advertisement
AT&T
AT&T 555-610-140
Issue 1
August 1991
MERLIN LEGEND™
Communications System
Installation, Programming,
& Maintenance
Copyright © 1991 AT&T
All Rights Reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
AT&T 555-610-140
Issue 1
August 1991
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and
Canadian Department Of Communications (DOC) Information
For important FCC and DOC interference, registration, and repair
information, see “Customer Support Information” in this book.
Trademarks
Accunet is a registered trademark of AT&T.
Dimension is a registered trademark of AT&T.
Horizon is a registered trademark of AT&T.
Magic on Hold is a registered trademark of AT&T.
Megacom is a registered trademark of AT&T.
MERLIN is a registered trademark of AT&T.
MERLIN LEGEND is a trademark of AT&T.
MERLIN MAIL is a trademark of AT&T.
MLX-10, MLX-10D, MLX-20L, and MLX-28D are trademarks of AT&T.
MultiQuest is a registered trademark of AT&T.
SYSTIMAX is a trademark of AT&T.
MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
PagePac is a registered trademark of DRACON, a Harris Corporation.
Starset is a registered trademark of Plantronics Corporation.
Supra and StarMate are trademarks of Plantronics Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
ZoneMate is a trademark of DRACON, a Division of Harris Corporation.
Support Telephone Number
AT&T provides a toll-free customer Helpline (1-800-628-2888)24 hours a day (U.S.A. only). Call the Helpline, or your authorized dealer, if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system.
ERRATA
MERLIN LEGEND™ Communications System
Installation, Programming, and Maintenance
555-610-140
Ignore all references to the small processor module. The MERLIN LEGEND™ Communications
System offers only one processor module. This processor module is referred to as a large processor module in this document.
Ignore references to the “small” processor module on the following pages:
Page 1-35, System Capacities, first, fourth, and sixth paragraphs.
Pages 1-36 - 1-37, Table 1-8, System Capacities.
Pages 1-38 - 1-40, Table 1-9, Feature Capacities.
Page 2-6, Backboard Requirements.
Page 3-10, Install the Feature Module in the Processor Module, first paragraph.
Ordering Codes Table: The following Price Element Codes (PECs) am not valid:
Small (Analog) - 6141-CUA
Small (Digital) - 6141-CUD
Ordering Codes Table: The following Price Element Codes (PECs) are not valid:
Small (Analog) - 6141-24D
Upgrade from Small to Large 6140-USLA
October 1, 1991
Contents
Customer Support Information
FCC Electromagnetic Interference Information
FCC Notification and Repair Information
Installation and Operational Procedures
DOC Notification and Repair Information
About The Book
Additional Ordering Information
i
ii
Contents
1
System Description
2 Preparation
Power Surge and Lightning Protection
Contents
3 Installation
The SMDR Printer and the System
4 Programming Procedures
Set the Basic System Operating Conditions
iii
Contents
Programming Procedures—Continued
Optional Group-Assigned Features
Backup, Restore, and Print System
5
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
6 Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
A Wiring
iv
Contents
B Adjuncts
C Product Ordering Information
D Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
E
General Telephone Programming
F General Feature Use
G
Programming Special Characters
H System Programming Console Overlay
v
Contents
I System Programming Reports
J System Programming Menu Hierarchy
K
Two-Digit Numbering Plan
L
System Technician’s Run Sheet
AB Abbreviations
GL Glossary
IN Index
Illustrations
vi
Tables
1
System Description
Line/Trunk and Station Modules
Touch-Tone Receiver Requirements
1-3 Reusable MERLIN II Line/Trunk and
Telephones and Adjuncts Not Supported
2 Preparation
vii
Tables
3
Installation
Switch Settings in Hybrid/PBX Mode:
Network and Equipment are ESF Framed
Switch Settings in Hybrid/PBX Mode:
Network and Equipment are D4 Framed
Switch Settings in Hybrid/PBX Mode:
Network is ESF Framed and Equipment is D4 Framed
Switch Settings in Hybrid/PBX Mode:
Network is D4 Framed and Equipment is ESF Framed
Artificial Transmit Line Options
Wire-Wrap Connector Pin Assignments
DTE 15-Pin Connector Pin Assignments
Network 15-Pin Connector Pin Assignments 3-34
viii
Tables
CSU Rear Panel Pin Assignments
AT&T 475/476 Printer DIP Switch Settings
ISDN 7500B Data Module Option Settings for Digital-to-Analog Modem Pool Operation 3-72
Modem Option Setting for Digital-to-Analog
ISDN 7500B Data Module Option Settings for
Analog-to-Digital Modem Pool Operation
Modem Option Setting for Analog-to-Digital
4 Programming Procedures
System Programming Menu Options
Commands Appearing on the Screen
Commands Applicable Only to SPM
ix
Tables
5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Maintenance Problems and Solutions
6 Adapters, Accessories, and
Applications
A Wiring
LS, GS/LS, DID, and OPT 6-Position
A-2 Tie-Trunk and DS1/PR1 8-Position Jacks A-2
A-3 Tie-Line Jack to RJ2GX Network
A-4 T/R, Analog Multiline Telephone, and MLX
Eight-Pin RS-232 Flow Control Cable
B Adjuncts
B-1 Adjunct Types and Specifications
x
CUSTOMER WARNING
This manual is designed for use by qualified service
technicians only. Technician qualification includes completion of an AT&T hands-on instructor-led course covering installation and maintenance for this product. Installation or maintenance of this product by anyone other than a qualified service technician may void the warranty. Hazardous electrical voltages are
present inside this product
The exclamation point in an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
When installing telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including:
■
Read and understand all instructions.
■
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on or packed with the product.
■
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
xi
■
Never install telephone jacks in a wet location unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
■
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone wiring has been disconnected at the network interface.
■
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
■
Use only AT&T manufactured MERLIN LEGEND™ Communications System circuit modules, carrier assemblies, and power units in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications
System (511A) control unit.
■
Use only AT&T-recommended/approved MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System accessories.
■
If equipment connected to the analog station modules
(008/408/408 GS/LS) or to the MLX telephone module (008
MLX) is to be used for in-range out-of-building (IROB) applications, IROB protectors are required.
■
Do not install this product near water, for example, in a wet basement location.
■
Do not overload wall outlets as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.
■
The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is equipped with a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin. This plug will fit only into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. if you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician to replace the obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding plug.
■
The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System requires a supplementary ground.
■
Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces.
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it.
■
Slots and openings in the module housings are provided for ventilation. To protect this equipment from overheating, do not block these openings.
xii
■
Never push objects of any kind into this product through module openings or expansion slots, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts, which could result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on this product.
■
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning.
Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners on this product. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
xiii
Customer Support
Information
Support Telephone Number
AT&T provides a toll-free customer Helpline (1-800-628-2888)24 hours a day (U.S.A. only). Call the Helpline, or your authorized dealer, if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Electromagnetic Interference Information
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Canadian Department of Communications (DOC)
Interference Information
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian
Department of Communications.
Customer Support Information
xv
Customer Support Information
Le présent appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicable aux appareils numériques de la classe A prescrites dans le Règlement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada.
FCC Notification and Repair Information
This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its rules. In compliance with those rules, you are advised of the following:
■
Means of Connection. Connection of this equipment to the telephone network shall be through a standard network interface jack: USOC
RJ11C, RJ14C, RJ21X. Connection to E&M tie trunks requires a USOC
RJ2GX. Connection to off-premises stations requires a USOC RJ11C or
RJ14C. Connection to 1.544 Mbs digital facilities must be through a
USOC RJ48C or RJ48X. Connection to DID requires a RJ11C, RJ14C or
RJ21X. These USOCs must be ordered from your telephone company.
This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines.
■
Notification to the Telephone Companies. Before connecting this equipment, you or your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone company’s business office of the following:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
The telephone number(s) you will be using with this equipment.
The appropriate registration number and ringer equivalence number
(REN), which can be found on the back or bottom of the control unit is as follows:
If this equipment is to be used as Key System, report the following number AS593M-72914-KF-E and if the system provides both manual and automatic selection of incoming/ outgoing access to the network, report AS593M-72682-MF-E.
The ringer equivalence number for both systems is 1.5A.
For tie-line connection, provide the telephone company the facility interface code (FIC) of TL31M and the service order code (SOC)
9.0F.
For connection to off-premises stations, report the FIC OL13C and
SOC 9.0F.
If this equipment is to be connected to digital service (1.544 Mbs), the FIC is 04DU9-B for D4 framing format or 04DU9-C for extended framing format, and SOC 6.0P.
If this equipment is to be connected to DID facilities, the FIC is
02RV2-T, and the SOC is 9.0F.
The quantities and USOC numbers of the jacks required for each jack provide the sequence in which lines are to be connected: the type lines, the FIC, and REN by position when applicable.
xvi
Customer Support Information
Customer Support Information
You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is permanently disconnected from the line(s).
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which maybe connected to the telephone line. Excessive REN’s on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all, areas the sum of the REN’s should not exceed five
(5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that maybe connected to the line, as determined by the total REN’s, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
Installation and Operational Procedures
The manuals for your system contain information about installation and operational procedures.
■
Repair Instructions. If you experience trouble because your equipment is malfunctioning, the FCC requires that the equipment not be used and that it be disconnected from the network until the problem has been corrected. Repairs to this equipment can be made only by the manufacturers, their authorized agents, or by others who maybe authorized by the FCC. In the event repairs are needed on this equipment, please contact the National Service Assistance Center
(NSAC) at 1-800-628-2888, or your authorized AT&T dealer.
■
Rights of the
Local Telephone Company. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the local telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in advance. But if advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will also be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment operations, or procedures that affect the proper functioning of this equipment. If they do, you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service.
■
Hearing Aid Compatibility. The custom telephone sets for this system are compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids as prescribed by the FCC.
■
Automatic Dialers. WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS
AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
■
Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call.
■
Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.
Customer Support Information
xvii
Customer Support Information
DOC Notification and Repair Information
NOTICE: The Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements. The DOC does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to connect it to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring for single-line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or any equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected. This precaution maybe particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician, as appropriate.
To prevent overloading, the Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop used by the device. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100.
DOC Certification No. 230 4095A
CSA Certification No. LR 56260
Load No. 6
xviii
Customer Support Information
Customer Support Information
Renseignements sur la notification du ministère des
Communications du Canada et la réparatione
AVIS: L'étiquette du ministère des Communications du Canada identifie le matériel homologué. Cette étiquette certifie que le matériel est conforme à certaines normes de protection, d'exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de télécommunications. Le Ministère n’assure toutefois pas que le matériel fonctionnera à la satisfaction de l’utilisateur.
Avant d'installer ce matériel, l'utilisateur doit s’assurer qu'il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l’entreprise locale de télécommunication. Le matériel doit également etre installé en suivant une méthode acceptée de raccordement. Dans certains cas, les fils intérieurs de l’enterprise utilisés pour un service individuel à ligne unique peuvent être prolongés au moyen d’un dispositif homologué de raccordement (cordon prolongateur téléphonique interne). L'abonné ne doit pas oublier qu'il est possible que la conformité aux conditions énoncées ci-dessus n’empêchent pas la dégradation du service dans certaines situations. Actuellement, les entreprises de télécommunication ne permettent pas que l'on raccorde leur matériel à des jacks d'abonné, sauf dans les cas précis prévus pas les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises.
Les réparations de matériel homologué doivent être effectuées pas un centre d'entretien canadien autorisé désigné par le fournisseur. La compagnie de télécommunications peut demander à l'utilisateur de débrancher un appareil à la suite de réparations ou de modifications effectuées par l’utilisateur ou à cause de mauvais fonctionnement.
Pour sa propre protection, l'utilisateur doit s'assurer que tous les fils de mise à la terre de la source d'énergie électrique, des lignes téléphoniques et des canalisations d'eau métalliques, s'il y en a, sont raccordés ensemble.
Cette précaution est particulièrement importance dans les régions rurales.
AVERTISSEMENT: L'utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui-même; il doit avoir recours à un service d'inspection des installations électriques, ou à un electricien, selon le cas.
L'indice de charge (IC) assigné à chaque dispositif terminal indique, pour
éviter toute surchage, le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut être raccordée à un circuit téléphonique bouclé utilisé par ce dispositif. La terminaison du circuit bouclé peut être constitutée de n'importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs, pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l’ensemble des dispositifs ne dépasse pas 100.
No d’homologation 230 4095A
No de certification CSA: LR 56260
L'indice de charge: 6
Customer Support Information
xix
secondary protectors are required. See Installation Manual.
utilisé pour des applications extérieures, l'installation d'un protecteur secondair est
Customer Support Information
Security of Your System—Preventing Toll Fraud
As a customer of a new telephone system, you should be aware that there exists an increasing problem of telephone toll fraud. Telephone toll fraud can occur in many forms, despite the numerous efforts of telephone companies and telephone equipment manufacturers to control it. Some individuals use electronic devices to prevent or falsify records of these calls. Others charge calls to someone else’s number by illegally using lost or stolen calling cards, billing innocent parties, clipping on to someone else’s line, and breaking into someone else’s telephone equipment physically or electronically. In certain instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telephone network through the use of remote access features.
The Remote Access feature of your system, if you choose to utilize it, permits off-premises callers to access the system from a remote telephone by using an 800 number or a 7- or 10- digit telephone number. The system returns an acknowledgement signaling the user to key in his or her authorization code, which is selected and administered by the system manager. After the authorization code is accepted, the system returns dial tone to the user. If you do not program specific egress restrictions, the user will be able to place any call normally dialed from a telephone associated with the system. Such an off-premises network call is originated at, and wiII be billed from, the system location.
The Remote Access feature, as designed, helps the customer, through proper administration, to minimize the ability of unauthorized persons to gain access to the network. Most commonly, phone numbers and codes are compromised when overheard in a public location, through theft of a wallet or purse containing access information, or through carelessness (writing codes on a piece of paper and improperly discarding it). Additionally, hackers may use a computer to "dial" an access code and then publish the information to other hackers. Enormous charges can be run up quickly. It is the customer’s responsibility to take the appropriate steps to properly implement the features, evaluate and administer the various restriction levels, protect access codes, and distribute access codes only to individuals who have been fully advised of the sensitive nature of the access information.
Common carriers are required by law to collect their tariffed charges. While these charges are fraudulent charges made by persons with criminal intent, applicable tariffs state that the customer of record is responsible for payment of all long distance or other network charges. AT&T cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
Customer Support Information
xxi
Customer Support Information
To minimize the risk of unauthorized access to your communications system:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Use a nonpublished Remote Access number.
Assign authorization codes randomly to users on a "need-to-have" basis, keeping a log of ALL authorized users and assigning one code to one person.
Use random sequence authorization codes, which are less likely to be easily broken.
Deactivate all unassigned codes promptly.
Ensure that Remote Access users are aware of their responsibility to keep the telephone number and any authorization codes secure.
When possible, restrict the off-network capability of off-premises callers, via use of Call Restrictions and Disallowed List capabilities.
When possible, block out-of-hours calling.
Frequently monitor system call detail reports for quicker detection of any unauthorized or abnormal calling patterns.
Limit Remote Call Forward to persons on a “need-to-have” basis.
Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability
Limited Warranty
AT&T warrants to you, the customer, that your MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System will be in good working order on the date AT&T or its authorized reseller delivers or installs the system, whichever is later
(“Warranty Date"). If you notify AT&T or its authorized reseller within one year of the Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order, AT&T will without charge to you repair or replace, at its option, the system components that are not in good working order. Repair or replacement parts may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis. If AT&T determines that your system cannot be repaired or replaced,
AT&T will remove the system and, at your option, refund the purchase price of your system, or apply the purchase price towards the purchase of another AT&T system.
xxii
Customer Support Information
Customer Support Information
If you purchased your system directly from AT&T, AT&T will perform warranty repair in accordance with the terms and conditions of the specific type of AT&T maintenance coverage you selected. A written explanation of
AT&T’s types of maintenance coverage maybe obtained from AT&T by calling 1-800-247-7000. If you purchased your system from an AT&T authorized reseller, contact your reseller for the details of the maintenance plan applicable to your system.
This AT&T limited warranty covers damage to the system caused by power surges; including power surges due to lightning.
The following will not be deemed to impair the good working order of the system, and AT&T will not be responsible under this limited warranty for damages resulting from
■ failure to follow AT&T’s installation, operation, or maintenance instructions
■ unauthorized system modification, movement, or alteration
■ unauthorized use of common carrier communication services accessed through the system
■ abuse, misuse, or negligent acts or omissions of the customer and persons under the customer’s control
■ acts of third parties and acts of God
AT&T’S OBLIGATION TO REPAIR, REPLACE, OR REFUND AS SET FORTH
ABOVE IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY.
EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE, AT&T, ITS AFFILIATES,
SUPPLIERS, AND AUTHORIZED RESELLERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Customer Support Information
xxiii
Customer Support Information
Limitation Of Liability
EXCEPT FOR PERSONAL INJURY, DIRECT DAMAGES TO TANGIBLE
PERSONAL PROPERTY PROXIMATELY CAUSED BY AT&T, AND LIABIILlTY
OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY ASSUMED IN A WRITTEN AGREEMENT SIGNED
BY AT&T, THE LIABILITY OF AT&T, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS AND
AUTHORIZED RESELLERS FOR ANY CLAIMS, LOSSES, DAMAGES OR
EXPENSES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING ACTS OR
OMISSIONS OF THIRD PARTIES) REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF
ACTION, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, SHALL NOT
EXCEED AMOUNT EQUAL TO THE LESSER OF THE DIRECT
DAMAGES PROVEN OR THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE SYSTEM. IN NO
EVENT SHALL AT&T OR ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS OR AUTHORIZED
RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL, RELIANCE, CONSEQUENTLY,
OR ANY OTHER INDIRECT LOSS OR DAMAGE (INCLUDING LOST
PROFITS OR REVENUES) INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SYSTEM. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL SURVIVE FAILURE OF
THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SET FORTH IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY
ABOVE.
xxiv
Customer Support Information
About This Book
This book provides technical information about the operation and installation of the communications system. It is intended for qualified technicians who install, maintain, and repair the communications system.
Related Documentation
The following books are available to help you set up, use, and maintain the communications system:
■ reference
■ setup and modification
■ telephone user support
■ operator guides
■ miscellaneous
About This Book
xxv
About This Book
How to Order Books
The books needed for operating the communications system were supplied with the system. You can order additional copies of these and other books listed below from the AT&T Customer
Information Center:
■
Within the continental United States, call 1-800-432-6600.
■
In Canada, call 1-800-255-1242.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications
System Book Title
System Reference
System Reference
System Setup and Modification
Key System Planning Forms only
Key System Planning and Key
System Planning Forms
PBX System Planning Forms only
PBX System Planning and PBX
System Planning Forms
Data Planning Forms only
Data Guide and Data Planning Forms
System Programming.
Order Number
555-610-110
555-610-116
555-610-112
555-610-117
555-610-113
555-610-118
555-610-114
555-610-111
xxvi
About This Book
About This Book
MERLIN LEGEND Communications
System Book Title
Telephone User Support
Analog Multiline Telephones
User's Guide
MLX-10D,™ MLX-28D,™ and MLX-20L™
Digital Display Telephones
User’s Guide
MLX-10™ Digital Non-Display
Telephone User's Guide
MLX-10™ and MLX-10D™ User Cards
MLX-28D™ and MLX-20L™ User Cards
Single-Line Telephones User’s Guide
Operator Guides
Analog Direct-Line Consoles
Operator’s Guide
Digital/ISDN Direct-Line Consoles
Operator’s Guide
Digital/ISDN Queued Call Console
Operator’s Guide
Miscellaneous
Calling Group Supervisor’s Guide
Order Number
555-610-120
555-610-122
555-610-123
555-610-124
555-610-125
555-610-121
555-610-131
555-610-132
555-610-133
555-610-130
About This Book
xxvii
About This Book
Additional Ordering
Information
For information on ordering replacement parts, accessories, and other equipment that is compatible with the system, see
Appendix A in System Reference.
Product Safety Labels
Throughout this book, hazardous situations are indicated by an exclamation point inside a triangle, along with the word caution or warning.
WARNING
Warning indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or severe personal injury if the hazard is not avoided.
CAUTION:
Caution indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided.
How to Comment on This
Book
We welcome your feedback on this book. Please use the feedback form that follows. If the form is missing, send your comments to A. Sherwood, AT&T, 99 Jefferson Road,
Rm. #2A25, Parsippany, NJ 07054.
xxviii
About This Book
System Description
The MERLIN LEGEND™ Communications System is an advanced digital switching system that integrates voice and data communications features. Voice features combine traditional telephone features, such as Transfer and Hold, with advanced features, such as Group Coverage and Park. Data features provide switched data connections that enable the transmission of voice and data over the same system wiring.
System Description
1-1
System Description
Modes of Operation
The system is designed for customers in the 10- to 100-station range. It can be configured to operate in one of three modes:
■
Hybrid/PBX
■
Key
■
Behind Switch
Hybrid/PBX Mode
The Hybrid/PBX mode handles a large volume of calls and users and provides the most flexibility of the three modes. Outside facilities consist of Ioop-start trunks, ground-start trunks, direct inward dialing (DID) trunks, tie trunks, and Digital Signal 1 (DS1) facilities. The trunks can be grouped in pools for shared use. In addition, trunks can be assigned to line buttons on multiline telephones for users who need a personal line.
Users access inside lines and outside trunks via system access buttons. To make an outside call, the user enters a dial-out code
(usually a 9), and the system automatically selects an available trunk. The Automatic Route Selection feature determines which trunk should be used for each type of outgoing call.
Incoming calls can be handled by a direct-line console (DLC) or a queued call console (QCC), or by a combination of both console types.
1-2
Modes of Operation
System Description
Key Mode
In the Key mode, each outside line appears on a button on one or more multiline telephones. The line buttons allow users to see activity on other telephones, join conversations, place calls, or receive calls. Separate intercom buttons are used to make and receive internal calls.
A Key system automatically assigns the first eight outside lines to all telephones. This arrangement can be customized through system programming by assigning lines to individual telephones or to selected groups of telephones.
Behind Switch Mode
In the Behind Switch mode, the system is connected to a
Hybrid/PBX or Centrex system. This other system (called the host) provides the interface to outside lines and some features.
A Behind Switch system assigns only one line (called a prime line) to each telephone. Outside lines to telephones or groups of telephones are assigned through system programming. In the
Behind Switch mode, people can use the special features of both the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and the host system.
Modes of Operation
1-3
System Description
System Components
The system consists of required and optional components:
■ required components
■ control unit
■ telephones
■ optional components
■ adjuncts
■ adapters
■ applications
These components are described in the following pages.
1-4
System Components
System Description
Control Unit
The control unit (CU) connects central office (CO) lines with telephones and adjuncts such as answering machines and fax machines. The CU consists of the following components:
■ control unit housing
■ carrier(s)
■ power supply module (one per carrier)
■ processor module
■ line/trunk and station modules
Control Unit Housing
The control unit is housed in a plastic cabinet for protection. The size of the housing increases as expansion carriers are added to
the CU. Figure 1 shows how the control unit housing fits around
the CU.
Carriers
The basic and expansion carriers each have seven slots to hold
modules (see Figure 2). The basic carrier contains a power
supply module, the processor module (slot 00), and line/trunk and station modules (slots 01–05).
Up to two expansion carriers can be added to the right side of the basic carrier to increase the capacity of the system. Like the basic carrier, the leftmost and widest slot of the expansion carrier holds a power supply module; the remaining six slots hold line/trunk and station modules.
Besides the slots, both basic and expansion carriers have a backplane with an input/output (I/O) bus that provides the interfaces with the modules.
Control Unit
1-5
System Description
Power Supply Modules
The power supply module provides power to the carrier, to each telephone, and to adjuncts—except for adjuncts such as answering machines and fax machines that have their own power supplies. Each carrier requires its own power supply module, which goes into the first slot on the carrier.
The power supply module converts 117-VAC line voltage to these outputs: +5 VDC, -5 VDC, and -48 VDC. All modules use
+5 VDC and -5 VDC for logic and analog transmission circuits.
Most line/trunk and station modules use -48 VDC for power to the stations. The direct inward dialing (DID) and off-premises telephone (OPT) line/trunk and station modules also provide
-48 VDC on the tip/ring (T/R) interface to the CO or OPT station.
The 012 basic telephone module provides 21 VDC to single-line telephones and equipment.
When single-line telephones are connected to a 012, 800 DID, or
008 OPT module, a 129B Frequency Generator (ring generator) must be installed in the power supply module of each carrier that houses one or more of these modules.
A green light on the power supply module remains on as long as the module is receiving power. The power supply module also has an on/off switch and a modular telephone jack for
connecting an auxiliary power unit as needed (see Figure 3).
Processor Module
Placed in slot 00 of the basic carrier, the processor module controls system features and programming via the processor and memory boards and the feature module. The processor module comes in small and large versions. The small processor module supports up to 24 CO or tie lines/trunks and 56 stations.
The large processor module supports up to 80 CO or tie lines/trunks and 144 stations.
1-6
Control Unit
System Description
The main board contains the 68000 microprocessor, a built-in
1200-baud data modem, built-in diagnostics, RAM, a real-time clock, and interrupt circuitry, and interfaces to the other modules through the I/O bus on the carrier backplane.
The processor module has two modular RS-232 jacks: one for
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) and the other for system programming and maintenance via a personal computer
A NiCad battery in the processor module provides backup power for the real-time clock and nonvolatile RAM in case of power failure or system shutdown. The battery provides RAM data retention for 12 to 30 days. The trickle-charge circuit can recharge the battery to 50 percent of capacity from a discharged state in 48 hours. The minimum battery life is five years.
Line/Trunk and Station Modules
The line/trunk and station modules have jacks for connecting the
CO lines/trunks and the station lines to the CU. The station lines connect to telephones and adjuncts.
Depending on the mode of operation chosen, the outside lines that extend from the CO are called either trunks or lines. "Trunks" is used for the Hybrid/PBX mode and in the phrase “tie trunks.”
“Lines” is used for Key or Behind Switch modes.
Control Unit
1-7
System Description
There are different types of lines/trunks for the different functions of each mode. A Key or Behind Switch system can use
■ loop-start (LS) lines
■ tie trunks
■ a DS1 facility programmed for either T1 or Integrated
Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface (ISDN-PRI) operation
■ a ground-start (GS) line only when registered under the MF
FCC classification
A Hybrid/PBX system can use
■ loop-start trunks
■ ground-start trunks
■ tie trunks
■ direct inward dialing (DID) trunks
■ a DS1 facility programmed for either T1 or ISDN-PRI operation
The names of modules consist of a number identifying the number of lines/trunks and/or stations that can be connected to the module, followed by the types of lines and/or telephones it supports. For example, the 408 GS/LS module provides four line jacks and eight station jacks and supports ground-start or loopstart lines.
The system supports 13 types of line/trunk and station modules
(see Figure 4). Table 1-1 lists the specifications for each type of
module.
See Appendix A for wiring diagrams.
1-8
Control Unit
System Description
Table 1-1 Line/Trunk and Station Modules
Module
Line/
Trunk Type Station Type
Specifications
008
N/A
Analog multiline telephone;
CMS; analog data via a modem
Capacity: 8 analog stations
Signaling: analog multiline telephone protocol (40 kbps)
Loop range: 1000 feet inbuilding or in-range out-ofbuilding, with analog IROB protectors, service only
008 MLX
N/A MLX telephone; digital data device
(such as
ISDN 7500B
Data
Module)
Capacity: 8 digital stations, each with one or two endpoints
(each endpoint is assigned an individual extension number), including the following station types:
■ digital voice only
■ digital voice with Voice
Announce to Busy feature
■ digital voice and digital data
(via the ISDN 7500B Data
Module)
■ digital voice and MFM
■ digital data only (ISDN
7500B Data Module)
Signaling: ISDN-BRI S/T protocol (two 64-kbps
B channels, one 16-kbps
D channel) on a passive bus
Power: 4-VDC phantom power to telephone; 48 VDC over a separate pair (7-8) to an operator DSS console
Loop range: 1000 feet, inbuilding and in-range out-ofbuilding, with MLX IROB protectors, service only
Control Unit
1-9
System Description
Table 1-1 Continued
Module
Line/
Trunk Type
Station Type Specifications
008 OPT N/A On-premises or offpremises single-line telephone
Capacity: 8 T/R stations* on
2-way voice transmission path with support for telephones with message-waiting LEDs; 2 TTRs
Notice to telephone company:
meets FCC Class C
Ringing current: 105-Vrms,
30-Hz sinusoidal ringing superimposed on -48 VDC; a ring generator must be installed in the power supply module of each carrier that has a 008 OPT module.
REN:
≥
1.0 per port
Disconnect signal: 900 ms
(T/R short for answering machines, G3 fax, etc.)
Switchhook flash detection:
300—1200 ms
Loop resistance: serves 2-wire loops to 1300 ohms, including stations
*
The system software recognizes the OPT module as a 012 module; thus, the overall station capacity is reduced by four stations for every OPT module.
1-10
Control Unit
System Description
Table 1-1 Continued
Module
Line/
Trunk Type
012
N/A
Station Type Specifications
Single-line telephone;
MERLIN
Attendant;
MERLIN
Capacity: 12 T/R stations on
2-way voice transmission path with support for telephones with message-waiting LEDs; 2 TTRs
Power: 21-VDC, 600-ohm
MAIL™ Voice battery source
Messaging
System;
T/R adjunct
(such as an answering or a fax
Ringing current: 105-Vrms,
30-Hz sinusoidal ringing superimposed on -48 VDC; a ring generator must be installed in the power supply module of machine); analog data device (such each carrier that has a 012 module.
REN:
≥
1.0 per port
Disconnect signal: 900 ms as a modem) (T/R short for answering machines, G3 fax, etc.)
Switchhook flash detection:
300—1200 ms
1OOD T1 or PRI N/A
Capacity: 24 lines/trunks for voice and analog data or 23 lines/trunks for voice and data with 1-channel used for signaling
Mode: multiplexes 23 or 24 lines/trunks into 1 facility and demultiplexes one facility into
23 or 24 lines/trunks
Speed: up to 64 kbps
Signaling: DS1 over 4-wire; T1 uses RBS or CCS; PRI has
ISDN-PRI
(23 B + D)
Control Unit
1-11
System Description
Table 1-1 Continued
Module
Line/
Trunk Type
400†
LS and TTR
Station Type Specifications
PFT telephone
Capacity: 4 lines/trunks,
4 TTRs, 1 PFT telephone
Signaling: LS
400EM Tie trunk N/A Capacity: 4 tie trunks
Method of Completion:
automatic-start, immediatestart, wink-start, or delay-dialstart
Signaling: E&M type 1S, type
1C, type 5
400 GS/
LS/TTR
LS or GS and PFT
TTR telephone; button needed for
GS PFT telephone
Capacity: 4 lines/trunks,
4 TTRs, 1 PFT telephone
Signaling: LS or GS, optioned per port
408†
LS
Analog multiline telephone;
CMS; PFT telephone
Capacity: 4 Iines/trunks,
8 stations, 1 PFT telephone
Station signaling: analog multiline telephone (40 kbps)
Signaling: LS Iine/trunk: analog voice
Loop range: 1000 feet, inbuilding and in-range out-ofbuilding, with analog IROB protectors, service only
†
Although these MERLIN II modules are supported in the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System, the 400 GS/LS and 408 GS/LS are the recommended modules.
1-12
Control Unit
System Description
Table 1-1 Continued
Module
Line/
Trunk Type
408
GS/LS
LS or GS
800‡
800 DID
800
GS/LS
LS
DID
LS or GS
Station Type
Specifications
Analog multiline telephone;
CMS; PFT telephone
Capacity: 4 Iines/trunks,
8 stations, 1 PFT telephone
Station signal: analog multiline telephone (40 kbps)
Line/trunk signaling: LS or GS line/trunk, optioned per port voice
Loop range: 1000 feet, inbuilding and in-range out-ofbuilding, with analog IROB protectors, service only
PFT telephone
Capacity: 8 lines/trunks, 2 PFT telephones
Signaling: LS
N/A Capacity: 8 Iines/trunks, 2 TTRs
Protocol: incoming calls only;
2-way (1-pair) fixed impedance to DID trunks; no outgoing calls
Signaling: loop-reverse battery wink-start or immediate-start; accepts touch-tone dialing
PFT telephone; button needed for
GS PFT telephone
Capacity: 8 lines/trunks, 2 PFT telephones
Signaling: LS or GS
‡ Although this MERLIN II module is supported in the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System, the 800 GS/LS is the recommended module.
Loop-Start Lines/Trunks
LS Iines/trunks are the standard for home and small business
Key systems. They are less expensive in some areas but have certain limitations:
■
They do not protect against "glare." (Glare occurs when a person tries to make an outside call on a line/trunk at the
Control Unit
1-13
System Description
Loop-Start Lines/Trunks
LS lines/trunks are the standard for home and small business
Key systems. They are less expensive in some areas but have certain limitations:
■
They do not protect against "glare." (Glare occurs when a person tries to make an outside call on a line/trunk at the same time an incoming call is being received on that line/trunk.)
■
They have higher cable losses than GS lines/trunks
■
They cannot assure secure toll restriction.
Ground-Start Lines/Trunks
GS lines/trunks are outside lines/trunks used by some businesses (such as hotels or motels) because the improved signaling of GS allows more secure toll restriction.
In addition, GS lines/trunks prevent glare and provide cable losses less than or equal to 4.5 dB.
The following types of outside lines/trunks come in either GS or
LS form:
■ basic lines
■
WATS (wide area telecommunications service)
■
800 service (In-WATS)
■ foreign exchange (FX)
1-14
Control Unit
System Description
Tie Trunks
Tie trunks provide private communication between two systems.
Tie trunks “tie” the two systems together, making it seem that all
the telephones are on the same system. (See "Networking
Capabilities" in this chapter for more information on how tie
trunks connect to other systems.)
Tie trunks provide efficient communication between systems at different locations. These locations can be different floors of the same building, different buildings in the same campus, or different cities or states.
Tie trunks can be added to the system via the 400EM module.
The 400EM module has four ports that must be programmed individually by selecting trunk options and setting the DIP (dual in-line package) switches, located on the front of the module, for
different signaling modes and types (see Figure 72).
The following tie-trunk options need to be programmed:
■
Direction
■
Two-way (factory setting). Calls can be made in either direction.
■
Outgoing only. Calls can be dialed but not received (no ringing).
■
Incoming only. Calls can be received but not dialed (no dialing).
■
Signaling Type can be any of the following types, programmed via the 400EM module. The type of signal can be set separately for incoming and outgoing calls; for example, a tie trunk can be wink-start for incoming calls and delay-dial-start for outgoing calls.
Control Unit
1-15
System Description
■
■
■
■
Wink-start (factory setting). The originating end of the tie trunk transmits an off-hook signal and waits for the remote end to send back a signal (a wink) indicating that it is ready to receive dialing information.
Immediate-start. No start signal is necessary, and dialing can begin immediately after the tie trunk is seized.
Delay-dial-start. The originating end of the tie trunk transmits an off-hook signal and waits for the remote end to send an off-hook signal followed by an on-hook signal.
Automatic-start. Incoming calls are routed directly to another station without a start signal. In other words, when you pick up the handset, the signal rings immediately at the other end. This is also called an automatic-ringdown tie trunk.
Wink-start, immediate-start, and delay-dial-start are also called dial-repeating tie trunks.
■
E&M Signal
■
Type 1 standard (factory setting)
■
Type 1 compatible
■
Type 5
■
Dial Mode determines the incoming and outgoing dial.
modes:
■ rotary (factory setting)
■ touch-tone
Note: If the 400EM module is administered for touch-tone dialing and there are no modules in the system that provide touch-tone receivers (TTRs) (012, 008 OPT, 400,
400 GS/LS/TTR, or 800 DID), a 400 GS/LS/TTR module must be installed.
1-16
Control Unit
System Description
■
Dial Tone determines whether the system returns a dial tone to the remote end of the line:
■ yes (factory setting)—a dial tone is sent to the remote end
■ no—a dial tone is not sent to the remote end
■
Answer Supervision Time sets a time limit in milliseconds
(ms) for the remote station to signal the calling station:
■
300 ms (factory setting)
■
20–4800 ms (increments of 20 ms)
■
Disconnect Time sets a time limit in milliseconds for the release of the E or M lead:
■
300 ms (factory setting)
■
140–2400 ms (increments of 10 ms)
Direct Inward Dialing Trunks
Direct inward dialing (DID) trunks allow incoming calls to reach specific individuals or facilities in the system without the assistance of a system operator. DID trunks are available only in the Hybrid/PBX mode. They are connected to the system on an
800 DID module.
With DID service, the customer reserves blocks of DID numbers from the local telephone company. The DID number should correspond to the extension number for an individual or a calling group, or to the code for Remote Access or pool dial-out.
CAUTION:
DID numbers that correspond to pool dial-out codes (or facility access codes) can be used to avoid toll restriction,
leading to toll abuse and/or fraud (see “Security of Your
System” under “Customer Support Information" in the front of
this book).
Control Unit
1-17
System Description
Because DID trunks allow calls to come directly to a telephone extension, they cannot be pooled. The CO passes the necessary digits to the system, which delivers the call directly to the dialed extension.
The system can receive 1- to 4-digit extension numbers over the
DID trunks. The number of digits received on a specific DID trunk is always the same for that trunk; however, different DID trunks can receive different numbers of digits.
If the extension numbers used in the system are fewer than four digits but the CO sends four, the system can be programmed to ignore the leading digit(s). For example, if the DID number sent by the CO is 2157, the extension numbers the system can access are 57, 157, or 2157. System programming determines the proper extension number to connect.
The system also can be programmed to match more digits than are received from the CO. Additional leading digits are taken from the 4-digit trunk number, as programmed. For example, if the system is setup to match three digits and the CO sends only two, programming determines which DID trunk number prefix to add to complete the match and connect the call.
No routing of calls is made until the designated number of digits is received. Incoming DID numbers that don’t match a valid extension are either directed to a predesignated extension, such as the system operator, or the system sends back a reorder tone
(fast busy).
Options are assigned to blocks of DID trunks. A maximum of two blocks of DID trunks is allowed. Each block can be configured to match the system numbering plan. For example, the system could have both 3- and 4-digit extension numbers. Trunk block 1 contains the options needed to reach the 3-digit numbers, and trunk block 2 contains the options needed to reach the 4-digit
1-18
Control Unit
System Description
The options for each DID trunk group are as follows:
■
Type
■ wink-start (factory setting)
■ immediate-start
■
Expected Digits
■
3 (factory setting)
■
1–4
■
Delete Digits
■
0 (factory setting)
■
0–4
■
Add Digits
■
0 (factory setting)
■
1- to 4-digit number (1 to 9999)
■
SignaIing
■ rotary (factory setting)
■ touch-tone
■
Invalid Destination
■ backup position (factory setting)
■ return to fast busy
100D Module
The 100D module is the interface that connects a DS1 facility to the system. It can be configured for T1 or Integrated Services
Digital Network Primary Rate Interface (ISDN-PRI) service (see
"DS1 Capabilities" later in this chapter).
Control Unit
1-19
System Description
Touch-Tone Receivers
The 800 DID, 008 OPT, and 012 modules each provide two
TTRs. Normally these TTRs are sufficient to handle calls originated on the 012 or 008 OPT module or received on the 800
DID module. However, additional TTRs maybe needed to support the following services:
■ tie trunks and DS1 emulated tie trunks set for Dual-Tone
Multifrequency (DTMF) signaling
■
Remote Access
■
Account Code Entry
■
AUDIX Voice Power (AVP)—IS II or Integrated Voice Power
Automated Attendant (IVP AA)—IS II applications
If more TTRs are needed to support these services, 400 or 400
GS/LS/TTR modules can be added (each module provides four
TTRs). Table 1-2 shows the estimated number of TTRs needed in
the system, depending on the call volume and the types of services.
1-20
Control Unit
System Description
Table 1-2 Touch-Tone Receiver Requirements
Calls/hr
Total Number of TTRs Required*
No Account Account Codes Account Codes
Codes or or AVP/AA and AVP/AA
Applcation (or equiv)
(or equiv)
110 2 4 6
180
350
420
610
4
4
6
6
6
8
8
10
10
12
8
10
710 8 10
14
*
System is assumed to already have basic phones, Remote Access, and tie trunks.
Reusable MERLIN® II Modules
Table 1-3 shows the MERLIN II line/trunk and station modules
that are usable in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications
System. Limitations are noted in the comments column.
Control Unit
1-21
System Description
Table 1-3 Reusable MERLIN II Line/Trunk and Station
Modules
Type
Apparatus
Code Comments
008 517A3
Fully compatible
012
517B3
517A13
Fully compatible
Compatible but does not support the downlink disconnect needed for voice-mail; does not meet Megacom® transmission requirements
517B13
517C13
Compatible but does not support the downlink disconnect needed for voice-mail; does not meet Megacom transmission requirements
Compatible but does not meet
Megacom transmission requirements
100D
517D13
517E13
517A15
517B15
Compatible but can be used for
Megacom only when the customer does not have to meet
EIA transmission standards
Fully compatible
Outgoing Call Management only
Supports only tie-trunk emulation
1-22
Control Unit
System Description
Table 1-3 Continued
Type
Apparatus
Code
400 517A12
400EM
408
800
517B12
517A14
517A1
517B1
517C1
517A4
517B4
Comments
No lightning protection; 146A surge protector required
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
No lightning protection; 146A surge protector required
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
No lightning protection; 146A surge protector required
Fully compatible
Reusable MERLIN II Hardware
Table 1-4 shows the MERLIN II hardware components that can
be used in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System.
Limitations are noted in the Comments column.
Control Unit
1-23
System Description
Table 1-4 Reusable MERLIN II Hardware
Type
Apparatus
Code or PEC
Comments
Power supply module
391A No surge protection;
147A protector recommended
391AA
Basic carrier
391A1
403A
403C
For Canadian use; no auxiliary power jack
Fully compatible
Compatible but must order system cover separately (part 16A); required spring clips for the system cover are provided with the
MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System upgrade package
For Canadian use; system cover and spring clips needed; the clips are provided with the
MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System upgrade package
403E Fully compatible
1-24
Control Unit
System Description
Table 1-4 Continued
Type
Apparatus
Code or PEC
Expansion carrier
403B
403D
Comments
Compatible but must order system cover separately (part 17A)
For Canadian use; system cover and spring clips needed; the clips are provided with the
MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System upgrade package
Fully compatible
Fully compatible
Frequency generator
(ring generator)
403F
129B
Auxiliary power
Music coupler
335A
61398
Compatible but can be used only when the unit loads do not exceed the
335A’s capacity an
Auxiliary Power Unit
9024 is recommended
Fully compatible
Control Unit
1-25
System Description
Telephones and Consoles
Several different analog and single-line telephones work with the system; however, the only digital telephones that work with the system are the digital/ISDN (MLX) telephones.
W A R N I N G
An analog or digital multiline telephone located in a different building but within 1000 feet of the CU requires an IROB (inrange out-of-building) protector at each building entrance.
See Appendix C for ordering information on these telephones.
MLX Telephones
There are four new telephones in the MLX telephone line, all of which support ISDN capabilities:
■
MLX-20L™ telephone
■
MLX-28D™ telephone
■
MLX-10D™ telephone
■
MLX-10™ telephone
Some features are common to all MLX telephones:
■ programmable line and feature buttons with two associated lights (red and green)
Note: An MLX-20L telephone used as a QCC has no programmable buttons.
■ dedicated feature buttons (four have a red or green light)
■ red message-waiting light
■ built-in speakerphone
■ volume control for speakerphone, handset, and ringer
1-26
Telephones and Consoles
System Description
■ user reference card tray with feature and programming codes and directory lists
■ optional interns Multi-Function Module (MFM) to connect to tip/ring (T/R) equipment and alerting devices (described in
Note: An MLX-20L telephone used as a QCC cannot have an
MFM in it.
■ two-position adjustable desk stand
■ four-pair modular line cord
MLX telephones with display have two additional features:
■
LCD display
■ display-associated keys
A list of features specific to each telephone model in the MLX telephone family follows.
MLX-20L Telephone (see Figure 5)
■ can be used for system programming and as a DLC or a
QCC operator console
■
20 line and feature buttons
■ display (7 lines x 24 characters)
■
14 display-associated buttons
■ accommodates one or two Direct Station Selectors (DSSs)
MLX-28D Telephone (see Figure 6)
■ can be used as a DLC operator console
■
28 line and feature buttons
■ display (2 lines x 24 characters)
Telephones and Consoles
1-27
System Description
■
8 display-associated buttons
■ accommodates one or two Direct Station Selectors (DSSs)
MLX-10D Telephone (see Figure 7)
■
10 line and feature buttons
■ desktop or wall-mount
■ display (2 lines x 24 characters)
■
8 display-associated buttons
MLX-10 Telephone (see Figure 8)
■
10 line and feature buttons
■ desktop or wall-mount
Analog Multiline Telephones
In addition to the MLX telephones, the analog multiline telephones in Table 1-5 can be connected to the system.
Table 1-5 Analog Multiline Telephones
Model Description
5-button* 5-button telephone with membrane. No adjuncts are supported with this telephone.
10-button*
34-button*
10-button telephone with membrane
34-button basic telephone with membrane
34-button
Deluxe*
Deluxe 34-button telephone with membrane
* Vintage telephone; no longer available for sale or lease
1-28
Telephones and Consoles
System Description
Table 1-5 Continued
Model Description
10-button
HFAI*
10-button hands-free-answer telephone. No adjuncts are supported.
34-button
BIS*
34-button telephone with built-in speakerphone
34-button
BIS/DIS*
BIS-10
34-button telephone with 16-character display and built-in speakerphone
10-button telephone with built-in speakerphone
BIS-22
BIS-22D
22-button telephone with built-in speakerphone
22-button telephone with 16-character display and built-in speakerphone
BIS-34
BIS-34D
34-button telephone with built-in speakerphone
34-button telephone with 16-character display and built-in speakerphone
MLC-5
Cordless
Cordless 5-button telephone
* Vintage telephone; no longer available for sale or lease
Telephones and Consoles
1-29
System Description
Single-Line Telephones
The system supports the single-line analog telephones listed in
Table 1-6.
Note: 2500MM or 500MM telephones should be used for PFT telephones. If the telephones are to be connected to GS lines/trunks, a GS button (KS 23566L1, PEC 31021 ) must be added to each PFT station. If rotary lines/trunks are used, PFT telephones must be rotary telephones.
Table 1-6 Single-Line Telephones
Model Description
2500MMGB
Basic desk telephone
2554MMGJ
2500YMGK
2500SM
2514BMW
Basic wall telephone
Basic desk telephone with message-waiting light and Recall button. Recall button is used instead of the switchhook for features that require a switchhook flash, such as Transfer and Hold.
Basic desk telephone used with 4A speakerphone
Basic desk telephone with built-in headset jack
2526BMG Outdoor telephone used with weatherproof enclosure
7101A* Basic desk telephone with message-waiting light and Recall and Disconnect buttons. No adjuncts are supported.
* Vintage telephone; no longer available for sale or lease
1-30
Telephones and Consoles
System Description
Table 1-6 Continued
Model Description
7102A
CS6402U01A*
Basic desk telephone with message-waiting light and Recall button. No adjuncts are supported. Can be used for PFT stations.
Basic desk telephone, Feature Phone Model
420. Has built-in speakerphone, memory, and redial.
2500MMGJ
2500MMGK
Basic desk telephone
Basic desk telephone with the following limitation: Timed Recall button action (similar to a switchhook flash) will invoke the Hold and
Transfer feature.
500MM
554BMPA
500SM
Basic telephones with the following limitations:
Since these sets are equipped with rotary dials, no system features requiring
✱ and # can be used. Telephones equipped with neon message-waiting lights are not supported.
* Vintage telephone; no longer available for sale or lease.
Telephones and Consoles
1-31
System Description
Telephones and Adjuncts Not
Supported
CAUTION:
The following telephones and adjuncts cannot be used with the system. Connecting them can damage the telephones, adjuncts, and system.
Table 1-7 Telephones and Adjuncts Not Supported
Model Notes
510D
Personal
Terminals
Digital Communications Protocol (DCP)
DCP telephones
7400 telephones and adjuncts (asynchronous data units and multiple asynchronous data units) that use DCP and that are supported on the MERLIN II communications system.
MET telephones
Single-line telephones
Multibutton electronic telephones (MET) and adjuncts that are used with the Dimension® PBX and Horizon® systems.
with neon message-waiting light
Analog telephone adjuncts
Basic telephone modem interface (BTMI);
BTMI-2; off-premises extension (OPX) unit;
System 25 Direct Extension Selector (DXS); DSS attached to a 34-button Deluxe membrane
1-32
Telephones and Consoles
System Description
System Operator Consoles
System operator consoles are telephones that are programmed for call handling and other operator duties.
Two configurations of operator consoles can be used—directline console (DLC) and queued call console (QCC). In a DLC configuration, lines/trunks are assigned to individual buttons and the console can have several calls ringing at the same time. In a
QCC configuration, incoming calls are held in a queue and calls are directed to, a QCC as a position becomes available. Only one call rings at a time.
The following telephones can function as DLCs:
■
MLX-20L telephone*
■
MLX-28D telephone*
■
MERLIN II System Display Console with built-in DSS
■
BIS-34D
■
BIS-34
■
BIS-22D
Note: In a Hybrid/PBX system, only the MLX-20L telephone can function as a QCC.
DLCS are connected either to an analog station jack on a 008 or
408 analog multiline telephone module or to a digital station jack on a 008 MLX module. QCCs must be connected to a digital station jack on a 008 MLX module. The QCC system operator console must be connected to the first jack on the first 008 MLX module.
* One or two DSS adjuncts can be added to provide 50 or 100 additional extension buttons.
Telephones and Consoles
1-33
System Description
Adjuncts
Adjuncts are pieces of equipment that connect directly to the CU or to a telephone through an adapter (see “Adapters” below).
Answering machines, credit card verification terminals, and external alerts are examples of adjuncts. For more information on
Adapters
Adapters enable a proper connection of equipment or, in the case of the channel service unit (CSU), of a DS1 facility to the
CSU. Some adapters connect directly to the CU (system adapters) while others connect to telephones (telephone
adapters). See Chapters 3 and 6 for the installation procedures
for these adapters:
■ system adapters
■
ESF T1 CSU
■
551 T1 L1 CSU
■
Universal Paging Access Module (UPAM)
■ telephone adapters
■
Multi-Function Module (MFM) for digital telephones
■
General Purpose Adapter (GPA) for analog telephones
■
■
■
ISDN 7500B Data Module for connecting digital data equipment either directly to the CU or to an MLX telephone (for simultaneous voice and data transmission) modem for connecting digital equipment, such as a personal computer (PC), to a tip/ring (T/R) interface
Supplemental Alert Adapter (SAA) for connecting alerts
(such as horns or strobes) to an analog multiline telephone
1-34
Adjuncts and Adapters
System Description
System Capacities
The system comes in two sizes, large and small. The large system supports up to 80 central office (CO) lines/trunks and 144 stations, such as telephones and fax machines, and the small system supports up to 24 CO lines/trunks and 56 stations. The size of the system is determined by its memory capacity—that is, the processor module (including the feature module) located in the control unit (CU).
The large system has a total capacity of 224 jacks (80 CO lines/trunks plus 144 stations); however, each MLX module station jack supports two logical endpoints (station devices that can operate simultaneously and independently). For example, an
MLX telephone with a Multi-Function Module (MFM) plugs into only one station jack, but the jack supports the telephone and the equipment connected to the MFM (such as a fax machine or an answering machine).
In a similar way, although the 100D module has only one jack, it can serve up to 24 endpoints (emulated lines/trunks or ISDN-PRI lines/trunks).
Thus, the large system can be configured to connect up to 80 lines/trunks and 255 station endpoints, a total of 335 endpoints.
Note: The system has a time-slot capacity of 216. If more than
216 endpoints are in use at the same time, blocking can occur.
Table 1-8 lists the capacities of the system’s hardware and
software components for both small and large systems.
System Capacities
1-35
System Description
Table 1-8 System Capacities
Components
Small
Carriers*
■
■
Line/trunk and station module slots/basic carrier
■
Line/trunk and station module slots/expansion carrier 6
■
Total
Maximum slots available for modules
3
5
17
DS1 Modules
1
Endpoints (devices)
56
Lines/Trunks
24
Large
5
3
6
17
3
255
80
Operator Consoles
■
DLCs:
■
MLX†
■
Analog multiline‡
■
QCCs§
■
DSSs**
■
Combination of DLCs and QCCs
■
Number of consoles per module
6
8
4
12
8
2
8
8
4
16
8
2
* The basic carrier contains a power supply module, processor module, and five slots for line/trunk and station modules. Each expansion carrier contains a power supply module and six slots for Iine/trunk and station modules.
† MLX-20L or MLX-28D telephone, two per MLX module
‡ MERLIN II System Display Console or 34- or 22-button analog multiline telephone with display; two per analog multiline module
§ MLX-20L telephone; two per MLX module
** Two per MLX module (built into MERLIN II System Display Console)
1-36
System Capacities
System Description
Table 1-8 Continued
Components
Ports (not achievable simultaneously)
■
■
■
Total (lines/trunks plus stations)
Voice and data stations
Voice Announce to Busy
■
Voice-mail interface
■
Data via ISDN 7500B Data Module
■
Paging
■
Delay announcements
Small
80
56
28
20*
24
3
32
Large
224
144
127
20*
127
3
32
System programming equipment†
■
MLX-20L
■
RS-232 jack (for connection of PC with SPM)
■
Modem
Telephones
■
■
Single-line
Analog multiline
■
Without Voice Announce to Busy
■
Without Voice Announce to Busy
■
MLX-20L
■
MLX with ISDN 7500B Data Module or MFM
■
Power failure transfers
1
1
1
56
56
28
16‡
24
6
1
1
1
144
136
127
481‡
127
20
Two-party conversations
Traffic (CCS/hr/station)**
40 108
7.0
6.0
Voice-mail systems 1 1
—
* Although system software supports up to 24 voice-mail interface (VMl) ports, all the VMI ports must be in the same calling group, and the maximum number of stations in a calling group is 20.
† Remote access overrides on-site programming except during backup or restore
‡ Total includes the MLX-20L telephone used for system programming
§ One per four GS/LS line/trunk jacks
** Assuming 20 percent internal traffic
System Capacities
1-37
System Description
Table 1-9 lists the capacities for features.
Table 1-9 Feature Capacities
Feature Description
Allowed
Lists
Number of lists
Entries per list
Digits per entry
Maximum
8
10
7
ARS Number of ARS patterns
Subpatterns per pattern
Routes per subpattern
Number of fully programmable
ARS tables
Entries per table
Entries across all tables
Default tables
Number of calls in queue
Callback
Calling
Groups
Coverage
Groups
Number of groups
Members per group*
32
20
Groups per member
1
Delay announcements per system 32
Delay announcements per group 1
Groups per delay announcement 32
External alerts per group
1
Coverage groups per group
1
Number of groups
Senders per group
Groups per sender
Receiver buttons per group
Groups per QCC receiver
* QCCs cannot be members.
30
56 (small)
144 (large)
1
8
30
18
2
6
16
100
1600
4
64
1-38
System Capacities
System Description
Table 1-9 Continued
Feature
Description
Data Hunt
Groups
Number of groups
Members per group
Groups per member
DID Number of blocks
Number of trunks
Maximum
32
20
1
2
24 (small)
80 (large)
Directories
System Directory
■
■
Number per system
Listings per directory
1
40 (small)
130 (large)
Extension Directory
■
■
Number per system
Listings per directory
1
56 (small)
144 (large)
Personal Directory
■
Number per system
16 (small)
48 (large)
50
■
Listings per directory
Disallowed
Lists
Number of lists
Entries per list
Digits per entry
8
10
11
Fax
Number of fax machines
16*
Night
Service
Groups
Members per group
Groups per member
Emergency Allowed List entries
8
56 (small)
144 (large)
8
10
* System can support more than 16 fax machines, but those machines in excess of 16 cannot use the fax message-waiting feature.
System Capacities
1-39
System Description
Table 1-9 Continued
Category Description
Park Codes Number of codes
Maximum
8
Personal Lines Number of station endpoints
56 (small)
64 (large)
Personal
Speed Dial
Numbers
Pickup
Pools
Number of entries per telephone 24
Number of entries per system
880 (small)
1200 (large)
Digits per entry
28
Number of groups
Members per group
Groups per member
30
15
1
Number of pools
(trunk groups) Number of trunks in a pool
11
24 (small)
80 (large)
Pool Buttons
Remote
Access
Number of station endpoints
Number of barrier codes
Digits per code
56 (small)
64 (large)
16
4
Shared System Number of shared buttons per SA 16
Access Buttons
System
Speed Dial
Number of entries per system
(up to 40 digits each)
40 (small)
130 (large)
1-40
System Capacities
System Description
Data Capabilities
The system can provide data connections between two digital data modules (ISDN 7500B Data Modules), between two analog modems, or between an analog modem and a digital data module. The system provides access to an in-house host computer or to a data station on a network.
Data facilities include
■ digital data endpoints—RS-232 interfaces via ISDN 7500B
Data Modules
■ analog data endpoints—tip/ring modem interfaces
■ local host computer and workstation on local area network
(LAN) access (only via an RS-232 interface)
■
DS1 facility interface (analog data via T1 or ISDN-PRI, or digital data via ISDN-PRI)
Data Capabilities
1-41
System Description
Networking Capabilities
The system can connect to another system via the two CUs or via the tie trunks.
Control Unit to Control Unit
This system’s CU can connect to another system’s CU in three ways:
■ from an off-premises telephone (OPT) line to an LS line/trunk
(or vice versa) via analog facilities
■ via an analog tie trunk (400EM module)
■ via a digital tie trunk using emulated E&M in the T1 mode on a
100D module. A back-to-back connection from one DS1 facility to the other can be used when the total cable distance is fewer than 1300 feet.
OPT/LS Connection
A 008 OPT module on system A’s CU can be connected to an LS port on system B’s CU. This enables the user on system B to access all the stations and facilities on system A. If system B has
Remote Access, the user on system A can directly access stations and facilities on system B without operator intervention.
Conversely, an LS port on system A can be connected to an OPT port on system B.
Note: If the systems are on the same premises, the connection can be made to any T/R port.
1-42
Networking Capabilities
System Description
With the OPT/LS connection, glare is more frequent as the volume of calls increases. (Glare occurs when a user tries to make an outside call on a line/trunk at the same time an incoming call is being received on that line/trunk.) In addition, if system B (the LS interface) does not have Remote Access, only the station(s) assigned to the LS facility on system B can be accessed by system A.
Analog Tie-Trunk Connection
In an analog tie-trunk connection, the system A’s 400EM module is connected to system B’s CU. On premises, this module can be connected directly to system B if system B has similar tie-trunk facilities.
For off-premises connection, the 400EM module can be connected via the telephone company’s facilities to system B.
The analog tie-trunk connection can be programmed for two-way traffic or for one-way traffic (incoming or outgoing). The one-way mode prevents blocked calls caused by glare.
Digital Tie-Trunk Connection
The digital tie-trunk connection joins the DS1 facility (the 100D module) on system A to system B’s DS1 facility. If system B is on premises, the connection is back-to-back. To reach a remote system, the DS1 facility connects via a channel service unit
(CSU) to the telephone company’s facilities.
Networking Capabilities
1-43
System Description
Tie-Trunk Networks
The following tie-trunk networks can be used with the system.
Nontandem
The nontandem network is used primarily to connect station lines at both ends; it does not connect to another tie trunk (see
Tandem
The tandem network has a station on one system connected to a station on a third system via a tie-trunk connection in a second system. The tandem network can also be used to connect to an external facility in the third system, but the grade of service will
be fair to poor if one or both tie trunks are analog (see Figure 9).
Intertandem
The intertandem network has a tandem tie trunk connected to tie trunks at both ends. It is not recommended for analog tie trunks
1-44
Networking Capabilities
System Description
Functional Units
The functional units are the processor module, which controls the operation of the system and its features; the line/trunk and station modules, which connect the central office (CO) lines/trunks to the stations; the power supply module, which supplies power to the control unit; and the carrier with its backplane assembly, which contains the input/output (I/O) bus and the time-division multiplex (TDM) bus. All the modules are electrically connected to the backplane, which provides common circuitry for the I/O
bus, the TDM bus, and power distribution. (See Figure 10 for a
functional block diagram of the system architecture.)
The processor module is connected to intelligent ports on the line/trunk and station modules, through the I/O bus, by the digital switch element (DSE) on each line/trunk and station module. The
TDM bus also is connected to the DSE of each line/trunk and station module. The two busses are described below:
■
Input/Output Bus. The I/O bus contains a 16-bit address bus and an 8-bit data bus. The address bus selects the module that receives instructions from the 68000 microprocessor in the processor module. The microprocessor provides instructions to the port processors and DSEs through the 8-bit data bus.
■
Time-Division Multiplex Bus. The TDM bus connects the
DSEs to allow voice or data to flow in and out of the system.
The TDM bus is parallel, 8 bits wide, and runs at 2.048 MHz
(256 time slots x 8 kHz = 2.048 MHz). Each TDM cycle has
256 time slots for voice, data, tones, and clocks. The frame repetition rate is 8 kHz, providing a 64-kbps channel on each time slot (8-bit bus x 8 kHz = 64 kbps).
Functional Units
1-45
System Description
The built-in data modem connects to the TDM bus; this permits access from a local or remote PC or workstation equipped with a 1200-bps modem. The TDM bus connects with the built-in diagnostics that enable the processor to read and write to dedicated TDM test slots.
Voice signals on the TDM bus are encoded in Mu-Law 255 pulse code modulation (PCM) format for domestic use. The system provides a circuit-switched connection for
transmission of digital data signals up to 64 kbps. See “Signal
1-46
Functional Units
System Description
Signal Processing
Because the system is internally a digital system that must interact with both analog and digital devices, it must accurately translate analog signals. Doing this involves signal conversion, quantizing, commanding, and switching.
Signal Conversion
The first step in analog-to-digital (A/D) conversion is to sample the analog signal and convert the signal into a series of amplitude steps. This is called pulse amplitude modulation
(PAM).
PAM samples the height of the analog waveform 8000 times per second, or more than twice the frequency of the input signal bandwidth (for analog voice the bandwidth is 3300 Hz). Because the analog signal is sampled at more than twice its bandwidth, both the amplitude and frequency content of the original analog signal are preserved. The amplitude of each PAM sample is then digitally encoded and transmitted by using a process called pulse code modulation (PCM).
PCM uses PAM as its starting point but goes further by digitizing the PAM signal for transmission via the digital switch. PCM converts the height of each PAM pulse to an 8-bit digital signal for transmission.
PCM digitizes the PAM information by comparing each PAM sample to a point on a chart. Each point has a distinct 8-digit binary code. Therefore, it is the binary code (digital), not the amplitude pulse (analog), that is transmitted in PCM. At the destination, the PAM signal is reconstructed from the PCM signal via a digital-to-analog (D/A) converter. The D/A converter also completes the reconstruction of the analog signal from the stream of PAM signals.
Signal Processing
1
-
47
System Description
The digitally encoded signals are routed from one interface port to another interface port by assigning source and destination to specific time slots on the TDM bus. In this way, signals can be transmitted to one or several destinations and reconstructed at the original amplitude. The result is no signal loss during switching and transmission from one point to another.
Quantizing
The process of converting PAM samples into discrete PCM values is called quantizing. In the case of voice-grade signals, eight bits are commonly used to encode one PAM sample.
Quantizing with eight bits allows 256 unique values to represent the range of amplitudes in the analog signal being sampled.
Quantizing causes distortion due in part to the “rounding off” of
PAM samples into discrete PCM values. This distortion can be minimized by increasing the number of bits used to encode each
PAM sample or by increasing the sampling rate. Using 8-bit coded samples taken at an 8-kHz rate results in toll-grade transmission quality.
Companding
Distortion also occurs in quantizing because equal consideration is given to all amplitude levels. Linear quantizing divides the amplitude range into equal segments, which results in unnecessary quality at levels where voice signals are unlikely to occur and not enough quality where they do occur. Commanding eliminates this distortion by using a nonlinear scale that has smaller divisions and more accuracy in areas of the scale where voice signals are most likely to occur.
1-48
Signal Processing
System Description
Mu-Law 255
Mu-Law 255 is a commanding scheme that uses a compression ratio compatible with modern channel bank equipment. The scale is divided into 16 intervals, with each interval having 16 levels. Therefore, the scale has 256 discrete values. But since
Mu-Law 255 has a negative and a positive zero, it really has only
255 discrete values. This commanding scheme is used in the
United States and Japan.
Digital Switching
The TDM bus allows many users to communicate over a common electrical connection because it is physically distributed across the backplane of the CU and connects all line/trunk and station modules.
The TDM bus has specific time slots for various functions. For example, during a conversation between station A and station B, a time slot is resewed for station A to transmit on and for station
B to receive on. An analog station can transmit on time slot 150 and receive on time slot 160. Because the TDM bus cycles 8000 times per second, the conversation is continuous.
The TDM bus carries tones and control signals to stations via time slots 0 to 39. Unlike other bus configurations, the stations on the TDM bus receive all transmissions. If a station is not assigned to any of the time slots, the station ignores the data.
The digital switch element (DSE) is a digital switch for voice and data. It also performs the operations for commanding schemes such as Mu-Law and A-Law. Each module has a DSE to interface codecs or digital transceivers to the TDM bus. The actual digital switching occurs when the DSE is programmed by the system
I/O bus to transmit data on or receive data from the TDM bus in specific time slots. For example, the digital station can send data on time slot 200 and receive data on time slot 220.
Signal Processing
1-49
System Description
This process also involves time slot interchanging so that an available slot in the TDM cycle can be filled with a transmit or receive slot. The DSE allows up to 16 time slots to be conference and sent out to a single station port.
Tie-Trunk Signaling
Tie trunks transmit via three different signaling formats, each made up of a specific mode and a specific type.
The DIP switches on the 400EM module select the signaling
modes needed for tie-trunk transmission (see Figure 72); the
signaling type is selected during system programming.
Signaling Modes
There are two signaling modes:
■
Simplex mode. Two signaling leads superimposed onto the analog transmission leads provide a 2-pair wire interface for connecting two local systems at minimal cost.
■
E&M mode. This is a standard interface. The E&M signaling leads are isolated from the transmission leads, requiring a
3-pair wire interface.
In the simplex mode, protective resistance is always included in the circuit. The E&M mode can be either protected or unprotected from high-voltage transients or fluctuations. In the protected mode, a resistance is added to the leads to reduce current peaks. The protected mode is used when there is no network interface to protect the circuit from outside interference.
1-50
Signal Processing
System Description
The unprotected mode must be used for an E&M type 1 standard interface (see below) to meet the specified voltagedrop criteria. This mode is used when there is a network interface.
CAUTION:
The protected mode must be used whenever the E&M leads extend out-of-building and are not connected to the network interface.
Signaling Types
Three different signaling types combine with the signaling modes. Together these create the proper signaling format for each system.
■
Type 1 standard. This is the factory-set type, which is used to connect two systems through two intermediate COs. The switches must be set for E&M mode.
■
Type 1 compatible. This type is used to connect directly without intermediate COs. One system is set to type 1 standard, the other to type 1 compatible. The switches must be set for E&M mode.
■
Type 5 simplex. This type is used to connect similar systems or systems with compatible signaling that are Iocated in the same building or on the same business campus.
The choice of a tie-trunk signaling format depends on the particular application and the two systems being connected, including whether or not the tie-trunk signals pass through CO
lines or over customer-owned cable. Table 1-10 shows how to
determine tie-trunk compatibility between the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System and other systems.
Signal Processing
1-51
System Description
Table 1-10 Tie-Trunk Compatibility
Installation Situation
Preferred Signaling Format
From MERLIN
LEGEND
Communications System
Location
MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System
Signaling
Mode and
Type
Protected or Unprotected
Far End
Signaling
Mode and
Type
Protected or Unprotected
To
MERLIN
LEGEND or
MERLIN II
System
25 or
System
75
System
85
Dimension PBX
Same site or interbuilding
Same site or interbuilding
Sane site or interbuilding
Same site
Simplex; type 5
Simplex; type 5
Simplex; type 5
N/A
N/A
N/A
Unprotected
Simplex; type 5
Simplex; type 5
Simplex; type 5
E&M; type 1; standard
N/A
N/A
N/A
Unprotected
Dimension PBX
Other
Other
Network
Interface lnterbuilding
Same site lnterbuilding
N/A
E&M; type 1; compatible
E&M; type 1; compatible
E&M; type 1; compatible
E&M; type 1; compatible
E&M; type 1; standard
Protected
Unprotected
Protected
Unprotected
E&M; type 1; standard
E&M; type 1; standard
E&M; type 1; standard
N/A
Protected
Unprotected
Requires a protection unit
N/A
1-52
Signal Processing
System Description
DS1 Capabilities
A Digital Signal One (DS1) facility is a transmission system that transports digital signals in the DS1 format. The interface that allows the connection of DS1 facilities to the system is the 100D module. Through this module voice and data calls can be placed on or received by a DS1 facility.
Twenty-four Digital Signal Zero (DS0) channels, each operating at 64 kbps, plus framing bits, are multiplexed, forming a DS1 signal of 1.544 Mbps. Each DS0 channel within the DS1 signal corresponds to a logical endpoint. Even though there is only one physical jack, the 100D module supports up to 24 logical endpoints or ports (one for each channel).
In DS1 format, calls to other digital PBXs or COs remain digital, and signals do not need to be converted to analog for acceptance by the connecting trunk. In addition, the 100D module can be configured to work with T1 or Integrated Services
Digital Network Primary Rate Interface (ISDN-PRI) service.
To connect the 100D module to an outside DS1 facility, a channel service unit (CSU) is used. The CSU regulates the transmission into and out of the 100D module so that the module matches the transmission of the outside facility.
Both ends of the DS1 facility must be able to “speak the same language.” To ensure this, the following options are set during system programming to match the transmission of the outside DS1 facility:
■ type of service (T1 or ISDN-PRI)
■ framing format
■ line coding
■ line compensation
DS1 Capabilities
1-53
System Description
■ clock synchronization
■ signaling mode (for T1 service only)
The appropriate setting for each option is determined by the transmission facility to which the module is connected. Each option is discussed below.
Type of Service
The system supports two types of service for DS1 facilities: T1 and ISDN-PRI. The 100D module can be programmed to operate in either type of service. T1 service transmits and receives voice and analog data; ISDN-PRI transmits and receives voice and analog and digital data.
The following AT&T Switched Network (ASN) services are provided through a T1 or ISDN-PRI line/trunk:
■
Megacom WATS service for domestic long-distance outward voice calls; ISDN-PRI does not support international dialing for Megacom WATS service.
■
Megacom 800 service for domestic toll-free incoming voice calls. T1 service supports Megacom 800 with or without
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS), while ISDN-PRI supports it only without DNIS. Also, ISDN-PRI does not support international dialing for Megacom 800 service.
■
Software Defined Network (SDN) for voice and circuitswitched data calls (up to 56 kbps). SDN lets businesses use portions of the ASN in concert with their dedicated private line networks. However, the system does not support “uniform dialing plan,” which is necessary for complete integration with
SDN. Also, ISDN-PRI service does not support international dialing for SDN.
■
MultiQuest® service for domestic toll incoming voice calls
(900 number). T1 supports MultiQuest service with or without
DNIS, while ISDN-PRI supports it only without DNIS.
1-54
DS1 Capabilities
System Description
Any combination of these ASN services can be used in T1 or
ISDN-PRI.
In addition to these ASN services, T1 also supports Shared
Access for Switched Services (SASS). SASS allows both
Megacom WATS and Megacom 800 services to be offered over the same line/trunk facilities, eliminating the need to have separate incoming and outgoing Iine/trunk groups.
Like T1, ISDN-PRI also supports Megacom WATS and Megacom
800 services on a shared line/trunk, but only on a call-by-call basis. Besides this, ISDN-PRI provides Accunet® Switched
Digital Service for 56-kbps, 64-kbps restricted, and 64-kbps clear circuit-switched data calls. However, Accunet Switched
Digital Service is not supported for international dialing.
T1
T1 is the factory setting and is selected for the DS1 facility to allow each of the 24 channels to be programmed to emulate tie,
LS, or GS lines/trunks in any combination. This means that a single 100D module can take the place of 24 regular outside lines.
If common-channel signaling is selected, 23 channels are available for emulation and the 24th channel carries formatting signals.
ISDN-PRI
ISDN-PRI is a standard format for ISDN service. Some of the benefits of ISDN-PRI service are
■
Speed. Data calls to outside destinations can be established on the same B channels used for voice calls if the service allows. Modems and dedicated, conditioned lines/trunks are not needed.
DS1 Capabilities
1-55
System Description
■
AT&T’s INFO2 automatic number identification (ANI)
service. Customers who subscribe to this service can identify an incoming call on an lSDN-PRl line/trunk by either telephone number or billing number.
Note: The availability of the caller identification information may be limited by local-serving (caller’s) jurisdiction, availability, or CO equipment.
■
Dynamic B-channel assignment. An individual B channel can be removed from service without blocking calls to or from any other B channels.
■
Improved toll restriction. The ways that toll restriction can be bypassed are limited on ISDN-PRI Iines/trunks.
■
Reliable indication of far-end disconnect.
■
Improved SMDR reports. Call timing for SMDR reports is improved since lengths of times recorded are closer to the actual billed duration.
Framing Format
To identify the DS0 channels, the DS1 signal is segmented into blocks of 193 bits, called frames. A frame consists of 24 eight-bit words (one for each channel) plus a framing bit at the beginning of each frame: 24 words x 8 bits = 192 bits. Thus, a framing bit appears in every 193rd bit position of the 1.544-Mbps DS1 signal.
Frames repeat at a rate of 8000 per second, with each frame repeating DS0 channels 1 through 24 sequentially.
Two methods of framing can be used by a 100D module, but the framing format chosen must match the framing at the far end:
■
D4 Framing Format. The system is factory set for the most common framing format, D4 framing. A D4 frame consists of
24 eight-bit time slots and one framing bit. To synchronize the
1-56
DS1 Capabilities
System Description signals, the receiving equipment uses the framing information to identify the start of each frame and to identify which frames contain signaling information. The framing information repeats once every 12 frames; these 12 frames form the D4 superframe. This framing format is used by most DS1 equipment.
■
ESF Framing Format. The extended superframe (ESF) format extends the 12-frame D4 superframe to a 24-frame superframe, hence its name. The 24 framing bits include a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) for the entire extended superframe and a facility data link for maintenance. The ESF can detect more errors than D4 framing; however, ESF is not used universally by DS1 equipment.
Line Coding
The DS1 signal consists of a continuous bit stream of ones and zeros, encoded into bipolar pulses for transmission. Only the ones create a pulse; the zeros represent the absence of a pulse.
The pulses of the ones alternate between positive and negative.
This type of line coding is called bipolar or alternate mark inversion (AMI). The line-coding formats guarantee that the
"ones-density" requirement is met to achieve clock recovery.
To meet the ones-density requirement, either zero code suppression (ZCS) or bipolar 8 zero substitution (B8ZS) line coding is used. The factory-set line coding is ZCS.
ZCS
ZCS line coding monitors each DS0 channel and prevents strings of eight or more zeros. Upon detecting eight consecutive zeros in a channel octet, ZCS line coding forcibly changes the seventh zero (second least significant bit) to a one.
With ZCS line coding, any bit that is overwritten has no noticeable effect on voice and voice-grade data. However, the ZCS linecoding format can cause errors in digital data transmission.
DS1 Capabilities
1-57
System Description
B8ZS
B8ZS line coding encodes an all-zero channel octet into a unique binary sequence with a “bipolar violation” in bit positions 4 and 7.
Normally, for bipolar (AMI) transmission, ones are encoded alternately as a positive then negative, or negative then positive, pulse. If two positive or two negative pulses are received in succession, a bipolar violation occurs.
Ordinarily bipolar violations are caused by noise hits on the signal. However, B8ZS line coding allows the 8-bit strings to be detected at the receiving end and converted back into the original sequence.
B8ZS line coding is preferred over ZCS because it does not cause errors in data transmission.
B8ZS violations are passed by the ESF T1 CSU but not by other
CSUs. The CSU is a hardware component needed when two endpoints are located in different buildings or when the distance between the two endpoints makes office or line repeaters necessary. The CSU is located on the customer’s premises and is used to connect the system to DS1 network facilities (see
“Install the Channel Service Unit” in Chapter 3, “Installation”).
Line Compensation
Line compensation adjusts for the amount of cable loss in decibels (dBs), based on the length of cable between the 100D module and the CSU or other far-end connection point. The factory setting is a value of 1, which allows a maximum loss of
0.6 dB. The other possible settings are shown in Table 1-11.
1-58
DS1 Capabilities
System Description
Table 1-11 Line Compensation Settings
Setting dB Loss
1 -0.6
2 -1.2
3
4
5
-1.8
-2.4
-3.0
Cable Feet
0 - 1 3 3
133-266
266-399
399-533
533-655
Clock Synchronization
Clock synchronization is an arrangement where digital facilities operate from a common clock. Whenever digital signals are transmitted over a communications link, the receiving end must be synchronized with the transmitting end to receive the digital signals.
The system synchronizes itself to the network by extracting the timing signal from the incoming digital stream. If the system has more than one 100D module, the module that provides the primary synchronization for the other 100D modules and for the
TDM bus must be identified during system programming. The factory setting is the first 100D module in the carrier. This can be changed to the second or third module.
Backup synchronization in the event of a maintenance failure can be provided by programming the second and third installed modules as secondary and tertiary synchronization.
DS1 Capabilities
1-59
System Description
In addition, the source of synchronization can be factory set to
“loop clock reference source” (the clock is synchronized to the external endpoint) or set to “local clock reference source” (the clock is free running). This setting must be made for the primary, secondary, and tertiary synchronization modules.
Signaling Mode
Signaling is the process of communicating channel-state information (such as dialing) from endpoint to endpoint. Two types of signaling can be used in T1 transmission: robbed-bit signaling (RBS) and common-channel signaling (CCS).
Choosing a signaling mode pertains only to T1 service; ISDN-PRI always uses common-channel signaling (23 B channels and 1
D channel).
Robbed-Bit Signaling
RBS replaces ("robs") the least significant bit of every sixth frame of each DS0 channel with signaling information. (RBS is also called in-band signaling, since signaling information is embedded in the least significant bit of every sixth 8-bit word.)
RBS is appropriate for voice and voice-grade data (up to
1200 baud), but facilities using RBS cannot accurately transmit digital data because digital data uses high-speed data rates, such as 64 kbps. Therefore, the channel is limited to voice and analog voice-band data applications.
1-60
DS1 Capabilities
System Description
Common-Channel Signaling
CCS is an out-of-band signaling format that places the signaling bits for channels 1 through 23 into the 8-bit word of the 24th channel. This restricts DS1from using the 24th channel for voice or data transmissions.
D4 framing does not preclude the use of CCS, but CCS is not compatible with D4 channel banks because the D4 channel banks recognize only RBS. Coupled with B8ZS coding, CCS can support digital data up to 64 kbps per channel.
Recommended Framing and
Signaling Formats
ESF framing should be used to take advantage of its improved maintenance, diagnostic, and testing capabilities (the ESF T1
CSU is required to interface with the network). If the transmission between two systems is voice-only, RBS should be used for all
24 communication paths. For voice transmission, both ZCS and
B8ZS line coding can be used to satisfy the ones-density requirement; the preferred line-coding format is B8ZS, which is needed for 64-kbps digital data.
The framing and signaling formats depend on the network and interconnection devices (CSUs) used. For example, many CSUs support only ZCS line coding.
Notes:
■
Digital data up to 64 kbps is possible only in ISDN-PRI mode. Also, ESF framing mode, CCS signaling, and B8ZS line coding are required.
■
An ESF T1 CSU must be used for interbuilding DS1 connections.
DS1 Capabilities
1-61
Preparation
Certain hardware placement and connection requirements must be met before installation. This chapter tells you how to meet these requirements to ensure proper operation.
To verify that the requirements have been met, you must have the following information about the system:
■ location of the control unit (CU), wiring fields, network interface, and power for the system
■ type and number of central office (CO) facilities provided by the local telephone company
■ hardware requirements for the CU, wiring fields, telephones, data equipment, and optional equipment
■ location of the telephones, data equipment, and optional equipment
■ types and placement of CU modules
■ jack assignments for lines, trunks, and stations
■ requirements for voice and data features
Preparation
2-1
Preparation
Planning Forms
First, review the completed planning forms, service order forms, and floor plan. If you do not have these forms, contact the customer’s AT&T representative, the Customer Service Center
(CSC), or the authorized AT&T dealer. The planning forms are
listed in Tables 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3. Not all of them are necessary
for each system.
Table 2-1 Required Planning Forms
Form No. Description
Form 1
Form 2a
System Planning
System Numbering—Station Jacks
Form 2b
System Numbering—Digital/ISDN Station
Adjuncts
Form 2c
Form 2d
System Numbering—Line/Trunk Jacks
System Numbering—Special Renumbers
Form 3b
Outside Trunks—Pools (PBX only)
Form 4a Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4b
Form 4c
Form 5a
Form 5b
Form 5c
Digital/ISDN (MLX) Telephone
Tip/Ring Equipment
Direct-Line Console (DLC)—Analog
Direct-Line Console (DLC)—Digital/ISDN
Queued Call Console (QCC) (PBX only)
2-2
Planning Forms
Preparation
Table 2-2 Required Planning Forms for 100D,
400EM, or 800 DID Modules
Form No. Description
Form 3a
Form 3c
Outside Trunks—Remote Access
Outside Trunks—DS1 Facility (100D Module)
Form 3d Outside Trunks—Tie
Form 3e
Outside Trunks—DID (PBX only)
Table 2-3 Optional Planning Forms
Form No. Description
Form 6a Optional Operator Features
Form 6b Call Pickup Groups
Form 6c Group Paging
Form 6d Group Coverage
Form 6e Group Calling
Form 6f System Features
Form 6g
Allowed Lists
Form 6h Disallowed Lists
Form 7a Night Service—Group Assignment
Form 7b Night Service—Outward Restriction
Planning Forms
2-3
Preparation
Table 2-3 Continued
Form No. Description
Form 7c
Form 8a
Night Service—Time Set
Label Form—Lines/Trunks
Form 8b Label Form—Stations and Calling Groups
Label Form—Posted Message
Form 8c
Form 8d System Speed Dial and System Directory
Automatic Route Selection Worksheet (PBX only) Form 9a
Form 9b Automatic Route Selection Tables (PBX only)
Form 9c Automatic Route Selection Default and Special
Numbers Tables (PBX only)
2-4
Planning Forms
Preparation
Environment
The CU requires the following environmental conditions.
Table 2-4 Environmental Requirements
Operating
40°–104°F; 4°–40°C
Temperatures
Optimum temperature 60°F
Humidity
20% – 80%
Airborne
Do not expose the CU to moisture,
Contamination
corrosive gases, dust, chemicals, spray paint, or similar material.
Ventilation
■
Allow at least 1" on the right and left sides of the CU and 12" above and below the CU to prevent overheating.
■
Do not place the CU near extreme heat
(furnaces, heaters, attics, or direct sunlight).
Electrical
Fields
Heat
Dissipation
Do not expose the CU to devices that generate electrical currents that cause interference (such as arc welders or motors).
500 Btu/hr
■
Basic carrier
■
Basic carrier with one expansion carrier
■
Basic carrier with two expansion carriers
1000 Btu/hr
1500 Btu/hr
W A R N I N G
Do not install the control unit outdoors.
Environment
2-5
Preparation
Space and Location
The customer must provide a backboard on which to mount the
CU. The backboard should be wire enough to accommodate additional carriers if system growth is anticipated. Attach the backboard to the wall, allowing enough room on either side of the CU for necessary wiring fields.
Backboard Requirements
■
Dimensions
■ without SYSTIMAX wiring
— small system: 4’W x 3’H x 3/4"D
— large system: 6’W x 3’H x 3/4"D
■ with SYSTIMAX wiring
— small system: 5’W x 4’H x 3/4"D
— large system: 7’W x 4’H x 3/4"D
■
Material
■
3/4" plywood
■
Check with local building code enforcement agency to see if fire-retardant material must be used.
2-6
Space and Location
Preparation
■
Mounting Hardware
■
For a wood mounting surface, use woodscrews.
■
For a brick, cinder block, or concrete mounting surface, use masonry anchors.
■
For a plaster or plasterboard mounting surface, use toggle bolts.
■
For a sheet-metal mounting surface, use sheet-metal screws and attach them to structural members.
Note: The combined pullout force of the backboard should beat least 650 lbs.
Control Unit Requirements
■
Dimensions
■
Basic carrier—14”W x 23”H x 12”D
■
Basic carrier and one expansion carrier—
25” W x 23” H x 12”D
■
Basic carrier and two expansion carriers—
37” W x 23” H x 12” D
■
Location
■
Within 5 feet of AC power outlet that is not switch controlled
■
Within 25 feet of the network interface
■
Within 1000 cable feet of telephones
Space and Location
2-7
Preparation
Power and Grounding
Proper power and grounding are essential for correct and safe functioning of the system.
Power Requirements
The customer should provide a load center of appropriate current rating equipped with 120-VAC, 15-amp circuit breaker(s).
Each breaker must protect one dedicated quad AC outlet or two dedicated duplex AC outlets.
One outlet must have an attached ground bar connected by a
#6 AWG copper wire to an approved ground. This ground bar is
the system’s single-point ground (see Figure 11).
Table 2-5 contains the AC power requirements and specifications for the CU.
Table 2-5 AC Power Requirements
Parameter
Value
Nominal voltage 117
Voltage range*
Frequency
99-129
60 ± 5%
Hz
Unit
VAC
VAC
Maximum current 3 per power supply amps
Power consumption 225 per power supply watts
* The system will bridge a 40-ms AC power supply outage without DC voltages being affected.
2-8
Power and Grounding
Preparation
Each carrier requires one outlet receptacle. Additional AC outlets may be required for auxiliary equipment. All AC outlets must be connected to the same load center and must have the ground wire connected to the single-point ground bar on the first AC
If a printer or a PC is installed with the system, it must be plugged into the same AC branch as the power supply module of the basic carrier. If the printer or the PC is 50 or more feet from the CU, asynchronous data units (ADUs) must be installed. (See
Chapter 3, “Installation,” for procedures for Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR) printer and PC installations.)
CAUTION:
The AC outlet for the CU should not be switch controlled.
Plugging the CU into an outlet that can be turned on and off by a switch invites accidental disconnection of the system.
The AC outlet must be properly wired (see “AC Outlet Tests” below).
AC Outlet Tests
The system must be connected to a properly grounded AC outlet. The two methods recommended for verifying proper grounding at the AC outlet are described in the following pages.
See Table 2-5 for AC power requirements.
If the AC outlet test detects any of the following faults, have them corrected before installing the CU:
■ open ground
■ reversed polarity
■ open hot
■ open neutral
■ hot and ground reversed
■ hot on neutral with hot open
Power and Grounding
2-9
Preparation
WARNING:
Hazardous voltages are present during the following tests.
Use care when working with AC power line voltages.
Using an Ideal 61-035 Circuit Tester (or equivalent)
1. Plug the circuit tester into the outlet to be tested. If the circuit is properly grounded, the yellow and white lights on the tester will go on.
2. Unplug the circuit tester.
Using a Volt-Ohm Milliammeter (VOM)
1. Set the VOM to the scale on which you can read 130 VAC.
2. Measure the AC outlet voltages (see Figure 11):
■
Phase to ground should be 110 to 125 VAC.
■
Neutral to ground should be less than 2.5 VAC.
■
Phase to neutral should be 110 to 125 VAC.
If the voltage readings do not measure the values required, the
AC outlet is improperly wired.
WARNING:
If the AC outlet test shows an improper ground, do not
install the system. Advise the customer to have a licensed electrician correct the problem.
2-10
Power and Grounding
Preparation
Grounding Requirements
Proper grounding (see Figure 12) of the installation site
safeguards system functioning by protecting the system from
■ lightning
■ power surges
■ power crosses on CO lines/trunks
■ electrostatic discharge (ESD)
The telephone company is responsible for providing protection of CO lines/trunks at the entrance to the site. The protection should consist of
■ carbon blocks or gas discharge tubes connected to an approved ground
■ adequate bonding of the CO line/trunk protector ground and the power company ground
The CU, the CO line protector, and the AC power service panel should be as close to each other as possible. Because equipment can be located throughout a building, the National
Electrical Code requires the ground point for the CO line protector to be bonded to the AC power ground. The AC outlet and the single-point ground bar must be properly grounded.
Power and Grounding
2-11
Preparation
Each power supply module in the CU must be connected to the single-point ground bar by a #12 AWG or a #14 AWG solid copper wire. The wire run should not exceed 25 feet. (See
"Provide Proper Grounding" in Chapter 3, "Installation.")
WARNING:
Improper ground can cause equipment failures, service outages, and electrical shock. Verify that the AC power uses an approved ground for its primary ground, that all voltagelimiting devices are grounded to an approved ground, and that the ground is one of the approved grounds below.
Approved grounds (listed from most to least preferred) are
■ building steel
■ acceptable water pipe-must be a metal, underground water pipe at least 1/2 inch in diameter, in direct contact with the earth for at least 10 feet. It must be electrically continuous (or made electrically continuous by bonding around insulated joints, plastic pipe, or plastic water meters) to the point where the protector ground is connected. A metallic underground water-pipe must be supplemented by the metal frame of the building, a concrete encased ground, or a ground ring. If these grounds are not available, the water pipe ground can be supplemented by one of the following types of grounds:
■ metal underground gas piping system—an electrically continuous metal underground gas piping system that is uninterrupted with insulating sections or joints, and without an outer nonconductive coating
■ other local metal underground systems or structures— local underground structures such as tanks and piping systems
2-12
Power and Grounding
Preparation
■ rod and pipe electrodes—a 5/8-inch (solid rod) or 3/4-inch
(conduit or pipe) electrode driven to a minimum depth of 8 feet
■ plate electrode—a minimum of 2 square feet of metallic surface exposed to the exterior soil
■
■ concrete encased ground—must be an electrode, consisting of at least 20 feet of one or more steel reinforcing rods at least
1/2 inch in diameter, or 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than #4 AWG encased in 2 inches of concrete. This electrode must be located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with the earth.
ground ring—consists of at least 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than #2 AWG encircling the building.
The ground ring must be in direct contact with the earth and buried at least 2.5 feet below the earth’s surface.
Power and Grounding
2-13
Preparation
Power Surge and Lightning
Protection
For most surges, the following standard grounding requirements provide adequate lightning and power surge protection:
■ properly wired/grounded/bonded CO line protectors
■ properly wired/grounded AC outlet
■ properly grounded single-point ground bar
■ properly wired connection between single-point ground and power supply modules
Additional Protection
The 391A1 power supply module and the line/trunk and station modules have built-in AC line protection. This built-in protection handles almost all situations.
Occasionally, additional protection may be needed if the customer is located in a heavy lightning area. A 147A protector can be connected to the system to limit surges from the AC lines and CO lines. One 147A protector provides protection for four
CO lines. Up to three 146A protectors can be added to the 147A to provide protection for a maximum of sixteen CO lines. For more than sixteen lines, additional 147A protectors are required.
(See Figure 13 for a typical 147A protector installation.)
Note: The 147A protector is usually not needed with the 391A1 power unit (the power supply module). It maybe needed with the older 391A power supply module in heavy lightning areas.
Complete installation instructions are provided with the protectors (CIB 3109 and CIB 3111).
2-14
Power Surge Protection
Preparation
Unit Loads
A unit load is a measure of power used to determine the electrical load on the power supply module caused by telephones, adjuncts, and DID modules. One unit load equals
1.9 watts.
Unit load and auxiliary power requirements for a new system are computed automatically by the AT&T DOSS Configurator, and any necessary auxiliary power equipment is automatically ordered. However, in the event of maintenance or equipment changes, you must calculate unit loads yourself to ensure proper
operation under all conditions (see Appendix D for a unit load
worksheet complete with specific unit load values).
The power supply module provides 54 unit loads to each carrier.
If the unit load requirement for a carrier exceeds 54, an auxiliary power unit is needed to allow that carrier to support an additional
27 unit loads.
Note: Running the system with more than 54 unit loads per carrier may not appear to do harm. However, this can cause the system to malfunction, creating "no trouble found" situations.
An auxiliary power unit redirects the power requirements from the last two slots on the carrier. Any station connected to the modules in the last two slots receives power from the auxiliary power unit instead of the power supply module.
Besides DID trunks, only telephones and adjuncts that connect to analog and digital ports on the CU require unit load calculations. Any equipment with its own power supply (for example, an answering machine) does not have to be included in the unit load calculation.
Unit Loads
2-15
Preparation
Unit Loads for the Hybrid/PBX
Mode
The 391A1 power supply module generally supports six modules of any type in a Hybrid/PBX system. However, the unit loads on a carrier can exceed 54 if both of the following exist:
■ all six carrier slots have only MLX telephone or analog multiline telephone modules installed
■ the carrier has a total of more than 45 MLX-20L or 34-button analog multiline telephone stations installed
Unit Loads for the Key or Behind
Switch Mode
In a Key or Behind Switch system with four or fewer modules, no calculation is needed. The 391A1 power supply module generally supports four modules of any type in Key or Behind
Switch mode.
Calculating Unit Loads
Calculate the unit loads of each carrier by completing the steps
on the worksheet in Appendix D.
2-16
Unit Loads
Installation
Installation of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System involves these equipment areas:
■ control unit
■ system wiring
■ telephones and consoles
Depending on the system’s configuration, other equipment, such as an ISDN 7500B Data Module or a Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR) printer, can also be connected to the CU.
This chapter tells you how to install the system. Follow the recommended sequence whenever possible.
Note: You must record each station jack connection and each station change on the "System Technician’s Run Sheet" (see
Installation
3-1
Installation
The Control Unit
Use these instructions to install a basic system control unit.
Instructions for installing other equipment, such as an SMDR printer or an ISDN 7500B Data Module, are also given in this chapter. All connections to the CU must be made with the control unit housing removed.
CAUTION:
The system contains components that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). To prevent ESD:
■
Properly ground yourself when working on the control unit.
■
Have the customer maintain relative humidity between
20 percent and 80 percent.
Install the Basic Carrier
Place the backboard and the basic carrier by using the
instructions in Chapter 2 under “Space and Location.” Mount the
basic carrier onto the plywood as far left as possible to leave space for system expansion (up to a total of three carriers).
Follow these steps to install the basic carrier (see Figure 14):
1.
Mark the screw hole locations on the backboard by using the basic carrier as a guide. Make sure the carrier is level before marking the holes.
2.
Lay the carrier to the side.
3.
Drill a pilot hole in the center of each of the four marked mounting-hole locations.
4.
Anchor the screws approximately halfway into the backboard.
5.
Place the control unit housing wire clips around the molding.
for the screws on the back of the carrier.
3-2
The Control Unit
Installation
Note: Put on all four housing clips if the system has only one carrier. Put on the housing clips only on the left side of the basic carrier if an expansion carrier is to be added.
6.
Position the carrier on the screws and slide the carrier to the left.
7.
Check to see that the carrier is level and that the housing clips extend as far as possible from the sides of the carrier.
Tighten the screws.
Install the Expansion Carrier
Follow these steps to mount the expansion carrier to the backboard and connect it to the basic carrier or to an existing
expansion carrier (see Figure 15).
1.
Locate the breakaway plastic tab on the right side of the already mounted carrier. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the tab open to expose the card extenders and connectors on the carriers.
2.
Align the connector of the expansion carrier with the card extender on the already mounted carrier and slide the connector onto the extender.
3.
Mark the screw hole locations on the backboard by using the expansion carrier as a guide. Make sure the carrier is level before marking the holes.
4.
Disconnect the connector on the expansion carrier from the card extender on the already mounted carrier and lay the expansion carrier to the side.
5.
Drill a pilot hole in the center of each of the four marked mounting-hole locations.
6.
Anchor the screws approximately halfway into the backboard.
7.
Place the control unit housing clips around the right-hand molding for the screws on the back of the last carrier.
The Control Unit
3-3
Installation
8.
Position the expansion carrier on the screws and slide it to the left, reconnecting the card extender on the expansion carrier to the connector on the already mounted carrier. Make sure the connection is secure.
9.
Check to see that the carrier is level and that the housing clips extend as far as possible from the right side of the carrier. Tighten the screws.
Install the Power Supply Modules
W A R N I N G
Do not attach any cables or power cords to the power supply module until it is installed in the carrier. Do not apply power to the CU until all the modules and power equipment are installed. Once they are installed, follow the procedures
under “Turn the Power On” in this chapter. Failure to comply
can result in shock hazard or damage to the equipment.
If a ring generator is needed, install it in the power supply module before the power supply module is installed in the
carrier (see “Install a Ring Generator in the Power Supply
CAUTION:
To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD), avoid touching leads, connectors, pins, and other components. Use a properly grounded wrist strap.
CAUTION:
Remove the protective cover from each module’s goldfinger connector before installing the module into the carrier.
3-4
The Control Unit
Installation
Follow these steps to install the power supply modules:
1.
Make sure all power to the CU is turned off.
2.
Set the power switch on the power supply modules to OFF.
3.
Install the ring generator on any power supply module providing power to a 012 basic telephone or 008 OPT
module. (See “Install a Ring Generator in the Power Supply
Note: Place all 012 and 008 OPT modules in one carrier whenever possible.
4.
Add a copper-foil shield to any power supply module that is
5.
Install a power supply module in the left-most slot of each carrier.
a. Lower the module hook onto the rod.
b. Be sure the connector on the module mates properly with the connector on the carrier.
c. Push the module into the carrier until it locks into place.
6.
Connect one end of the AC power cord to the connector marked AC INPUT on the power supply module.
CAUTION:
Do not plug the power cord into the outlet now.
Install a Ring Generator in the Power Supply Module
A ring generator provides the ringing capability for basic
telephones such as single-line telephones. Figure 16 shows the
proper placement of the ring generator in the power supply module.
The Control Unit
3-5
Installation
Note: Each carrier that has 012 basic telephone or 008 OPT modules must have a ring generator installed in the carrier’s power supply module before the power supply module is installed in the carrier. Place all 012 and 008 OPT modules in one carrier whenever possible.
WARNING:
Hazardous electrical voltages may be present if the following steps are not performed correctly.
Follow these steps to install a ring generator:
1.
Turn off the power switch at the power supply module.
2.
If there is an auxiliary power unit, unplug it from the AC outlet and then unplug it from the front of the power supply module.
3.
Unplug the power supply module’s power cord first from the
AC outlet (or from the auxiliary power unit) and then from the front of the power supply module itself.
4.
Remove the power supply module from the carrier.
Note: At this point there should be no cords connected to the front of the power supply module.
5.
Place the power supply module on its left side and remove the five screws.
6.
Carefully turn the module over on its right side and remove the left half of the power supply module.
7.
Position a 129B Frequency Generator (ring generator) so that its screw holes are aligned with the screw posts on the power supply module and the transformer is next to the main board.
8.
Attach the ring generator to the power supply module with four screws.
3-6
The Control Unit
Installation
9.
Connect one end of the cable with the 3-pin connectors to the header labeled P101 on the power supply circuit board.
Connect the other end of the cable to the header labeled P1
on the ring generator (see Figure 16).
10.
Connect one end of the 4-pin cable to the header labeled
P202 on the power supply circuit board. Connect the other end of the cable to the header labeled P2 on the ring
11.
Use the clips provided with the ring generator to attach the cables to the inside edge of the plastic housing (see
Figure 16). Make sure the cables do not lie across the circuit
boards.
12.
Replace the left half of the module housing.
13.
Carefully turn the module over and replace the five screws.
14.
Stick the modification label “Equipped with 129B Freq. Gen." to the wire manager on the front end of the power supply module.
15.
Place the power supply module back in the carrier.
Add a Foil Shield to the Power Supply Module
For each expansion carrier, you must install another power supply module for the additional line and station modules. The added power supply module can cause excessive noise on the module immediately to its right.
To eliminate the noise, apply copper-foil shields to the power supply module housing. These shields and their labels are packaged in the power unit shielding kit included with the expansion carrier.
Follow these steps to install a copper-foil shield (see Figure 17):
1. Lay the power supply module on a flat surface with the right side up (as viewed from the front edge).
The Control Unit
3-7
Installation
2.
Wipe the module free of any dust or dirt.
3.
Peel the backing paper from the smaller copper-foil shield to expose the adhesive.
Note: Check the position of the foil shield before sticking it to the side of the module. Once in place, the foil is difficult to remove.
4.
Position the foil on the upper part of the module. Work out any air bubbles as you press the foil firmly in place.
5.
Peel the backing paper from the larger copper-foil shield to expose its adhesive.
6.
Position the foil on the lower part of the module (the shields should meet and not overlap or leave space between). Tuck the foil shield tightly along the ledge (or crease) of the housing. Work out any air bubbles as you press the foil firmly in place.
7.
With the copper-foil shield in place, put the power unit information label on the lower piece of foil.
8.
Attach the UL or CSA label on the power supply module below the copper-foil shield.
Install the Processor Module
There are three steps to installing the processor module:
■
As necessary, modify the processor module for Key-only operation.
■
Install the feature module in the processor module.
■
Insert the processor module into the carrier.
3-8
The Control Unit
Installation
CAUTION:
To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD), avoid touching leads, connectors, pins, and other components when handling the circuit board. Use a properly grounded wrist strap.
Modify Processor Module for Key-Only Operation
The system can be configured to operate in Key, Hybrid/PBX, or
Behind Switch mode. The mode of operation is chosen and registered with the FCC before the system is installed. The processor module is configured for the multifunction (MF) option when shipped.
The MF option allows the system to operate in any of the three modes (Hybrid/PBX, Key, and Behind Switch), according to how the software is administered. The Key function (KF) option restricts system operation to Key-only mode. Software programming of PBX features and pooled trunks is not possible in this mode.
Follow these steps to modify the processor module for Key
1. Remove the processor module from its package. Do not open the module case.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the HDR3 header. If the HDR3 header is disturbed, the system default memory can be lost.
2. Locate the header marked HDR4 on the module's circuit board.
3. Locate the shunt attached to one of the pins of the HDR4 header.
4. Remove the shunt from the single header pin; then reinsert it so that it covers both pins on the header.
The Control Unit
3-9
Installation
5. Locate the KF label that is on the jack numbering labels sheet packed with the feature module; stick it on the wire manager at the base of the module.
Install the Feature Module in the Processor Module
Before you install the processor module in the carrier, you must install the feature module in the processor module. The feature module comes in two models: a model for the small processor module and a model for the large processor module.
Follow these steps to install the feature module (see Figure 19):
1.
Unpack the feature module.
2.
Stick the round feature module label to the front of the processor module housing.
3.
Lay the processor module on its left side.
4.
Align the connectors on the feature module with the connectors in the processor module.
5.
Firmly press the feature module into the processor module.
Insert the Processor Module
CAUTION:
Remove the protective cover from the processor module’s gold-finger connector before installing the module into the carrier.
Follow these steps to insert the processor module (see
1.
Lower the processor module onto the rod on the carrier in slot 00.
2.
Be sure that the connector on the module mates properly with the connector on the carrier.
3.
Swing the processor module into the slot.
3-10
The Control Unit
Installation
4. Push firmly until the processor module snaps into place. The processor module should be securely attached to the rear of the carrier and held in place by the tab on the bottom toward the back of the processor module.
CAUTION:
To avoid damage, do not force the module. If the module does not insert easily, push in on the rear locking tab, remove the module, check for any obstruction, and reinsert the module.
Replace the Feature Module
CAUTION:
Make sure that you have all the necessary records to reprogram the system before you replace the feature module. When the feature module is replaced, all system memory is lost and the system must be reprogrammed.
It may become necessary at some point to replace the feature module because of upgrades or malfunctions. Follow these steps to replace the feature module in a fully installed system:
1. Turn off the system (see “Shut the Power Off” later in this
chapter). Make sure the ON/OFF switch on the power supply module is set to the OFF position.
2. Remove the processor module from the carrier.
a. Press up on the tab on the bottom of the module.
b. Pull the bottom of the module away from the carrier.
c. Lift upward to disengage the module from the rod on the top of the carrier.
3. Lay the processor module on its left side.
The Control Unit
3-11
Installation
4.
Grasp the metal rings on the outside of the feature module and pull up.
5.
Check the HDR4 header on the processor module circuit
board for proper mode operation (see "Modify the Processor
Module for Key-Only Operation" earlier in this chapter).
6.
Align the connectors on the new feature module with the connectors in the processor module.
7.
Firmly press the new feature module into the processor module.
8.
Install the Auxiliary Power Unit
If the system must support more than 54 unit loads, install an
auxiliary power unit, the Auxiliary Power Unit 9024 (see “Unit
Note: An already installed 335A auxiliary power unit can continue to be used if no new telephones or modules are added to the system.
Follow these steps to install an auxiliary power unit (see
1.
Make sure that the ON/OFF switch on the power supply module is set to the OFF position.
2.
Mount the auxiliary power unit on a surface within 2 feet of the
CU (probably the backboard on which the CU is mounted).
3.
Insert one end of the modular line cord that comes with the auxiliary power unit into the jack labeled AUX POWER INPUT on the power supply module. Insert the other end of the modular line cord into the jack labeled AUX POWER on the auxiliary power unit.
3-12
The Control Unit
Installation
CAUTION:
Do not plug the power supply module or the auxiliary power unit into the AC outlet until you are ready to turn on the
system. See “Turn the Power On” later in this chapter.
CAUTION:
Do not attach the power cord(s) to any building surfaces.
Install the Line/Trunk and Station
Modules
Use caution when installing the Iine/trunk and station modules to
prevent damage to the connectors. See Appendix A for specific
wiring applications.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD), avoid touching leads, connectors, pins, and other components. Use a properly grounded wrist strap.
Note: Do not leave empty slots between modules in the carrier.
The system will ignore modules installed beyond any empty slot.
Follow these steps to install Iine/trunk and station modules (see
1. Review the system planning form to verify slot placement on the carrier for each module. According to the system planning form, install Iine/trunk and station modules in slots
01 through 05 on the basic carrier, slots 06 through 11 on the first expansion carrier, and slots 12 through 17 on the second expansion carrier.
The Control Unit
3-13
Installation
Note: Whenever possible, place all 012 and 008 OPT basic telephone modules in the same carrier so that the same ring generator can support them.
CAUTION:
Remove the protective cover from each module’s goldfinger connector before installing the module into the carrier.
2.
Lower the module onto the rod on the carrier in the appropriate slot.
3.
Be sure that the connector on the module mates properly with the connector on the carrier.
4.
Swing the module into the slot and firmly push the module into the carrier until it locks into place.
Note: If you have difficulty installing a module, check the module for alignment problems. Inspect the carrier for damage. If no damage is present, the modules should snap into place. If the carrier is damaged, you must replace it.
5.
After all modules have been installed, label all jacks with the numbered labels provided with the feature module. The labels for lines/trunks have a cream-colored background and green numbers. The labels for stations have a cream-colored background and blue numbers.
a.
Label each line/trunk jack on the modules sequentially, from 01 up to 80. Begin with the module in slot 01, numbering from bottom to top on each module and working from left to right across the carrier.
b.
Label each station jack on the modules sequentially, from
01 up to 144. Begin with the module in slot 01, numbering from bottom to top on each module and working from left to right across the carrier.
3-14
The Control Unit
Installation
Note: For each 400EM module, set the dual in-line package
(DIP) switches on the module for the desired tie-trunk options
(see Figure 72 and "Tie-Trunk Signaling" in Chapter 1).
Follow these steps to remove a module:
1.
Press upon the tab on the bottom of the module.
2.
Pull the bottom of the module away from the carrier.
3.
Lift upward to disengage the module from the rod on the top of the carrier.
Provide Proper Grounding
Proper grounding of the system protects it from
■ lightning
■ power surges
■ power crosses on CO lines/trunks
■ electrostatic discharge (ESD)
WARNING:
Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation. There is a risk of electric shock if the system is not properly grounded.
Follow these steps to properly ground the CU power supply
modules (see Figures 11 and 12):
1.
Attach a #12 or #14 ground wire to the grounding screw on each power supply module.
2.
Connect the other end of each ground wire to the terminals of the single-point ground bar on the AC outlet box.
The Control Unit
3-15
Installation
Connect the Control Unit to an AC
Outlet
CAUTION:
Be sure the AC outlet has been tested for proper grounding
by following the procedures in Chapter 2 under “AC Outlet
Tests.” The outlet should be 117-VAC, 60-Hz, 3-wire
grounded.
CAUTION:
To prevent someone from accidentally shutting off the power, do not connect the CU to a switch-controlled outlet.
The AC outlet should be within 5 feet of the CU.
Follow these steps to connect the CU to an AC outlet:
1.
Turn the switch on the power supply module in the basic carrier to the OFF position.
2.
Turn off the power switches on the expansion carrier power supply modules.
3.
Unplug any auxiliary power units.
4.
Plug one end of the power cord into the AC INPUT connector just below the power switch on the front of the power supply module. Do this for each carrier.
5.
Plug the other end of the power cord into the AC outlet. Allow at least 1 foot of slack in the cord. Do this for each carrier.
CAUTION:
Do not attach the power cord(s) to any building surfaces.
3-16
The Control Unit
Installation
Turn the Power On
CAUTION:
Follow the steps in exact sequence.
When the system is completely installed, follow the steps in the sequence below to turn on the power to the power supply module:
1. For each power supply module and auxiliary power unit (see
“Install the Auxiliary Power Unit” earlier in this chapter), plug
the AC line cord into the AC outlet.
2. Set the power switch on the power supply modules to ON for all expansion carriers.
The green power lights on the expansion carriers’ power supply modules go on.
3. Set the power switch on the basic carrier’s power supply module to ON.
The green light on the power supply module goes on. The red light on the processor module goes on for 15 to 45 seconds and then goes off.
If the system is operating properly, you will see the following indicators:
■
The green power lights on all the power supply modules remain on.
■
The red warning light on the processor module goes on for 15 to 45 seconds during power-up and then goes off.
■
All indicators on the 100D and 400EM modules (if present) go on and then off. They remain off when the modules are idle.
If any of these conditions are not present, see Chapter 5,
The Control Unit
3-17
Installation
Shut the Power Off
During installation you may need to shut the power off for troubleshooting or because you need to add something to the carrier.
C A U T I O N
Follow the steps in exact sequence.
1.
Turn off the power at the power supply module in the basic carrier.
2.
Turn off the power at the power supply modules in the
expansion carriers.
3.
Unplug any auxiliary power units. Because the power supply modules are already off, the sequence for removing auxiliary power cords is not important.
Install the Control Unit Housing
The control unit housing is a plastic cover to protect the CU modules. One front panel is used for each carrier. Follow these
steps to install the control unit housing (see Figure 22):
1.
Lay the front panel(s) face down.
2.
If more than one carrier is being housed, slide the front panels together so that the semicircles on the inside line up.
3.
Add both side panels to the front panel(s) by sliding the front panel(s) into the slots on the side panels so that the semicircles on the inside line up.
4.
Pick up the whole housing and place it on the CU.
a. Line up the wire clips attached to the carrier with the recesses on the outside of the side panels.
b. Push back until the clips hook over the tabs and rest in the recesses.
3-18
The Control Unit
Installation
Channel Service Unit
The channel service unit (CSU) provides the interface between the 100D module and the DS1 facilities. Two models are available: the ESF T1 CSU and the 551 T1 L1 CSU.
ESF T1 CSU
The ESF T1 CSU can connect to the DS1 network by using the
D4 or extended superframe format (hence the ESF). Also, it is the only CSU to provide the B8ZS line coding needed to transmit a
64-kbps clear channel.
Mount the ESF T1 CSU in a relay rack or on a shelf as a standalone unit. Plug the CSU into a 117-VAC outlet.
Note: Before the CSU can be installed, the local telephone company must be contacted for information such as services available, equipment options, and 48-VDC power on the line.
Also, a completed "Request for 1.544 Mbps End Section
Characteristics" form must be submitted to the telephone company.
To install the ESF T1 CSU, set the switch options, mount the CSU
(as needed), and connect the wires from the 100D module and the DS1 network. Follow the procedures below to install an
ESF T1 CSU.
Set the DIP Switches on the Rear Panel
The seven 8-position dual in-line package (DIP) switches on the rear panel are set for operating features and for diagnostic tests:
■
SW1 sets the CSU address, which must be confirmed with the
local telephone company (see Table 3-1).
■
SW2 sets the bit-error rate (BER) alarm threshold (see
Channel Service Unit
3-19
Installation
■
SW3 is not used.
■
SW4 sets the Errored Seconds threshold; positions 7 and 8 can be changed to match diagnostic equipment (see
■
SW5 sets signal processing parameters according to the services required by the customer and provided by the
telephone company (see Table 3-4).
■
SW6 sets signal processing parameters according to the services required by the customer and provided by the
telephone company (see Table 3-5).
■
SW7 sets the distance from the 100D module to the CSU (see
Note: Setting SW7 or administering line compensation for the
100D module can provide for cable distances up to 655 feet.
If the SW7 is set and the 100D module is administered, the maximum cable distance between the 100D module and the
CSU can be up to 1310 feet.
Note: In the following tables, "up" is the physical position of the setting and represents "off" or "open." "Down" is the physical position of the setting and represents "on" or “closed.” To effect option changes, you must power down the CSU and then power up.
3-20
Channel Service Unit
Installation
Table 3-1 SW1 Default Settings
Position
Status
1 up down
2
3
4 down down down
5
6
7
8 down down down
Channel Service Unit
3-21
Installation
Table 3-2 SW2 Default Settings
Position Status
1 up
Effect
BER threshold is 10
–6
2
3
4 down up up
BER threshold is 10
–6
BER threshold is 10
–6
BER threshold is 10
–6 not used
5
6 up up
7 not used not used
8 up up Alarm LED/relay operation is momentary.
3-22
Channel Service Unit
Installation
Table 3-3 SW4 Default Settings
Position Status
1 down not used not used
2
3 down down
4 down not used not used
Effect
5
6
7
8 down down up down not used not used disable auto dial modem
TABS protocol enabled
Channel Service Unit
3-23
Installation
Table 3-4 SW5 Default Settings
Position
1
Status
down
Effect
DTE is D4 framed.
2 down Network is AMI.
DTE is AMI
3
4 down up generate CRC-6 to DTE
5
6
7 up up up generate CRC-6 to network
Part 68 Density enforcement
8 up does not poll far-end CSU for alarms not used
3-24
Channel Service Unit
Installation
Table 3-5 SW6 Default Settings
Position
Status
1 down
Effect
send received signal to DTE or network during loopback operation
2
DTE B8ZS is not decoded.
Network B8ZS is not decoded.
3
4 up up
5 down down network ESF default to DIP switch configuration upon power-up not used
6
7 up up
8 down not used loop network signal back (ESS loopback) to network during keepalive
Channel Service Unit
3-25
Installation
Position
1
2
5
6
7
3
4
8
Table 3-6 SW7 Settings
up up up up
0 – 150 ft
down up up up
Status
150 – 450 ft
up down up down up down up up
450 – 655 ft
up up up up down up down up
3-26
Channel Service Unit
Installation
Bit-Error Rate Threshold Option
DIP switch SW2 can be set to alarm at bit-error rate (BER) threshold Ievels between 10
–4 and 10
-9 or can be disabled.
Table 3-7 shows the settings for SW2 for the various thresholds.
Table 3-7 SW2 BER Options
Position 10-4
Threshold Option
10-5 10-6 10-7
10-8 10-9
Disable
1 up down up down up down down
2
3
4 u p u p up up up up down down up up up down down up up up up up up up down not used (up)
5
6 not used (up)
7 not used (up)
8 up = non-latching mode; down = latching mode
Channel Service Unit
3-27
Installation
Switch Settings for Framing in Hybrid/PBX Mode
The framing format for the network and for data terminal equipment can be either D4 or extended superframe (ESF). DIP switches SW5 and SW6 must be set according to the following tables to match the framing format for the network and the equipment. This applies to Hybrid/PBX mode only.
Table 3-8 Switch Settings in Hybrid/PBX Mode: Network and Equipment are ESF Framed
Switch
1 2 3 4
Position
5
6 7 8
5 up down down down down down
*
up
6 up up up down down up up up
*
When this switch position is set to down, the near-end CSU polls the far-end
CSU for alarm status. If the network is set to D4 framing, the polling option at this switch position must be off (up).
Table 3-9 Switch Settings in Hybrid/PBX Mode: Network and Equipment are D4 Framed
Switch 1 2
3
Position
4 5 6 7
8
5 down down down up up down up up
6 up up up u p down up up up
3-28
Channel Service Unit
Installation
Table 3-10 Switch Settings in Hybrid/PBX Mode: Network is
ESF Framed and Equipment is D4 Framed
Switch
5
1 2
down down
3
Position
4 5
down down up
6
down
7
*
8
up
6 up up up down down up up up
* When this switch position is set to down, the near-end CSU polls the far-end
CSU for alarm status. If the network is set to D4 framing, the polling option at this switch position must be off (up).
Table 3-11 Switch Settings in Hybrid/PBX Mode: Network is
D4 Framed and Equipment is ESF Framed
Switch 1 2 3
Position
4 5 6 7 8
5 up down down up up down up up
6 up up up up down up up up
Set the Power Option Switch
At the power option switch, accessed through the top panel of the ESF T1 CSU, select the appropriate power source:
■ span power (SP)
■ local power—dry loop (DL)
■ local power—wet loop (WL)
Channel Service Unit
3-29
Installation
CAUTION:
Connecting an ESF T1 CSU provisioned for Iocal power— wet loop to digital microwave, digits/multiplexers, or fiber optics can damage the equipment. Connecting an ESF T1
CSU provisioned for local power — wet loop with span-line power present can damage the CSU. Therefore, the local power — wet loop option can be used only in private networks with user-owned facilities.
Local power is required for total unit operation no matter which method of power is selected.
Note: Select local power—dry loop in almost all cases. If span-
Iine power is provided and the telephone company agrees, you can option the CSU for SP. However, most telephone companies do not provide span-line power for new installations.
Set the Artificial Transmit Line Option
Depending on the distance from the CSU to the first line repeater, set the Line Build-Out (LBO) switch to the proper
option (see Table 3-12). The LBO switch is accessed through the
top panel of the CSU.
Notes:
■
The required setting for the LBO switch is usually specified by
■ the telephone company.
The receive path contains a fixed 7.5 dB artificial line and an automatic line build-out (ALBO) circuit, which automatically compensate for signal levels in the range of 0 to -27.7 dB.
3-30
Channel Service Unit
Installation
Table 3-12 Artificial Transmit Line Options
Position
Option Distance
1
0.0 dB 0—1000 ft
2
7.5 dB 1000—2000 ft
3
15.0 dB 2000—3000 ft
Connect the CSU to the 100D Module and the DS1
Network
Follow these steps to connect the ESF T1 CSU to the 100D
module and the DS1 network (see Figure 23):
1.
Connect the D8W cord from the 100D module (see Table
3-13) to the rear panel of the CSU in one of the following
ways:
■
directly to the wire-wrap connector (see Table 3-14)
■ with a special cable adapter to the 15-pin DTE female
2.
Connect the network cord to the CSU in one of the following ways:
■
directly to the wire-wrap connector (see Table 3-14)
■ with a special cable adapter to the NET 15-pin male
Channel Service Unit
3-31
Installation
Table 3-13 100D Module Pin Assignments
Pin No.
Designation
Signal
1 T1
RCV (tip)
2 RCV (ring)
4
R1
R
5
T
XMT (ring)
XMT (tip)
Table 3-14 Wire-Wrap Connector Pin Assignments
Pin No. Signal
1 shield ground
2 shield ground
3
5
8
10
19
20 transmit data to the DTE (ring) receive data from the DTE (tip) receive data from the network (tip) transmit data to the network (ring) shield ground
21
23
26 shield ground transmit data to the DTE (tip) receive data from the DTE (ring) receive data from the network (ring)
3-32
Channel Service Unit
Installation
Table 3-14 Continued
Pin No.
Signal
28 transmit data to the network (tip)
30
31
32
33 external ACO input audible com audible N/C (with ACO) audible N/O (with ACO)
34
35
36 visual com visual N/C (no ACO) visual N/O (no ACO)
Table 3-15 DTE 15-Pin Connector Pin Assignments
Pin No.
Signal
1 receive data from the DTE (tip)
2 or 8
3
4 or 15 shield ground transmit data to the DTE (tip) shield ground receive data from the DTE (ring)
9
11 transmit data to the DTE (ring)
Channel Service Unit
3-33
Installation
Table 3-16 Network 15-Pin Connector Pin Assignments
Pin No.
Signal
1 transmit data to the network (tip)
9
11
3
8
15 receive data from the network (tip) shield ground transmit data to the network (ring) receive data from the network (ring) shield ground
Front Panel
The ESF T1 CSU's front panel consists of LEDs, controls, and
23). Tables 3-17, 3-18, and 3-19 show the
functions of these items.
3-34
Channel Service Unit
Installation
Table 3-17 CSU Front Panel LEDs
LED
Color
When Lit Indicates
LOCAL
POWER
Yellow
Local 117 VAC or -48 VDC is
ON
Network
Side
FAR END
LOOPED
CRITICAL
PWR
PULSES
FRAME
LOSS
Red
Yellow
Green
Red
Red
Far-end CSU looped if initiated by near-end CSU
Power is on to critical circuits
Normal incoming signal from network
Loss of signal, loss of frame synch, improper frame sequence, or unframed signal
CRC error detected
CRC
ERROR
BPV
Red
Yellow
Non-B8ZS violation detected when optioned for B8ZS; other bipolar violations detected
Loopback is activated
NEAR END
LOOPED
ALARM
Red
BER threshold exceeded
(associated contacts for an audible alarm are also activated)
Channel Service Unit
3-35
Installation
Table 3-17 Continued
LED Color
System Side
LOOPED
Yellow
When Lit Indicates
FRAME
LOSS
LOW DENS
ACO
Red
Red
Yellow
Loopback activated on system side
Loss of signal, loss of frame synch, improper frame sequence, or unframed signal
Avg. ones density below threshold or consecutive zeroes threshold
Lights when ACO button is pressed when ALARM LED is lit
Table 3-18 CSU Front-Panel Controls
Control Function
LOOPBACK
Loops the incoming signal from the system to the system
SENDCODE
Sends "loop up" or "loop down" code to farend CSU
ACO
Functions only when the ALARM LED is lit turns on ACO LED and deactivates audible alarm; clears alarm if the alarm condition has been cleared
3-36
Channel Service Unit
Installation
Table 3-19 CSU Front-Panel Test Jacks
Jack
Provides
DIAGNOSTIC
Access via 310 jack to the 4-kbps data link
EQ IN
EQ OUT
Break-in access to transmit line to system
Break-in access to receive line from system
SM IN
SM OUT
EQ MON
SM MON
+1, -1
Break-in access in transmit path to network
Break-in access in receive path from network
Monitor access to received signal from system
Monitor access to received signal from network
Test points for measuring simplex current from network to critical circuits (if provided)
551 T1 L1 CSU
The 551 T1 L1 CSU (see Figure 24) performs many of the same
functions as the ESF T1 CSU, but it does not support B8ZS and therefore does not support the 64-kbps clear channel. Also, it does not support extended superframe (ESF) format; if a network requires this format, the ESF T1 CSU must be used.
Mount the 551 T1 L1 CSU in a relay rack, in various types of cabinets, or as a stand-alone unit. This CSU consists of the following components:
■ chassis with top and rear cover
■
Signal Monitor Unit (plug-in)
■
Office Repeater (plug-in)
Channel Service Unit
3-37
Installation
■
Fault Location Filter (a factory-installed option)
Note: Before the CSU can be installed, the serving telephone company must be contacted to obtain all necessary information, such as services available, equipment options, and power on the line. Also a completed “Request for 1.544 Mbps End Section
Characteristics” form must be submitted to the telephone company.
Follow these procedures to install the components of the
551 T1 L1 CSU.
Set the Switch Options on the Signal Monitor Unit and the
Office Repeater
Set the switches before placing the Signal Monitor Unit (SMU) and the Office Repeater (OR) in the CSU chassis.
The default settings accommodate most installations. However, some options depend upon local line conditions, for example, availability of line power and the type of service requested by the customer.
Also, proper settings for some options must be obtained from
AT&T, its authorized representative, or the local telephone company. The local telephone company representative must be informed of the options selected.
Signal Monitor Unit Switch Settings
There are four option switches in the SMU (see Figure 25). These
switches govern the operation of the following options:
■
ONES causes the unit to transmit an “ALL ONES” keep-alive signal to the CO when the customer signal drops below the minimum average ones-density.
3-38
Channel Service Unit
Installation
■
■
ESS (electronic switching system) causes the CSU to loop back its receive line to its transmit line (instead of generating
“ALL ONES”) when the customer signal fails. The Ioopback framing pattern prevents false alarms at an ESS or a data acquisition control system (DACS).
ZEROES selects either 16 or 50 consecutive zeroes to be the criteria for lighting the Zeroes LED.
■
ACTIVE FAULT LOCATE causes the remote Ioopback path to preserve bipolar violations to allow single-ended fault locating when active fault filters are used.
Table 3-20 shows the switch settings for the different options.
Table 3-20 SMU Switch Settings
Option
ONES
Switch Setting
#1—closed
#2—open
ESS
ZEROES
ACTIVE FAULT LOCATE
#1—open
#2—closed
#3—closed for 16-zero limit
#4—closed
Channel Service Unit
3-39
Installation
Office Repeater Switch Settings
Tables 3-21 and 3-22 show the power mode and artificial line-
option settings for the OR (see Figure 26).
Table 3-21 OR Power Mode Option Settings
Power Mode
Screw
Options*
S2
S3
Line power
C, E, K n/a n/a
S4 S5
AB B
C, E, K
Y OUT
AA
B
-48 V with sealing current
-48
V without sealing current
C, G, J
Y OUT
AA B
* Letters indicate those screws that are closed.
Table 3-22 OR Artificial Line Options
Line Loss S1 S5
0 dB
C n/a
7.5 dB A A
15 dB
B B
Mount the CSU Chassis
After the options have been set on the SMU and the OR, mount the CSU shelf assembly into a rack or other enclosure.
3-40
Channel Service Unit
Installation
Connect Lines to the Terminal Block (TB1)
The terminal block (TB1) on the back of the chassis is the connecting point for T1 service lines and for fault and loopback wires. Also, if a local power supply is used, the TB1 is the termination spot for the power supply wires.
WARNING:
Voltages as high as 260 V can occur between the transmit and receive pairs of the T1 line.
Follow these steps to connect the lines to TB1 on the back of the
1.
Connect the T1 service lines to terminals 1 through 5.
2.
Connect the fault pair (if provided by the local telephone company) to terminals 8 and 9.
3.
Connect the DC loopback pair (if provided by the local telephone company) to terminals 11 and 12.
4.
If the CSU is to be locally powered, connect the power supply leads to terminals 14 and 15.
Insert the Signal Monitor Unit
After setting the option switches, plug the SMU into the right side of the 551 T1 L1 CSU chassis.
The SMU has six LEDs and six bantam jacks (see Figure 25).
Tables 3-23 and 3-24 show the functions of the LEDs and the
test jacks on the front panel.
Channel Service Unit
3-41
Installation
Table 3-23 SMU Front-Panel LEDs
Label Color
When Lit Indicates
Low average ones density Avg. Dens Red
Zeroes Red > 50 consecutive zeroes (needed for encryption) or > 16 consecutive zeroes (option switch S4 closed)
Presence of simplex current
Line Pwr
Yellow
Looped Yellow
BPV
Loopback function activated
Bipolar violations received
Pulse
Red
Green Normal 1.544-Mbps pulses present
Table 3-24 SMU Front-Panel Test Jacks
Jack
Provides
EQ (IN-OUT-MON) Access to transmit input and receive output of the 100D module
SM (IN-OUT-MON) Access to CSU transmit input and receive output
Insert the Office Repeater
Plug the OR into the left slot of the 551 T1 L1 CSU chassis (see
Figure 26). The front panel has
■ six 310 jacks for in-line access and monitoring of the span line and the SMU card
3-42
Channel Service Unit
Installation
■ two GMT fuses for protection of the local powering circuitry
■ four test points
Note: The transmit path in the OR has an adjustable artificial line; this allows the transmit level to be adjusted to 0, 7.5, or 15 dB to meet the required -15 or -22.5 dB section loss. The receive path contains a fixed 7.5 dB artificial line and an Automatic Line Build-
Out (ALBO) circuit, which automatically compensate for signal levels in the range of 0 to -27.7 dB.
Connect the 551 T1 L1 CSU to the 100D Module
Connect the 100D module to the CSU’S rear panel (see
1. Place an adapter on the end of the D8W cord from the 100D module.
2. Plug the adapter into the 15-pin subminiature connector.
Note: The maximum length of cable from the 100D module to the
CSU for line compensation is 655 feet.
Table 3-25 shows the pin assignments for the rear panel
connections.
Channel Service Unit
3-43
Installation
Table 3-25 CSU Rear-Panel Pin Assignments
100D Module 551 T1 L1 CSU
PIN #
DESIG SIGNAL D-CONN DESIG SIGNAL
1 T1 RCV (tip) 3 T XMT (tip)
2 R1 RCV (ring) 11 R XMT (ring)
4
R XMT (ring) 9 R1 RCV (ring)
5 T XMT tip) 1 T1 RCV (tip)
DC Power Options
Depending on the type of line provided by the local telephone company, the CSU can be supplied with -48 VDC power on the
T`wire pair from the network. If the CSU is not powered from the network, a KS22911,L1 power supply is required. Connect the power supply to the rear panel at TB1 as follows:
■ positive lead to terminal 15
■
-48 VDC lead to terminal 14
3-44
Channel Service Unit
Installation
The SMDR Printer and the
System Programming PC
Both an SMDR printer and a personal computer (PC) used for system programming can be connected to the processor module.
Connect a Printer to the Control
Unit
A printer (AT&T models 475/476 and 572) can be connected to the CU through the SMDR port on the processor module. There are two procedures for installing a printer, depending on whether the printer is within 50 feet of the CU or not.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD), avoid touching leads, connectors, pins, and other components. Use a properly grounded wrist strap.
Notes:
■
The AT&T 570 printer is not compatible with the system
■
■ because it is not a serial printer.
Before connecting a printer, make sure that all modules have been installed on the CU.
The printer must be plugged into the same AC outlet as the CU.
Connect a Printer Within 50 Feet of the CU
Use the following hardware and procedure to connect a printer to the CU when the printer is within 50 feet of the CU and is powered from the same 117-VAC branch as the CU.
The Printer and the
PC
3-45
Installation
Hardware
■
Z200A EMI filter
■ adapter for the connector on the interface cable
■
355A for a male connector
■
355AF for a female connector
1.
Take the Z200A EMI filter and cord, and plug the end of the cord closest to the filter into the SMDR port (the top one) on the processor module.
2.
Plug the other end of the EMl filter cord into the adapter
(355AF or 355A).
3.
Connect the female connector on the adapter to the 25-pin male connector on the printer’s interface cable.
4.
Set the printer options for use with the SMDR feature.
■
For the AT&T 572 printer, set the options on the printer
according to Table 3-26. (See the user’s guide supplied
with the printer for further information.)
■
For the AT&T 475/476 printer, set the DIP (dual in-line
package) switches on the printer according to Table 3-27.
(See the user’s guide supplied with the printer for further information.)
3-46
The Printer and the
PC
Installation
06
07
11
13
15
16
17
18
Table 3-26 AT&T 572 Printer Options
No.
Function
Menu
Status
01 FORM LENGTH
09 11
02 LP1
01 6
03 CPI
01 10
04
05
LQ or NLQ
BUZZER
01
01
LQ
ON
14
FONT
RESOLUTION
BUFFER
PW ON MODE
DIRECTION
BUFFER FULL
P.E.
AUTO CR
01
01
02
01
01
02
01
01
01
BUILT-"IN"
144
N-"LINE"
ON-"LINE"
BI-DIR.1
LF + CR acTIVE
CR + LF
0
22
31
ZERO
AUTO LF
1" SKIP
01
01
CR ONLY
OFF
32
CHAR. SET (G0,GL) 02
USA
The Printer and the PC
3-47
Installation
33
34
35
81
82
Table 3-26 Continued
No.
Function
CHAR. SET (G1 ,GR)
CHAR. SET (G2)
CHAR. SET (G3)
OFF-"LINE" STATE
DSR
RTS TIMING
Menu Status
01 UK
03
0
GE
“LINE” DRAWING
ALL RECEIVE
01
02
01
OFF
RTS
83
84
85
91
CD
CTS
OVER RUN
02
02
02
02
OFF
OFF
256
8
92
93
94
DATA BIT
PROTOCOL
STOP BIT
03
01
01
04
XON/XOFF*
2
NON
95
96
PARITY
BPS
1 2 0 0
* This is the default status, but the system cannot read the character sent by the printer.
3-48
The Printer and the PC
Installation
Table 3-27 AT&T 475/476 Printer DIP Switch Settings
Switch 1 Switch 2
Switch 21
DIP 1–Open DIP 1–Open
DIP 1–Open
DIP 2–Closed
DIP 3–Open
DIP 2–Open
DIP 3–Open
DIP 2–Open
DIP 3–Open
DIP 4–Open
DIP 4–Closed
DIP 5–Closed
DIP 6–Closed
DIP 7–Closed
DIP 8–Open
DIP 4–Open
DIP 5–Open
DIP 6–Open
DIP 7–Closed
DIP 8–Open
DIP 5–Open
DIP 6–Open
DIP 7–Open
Switch 22
DIP 1–Open
DIP 2–Closed
Switch 23
DIP 1–Closed
DIP 2–Open
DIP 8–Closed
Switch 24
DIP 1–Open
DIP 3–Closed
DIP 4–Open
DIP 3–Open
DIP 4–Open
DIP 2–Closed
DIP 3–Closed
DIP 4–Open
DIP 5–Open
DIP 5–Closed
DIP 6–Open DIP 6–Closed
DIP 7–Open
DIP 8–Closed
Note: Open = off, Closed = on.
The Printer and the PC
3-49
Installation
Connect a Printer 50 or More Feet from the CU
Use the following hardware and procedure to connect a printer to the CU that is
■
■
■
50 or more feet from the CU not grounded to the same AC outlet as the CU not grounded to an outlet that is on the same 117-VAC branch as the CU and that is 50 feet or less from the CU
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Hardware
■
Z200A
EMI filter
■ adapter for the interface cable connector
■
355A for the male connector
■
355AF for the female connector
400B2 power adapter
Z3A2 ADU (asynchronous data unit)
BR1A-4P adapter, 102 connecting block, or 103 connecting block
EIA crossover cable
ADU crossover cable
2012D transformer
248B adapter
D8W cords
D6AP power cord
RS-232 cable
3-50
The Printer and the PC
Installation
1.
Take the end of the Z200A EMI filter cord that is closest to the filter and plug it into the SMDR port (the top one) on the processor module.
2.
Plug the other end of the EMI filter cord into a 355AF adapter.
3.
Connect the female connector on the 355AF adapter to one end of the EIA crossover cable. Connect the other end of the
EIA cable to the 25-pin male connector of a Z3A2 ADU.
CAUTION:
If the printer is in a building outside the main building (CU location), an ADU and an additional protector must be installed in each building. The ADUs and protectors provide both the CU and the printer additional protection against exposure to lightning, inadvertent contact with power lines, and power currents induced by nearby power lines. See the installation notes packed with the ADU for more information.
4.
Plug one end of a D8W cord into the Z3A2 ADU and the other end into an ADU crossover cable.
5.
Plug the other end of the ADU crossover cable into one of the jacks on a 400B2 power adapter.
6.
Plug one end of a D6AP cord into the other jack of the 400B2 adapter. Plug the other end of the D6AP cord into the jack on
a 248B adapter (see Figure 30).
7.
Connect the spade-tip wires on the 248B adapter to the
screws on a 2012D transformer (see Figure 30).
8.
Plug the 400B2 adapter into a BR1A-4P adapter, 102 connecting block, or 103 connecting block.
9.
Place a plug onto the end of the inside wiring (DIW) on the
CU side and plug the DIW cord into the BR1A-4P adapter,
102 connecting block, or 103 connecting block.
The Printer and the PC
3-51
Installation
10.
On the printer side of the inside wiring, punch down the DIW cord onto a 102 or 103 connecting block.
11.
Plug one end of a D8W cord into the 102 or 103 connecting block and the other end into a Z3A2 ADU.
12.
Connect one end of an RS-232 cable to the Z3A2 ADU and the other end to the printer.
13.
Plug the 2012D transformer into a wall outlet.
14.
Set the printer options for use with the SMDR feature.
■
For the AT&T 572 printer, set the options on the printer
according to Table 3-26. (See the user’s guide supplied
with the printer for further information.)
■
For the AT&T 475/476 printer, set the DIP switches on the
printer according to Table 3-27. (See the user’s guide
supplied with the printer for further information.)
Connect a PC to the Control Unit
A PC with MS-DOS* 3.3 or higher can be used for programming and maintenance of the system. The connection of the PC to the
CU depends upon whether or not the distance between the two is less than 50 feet.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD), avoid touching leads, connectors, pins, and other components. Use a properly grounded wrist strap.
* Registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
3-52
The Printer and the
PC
Installation
Connect a PC Within 50 Feet of the CU
Use the following hardware and procedure to connect a PC to the CU when the distance from the PC to the CU is less than 50 feet.
Hardware
■
355AF adapter
■
D8W cord
■
RS-232 cable
1. Plug one end of a D8W cord into the system programming/ maintenance port (the lower one) on the processor module.
Plug the other end of the D8W cord into a 355AF adapter.
2. Connect one end of an RS-232 cable to the 355AF adapter and the other end to the COM1 port on the PC.
Connect a PC 50 or More Feet from the CU
Use the following hardware and procedure to connect a PC to the CU when the distance from the PC to the CU is 50 or more feet.
Hardware
■
■
■
■
■
■
355AF adapter
400B2 power adapter
BR1A-4P adapter, 102 connecting block, or 103 connecting block
Z3A2 ADU (asynchronous data unit)
EIA crossover cable
ADU crossover cable
The
Printer and the PC
3-53
Installation
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
2012D transformer
248B adapter
102 or 103 connecting block
DIW cable
D8W cords
D6AP power cord
RS-232 cable
1.
Plug one end of a D8W cord into the system programming/ maintenance jack (the lower one) on the processor module.
Plug the other end of the D8W cord into a 355AF adapter.
2.
Connect an EIA crossover cable to the 355AF adapter.
3.
Connect one end of an RS-232 cable to the EIA crossover cable and the other end to a Z3A2 ADU.
CAUTION:
If the PC is in a building outside the main building (CU location), an ADU and an additional protector must be installed in each building. The ADUs and protectors provide both the CU and the PC additional protection against exposure to lightning, inadvertent contact with power lines, and power currents induced by nearby power lines. See the installation notes packed with the ADU for more information.
4.
Plug one end of a D8W cord into the Z3A2 ADU and the other end into an ADU crossover cable.
5.
Plug the other end of the ADU crossover cable into one of the jacks on a 400B2 power adapter.
6.
Plug one end of a D6AP cord into the other jack of the 400B2 adapter. Plug the other end of the D6AP cord into the jack on
a 248B adapter (see Figure 30).
3-54
The Printer and the
PC
Installation
7.
Connect the spade-tip wires on the 248B adapter to the
screws on a 2012D transformer (see Figure 30).
8.
Plug the 400B2 adapter into a BR1A-4P adapter, 102 connecting block, or 103 connecting block.
9.
Place a plug onto the end of the inside wiring (DIW) on the
CU side and plug the DIW cord into the BR1A-4P adapter.
10.
On the PC side of the inside wiring, punch down the DIW cord onto a 102 or 103 connecting block.
11.
Plug one end of a D8W cord into the 102 or 103 connecting block and the other end into a Z3A2 ADU.
12.
Connect one end of an RS-232 cable to the Z3A2 ADU and the other end to the COM1 port on the PC.
13.
Plug the 2012D transformer into a wall outlet.
The Printer and the PC
3-55
Installation
Data Adapters
Adapters are needed to connect data equipment to the control unit. The kind of adapter used depends on whether or not the data is analog or digital. For analog data a modem or modem pool is used; for digital data an ISDN 7500B Data Module is used.
ISDN 7500B Data Module
The ISDN 7500B Data Module is used to connect a digital data terminal to the system on a 008 MLX module. The data module is used at the digital data station to make and receive data calls.
When a data terminal is used to make calls, the keyboard is used to dial the number. Instead of converting digital data signals to analog signals as a modem does, the 7500B maintains a digital data format that allows transmission to another digital station or over the Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate
Interface (ISDN-PRI) telephone network.
The ISDN 7500B Data Module provides an RS-232 interface for asynchronous data terminal equipment operating at speeds up to 19.2 kbps. The data module also provides a CCITT V.35
interface for synchronous data terminal equipment operating at speeds up to 64 kbps. (Optional enhancement boards must be ordered separately.)
The 7500B can be setup to handle a variety of data communications equipment (DCE) and is the only digital adapter that can be used with the system.
The 7500B front panel has the following (see Figure 33):
■
POWER/TEST LED. Lights when power is supplied to the
7500B; flashes when 7500B tests are performed.
3-56
Data Adapters
Installation
■
DATA LED. Flashes to indicate an incoming data call and lights when a call is in progress; flashes when 7500B tests are performed.
■
Display. Displays status information and option settings.
■
NEXT, BACK, and ENTER buttons. Used to operate the
75008 and to adjust the screen’s contrast.
The 7500B back panel has the following (see Figure 34).
■
PHONE jack. Connects a digital/ISDN (MLX) telephone to the
7500B.
■
LINE jack. Connects the 7500B to an MLX system module.
■
POWER connector. Connects the 7500B to the DC power supply, which connects to an AC outlet.
■
PORT 1. Connects the 7500B to a data terminal, computer, or modem.
■
PORT 2. When an enhancement board is installed for synchronous operation, Port 2 connects a second data terminal, an automatic calling device (with an RS-366 interface), or a data terminal with a V.35 interface.
Note: A modem can provide an analog data interface from an
MLX telephone that has an MFM installed.
When you use the ISDN 7500B Data Module with an MLX telephone, plug one end of the D8W cord into the PHONE jack on the 7500B and the other end of the cord into the LINE jack on the MLX telephone.
The maximum cord length from the 7500B to the telephone cannot exceed 80 feet.
The MLX telephone cannot be used to dial data calls, and the data module cannot be used to dial voice calls. Each device
Data Adapters
3-57
Installation operates independently, and features are assigned to each device independently.
Note: Do not connect two ISDN 7500B Data Modules on one line.
The data module can be configured as a stand-alone by ordering a WP90110, L1 power unit (PEC 21625). The 7500B can also be configured in a multiple-mount arrangement by ordering a Z77A data mounting (PEC 21626), which provides a common power supply for up to eight data modules. Both the power unit and the data mounting need a 115-VAC power outlet. Neither the power unit nor the data mounting is provided with the data module, and both must be ordered separately.
The 7500B does not have the internal 100-ohm line termination that is provided with MLX telephones. Therefore, when the 7500B is used without an MLX telephone, a 100-ohm, 440A4 terminating resistor adapter (PEC 2709-A59) must be installed on the line near the 7500B.
To provide synchronous operation at speeds up to 64 kbps, one of the following optional circuit boards must be ordered:
■
■
Multipurpose Enhancement Board. Provides an RS-366
Automatic Calling Unit (ACU) interface and converts the
RS-232 interface on the main circuit board from asynchronous to synchronous. A V.35 adapter cable must be ordered separately to operate at data rates of 56 and
64 kbps. Without the adapter cable, data rates are limited to
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19,200 bps.
High-Speed Synchronous Interface Enhancement Board.
Provides a V.35 interface at synchronous data rates of 48, 56, or 64 kbps. A V.35 adapter cable that converts the 25-pin male connector on the board to the industry-standard 34-pin
V.35 interface is included.
3-58
Data Adapters
Installation
Data Module Features
The data module offers the following features:
Asynchronous Features
■
RS-232 interface
■
■ asynchronous full-duplex operation selected data rates of 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and
19,200 bps
■
■
■
■ data options set via the data terminal attached to the RS-232 interface ability to change options without dropping a data call
■ autobaud (also called data metering or speed matching), or the ability to adjust the speed of transmission to match the speed of the data terminal being called auto-adjust, or the ability to adjust to the speed and parity of the data terminal being used call setup (dialing) from the keyboard of an ASCII data terminal by using the local command (CMD) mode or AT mode
■ automatic or manual answering of incoming data calls
Synchronous Features with Multipurpose Enhancement
Board
■
RS-232 interface
■ half- or full-duplex operation using the RS-232 interface at data rates of 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19,200 using data transport Mode 2
■ half- or full-duplex operation at 56 kbps via the V.35 interface adapter cable
Data Adapters
3-59
Installation
■
■
■
■ full-duplex operation at 64 kbps via the V.35 interface adapter cable automatic answering of incoming data calls ability to place outgoing data calls manually and select userprogrammable telephone numbers from the data module display on the front panel
RS-366 interface to an Automatic Calling Unit (ACU)
■
■
Synchronous Features with High-Speed Synchronous
Enhancement Board
V.35 interface (The adapter cable is provided when the board is ordered by using PEC 21624.) full-duplex operation at 48, 56, and 64 kbps
■
■
■ half-duplex operation at 56 kbps only automatic answering of incoming data calls ability to place data calls manually and select userprogrammable telephone numbers from the data module display on the front panel
Installation
Various configurations are used on the ISDN 7500B Data
Module. Depending on the configuration, some equipment is required and some is optional.
Required Equipment
■
ISDN 7500B Data Module
■
WP90110,L1 power supply (for stand-alone)
■
D8W cord
■
EIA-232D cable(s) or V.35 cable
3-60
Data Adapters
Installation
Optional Equipment
■ multipurpose enhancement board
■ high-speed, synchronous enhancement board with V.35
adapter cable
■
440A4 terminating resistor adapter (needed when the 7500B is installed without an MLX telephone)
Installation Procedures
Follow the steps for the proper configuration to install the ISDN
7500B Data Module.
Stand-Alone, Single-Port Asynchronous DCE Configuration.
This configuration uses the basic ISDN 7500B Data Module (see
1.
Remove the 7500B from the box.
2.
Plug the D8W cord into the jack labeled LINE on the back of the 7500B.
3.
Plug the WP90110,L1 power supply cord into the connector labeled POWER on the 7500B.
4.
Plug the male end of the EIA-232D cable into the connector labeled PORT 1.
5.
Connect the other end of the EIA-232D cable to the data terminal.
6.
Plug the other end of the D8W cord into a telephone wall jack or into a 440A4 terminating resistor adapter (when the 7500B is installed without an MLX telephone).
7.
As necessary, plug the terminating resistor adapter into the wall jack.
8.
Plug the power cords of the WP90110,L1 power supply and the data terminal into an AC power outlet that is not controlled by a wall switch.
Data Adapters
3-61
Installation
Stand-Alone Asynchronous DTE Configuration.
Follow the steps below to configure the ISDN 7500B Data Module to work with a modem in a modem pool:
1.
Remove the 7500B from the box.
2.
Open the door panel on the 7500B.
a.
Insert a pen into the small hole near the LINE label on the back panel.
b.
Push in on the tab in the hole while you pull upon that side of the door.
c.
Repeat steps a and b for the other side of the door panel by sticking your pen into the small hole near the PORT 2 label.
d.
Lift off the door and set it aside.
3.
Looking straight down at the inside of the 7500B, locate the large silver arrow pointing toward the back.
This arrow points to the DCE/DTE flip board, which is perpendicular to the plane of the arrow.
4.
Look at the DCE/DTE flip board from the front of the 7500B
Either DTE or DCE will be in the left-hand corner of the board.
5.
Adjust the flip board as needed.
■
■
If DTE is in the left-hand corner of the board, the 7500B is already configured for DTE; go to step 6.
If DCE is in the left-hand corner of the board: a.
Grasp the flip board firmly with both hands.
b.
Pull up gently until the board is completely free.
c.
Turn the board around 180 degrees (DTE is in the lefthand corner.) d.
Replace the board in its slot.
3-62
Data Adapters
Installation
6.
Close the door panel by hooking the hinges under the front housing and then snapping the rear tabs into place.
7.
Plug the D8W cord into the jack labeled LINE.
8.
Plug the power supply cord into the connector labeled
POWER on the 7500B.
9.
Plug the male end of the EIA-232D cable into the connector labeled PORT 1.
10.
Connect the other end of the EIA-232D cable to the modem
(a male-to-male cord or a male-to-female cord with a gender changer is needed).
11.
Plug the power cord into an AC power outlet.
12.
Plug the D8W cord into a telephone wall jack.
Note: Before plugging the D8W cord into a wall jack, make sure you do not need the terminating resistor adapter. If you
need it, see "Terminating Resistor Adapter Installation" later in
this chapter.
Stand-Alone Multipurpose Enhancement DCE Configuration.
Follow the steps below to configure the 7500B for use with the multipurpose enhancement board to work with modems:
1. Remove the 7500B from its box or turn off the power on installed sets.
2. Remove the multipurpose enhancement board from its box.
3. Open the door panel on the 7500B.
a. Insert a pen into the small hole near the LINE label on the back panel.
b. Push in on the tab in the hole while you pull up on that side of the door.
Data Adapters
3-63
Installation c.
Repeat steps a and b for the other side of the door panel by sticking the pen into the small hole near the PORT 2 label.
d.
Lift off the door and set it aside.
4.
Remove the protective cover from the PORT 2 slot (see
a.
Hold the cover (the marked area) for the PORT 2 slot in one hand and the rest of the rear panel in the other.
b.
Gently move the cover back and forth until the cover separates from the rear panel.
c.
Discard the cover.
5.
Install the multipurpose enhancement board (see Figure 37).
a.
Holding the enhancement board with the EIA-232D connector pointed toward the back of the 7500B and with the component side down, position the board over the open area of the 7500B.
b.
Attach the pigtail connector to the pin between the power connector and the screw for the EIA-232D connector.
c.
Position the board so that its cutouts correspond to the notches in the plastic housing.
d.
Gently push on the board until it is firmly in place and the edges of the board rest on the notches in the housing.
6.
Close the door panel by hooking the hinges under the front housing and then snapping the rear tabs into place.
7.
Peel off the label indicating the EIA-232D interface from the enhancement board package and stick it to the rear panel under the PORT 2 connector.
8.
Plug the D8W cord into the jack labeled LINE.
9.
Plug the power supply cord for the 7500B into the connector labeled POWER.
3-64
Data Adapters
Installation
10.
Plug the male end of the EIA-232D cable into PORT 1.
11.
Connect the other end of the EIA-232D cable to the data terminal or computer port.
12.
If the automatic calling unit function is to be used, connect a
25-pin EIA cable between the RS-366 interface (PORT 2) and the computer’s RS-366 ACU interface.
13.
14.
Plug the power cord for the 7500B into the AC outlet.
Plug the D8W cord into the telephone wall jack.
Note: Before plugging the D8W cord into a wall jack, make sure you do not need the terminating resistor adapter. If you need it, see "Installing the Terminating Resistor Adapter" later in this chapter.
Stand-Alone, High-Speed, Synchronous DCE Configuration.
Follow the steps below to configure the ISDN 7500B Data
Module for high-speed, synchronous modem operation:
1.
Remove the 7500B from its box or turn off the power if the
7500B is already installed.
2.
Remove the high-speed, synchronous enhancement board from its box.
3.
Open the door panel on the 7500B.
a.
Insert a pen into the small hole near the LINE label on the back panel.
b.
Push in on the tab in the hole while you pull upon that side of the door.
c.
Repeat steps a and b for the other side of the door panel by sticking the pen into the small hole near the PORT 2 label.
d.
Lift off the door and set it aside.
Data Adapters
3-65
Installation
4.
Remove the protective cover from the PORT 2 slot (see
a.
Hold the cover (the marked area) for the PORT 2 slot in one hand and the rest of the rear panel in the other.
b.
Gently move the cover back and forth until the cover separates from the rear panel.
c.
Discard the cover.
5.
Install the high-speed, synchronous enhancement board (see
a.
Holding the enhancement board with the EIA-232D connector pointed toward the back of the 7500B and with the component side down, position the board over the open area of the 7500B.
b.
Attach the pigtail connector to the pin between the power connector and the screw for the EIA-232D connector.
c.
Position the board so that its cutouts correspond to the notches in the plastic housing.
d.
Gently push on the board until it is firmly in place and the edges of the board rest on the notches in the housing.
6.
Close the door panel by hooking the hinges under the front housing and then snapping the rear tabs into place.
7.
Plug the D8W cord into the jack labeled LINE.
8.
Plug the power supply cord for the 7500B into the connector labeled POWER.
9.
Connect a V.35 adapter cable (packaged with the enhancement board) to PORT 2.
10.
Connect a V.35 cable between the adapter and the V.35 data terminal.
11.
Plug the power cord into the AC outlet.
3-66
Data Adapters
Installation
12. Plug the D8W cord into the telephone wall jack.
Note: Before plugging the D8W cord into a wall jack, make sure you do not need the terminating resistor adapter. If you need it, see “Terminating Resistor Adapter Installation” below.
Terminating Resistor Adapter Installation
Connect a terminating resistor adapter to the D8W cord going to the wall jack if there is no MLX telephone connected to the ISDN
7500B Data Module. This adapter provides 100 ohms to terminate the line.
Modems
A modem is used at an analog data station to place and/or answer data calls. It converts the digital signals from the data terminal into analog signals for transmission over standard telephone lines. It also converts incoming analog signals to digital signals for acceptance by the data terminal.
Hardware Requirements
Most modems can be connected to the system. If a modem is used in a modem pool, a 2224G modem or its equivalent must
be used (see "Modem Pool" later in this chapter).
If you use a modem with an MLX telephone, install a Multi-
Function Module (MFM) in the telephone to provide a tip/ring interface for the modem. Connect the modem directly to the
MFM. If the modem is used with an analog multiline telephone, a
General Purpose Adapter is required to provide a tip/ring
interface for the modem. (See "Install the Multi-Function Module"
later in this chapter and "General Purpose Adapter" in Chapter 6
for more detailed information.)
Data Adapters
3-67
Installation
When a modem is connected to an MLX telephone using an
MFM, dial data calls using the data terminal keyboard and dial voice calls using the telephone dialpad. The MLX telephone cannot be used to dial data calls, and the data module cannot be used to dial voice calls. Each device operates independently, and features are assigned to each device independently.
When a modem is connected to an analog multiline telephone using a GPA, data calls and voice calls are dialed by using the telephone dialpad. The modem and telephone do not operate independently; features assigned to the telephone also apply to the analog data station (modem and associated data terminal).
Modem Features
The modem used in an analog data station (and not in a modem pool) provides the following features:
■ dialing or ending asynchronous data calls from the keyboard when connected to a tip/ring station jack on a 012 or 008 OPT module or when connected to an MLX telephone using an
MFM
■ autobaud (also called data metering or speed matching), or the ability to adjust the speed of transmission to match the speed of the data terminal being called
■ automatic or manual answering of incoming data calls
■ self-test and maintenance procedures
■ ability to set data options for the call an the keyboard and, if necessary, change the options without dropping the call
Modem Pool
A modem pool (also called a conversion resource) is made up of one or more pairings of an ISDN 7500B Data Module and a modem. The modem pool is used to convert data signals from digital to analog or to convert data signals from analog to digital.
3-68
Data Adapters
Installation
This allows data communications between digital data stations and analog data stations.
There are two types of modem pools:
■
Analog to Digital
converts analog signals to digital signals.
This allows analog data station users to communicate with inside digital station users or to place data calls using an outside digital ISDN-PRI facility. The modern is connected to the control unit by a basic station jack on a 012 module, and the ISDN 7500B Data Module is connected to the control unit by a digital station jack on a 008 MLX module. Data calls are placed to outside data stations through the control unit using system lines (outside ISDN-PRI facilities connected to the
DS1 line/trunk jack on a 100D module in the control unit).
■
Digital to Analog
converts digital signals to analog signals.
This allows digital data station users to communicate with inside analog data stations or to place data calls using the regular telephone network.
The modem is connected to the CU by a tip/ring jack on a
012 or 008 OPT module, and the ISDN 7500B Data Module is connected to the CU by a digital station jack on a 008 MLX module. Data calls are placed to outside data stations through the CU using system lines (outside tines/trunks connected to a line/trunk jack on a 400, 400 GS/LS/TTR 800,
800 GS/LS, 408, 408 GS/LS, 800 DID, or 400EM module in the CU.
Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog pools can also connect dedicated outside analog data lines to digital ports (008 MLX module) on the system.
Because of interfacing problems between the RS-232 on the modem with the RS-232 on the 7500B, modem pools can operate in one direction only—analog-to-digital or digital-toanalog.
Data Adapters
3-69
Installation
Hardware Requirements
A modem pool requires an ISDN 7500B Data Module(PEC2164-
BDM) and a 2224G modem or its equivalent. Since the 7500B in a modem pool operates without an MLX telephone, a 100-ohm
440A4 terminating resistor adapter (PEC 2709-A59) must be installed on the line near the 7500B.
The ISDN 7500B Data Module can be configured as a standalone by ordering a WP-90110-L1 power unit (PEC 21625). The
7500B can also be configured in a multiple-mount arrangement by ordering a Z77A data mounting (PEC 21626), which provides a common power supply for up to eight data modules. Both the power unit and the data mounting require a 115-VAC power outlet. Neither is provided with the data module, and both must be ordered separately.
The modem used in a modem pool must have the following features:
■ full-duplex operation
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
10-bit code support (start, 8 data bits, stop)
RS-232 asynchronous interface any or all of the following data rates: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600 bps supports DTMF dialing via the RS-232 interface ability to turn on or maintain the Clear-to-Send indicator when it is ready to receive ASCII dialing sequences from the data module in response to a Data-Terminal-Ready signal from the data module ability to keep the Data-Set-Ready lead on (and not turn it off) during transition from the interactive dialing mode to the data mode ability to terminate a data call or dialing sequence when the data module turns off its Data-Terminal-Ready lead
3-70
Data Adapters
Installation
■ ability to turn off the Data-Set-Ready or Receive-Line-Signal detect lead for a minimum of 50 ms when hanging up at the termination of a data call
■ ability to turn on the Ring indicator lead for at least 100 ms in the presence of an incoming analog call
■ supports Electronic Industries Association (EIA) signals CI and CI2 if the modem is multispeed
Note: AT&T model 2224G (PEC 2224-CEO for stand-alone, PEC
2224-GED for rack-mounting arrangement) is recommended.
Option Settings Requirements
The options set on a modem and a data module in a modem pool differ depending on whether the modem pool is digital-toanalog or analog-to-digital.
Following are the options required for the modem and data module for each type of modem pool. See the user manuals provided with the modem and the ISDN 7500B Data Module for instructions on how the options are set and the meaning of each option.
Digital-to-Analog Modem Pool Option Settings
Data Module Option Settings.
Use the following procedure to prepare the ISDN 7500B Data Module for operation in a digitalto-analog modem pool:
1. Use the instructions provided in the 7500B user manual to set the DCE/DTE flip board to the DTE position.
2. Use the front panel controls on the 7500B to set the options
on the display (see Table 3-28). See the ISDN 7500B Data
Module user’s manual for detailed information on using the front panel controls and the meaning for each option.
Data Adapters
3-71
Installation
Table 3-28 ISDN 7500B Data Module Option Settings for
Digital-to-Analog Modem Pool Operation
Position No.:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
L 1 : 3 3 3 0 0 0 b 0 0 1 0 1 1
L 2 :
0 1 1 1 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 0 b = blank, L = Line #
Modem Option Settings.
The following procedure is one method to prepare the AT&T model 2224G modem for operation in a digital-to-analog modem pool. The procedure is only a recommended method and may be different if you are using another type of modem.
1.
Connect a data terminal such as a PC to the modem and plug both the modem and data terminal into an AC outlet.
2.
Use the instructions provided with the modem to set all bitswitches to their default positions; except set the switch 1, bit 2 to the right.
3.
Save all bit-switch settings by unplugging the modem from the wall outlet and then plugging it back in.
4.
Set the data terminal speed to match the modem’s default speed.
5.
The modem is now operating in the AT&T command protocol.
Set the default software options:
■
Type "od"
■
Press Enter
6.
Set all bit-switches according to Table 3-29.
3-72
Data Adapters
Installation
7. Unplug the modem from the wall outlet; then plug it back in.
Set switch 1, bit 2 to the left. This stores the switch settings in the modem’s memory, and the modem is now operating in the
AT command protocol.
Table 3-29 Modem Option Setting for Digital-to-Analog
Modem Pool Operation
Bit Number
Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 L R L R R R L L
2
3
L
D
R
D
L
D
L
D
L
U
L
U
L
D
L
D
4 D D D
U
D
U
D
U
U
D
D
D
D
D
5
7
U D on on
L = left, R = right, U = up, D = down
8. Enter command mode, set the options, and save the options into protected memory to prevent loss of settings in case of a power failure:
■
Type "AT" and press Enter to enter the local mode.
■
Type "AT&D2" and press Enter. Option set: drop call when
DTR low.
■
Type "AT&C1" and press Enter. Option set: data carrier detect follow call.
■
Type "ATS0=1" and press Enter. Option set: Auto Answer.
Data Adapters
3-73
Installation
■
■
Type "ATQ0" and press Enter. Option set: enable result codes (factory setting).
Type "AT&W" and press Enter to write options to protected memory.
Analog-to-Digital Modem Pool Option Settings
Data Module Option Settings.
Use the following procedure to prepare the ISDN 7500B Data Module for operation in an analogto-digital modem pool:
1.
Use the instructions provided in the 7500B user manual to set the DCE/DTE flip board to the DTE position.
2.
Use the front panel controls on the 7500B data module to set the options on the display (see Table 3-30). See the ISDN
7500B Data Module user’s manual for detailed information on using the front panel controls and the meaning for each option.
Table 3-30 ISDN 7500B Data Module Option Settings for
Analog-to-Digital Modem Pool Operation
Position No.: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
L 1 : 3 3 3 0 1 0 b 0 0 1 0 1 0
L 2 : 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 3
1 0 0 0 0 b= blank, L = Line #
Modem Option Settings.
The following procedure is one method to prepare the AT&T model 2224G modem for operation in an analog-to-digital modem pool. This procedure is only a recommended method and may be different if you are using another type of modem.
1. Connect a data terminal such as a PC to the modem and plug both the modem and data terminal into an AC outlet.
3-74
Data Adapters
Installation
2.
Use the instructions provided with the modem to set all bitswitches to their default positions; except set the switch 1, bit 2 to the right.
3.
Save all bit-switch settings by unplugging the modem from the wall outlet then plugging it back in.
4.
Set the data terminal speed to match the modem's default speed.
5.
The modem is now operating in the AT&T command protocol.
Set the default software options:
■
Type "od"
■
Press Enter.
6.
Set all bit-switches according to Table 3-31.
Table 3-31 Modem Option Setting for Analog-to-Digital
Modem Pool Operation
Switch 1 2 3
Bit Number
4 5 6 7 8
1
2
3
4
L
L
D
R
R
D
D D
U
5 D
7 on on
L = Ieft, R = right, U = up, D = down
L
L
D
D
U
R
L
D
D
U
R
L
U
D
U
R
L
U
U
D
L
L
D
D
D
D
D
L
L
D
Data Adapters
3-75
Installation
7.
Unplug the modem from the wall outlet; then plug it back in.
Set switch 1, bit 2 to the left. This stores the switch settings in the modem’s memory, and the modem is now operating in the
AT command protocol.
8.
Enter command mode, set the options, and save the options into protected memory to prevent loss of settings in case of a power failure:
■
Type “AT” and press Enter to enter the local mode.
■
Type “AT&D2” and press Enter. Option set: drop call when
DTR low.
■
Type “AT&C1” and press Enter. Option set: data carrier detect follow call.
■
Type “ATS0=1” and press Enter. Option set: Auto Answer.
■
Type “ATQ1” and press Enter. Option set: disable result codes.
■
Type “AT&W” and press Enter to write options to protected memory.
3-76
Data Adapters
Installation
System Wiring
System wiring involves two installations:
■ connecting the network interface to the control unit (CU)
■ connecting the CU to the stations
On the network interface side, the method of connection depends on the type of network interface that is installed.
On the station side, the method of connection depends on the number of stations; 24 stations and under uses direct connection, while over 24 stations requires building a crossconnect field.
The recommended options for building the wiring field on the station side are Interconnect Wire, a complete wiring kit that uses
110 jack-panel blocks, a template, wiring troughs, D-rings, and
D8W cords; or SYSTIMAX, a complete wiring kit containing 110 termination blocks with modular jacks, a 110A field-termination block, a template, wiring troughs, D-rings, and patch cords.
CAUTION:
To avoid coupling power supply noise onto system wiring, allow at least 3 inches of clearance between the basic carrier’s power supply and any wiring or termination hardware located left of the CU.
Note: While there are many ways to connect the network interface to the CU and the CU to the stations, the methods shown here are the recommended ones.
System Wiring
3-77
Installation
WARNING:
National and local building codes specify the type of cable required for telecommunication wiring. For example, indoor wiring (DIW) cable cannot be used inside or on top of air plenums or ducts, along hot pipes, or across walkways.
Consult your local ordinances and regulations for proper cable selection.
If staples are used to attach the cords to walls or baseboards, check that the cords have not been pierced. Also, do not run CO lines from the network interface to the CU if the distance is greater than 25 feet.
Connect the Network Interface to the CU
The local telephone company installs the network interface for the CO lines. Before you install the system, verify that the network interface is the proper type and that it is located within
25 feet of the CU. The adapter needed to connect the CO lines to the CU depends on the type of network interface, as shown in
CAUTION:
To avoid coupling power supply noise onto system wiring, allow at least 3 inches of clearance between the basic carrier’s power supply and any wiring or termination hardware located left of the CU.
3-78
System Wiring
Installation
Table 3-32 Network Interfaces
Network
Interface Description
RJ11-type Connects one outside ground-start (GS), loopstart (LS), or Direct
Inward Dialing (DID) line/trunk to one modular jack
RJ14-type
RJ21X
RJ2GX
RJ48C/X
Adapter
Connects two outside lines/trunks to one modular jack (GS, LS, and DID)
50-pin connector connects 25 outside lines/trunks (GS, LS, and DID)
2-line adapter (267Ctype)
110AB1 jack-panel block
50-pin connector for up
356A for eight tie trunks to eight tie trunks
259A for one tie trunk
Connects DS1 facilities
Z601A if modular cords to a 4-pair jack (two are used active pairs)
After installing the adapter, label each jack going to the CU with the CO line number. Use the list provided by the local telephone company or the planning form(s) for outside lines/trunks as a reference.
You may also need to know the interface codes for network
facilities. These codes are shown below in Table 3-33 by trunk
type and adapter type.
System Wiring
3-79
Installation
Table 3-33 CO Network Interface Codes
Line/
Federal Interface
Trunk Type Code for Facility
Network
Interface
LS CO line 02LS2
RJ11C, RJ14C
RJ21
GS CO trunk
DID
OPS
Tie trunk
02GS2
02RV2-T
0L13C
TL31M
RJ11C, RJ14C,
RJ21
RJ11C, RJ14C,
RJ21
RJ11C
RJ2GX
DS1 04DU9-B
04DU9-C
RJ48C/X*
* The preferred network interface is the RJ48X. With the RJ48X interface, if no connection is provided by the customer’s equipment, the T1 facility’s receive pair is looped back to the transmit pair. This simplifies troubleshooting the T1 facility.
In most installations, the network interface is connected through a cross-connect field to the CU. However, for systems with fewer than 24 stations, the line/trunk wires can be directly connected to the CU.
Note: When constructing wiring fields between the network interface and the CU, you must order hardware as individual parts. Do not use Interconnect Wiring or SYSTIMAX kits.
3-80
System Wiring
Installation
RJ21X Interface
The RJ21X interface has a female 50-pin (25-pair) amphenol
connector (see Figure 38). To connect the RJ21 X interface to the
CU, you must build a wiring field between the RJ21X interface and the CU. This field, in effect, converts the female amphenol connector to 8-wire modular jacks.
Building the Wiring Field
Build the wiring field between the network interface and the CU by using 110AB1-100JP12 terminal blocks with modular jacks and associated hardware. Use the hardware and procedure below to build this wiring field.
■
110AB1-100JP12 termination blocks with modular jacks
■
110A1 wire troughs
■
D-rings
■
D2R cords
■
D-impact tool
■ spudger
■ hand tools
Procedure
Follow these steps to connect the RJ21X network interface to the
CU:
1. Drill two diagonally opposite holes in a suitable backboard
(plywood is recommended) for each piece of hardware. Keep a 1/16-inch space between each piece of hardware.
System Wiring
3-81
Installation
2.
Mount the wire troughs and the termination blocks. There is a wire trough above and below each termination block.
3.
If necessary, repeat steps 1 and 2 for a second column.
4.
Run the 25-pair amphenol cable on the RJ21X interface to the termination blocks. If more length is needed, an A25D maleconnector, single-ended, 25-pair, non-plenum cable can be used.
5.
As needed, mount D-rings to properly dress the wires.
6.
Cut off the amphenol connector on the cross-connect field side and strip the wires for each of the 25 pairs.
7.
Punch down the 25-pair wires to the termination block.
a.
Route the wires through the fanning slots on the termination block.
b.
Insert the conductors into the designated 110 connecting blocks already on the termination block.
c.
Use the D-impact tool to seat the conductors (see
d.
Remove any insulation fragments with a spudger.
8.
Test the CO lines for proper connection (see "Testing CO
Lines/Trunks" in this chapter).
9.
10.
Label the network interface jacks, CU module jacks,
termination blocks, and D2R cords properly (see “Labeling
CO Lines/Trunks” in this chapter).
For each line/trunk, plug one end of a D2R cord into the designated jack on the termination block and the other end into the line/trunk jack on the proper CU module.
Note: The modular jacks on the termination block are 8-wire jacks. The D2R cords are only 6-wire cords, but they will plug into the 8-wire jacks.
3-82
System Wiring
Installation
CAUTION:
Do not plug an analog multiline telephone, an MLX telephone, or anything else from the station side of the CU into this wiring field on the CO side. Doing so will busy-out the line/trunk.
RJ11 and RJ14 Interfaces
The RJ11 and RJ14 interfaces are connected in nearly identical ways, but the RJ11 interface connects one CO line per jack, while the RJ14 interface connects two lines per jack. Plug a
267C-type adapter into each RJ14 jack (see Figure 38).
Hardware
■
D2R cords
Procedure
Follow these steps to connect the RJ11 and RJ14 network interfaces to the CU.
1.
Test the CO lines for proper connection (see “Testing CO
Lines/Trunks” in this chapter).
2.
Label the network interface jacks, the CU module jacks, and
the D2R cords properly (see “Labeling CO Lines/Trunks” in
this chapter).
3.
4.
Plug one end of a D2R cord into the jack at the network interface and the other end into the appropriate line/trunk jack on the CU.
Dress the wires properly.
System Wiring
3-83
Installation
RJ2GX Interface
The RJ2GX interface is a 25-pair amphenol connector that interfaces up to eight tie trunks. You construct the cross-connect
field in the same way as for the RJ21X interface (see “RJ21X
Interface” earlier in this chapter).
Note: RJ21X and RJ2GX interfaces do not require separate termination blocks. If there is room on the termination block for the line wires, both the RJ21X and the RJ2GX can be punched down on the same 110AB1-100JP12 block. Any wires not used are left unterminated.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to connect tie trunks to GS, LS, or DID ports and vice versa. Since all the jacks on the termination block are 8-wire jacks, it is possible to accidentally interchange tie-trunk wires with GS, LS, or DID wires.
RJ48C/X Interface
The
RJ48C/X interface terminates a
DS1 line at the customer’s premises. Both RJ48C and RJ48X interfaces have 8-wire modular jacks. However, the RJ48X interface includes shorting bars that loop the T1 facility’s receive pair to the transmit pair.
This helps in testing the T1 facility from the CO.
Testing CO Lines/Trunks
Before connecting the CO lines/trunks to the CU, you must verify that a dial tone is being received and that you can dial out on every line.
Note: DID trunks can be tested only through the CU; do not test
DID trunks at this time.
3-84
System Wiring
Installation
CAUTION:
Do not use analog multiline telephones or MLX telephones for testing. They do not work for these tests and can be damaged if you use them for this purpose.
Test Loop-Start Lines/Trunks
To perform this test, you need a single-line telephone or an installer’s test telephone (craft set). (If you are installing rotary dial lines/trunks, you should perform this test with a rotary telephone.)
1.
Plug the telephone or the craft set into each CO line jack
(either at the network interface or at the cross-connect field) and listen for a dial tone.
2.
If you find a CO line that does not have a dial tone, check for a bad adapter or loose connections.
3.
If adapters and wiring are in working order but you still don’t hear a dial tone, notify the customer.
4.
If you hear a dial tone, dial a known telephone number to verify dialing. Also check that you have good two-way transmission after the CO completes the connection.
5.
If outward dialing is not possible on any of the lines, notify the customer.
Note: It is the customer’s responsibility to report service outages to the local telephone company.
Test Ground-Start Lines/Trunks
To perform this test, you need a single-line telephone with a ground key.
Note: If a single-line telephone with a ground key is not available, ground one side of a line/trunk.
1. Plug the single-line telephone into each CO line jack (either at the network interface or at the cross-connect field).
System Wiring
3-85
Installation
2.
Ground the ring lead by pushing the ground key or by grounding one side of the line/trunk.
3.
Pick up the handset.
You should hear a dial tone.
4.
Remove the ground from the ring lead.
5.
Dial a known telephone number to verify dialing. Also check that you have good two-way transmission after the CO completes the connection.
6.
If you find a CO line that does not have a dial tone, check for a bad adapter or loose connections.
7.
If adapters and wiring are in working order but you still don’t hear a dial tone, notify the customer.
8.
If outward dialing is not possible on any of the lines, notify the customer.
Note: It is the customer’s responsibility to report service outages to the local telephone company.
Labeling CO Lines/Trunks
You can have up to 80 CO line jacks on the communications system (01 to 80). Follow the procedure in this chapter to label each D2R or D8W cord, network interface jack, and CU module jack.
Procedure
1.
Review the system planning forms to determine each CO line assignment on the CU.
2.
Place a green cord label (packaged with the basic carrier) at each end of every D2R or D8W cord. The green label indicates the number of the CO line jack to which the cord is connected.
3-86
System Wiring
Installation
3. Label the jacks on the termination blocks.
4. Leave a copy of the CO line assignment planning form in a secure spot near the CU.
Connect the CU to the Stations
The following recommended methods of wiring the system from the CU to the stations are divided according to the number of stations: 24 stations and under, and over 24 stations.
CAUTION:
To avoid coupling power supply noise onto system wiring, allow at least 3 inches of clearance between the basic carrier’s power supply and any wiring or termination hardware located left of the CU.
Note: You must record each station jack connection and each station change on the “System Technician’s Run Sheet” (see
24 Stations and Under
For a system with up to
24 stations, direct wiring is recommended. To do this, plug in one end of a DIW cord into the station jack on the CU module and connect the other end to the
103/104 wall jack of the station.
■
DIW cords
■
Unicon plug
■ cable ties
■
4-pair plug presser
System Wiring
3-87
Installation
Procedure
1.
Run the DIW cord from the CU to the station and cut it. Allow enough slack for dressing the wire.
2.
Attach a Unicon plug to the CU end of the DIW cord by using the 4-pair plug presser.
3.
Plug the DIW cord into the CU and connect the other end to
the station jack (see “Terminating Cable at a Station Outlet” in
this chapter).
4.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each station line.
5.
Dress the wires properly by using cable ties. Fasten wire runs vertically to the left or right of the CU. The final horizontal wire run to the CU must be fastened within 12 inches of the CU.
Allow sufficient slack to reach any port on the CU.
6.
Label the CU module jacks, station jacks, and DIW cords
properly (see “Label the System Wiring” in this chapter).
Over 24 Stations
For systems with more than 24 stations, the two recommended methods are Interconnect Wiring and SYSTIMAX.
Interconnect Wiring
Interconnect Wiring is required when the system has more than
24 stations and SYSTIMAX has not been ordered. The
Interconnect Wiring module provides the hardware to interconnect up to 12 stations with 110-type wiring.
For Interconnect Wiring, you must build a jack field between the
CU and the stations by using 110AB1-100JP12 termination blocks with modular jacks and 110A1 wire troughs.
3-88
System Wiring
Installation
Hardware
Each kit includes:
■ instructions and parts sheet
■
110AB1-100JP12 termination blocks with modular jacks
■
110A1 wire troughs
■
D-rings
■
D8W cords
■
D-impact tool
■ spudger
■ hand tools
Procedure
1.
Drill two diagonally opposite holes in a suitable backboard
(plywood is recommended) for each piece of hardware. Keep a 1/16-inch space between each piece of hardware.
2.
Mount the wire troughs and the termination blocks. There is a wire trough above each termination block.
3.
If necessary, repeat steps 1 and 2 for a second column.
4.
Mount the termination blocks and terminate the station cable.
If the station cable is bottom feed, start at the top and work down. If the station cable is top feed, start at the bottom and work up.
a.
Mount a termination block to the wall with appropriate fasteners.
b.
Strip the jacket off the 4-pair DIW station wires, exposing the conductors.
c.
Punch down the station wires to the termination block.
System Wiring
3-89
Installation
(1) Route the station wires underneath the termination block and through the fanning slots.
(2) Insert the conductors into the designated 110 connecting blocks already on the termination block.
Follow the color sequence shown in Figure 43.
(3) Use the D-impact tool to seat the conductors (see
(4) Remove any insulation fragments with a spudger.
d.
Repeat steps a through c above for each termination block.
5.
Mount the wire troughs.
6.
As needed, mount the D-rings.
7.
Label the D8W cords, termination blocks, and DIW cords
properly (see "Label the System Wiring" in this chapter).
8.
Plug one end of a D8W cord into the station jack on the CU module and the other end into the designated jack on the termination block. Do this for all stations.
9.
Dress the wires through the wire troughs and D-rings (see
SYSTIMAX
SYSTIMAX is a wiring method that uses kits containing all the hardware you need to build a cross-connect field between the
CU and the station jack.
CAUTION:
To avoid coupling power supply noise onto system wiring, allow at least 3 inches of clearance between the basic carrier’s power supply and any wiring or termination hardware located left of the CU.
3-90
System Wiring
Installation
With each kit you can build up to 24 jacks. The maximum number of stations on the system is 144 and would require six kits.
Hardware (see Figures 39 and 42)
Each kit includes:
■ instructions and parts sheet
■
■ template two 110AB1-100JP12 termination blocks with modular jacks
■
■
■
■
■ one 110AB1-100FT field-terminated block
110A1 wire troughs
D-rings
110P8A5B patch cords
D8W cords
Tools
■
D-impact tool
■
788J1 impact tool
■ spudger
■ hand tools
System Wiring
3-91
Installation
Procedure
1.
Locate the proper wall space. The cross-connect field will usually be to the right of the CU. Leave enough space between the CU and the cross-connect field to allow for system growth.
2.
Attach the template to the wall or backboard with a staple gun, tacks, or tape. Make sure that the upper edge of the template outline is 70 inches above the floor and that the
template is parallel to the floor (see Figure 45).
3.
Find the placement of the hardware on the template (see
Figure 46). The first and third columns on the template show
where the termination blocks go; the middle column shows the place for the field-terminated blocks.
Keep the elements of a kit in the same-colored blocks. For example, the termination blocks of kit #1 go in the green section of column 1; the field-terminated block of kit #1 goes in the green section of column 2.
4.
Drill two diagonally opposite holes for each piece of hardware. You can drill right through the template (see
Figure 47). There is a 1/16-inch space between the outline of
each piece of hardware; keep this space as you mount the hardware.
5.
Remove the template from the wall. Keep it in one piece so you can check it for correct placement of the hardware.
6.
Mount the wire troughs and termination blocks on columns 1 and 3 as needed.
7.
Mount the field-terminated blocks on column 2 and terminate the station cable. If the station cable is bottom feed, start at the top and work down. If the station cable is top feed, start at the bottom and work up. In either case, work on one fieldterminated block at a time.
a. Run the station cable underneath the field-terminated block.
3-92
System Wiring
Installation
b.
Strip 12 inches of jacketing off the cable, exposing the conductors.
c.
Press the conductors into the index strip on the fieldterminated block according to the color sequence shown
in Figure 43. Make sure each pair keeps its twist up to the
index strip. (Each pair is split by a raised tooth on the index strip.) d.
Use the 788J1 impact tool to seat and trim the conductors
(see Figure 48). Make sure the blade edge is positioned
properly: blade up for rows 1 and 3, blade down for rows 2 and 4.
e.
Continue seating and trimming conductors from left to right for each row.
f.
Note: The last two right-hand slots must remain vacant.
Reverse the blade edge on the 788J1 impact tool and use the tool to seat the connecting blocks on each index strip
(see Figure 49). Make sure the slate strip on each
connecting block is facing down.
8.
As shown on the template, mount the wire troughs on column 2 after all the field-terminated blocks have been wired.
9.
Mount the D-rings between the columns as needed to dress the patch cords.
10.
Plug one end of a D8W cord into the proper CU module station jack and the other end into the corresponding jack on the D8W cords.
11.
Dress the D8W cords through the wire trough above the
termination block (see Figure 44).
as needed to dress the cords.
System Wiring
3 - 9 3
Installation
12.
information (such as extension numbers and users’ names) on the strip labels provided and snap the designation strips into place.
13.
Use the 110P8A5B patch cords to connect termination blocks
to field-terminated blocks (see Figure 50). Properly dress the
patch cords through the wire troughs and D-rings.
Wire a Telephone for Two Voice-
Pairs
If an analog telephone requires either the Voice Announce to
Busy feature or the Simultaneous Voice and Data feature, you must assign two adjacent odd/even station jacks (01 and 02, 13 and
14, etc.) on an analog station module to that telephone. The numbers of these station jacks are boxed on the planning forms.
Two voice-pairs (one pair from each jack) must be connected
from the CU to the telephone (see Figure 51 ). A bridging adapter
is used to connect both voice-pairs to the telephone.
Note: In Figure 51, the wire from station jack 39 connects to the
jack labeled EVEN on the bridging adapter. The label on the bridging adapter refers to the default intercom number, which does not necessarily match the station jack number in terms of odd and even. Odd/even wiring refers to jack numbers, not intercom numbers.
Terminate Cable at a Station Outlet
There are many kinds of station outlets, which are fundamentally all the same. Some are wall-mounted, affixed directly onto a wall surface, and others are flush-mounted, where the jacks are located inside a wall housed in a regular electrical box. On the workstation side, a cord plugs into the jack; on the closet side, the 4-pair wire is hardwired to the outlet.
3-94
System Wiring
Installation
Following is one method to use when connecting 4-pair wire to a wall-mounted station outlet. You should be able to adapt the method used to join 4-pair wire to flush-mounted outlets.
Note: In some cases the electrical boxes will already be mounted; in others the installer must do the job. In either case, the box should be installed before the wire is terminated on the outlet.
1.
Take the outlet apart by first unscrewing the screw that holds the sections together; then pull off the termination clips.
2.
Pull out a few feet of slack from the wall.
3.
Use diagonal pliers to strip 3 to 4 inches off the end of the
4-pair wire.
4.
Thread the conductors through a hole in the base of the outlet.
5.
Press the wires into appropriate slots on the outlet (see
6.
Use diagonal pliers to clip off the ends of the conductors.
7.
Press the clips back on over the wires (see Figure 52).
8.
Strip off the protective paper from the adhesive strips and press them onto the back of the outlet.
9.
Press the outlet onto the wall.
10.
As further security, also screw the outlet to the wall.
11.
Screw the parts of the outlet together.
System Wiring
3-95
Installation
Label the System Wiring
If done correctly, labeling can provide valuable information about the location of wire or cable within the building and save hours of frustrating work.
■
There are five types of labels used for identification:
Cable labels. Cable labels are white adhesive-backed tabs that are stuck to the cables to identify the source and the destination of the cables before they are pulled to and terminated in satellite closets and equipment rooms. The labels come in a variety of shapes and sizes to accommodate different sizes of cable. Use a pen or a felt-tip marker to write on the surface.
■
■
Field labels. Field labels are adhesive-backed tabs that are applied to smooth surfaces in the equipment room and satellite closets. They identify components. Use a pen or a felt-tip marker to write on them.
Insert labels. Insert labels are cardboard-like strips that slip inside the clear plastic designation strips located between the rows of a termination or field-terminated wiring block. They are color-coded to identify the origins of cables.
■
■
Along with the color-coding scheme, alphanumeric codes on the labels help to identify the specific location of the same pair or series of pairs at the other end of the cable (see
Jack labels. Jack labels are small, white, rectangular-shaped stick-on tabs that are stuck to the cover plate or housing of station outlets. They identify the location of the satellite closet where the cable to that outlet is terminated and the number of the circuit.
Station cord labels. The blue station cord labels are packaged with the CU carriers and wrap around each end of the station cords leaving the CU.
3-96
System Wiring
Installation
Table 3-34 Insert Labels
Color
Light blue
What It Identifies Special Features
4-pair cable originating at The fourth pair of the 4station outlets in offices pair cable to MLX or other locations stations is reserved for supplying power to one
DSS at an operator console.
White Various types of riser
(house) or campus cable connections
Gray
Closet letter and circuit number
Used with 25-pair tie cables that link large riser closets and smaller satellite closets or two riser/satellite closets
Green CO pairs
Purple
Yellow
System-common equipment, such as a
PBX or a data switch
Auxiliary circuits arranged in
3-pair modularity
Used only on the line/trunk or auxiliary field in the equipment room
Usually supplied with the system-common equipment
For auxiliary circuits not arranged in 3-pair modularity, use blank labels. If a system has customized labels for the auxiliary system, use them.
System Wiring
3-97
Installation
Table 3-34 Continued
Color What It Identifies
Orange Connections from transmission electronics equipment, such as multiplexer or concentrators
Special Features
Supplied by the equipment manufacturers
Labeling 4-Pair Wire and Outlets
It doesn’t matter whether you pull the 4-pair wire from the station to the CU or from the CU to the station.
In either case, mark one end of the
4-pair wire with the location or destination of the other end.
Note: In the following procedure, it is assumed you are pulling from the station to the
CU.
1.
If you have not already received labeling instructions from the designer of your system, assign a number to each jack on the floor.
2.
Put the boxes of wire near the offices (and jacks) to which they have been assigned.
3.
Mark the end of each 4-pair wire with the number of the jack to which the wire has been assigned.
4.
Mark the box with the letter of the closet to which the 4-pair is pulled and with the circuit number of the wire. This is the same as the number you wrote on the wire sheath. Wire 1 becomes circuit 1; wire 2 becomes circuit 2.
5.
At the boxes next to the offices, pull out enough wire to reach the wall jacks. Allow plenty of slack. Cut the wire and mark the end of the 4-pair wire with the closet letter and the circuit number.
3-98
System Wiring
Installation
6.
After you pull the wire into the office or work area and fish it through the wall opening for the wall jack, transfer the information to the faceplate of the jack itself. If you’ve done the job correctly, you should now have the correct closet letter and circuit number of the wire on the jack.
7.
When the 4-pair wire reaches the CU cross-connect field, punch down the pairs in the sequence they are labeled on the sheath.
8.
On the blue labels designed for the 110-type field-terminated block, add any necessary information. With preprinted labels, you add only the floor number. With blank labels, you also have to write in the closet letter and the number from the wire sheath.
If no labeling exists, simply assign a different number to each
4-pair wire and write that number on both the box and the wire end. Anyone who comes after you will find both ends of the wire labeled with the same unique number and should be able to proceed accordingly.
Checking Poorly Labeled Wiring
If you don’t understand the labeling system used or a label is missing or damaged, use a tone device and a telephone handset to match like wires.
Hardware
■ tone device
■ telephone handset
■ telephone cord with an 8-pin modular plug
■
4-pair patch cord
Tools
■ diagonal pliers or wire strippers
System Wiring
3-99
Installation
Procedure
1.
Insert the 8-pin plug of the telephone cord into an outlet on the floor area.
2.
Using diagonal pliers or wire strippers, cut off the end of the telephone cord to expose the pairs.
3.
Choose a single pair and untwist the wires.
4.
Extending from the bottom of the tone device are two clips.
Attach one wire of the pair you have chosen to one of the clips and the other wire to the other clip.
5.
Turn on the switch on the outside of the tone device. You will hear a high-pitched, alternating signal.
6.
Take the telephone handset and a 4-pair patch cord to the cross-connect field between the CU and the station.
7.
Go to the blue field on the cross-connect field and, starting at the top left corner, push the patch cord onto the first connecting block.
8.
Using the diagonal pliers or wire strippers, cutoff the other end of the patch cord and expose the pairs. Don’t cut off too much of the cord because you’ll need the length to test the top rows of the cross-connect field.
9.
The handset also has two clips with “teeth” that extend from its base. Attach the clip of the handset to the exposed wires of the patch cord. Set the switch on the side of the handset to
MONITOR.
10.
Listen in the handset for the tone device signal.
11.
If you hear the signal, you have found the correct wires.
Correctly label both the cross-connect field and the outlet.
12.
If you don’t hear the signal, remove the patch cord from the connecting block and push the patch cord down onto the connecting block to the right of the one just tested. Keep moving the patch cord to the next connector block on the right until you find the pairs that carry the tone device signal.
3-100
System Wiring
Installation
Remove Damaged Connecting
Blocks
In some cases, a connecting block can become damaged and must be removed.
Procedure
1.
Remove the wires or the patch cord from the connecting block.
■
With interconnect wiring, remove the station wires with long-nosed pliers and tag the wires with tape to identify their position.
■
With SYSTIMAX, pull off the patch cord.
2.
Place a 788K1 retainer tool against the conductor pairs beneath the connecting block to be removed.
3.
Grip the connecting block in the center with pliers. Move the
block gently up and down and pull it out (see Figure 53).
4.
If a conductor wire is accidentally pulled from a block, pull it with the long-nosed pliers to get some slack. Use your fingers to lay the conductor wire back in its slot in the index strip.
Reseat it with the D-impact tool.
5.
Seat the new connecting block by using the 788J1 impact
6.
Replace the station wire onto the connecting block.
■
With interconnect wiring, remove the tag from the station wires and reseat the wires by using the D-impact tool.
■
With SYSTIMAX, attach the patch cord to the connecting block.
System Wiring
3-101
Installation
IROB Protection
Equipment connected to the analog multiline telephone station jacks (on the 008, 408, and 408 GS/LS/TTR modules) or to the
MU telephone jacks (on the 008 MLX module) that is located in a different building from but within 1000 cable feet of the CU requires IROB (in-range out-of-building) protection units. These
IROBS protect the equipment and the CU from lightning strikes and power surges. Two units are required for each piece of equipment — one for the CU end of the wire run, the other for the equipment end.
Note: No 012 basic telephone modules can be used in IROB applications.
Use the following IROB protectors:
■
TII Model 343 (PEC 32918) for analog multiline telephones
■
AT&T Model 505A (PEC 32919) for MLX telephones and
WARNING:
The IROB protectors must be installed by an AT&T service technician, or an authorized representative, or a qualified installer. For installation instructions, read the CIB that comes with the IROB protector.
Make sure each IROB protector is properly connected and is grounded to an approved building ground.
Note: The 505A IROB protector contains fused primary and secondary protection for two pairs of wires. Auxiliary power cannot be fed through the 505A protector to terminal equipment.
3-102
IROB Protection
Installation
Telephones and Consoles
The telephone system supports the MLX-10,™ MLX-10D,™
MLX-20L,™ and MLX-28™ telephones (see Figures 5–8), as well
as analog multiline and single-line telephones.
The following describes how to install the MLX telephones and consoles, the Multi-Function Module, and the Direct Station
Selector.
Install the Multi-Function Module
The Multi-Function Module (MFM) is an optional adapter for connecting tip/ring (T/R) or supplemental alert devices to any
MLX telephone. If you are installing an MFM, do it before you install the MLX telephone.
The MFM provides a modular jack connection for
■
T/R devices such as single-line telephones, fax machines, modems, credit card verification terminals, cordless telephones, and answering machines. The MLX telephone and the adjunct that is connected to the MFM are independent and can place and receive calls at the same time. The MFM is the only T/R adapter used with the MLX telephones.
■ supplemental alerts such as bells, chimes, horns, and strobes. These alerts notify people in noisy areas of incoming calls.
The MFM is set for T/R devices or for supplemental alerts by two jumper blocks preset at the factory for T/R operation.
The MFM comes with the following (see Figure 56):
■ a KS22911,L2 power supply
■ a 400B or 400B2 adapter
Telephones and Consoles
3-103
Installation
■ a D6AP cord
Before installing the MFM, consider the following:
■
The KS22911,L2 power supply must be connected to an electrical outlet that is within 50 feet of cord length of the MLX telephone.
■
If you are connecting an MFM and two Direct Station
Selectors (DSSs) to the telephone, a 329A power unit is required. (The 329A power unit must be ordered separately.)
■
A longer D8W telephone cord is required if the wall jack is more than 7 feet from the MLX telephone.
Note: The MFM uses one of the two B channels when it is active.
This means that when an accessory, such as a fax machine, and the MLX telephone are in use at the same time, Voice Announce to Busy is not possible. (Voice Announce to Busy is a feature that allows users to be paged on the speakerphone even if they are on a call.)
Procedure
WARNING:
Before installing the MFM, disconnect all cords (line and/or power) attached to the MLX telephone. This is to ensure that no hazardous voltages are present during assembly.
Ringing voltage from the MFM attached to the MLX telephone can cause electrical shock if adjustments are made while the cords (line and/or power) are connected.
Follow these steps to install and replace an MFM and change its pin settings.
1. Remove the user card tray from the bottom of the desk stand on the telephone.
3-104
Telephones and Consoles
Installation
2. Remove the desk stand and the module cover (see
Note: To install or replace an MFM in a previously wallmounted MLX-10 or MLX-10D telephone, go to step 2c.
a. Place the telephone face down on a flat surface. Press on the top rear center of the stand to release the tab.
b. Pull the stand toward you and away from the telephone.
c. Use a screwdriver to remove the screw in the lower righthand corner of the module cover.
d. Press the center of the right side of the module cover with one hand and lift the cover to remove it.
3. Remove an existing MFM (see Figure 58).
Note: If the telephone does not have an existing MFM, go to step
4.
To reset the jumpers on an existing
MFM, go to step 5.
a. Locate the MFM locking tabs on the top and bottom of the telephone. Spread these tabs apart to release the MFM.
b. Grasp the MFM by the edges and pull it toward you to free the connector pins. Do not touch the connector pins. Set the MFM aside on a clean surface.
4. Install a new MFM (see Figure 58).
a. Hold the MFM circuit board by the edges with the long connector pins facing the underside of the telephone.
b. Taking care not to touch the connector pins, push down on the MFM board so that the connector pins are inserted into the socket in the telephone.
c. Press firmly to lock the tabs in place. The connector pins and tabs must be secure.
Telephones and Consoles
3-105
Installation
5. As needed, adjust the jumper settings for T/R operation or for
a supplemental alert device (see Figure 59).
a. Pull the connectors off.
b. Push the connectors down over the appropriate pins.
6. Replace the module cover.
a.
If the module cover has a square jack guard that protects the TEL/OTHER jack area, grasp and twist the guard to
Note: Save the jack guard if you are wall mounting an
MLX-10 or MLX-10D telephone.
b.
There are locking tabs on both sides of the module cover and a screwpost on the right side of the telephone. Place the tab in the slot on the left side of the telephone.
c.
Lower the cover to the right and press firmly to lock the tabs in place. Both tabs must be secure.
d.
Replace and tighten the screw you removed earlier.
7. Replace the desk stand and the user card tray.
Note: If you are wall mounting an MlX-10 or MLX-10D telephone, do not replace the desk stand. Go to step 8.
a.
The desk stand has two height adjustments. Insert the tab at the bottom of the stand in either the low or high position.
b.
Insert the tab at the top of the stand into the corresponding slot on the desk telephone. To readjust the stand, see the instructions on the bottom of the card tray.
3-106
Telephones and Consoles
Installation
8. Connect the telephone (see Figure 61 ).
a.
Plug the D8W cord from the telephone into the 8conductor (large) modular jack of the 400B or 400B2 adapter.
b.
Connect one end of the D6AP cord to the 2-conductor
(small) modular jack on the 400B or 400B2 adapter, and plug the other end into the modular jack of the
KS22911,L2 power supply. The total length of the cords connecting the power supply to the MLX telephone must be less than or equal to 50 feet.
CAUTION:
Plugging the D6AP cord into the 8-conductor (large) modular jack on the 400B or 400B2 adapter can cause electrical damage to the control unit and the telephone.
c.
Plug the power supply into a 117-VAC outlet not controlled by a wall switch.
d.
Insert the plug end of the 400B or 400B2 adapter into the wall jack.
9.
Test the MFM for T/R operation by using the directions in
Test the MLX Telephones with an MFM in this chapter.
10.
Attach the adjunct (see Figure 62).
a.
Insert one end of the cord supplied with the adjunct into the jack labeled TEL/OTHER on the back of the telephone.
b.
Route the adjunct and D8W telephone cords through the cord channel.
c.
Test the adjunct by dialing its extension.
Note: See Appendix B for a list of approved adjuncts.
Telephones and Consoles
3-107
Installation
Attach the Direct Station Selector
The Direct Station Selector (DSS) is an optional piece of telephone equipment. One or two DSSs can be connected to an
MLX-28D or MLX-20L telephone.
Note: Connect the DSS(s) before you install the MLX telephones.
Before installing the DSS, consider the following:
■
Auxiliary power is required when
■ an MLX telephone (with or without an MFM) has two DSSs attached. Use a 329A power unit (must be ordered separately).
■
■ an MLX telephone has one DSS and one MFM attached.
Use the KS22911,L2 power unit, 400B adapter, and D6AP cord provided with the MFM.
two MLX telephones are on the same carrier, each with one DSS attached. Use a KS22911,L2 power unit, 400B adapter, and D6AP cord for any additional stations with
DSSs; these can be ordered separately but are also provided with an MFM.
When additional CU carrier power is required and the system is backed up by an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), the
Auxiliary Power Unit 9024 should also be connected to this
UPS.
The total length of cords between the KS22911,L2 or 329A power supply and the MLX telephone can be no more than
50 feet.
Improper operation can result if the 2-foot D8AC cord
(packaged with the DSS) is replaced with a longer cord.
3-108
Telephones and Consoles
Installation
Procedure
Note: If you are connecting two DSSs to the telephone, unpack the second DSS now.
1. Adjust the angle
The DSS is packed fully assembled with the desk stand in the low position. If you prefer the low position, go to step 2. To adjust the angle of the DSS to the high position, place the
DSS face down on a flat surface and follow these steps: a. Press on the top rear center of the stand to release the tab. Pull the stand toward you and away from the DSS.
b. To adjust the stand to the high position, insert the tab at the bottom of the stand into the other slot.
c. Lower the stand and press the tab at the top into the corresponding slot on the DSS.
2. Install the D8AC cord on the DSS (see Figure 63).
a.
There are two jacks on the DSS labeled IN and OUT. Plug one end of the D8AC cord into the jack labeled IN.
b.
Route the D8AC cord through the cord channel on the left side of the DSS.
■
If you are installing one DSS, go to step
4.
■
If you are installing two DSSs, repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second DSS; then go to step 3.
3. Wire the two DSSs (see Figure 63).
a. Place the two DSSs side by side and face down.
b. Route the D8AC cord from the IN jack of the second DSS
(DSS2) through the cord channel of the first DSS (DSS1).
c. Plug this D8AC cord into the jack labeled OUT on DSS1.
4. Wire the telephone to the DSS(s) (see Figure 63).
Telephones and Consoles
3-109
Installation a. With the handset removed from the telephone, place the telephone face down on a flat surface to the right of the upside-down DSS(s).
b. Plug the D8AC cord from the IN jack of the DSS1 into the jack labeled DSS on the telephone, and route the cord through the cord channel.
c. Plug the D8W line cord into the jack labeled LINE of the
MLX telephone. The D8AC and D8W cords share the cord channel on the telephone.
5. Turn the telephone and the DSS(s) face up with the telephone now to the left of the DSS(s).
6. Insert one end of the coiled H4DU handset cord into the handset and the other end into the jack on the side of the telephone.
Notes:
■
If auxiliary power is not required, go to step 7.
■
If auxiliary power is required, go to step 8.
7. Connect the telephone (auxiliary power is not required) by plugging the D8W cord into the wall jack. Go to step 9.
8. Connect the telephone (auxiliary power is required; see
a. Plug the D8W cord from the telephone into the 8conductor modular jack of the 400B or 400B2 adapter.
b. Connect one end of the D6AP cord to the 2-conductor
(small) modular jack of the 400B or 400B2 adapter, and plug the other end of the D6AP cord into the modular jack of the KS22911,L2 or 329A power supply.
CAUTION:
Plugging the D6AP cord into the 8-conductor (large) modular jack of the 400B or 400B2 adapter can cause electrical damage to the control unit and the telephone.
3-110
Telephones and Consoles
Installation c. Insert the plug end of the 400B or 400B2 adapter into the wall jack.
d. Plug-the power supply into a 117-VAC outlet.
Note: The combined total length of the D6AP and D8W cords can be no more than 50 feet.
9. Label the DSS designation cards.
a.
Pull the tab at the top of the large plastic cover and rotate the cover toward you.
b.
Remove the cover and the large designation card.
c.
Write or type the button assignments on the card. For the
DSS1, use the side of the large card that is labeled 00 through 49. For the DSS2, use the side labeled 50 through
99.
Note: The button assignments on the designation card should be by extension number, not by logical ID port number.
d.
Replace the card and the plastic cover. Be sure the coated side of the cover is facing up.
e.
Repeat these steps to remove the small plastic cover and to label the small designation card.
Note:
If the MLX telephone to which the DSS is attached is unplugged from the CU and then again plugged into the CU, the display on the telephone may disappear. Press the Home button to bring back the display.
Telephones and Consoles
3-111
Installation
Assemble the MLX Telephone or
Console
Before installing an MLX telephone or console, consider the following:
■
A 630B Phonemount (not included) is required to mount an
MLX-10 or MLX-10D telephone to the wall.
■
To connect an adjunct, you must first have a Multi-Function
Module (MFM). (Adjuncts include answering machines, alerts, and fax machines.) If you are installing an MFM, do it now by
using the procedure in “Install the Multi-Function Module”
earlier in this chapter. After the MFM is installed, go to step 1.
Procedure
1.
Remove or adjust the desk stand (see Figure 57).
MLX telephones are packed fully assembled with the desk stand in the low position. The angle of any MLX desk telephone can be adjusted to the high position. If you are wall mounting an MLX-10 or MLX-10D telephone, you must first remove the desk stand. To remove the desk stand or adjust its angle, place the telephone face down on a flat surface and follow these steps: a.
Press on the top rear center of the stand to release the tab(s). Pull the stand toward you and away from the telephone.
Note: If you have removed the stand to wall mount an
MLX-10 or MLX-10D telephone, set the stand aside and go to step 2.
b.
To adjust the stand to the high position, insert the tab(s) at the bottom of the stand into the slot(s).
3-112
Telephones and Consoles
Installation c. Lower the stand and press the tab(s) at the top into the corresponding slot(s) on the telephone.
Note: The diagram on the bottom of the user card tray also shows the steps to adjust the stand.
2. Connect the line cords (see Figure 62).
a.
Plug one end of the D8W cord into the telephone jack labeled LINE on the underside of the telephone.
b.
Route the D8W cord through the cord channel on the back of the telephone.
c.
If the telephone is for desktop use, turn the desk telephone face up and plug the D8W cord into the wall jack.
3. Install the handset by inserting one end of the coiled H4DU handset cord into the handset and the other end into the jack on the side of the telephone.
4.
Label the extension identification card (see Figure 64).
a.
Insert a straightened paper clip into the hole on the side of the plastic cover while holding your finger on the opposite edge. Use the paper clip to push and lift the cover.
b.
Type or write the assigned extension number on the card.
Notes:
■
If you are mounting an MLX-10 or MLX-10D wall telephone,
go to step 5.
■
If you are assembling a desk telephone, go to step 6.
5. Prepare the handset holder for wall mounting (see Figure 64).
a. Remove the handset holder by pushing it up and pulling it out.
b. Rotate the handset holder 180° and replace it in its slot.
Telephones and Consoles
3-113
Installation
6. Replace the extension identification card and plastic cover by inserting one end into the slot and bending the cover to snap the other end into place.
Notes:
■
If you are mounting an MLX-10 or MLX-10D wall telephone, go to step 7.
■
If you are assembling a desk telephone, go to step 8.
7. Mount an MLX-10 or MLX-10D wall telephone.
a.
Turn over the telephone and remove the jack guard from the TEL/OTHER jack area. Set the telephone aside.
b.
Unpack the 630B Phonemount and remove the modular jack from the backplate.
c.
Route the cord (DIW or D8W) through the hole in the backplate and have it exit at the top of the backplate, leaving 10 inches of cord to connect the telephone (see
d.
Attach the backplate to the wall by using the instructions provided with the 630B Phonemount.
e.
Insert the two short screws provided with the Phonemount
into the mounting plate (see Figure 65). Be sure to thread
the upper screw through the jack guard.
f.
Plug the free end of the cord into the jack labeled LINE on the back of the telephone. Route the cord through the
cord channel above the jack (see Figure 62).
g.
Position the telephone on the mounting plate mounting studs and then slide the telephone down to lock it in place.
To remove the telephone, slide it up and off (see
3-114
Telephones and Consoles
Installation
8. Label the button assignment card.
a. Pull the tab at the top of the plastic cover toward you.
b. Type or write the button assignments on the card.
c. Replace the card and the plastic cover. Be sure the textured side of the cover is facing you.
9. Adjust the contrast on the telephone’s display.
■
MLX-20L. Slide the lever on the top of the telephone.
■
MLX-10D and MLX-28D. Follow the directions in the user’s guide for the appropriate MLX telephone.
Telephones and Consoles
3-115
Installation
System Acceptance Test
Once the system has been installed and initialized, it is ready for acceptance testing. Test all lines/trunks, telephones, and features to ensure they are working correctly. If any equipment is
not working correctly, see Chapter 5, “Maintenance.”
Test the MLX Telephones
The switch-based software test described in this chapter verifies that the LEDs, ringer, buttons, switchhook, and B-channel operation on the MLX telephones are working correctly. This test cannot be run when the telephone is in program, forced-idle, or maintenance mode. When an MLX telephone is in the test mode, it is considered busy and therefore not available for use.
If you hang up during any of these procedures, you are automatically taken out of the test mode.
Follow these steps to test the basic features of an MLX telephone:
1.
Pick up the handset of the telephone being tested and push an Intercom button (Key or Behind Switch mode) or a System
Access button (Hybrid/PBX mode). After receiving a dial tone, dial
∗00 to activate the test mode.
You should hear a steady test tone over the handset and a ring burst over the speaker. The telephone’s red and green
LEDs should be on.
2.
To test the line buttons, press any line button with two LEDs.
The diagnostic tone should stop, and the LEDs for that button should go off.
3.
Press the same line button repeatedly to toggle between the green and red LEDs.
3-116
System Acceptance Test
Installation
4.
To test a fixed-feature button with one LED, press the button.
The Feature and HFAI LEDs should go off. The first press of the Speaker button should turn off the Mute LED. The second press of the Speaker button should turn off the
Speaker LED.
Note: If the Mute button has been pressed before the
Speaker button, the Mute LED cannot be turned off; it will wink.
5.
Press the fixed-feature buttons repeatedly to toggle the LEDs on and off.
6.
To test the red Message light, press either a fixed-feature button without an LED (such as Transfer or Drop) or any dialpad button.
The Message LED should go off.
7.
Press the fixed-feature or dialpad button repeatedly to toggle the Message LED on and off.
8.
Hang up the handset to leave test mode.
Test the MLX Telephones with a
Display
While the telephone is in the test mode, follow these steps to test the display buttons:
1.
Press the labeled display buttons (Home, Menu, lnspct, and
More).
The display should spell out these button labels.
2.
Press the unlabeled display buttons.
The display should spell out
Display Button
and the number of the button pressed (1 - 4).
System Acceptance Test
3-117
Installation
Test the MLX Telephones with an
M F M
Test a MLX telephone with an MFM installed and configured for a
T/R adapter. Follow these steps to check the proper channel operation and the MFM circuitry for the TTR, the ring generator, and the message LED:
1.
2.
Connect a known working 2500-type single-line telephone with a message light to the MFM adapter. The 2500 telephone must also have a mechanical ringer.
Pick up the handset on the 2500 telephone and dial
∗09 after receiving the dial tone.
You should receive another dial tone.
3.
4.
Press any button to deactivate the test tone.
Dial the following sequence of numbers:
123456789∗0# and press the switchhook quickly.
You should receive a confirmation tone.
5.
Hang up.
The CU should send a ring burst, and the message LED on the 2500 telephone should go on.
6.
Turn off the message LED by dialing the appropriate code number.
Test the Telephones for Intercom
Dial Tone
Follow these steps to test for intercom dial tone:
1. Press the Intercom or System Access button (depending on the mode of operation).
The red LED next to this button should go on.
2. Press the Speaker button.
3-118
System Acceptance Test
Installation
The green LED next to the red LED on the intercom or System
Access button should go on, you should hear an intercom dial tone, and the green LED next to the Speaker button should go on.
3.
Press the Speaker button again to disconnect the Intercom or
System Access button.
The red and green LEDs next to the Intercom or System
Access button should go off, the green LED next to the
Speaker button should go off and the dial tone should stop.
Test the Telephones for Outside Line
Dial Tone
Follow these steps to test for an outside line dial tone:
1.
Without lifting the handset, press a line button.
The red LED next to this button should go on.
2.
Pick up the handset or press the Speaker button.
The green LED next to the red LED at the line button should go on, and you should hear a dial tone.
3.
Hang up as needed and repeat steps 1 and 2 for each line button on the telephone.
Test the Analog Multiline and Single-
Line Telephones
Follow these steps to test the basic functioning of analog telephones:
1.
If you are at a multiline telephone, press the Intercom or
System Access button.
2.
Pick up the handset.
You should hear a dial tone.
System Acceptance Test
3-119
Installation
3.
Dial the extension number of another working telephone.
You should hear ringback at the calling telephone and ringing at the called telephone.
4.
At the called telephone, have someone pickup the handset; verify that you have good two-way communication.
5.
At both telephones, hang up.
6.
If you are at a multiline telephone, press an outside line button or the System Access button.
7.
Pick up the handset.
You should hear a dial tone.
8.
If you are using an System Access button, dial the dial-out code.
9.
Dial one of the numbers assigned to the telephone you want to answer the call.
You should hear ringback at the calling telephone and ringing at the answering telephone.
10.
Have someone pick up the handset at the answering telephone; verify that you have good two-way communication.
11.
At both telephones, hang up.
12.
If the station is toll restricted, place a toll call.
You should hear a reorder tone.
Test the Ground-Start and Loop-
Start Lines/Trunks
Follow these steps to test the GS and LS outgoing and incoming lines/trunks at a telephone:
1. Dial
∗03 followed by the line/trunk ID number (01-80).
3-120
System Acceptance Test
Installation
You should hear a dial tone for a working line/trunk, a reorder tone for a DID trunk or an invalid line/trunk number, or a busy tone if the Iine/trunk is in use.
Note: Dialing
∗03 on a single-line telephone works only if the line/trunk accepts touch-tone dialing. After you dial
∗ 03 on a single-line telephone, you may have to wait for a “click” before dialing the line/trunk number.
2.
Repeat for all outgoing lines/trunks.
3.
Dial an incoming line/trunk on the system.
4.
Have someone answer the call at another telephone; verify that you have good two-way communication.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all incoming lines/trunks.
6.
Hang up to exit the test mode.
Test the DID Trunks
Follow these steps to test the DID trunks:
1.
Pick up the handset at the test terminal. Dial
∗03 and then dial a DID number.
You should hear ringback at the calling telephone and should hear ringing and see the green LED turn on at the called telephone.
Note: Dialing
∗03 on a single-line telephone works only if the line/trunk accepts touch-tone dialing. After you dial
∗03 on a single-line telephone, you may have to wait for a “click” before dialing the line/trunk number.
2.
Have someone pick up the handset on the called telephone; verify that you have good two-way communication.
3.
At the calling telephone, put the call on hold. Have the person at the called telephone keep the call active by either placing it on hold or laying the handset down.
System Acceptance Test
3-121
Installation
4. Call all the DID numbers by repeating steps 1 through 3.
Note: If there are not enough dial-out trunks, work with the
CO to check all the DID trunks or have someone call from the outside to check each DID trunk.
5. Hang up all the telephones used in this test.
Note: Before making the following tie-trunk tests, make sure that the tie trunks for the system are connected and properly configured.
Test the Incoming Tie Trunks
Follow these steps to make sure the incoming tie trunks work:
1.
At the far-end tie-trunk site, have someone pickup the handset and access a tie trunk assigned to a button on your telephone.
Your telephone should ring, and the green LED next to the tietrunk button should flash.
Note: To test a dial-repeating tie trunk, have the person at the far-end tie-trunk site dial a system extension number. (No dialing is required to test an automatic incoming tie trunk.)
2.
Pick up your handset and verify that you have good two-way communication.
3.
At your telephone and the distant telephone, hang up.
4.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all incoming tie trunks.
3-122
System Acceptance Test
Installation
Test Outgoing and Two-Way
Automatic-Start Tie Trunks
Before testing outgoing or two-way automatic-start tie trunks, have someone ready to receive your call at the receiving telephone. Follow these steps:
1.
At any telephone that has access to an automatic-start tie trunk, press the first tie-trunk button.
The red LED next to the tie-trunk button just pressed goes on.
Note: In Hybrid/PBX systems with Pooled tie trunks Press the
System Access button and dial the pool dial-out code.
2.
Pick up the handset.
The green LED goes on next to the red LED at the tie-trunk button, and you hear ringing.
3.
When the person answers, verify that you have good two-way communication and hang up.
4.
Repeat this procedure for each automatic-start tie trunk administered.
Test the Outgoing and Two-Way
Dial-Repeating Tie Trunks
Test dial-repeating tie trunks (wink-start, immediate-start, and delay-start) when you are sure that someone can receive your call at the far end. Follow these steps:
1.
At any telephone that has access to a dial-repeating tie trunk, press the first tie-trunk button.
The red LED next to the pressed tie-trunk button goes on.
Note: In Hybrid/PBX systems with pooled tie trunks, press the
System Access button and dial the pool dial-out code.
2.
Pick up the handset.
System Acceptance Test
3-123
Installation
The green LED next to the red LED at the tie-trunk button goes on.
3.
Dial the tie-trunk number of the station where someone is waiting for your call.
You hear ringing.
4.
When the person answers, verify that you have good two-way communication and hang up.
5.
Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each tie trunk administered.
Test The Incoming and Two-Way
Automatic-Start Tie Trunks
Follow these steps to test incoming and two-way automatic-start tie trunks:
1.
At a preset time, have someone at the far-end tie-trunk site place a call to your telephone by dialing the proper tie-trunk number.
You hear ringing at the telephone connected to the tie trunk, and the green LED next to the tie-trunk button flashes.
2.
Pick up the handset.
The red LED next to the tie-trunk button goes on, and the
green LED becomes steady.
3.
Verify that you have good two-way communication and hang up.
4.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each tie trunk administered.
3-124
System Acceptance Test
Installation
Test the Incoming and Two-Way
Dial-Repeating Tie Trunks
Follow these steps to test the dial-repeating tie trunks:
1.
At a preset time, have a person at the far end place a dialrepeating call to your telephone by dialing the proper tie-trunk number.
Your telephone rings, button flashes.
and the green LED next to the tie-trunk
2.
Pick up the handset.
The red LED next to the tie-trunk button goes on, and the green LED becomes steady.
3.
Verify that you have good two-way communication and hang up.
4.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each tie trunk administered.
Test the Dial Access Codes
Follow these steps to test the dial access codes:
1. Verify the proper operation of each feature requiring a dial access code:
■
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
■
Group Calling
■
Group Page
■
Listed Directory Number (the QCC queue)
■
Park
■
Pools
■
Remote Access
2. If any feature is not working properly, check the system programming translations.
System Acceptance Test
3-125
Installation
Test the System Features
You can test these system features from an MLX telephone or an analog multiline telephone:
■
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
■
Coverage
■
Group Calling
■
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
■
System Speed Dial
Note: You can also use a single-line telephone to test all of these features except for Coverage.
ARS and SMDR Tests
If ARS patterns have been translated, you can test the routing by placing toll calls and checking the line/trunk indicated on the
SMDR printout.
Follow these steps to verify ARS patterns:
1.
Determine which toll numbers to call by examining the system administrator’s ARS patterns.
2.
At any multiline telephone, pickup the handset, dial the ARS access code, and dial one of the toll numbers. Make sure that the call is completed before hanging up.
3.
Repeat step 2 for any additional toll numbers.
4.
At the SMDR printer, verify that the call was placed over the correct line/trunk group and check the number of seconds before the call is reported on the SMDR printout. If there are errors, check the translations.
3-126
System Acceptance Test
Installation
Group Calling Test
Follow these steps to test the Group Calling feature:
1.
At any telephone, pickup the handset, dial the CO line/trunk access code, and dial a calling group listed directory number.
2.
At the ringing telephone in the calling group, have someone pick up the handset; verify that you have good two-way communication.
3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each calling group.
4.
Make additional calls to check each member of each calling group.
5.
Test the calling group delay announcement (if provided) by making the whole group busy or by logging out all members of the group.
6.
At any telephone, dial the calling access code and repeat step 2.
System Speed Dial Test
Follow these steps to test System Speed Dial:
1.
From the test telephone, determine which numbers have been translated for System Speed Dial. (Get the list of translated numbers from the system manager.)
2.
Pick up the handset and dial a System Speed Dial code.
Verify that you have good two-way communication and that the correct party was reached.
Coverage Test
Follow these steps to test Coverage:
1. Have someone call the covered telephone.
System Acceptance Test
3-127
Installation
2.
Count the number of rings that occur at the covered telephone before the covering telephone starts ringing. This should be the same as the programmed number of rings.
3.
Pick up the handset at the covering telephone and verify that you have good two-way communication.
4.
Hang up at the covering telephone.
5.
Check both individual and group coverage.
Test the Operator Console
Testing the operator console, whether it is analog or digital, is the same as testing an MLX telephone, except for testing the console’s unique feature buttons. Follow these steps to test the operator console:
1.
Pick up the handset of the telephone being tested and push an Intercom button (Key or Behind Switch mode) or an
System Access button (Hybrid/PBX mode). After receiving the intercom dial tone, dial
∗00 to activate the test mode.
You should hear a steady test tone over the handset and a ring burst over the speaker. The telephone’s red and green
LEDs should be on.
2.
To test the line buttons, press any line button with two LEDs.
The diagnostic tone should stop, and the LEDs for that button should go off.
3.
Press the same line button repeatedly to toggle the green and red LEDs on and off.
4.
To test a fixed-feature button with one LED, press the button.
The Feature and HFAI LEDs should go off. The first press of the Speaker button should turn off the Mute LED. The second press of the Speaker button should turn off the
Speaker LED.
3-128
System Acceptance Test
Installation
Note: If the Mute button has been pressed before the
Speaker button, the Mute LED cannot be turned off; it will wink.
5.
Press the fixed-feature buttons repeatedly to toggle the LEDs on and off.
6.
To test the red Message light, press either a fixed-feature button without an LED (such as Transfer or Drop) or any dialpad button.
The Message LED should go off.
7.
Press the fixed-feature or dialpad button repeatedly to toggle the Message LED on and off.
8.
Verify that all features are working properly.
9.
If any features are not working properly, verify the translations through system programming.
Test the DSS
At each Direct Station Selector (DSS), check that all lights are operational. Using the DSS, call a telephone in the system. Test that the page buttons on the DSS work properly.
Test the Night Service
Follow these steps to test the Night Service feature on the system operator console:
1. At the system operator console, press the Night Service button. If the Night Service with Outward Restriction option is programmed, enter the assigned password after pressing the
Night Service button.
The Night Service LED goes on.
Note: Night Service on a DLC can also be activated by pressing the Feature button and dialing 39.
System Acceptance Test
3-129
Installation
2.
Pick up the handset and press a button for any outside line/trunk. Dial the CO line/trunk access code and the number of a CO line/trunk that receives Night Service coverage.
3.
Verify that the telephones assigned to the Night Service group are ringing.
4.
Have someone pick up the handset at a telephone in the
Night Service group; verify that you have good two-way communication.
5.
At both telephones, hang up.
6.
Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each Night Service Iine/trunk.
7.
Test telephones that have been programmed for Night
Service with Outward Restriction.
a. Pick up a handset on a restricted telephone and verify that outside calls are not allowed.
b. Using the password, make an outside call.
(1) Hang up the handset.
(2) Press the Recall button and dial the password.
Note: On an MLX telephone without a programmed Recall button, press the Feature button and dial 775 and the password before picking up the handset.
(3) Pick up the handset and make an outside call.
(4) Verify that you have good two-way communication and hang up.
8.
At the operator console, press the Night Service button again and verify that the Night Service LED goes off.
3-130
System Acceptance Test
Installation
Test the Dictation System Access
Place a call to verify that the dictation equipment can be accessed. If dictation equipment has not been installed, this feature cannot be tested.
1.
At the test telephone, pickup the handset.
2.
Dial the access code and the number associated with the dictation equipment.
3.
Verify that the ready tone is being transmitted.
4.
Test the transmission in both directions. Make a recording and play it back.
5.
Hang up.
Test
the Paging Interface
Note: If testing ZoneMate* 9 paging equipment (used with
PagePac
†
20), get an acknowledge tone. Then dial the zone code and make an announcement.
Follow these steps to test the paging interface:
1.
Pick up the handset at the test telephone and dial the access code or extension number for a particular zone.
You may hear a confirmation tone.
2.
Make an announcement into the handset.
You should hear the announcement from the loudspeaker(s).
3.
Hang up.
4.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all paging zones provided.
* Trademark of Dracon, a division of Harris Corporation.
†
Registered trademark of Dracon, a division of Harris Corporation.
System Acceptance Test
3-131
Installation
Test Music-on-Hold
Follow these steps to verify that music is provided to outside callers placed on hold. Inside callers do not receive Music-on-
Hold (MOH).
1.
Pickup the handset at the test telephone. Dial the CO line/trunk access code and the system’s listed directory number, or if you are using the DID trunk, dial any station.
2.
At the called station, answer the incoming call.
3.
At the called station, press Hold.
The line button’s green LED should flash.
4.
Verify that music is heard at the calling telephone.
5.
Hang up.
Note: If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials, you may be required to obtain a copyright license and pay license fees from a third party such as the
American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI). Or you can purchase a
Magic on Hold
® system, which does not require you to obtain such a license, from AT&T or your authorized representative.
Test the PFT Jacks
To test a power failure transfer (PFT) jack for proper operation, the outside line numbers to the module’s line/trunk jacks must be assigned and the lines/trunks must be operational. Also, a PFT
telephone on a GS line must have a GS button (see Figure 66)
attached to the telephone. Follow these steps to test the PFT jacks:
1. Plug a touch-tone or rotary dial telephone into a PFT jack.
3-132
System Acceptance Test
Installation
2.
Note the outside line number assigned to the lowest-position line/trunk jack on the module and be sure that the outside line/trunk is connected to the system.
3.
Turn off power to the CU, first at the power supply module on the basic carrier and then at the power supply module on each expansion carrier.
4.
If the telephone is connected to a GS trunk, push the GS button attached to the telephone.
5.
Pick up the handset on the touch-tone or rotary dial telephone.
You should hear a dial tone.
6.
If the telephone is connected to a GS trunk, again push the
GS button attached to the telephone.
7.
Dial an outside number where you know someone will answer the call.
8.
After the call is answered and you have verified that you have good two-way communication, tell the person the telephone number assigned to the outside-line jack bridged by the PFT jack to which you are connected.
9.
Have that person call the number after you hang up.
Your phone should ring after the other person completes dialing the number.
10.
Answer the phone and verify that you have good two-way communication before disconnecting.
11.
Note: Test all PFT jacks (by repeating steps 1 through 10 for each jack) before going to step 11.
Turn the power back on, first at each expansion carrier and then at the basic carrier.
System Acceptance Test
3-133
Installation
Test the Touch-Tone Receivers
Four touch-tone receivers (TTRs) are system resources available on each 400, 400 GS/LS, and 800 DID module. The 008 OPT and
012 basic telephone modules also provide two TTRs per module for system use. Follow these steps to test the TTRs:
1.
At a single-line telephone connected to a 012 or 008 OPT module, pick up the handset. Dial
∗04 and the 2-digit number
(starting with 01) of the TTR to be tested.
You should hear a busy tone if the receiver is in use or a
reorder tone if you misdialed or addressed a receiver not in your system (for example, you dialed 07 and your system has only a 012 module and one 400 module for a total of six
TTRs). Try again.
2.
if you hear a dial tone after one to three seconds of silence, proceed with this test.
Dial the digits
123456789∗0#.
You should hear a dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) signal as each button is pressed. After all the digits are dialed, you should hear a dial tone.
3.
Repeat the test for each TTR.
3-134
System Acceptance Test
Programming
Procedures
4
System Programming
Two types of equipment are used to program and maintain the system:
■
■
System Programming Console, an MLX-20L telephone
connected to the station jack assigned for system programming. The factory setting is the first jack on the first
008 MLX module in the control unit. The jack is also factoryset as the operator position.
If system programming or maintenance activities interfere with call handling, the system programming assignment can be changed to any of the first five jacks on the first 008 MLX module.
Personal Computer (PC) with System Programming
and Maintenance (SPM), a PC connected to the system programming and maintenance port (the lower RS-232 jack) on the processing module for on-site system programming and maintenance. Remote system programming and maintenance uses the built-in 1200-bps modem assigned to two fixed time-division multiplexed (TDM) time slots.
System Programming
4 - 1
Programming Procedures
●
Remote System Programming
To program with a PC with SPM from a remote location, place a data call using the instructions provided with the modem.
1. You can establish the data connection with the built-in modem in one of the following ways:
■
■
Call the system on a Remote Access line, enter the barrier code, and dial the code for the internal modem
(∗10)
Call the system on a regular line and ask the system operator to transfer you to the internal modem
■
Call the remote location (such as the National Service
Assistance Center) from the system and then transfer the call to the internal modem
2. When a connection is made with the system modem, use the following instructions to enter and exit system programming.
4-2
System Programming
Programming Procedures
Entering and Exiting System
Programming
Entering System Programming
Once the system programming console or PC is connected directly to the control unit (CU) or you have established a remote connection using a PC with a modem, follow these steps to enter system programming.
Step
1. Display main menu
Console
Menu
PC
SPM
Press any key
2. Select System
Programming
3. Display System
Programming menu
Sys Program
Exit
F1
F5
Exiting System Programming
Step Console PC
■
To return to the main menu from any screen
Menu
Exit
F5
■
To return to the main menu from the System
Programming menu
■
To exit system programming completely and return to normal activities
Home Home
System Programming
4-3
Programming Procedures
SPM Main Menu Options
Table 4-1 SPM Main Menu Options
Sys Program
Enter system programming and configure the system as shown on the planning forms for the system.
Backup
Boards
Save a backup copy of the system’s programming either on a floppy diskette or on the hard disk.
Determine which modules (port boards) are in each slot of the CU.
Print-Opts
Maint Mode
Restore
Set up the options for the printer used for
Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR) and connected to the SMDR
port. See “Installation” chapter for details.
The AT&T systems technician or authorized dealer uses this function for maintenance tests that ensure the hardware and software of the system are operating correctly.
Restore the system’s programming from a floppy diskette or from a file stored on the hard disk.
4-4
System Programming
Programming Procedures
Table 4-1 Continued
Pass-Thru
This option is used when the system configuration includes the Integrated
Solution II (IS II) application. It is used by
AT&T’s NSAC or an AT&T authorized dealer to establish a remote connection from a computer at their location to the
IS II computer connected to the system.
Password
Change the password.
Each option on the System Programming menu is described below.
Table 4-2 System Programming Menu Options
System
Set system operating conditions.
SysRenumber
Operator
LinesTrunk
Extensions
Replace the factory settings for the system numbering scheme with 1- to 4digit number that are more meaningful for the customer's business or more convenient for telephone users.
Program features for the operator positions.
Program line or trunk options
Program features for telephones (such as restrictions or line assignments).
Options
Program system-wide features (such as
Transfer Return or Delay Ring).
System Programming
4-5
Programming Procedures
Table 4-2 Continued
Tables
Program features that require entering information in a table (such as Allowed
Lists or Disallowed Lists).
AuxEquip
NightSrvce
Program auxiliary equipment connected to the system (such as an answering machine or a fax).
Program Night Service features.
Labeling
Data
Program the labels shown on display telephones (such as Public Directoy or
Posted Messages).
Specify telephones that require
Simultaneous Voice and Data capability.
Cntrl Prog
Exit
Print system programming reports (such as system configuration or extension assignments).
Perform centralized telephone programming (assign features to specific buttons on telephones).
Exit system programming.
4-6
System Programming
Programming Procedures
System Programming Screens
The console display area shows three types of system programming screens:
■
menu selection screen — allows you to select from several options on the menu.
■
informational screens — provide information about what is currently programmed on the system. You cannot make changes to these screens.
■
data entry screens — allow you to enter specific information for programming the features in the system.
The actual system programming screens are shown in System
Programming.
System Programming
4-7
Programming Procedures
Programming Command
Table 4-3 Commands Using Fixed Buttons
Function
Command
Console PC
To return to normal call-handling mode or to SPM idle state
Home Home
To display the System Programming
Menu
main menu on the console or
SPM main menu on the PC
End
PgUp
To display more menu items when a
More
“>” is shown on line 7
Inspct
To display the Inspect screen that lists all telephones or lines with a specific feature assigned
Drop
To clear all information from a screen or to enter a stop in a
System Speed Dial or Personal
Speed Dial programming sequence
To enter a pause in a System Speed
Hold
Dial or Personal Speed Dial programming sequence
PgDn
Alt+P
Alt+H
.
4-8
System Programming
Programming Procedures
Table 4-4 Commands Appearing on the Screen
Function Command
Console PC
To remove a feature from a line/trunk or telephone
When
Delete command appears on the screen:
Delete
When
Delete command appears on the screen:
F8
When
Delete command doesn’t appear on the screen:
Drop
When
Delete command doesn’t appear on the screen:
Alt+P
F4
To move the cursor from right to left
Bksp
and erase characters
To save an entry and update line 1 of the screen with the next extension or item number. (Next or
F9 is used only when entering information for sequentially numbered extensions or entries.)
Next
To return to the previous screen or menu without entering or changing information
Exit
F9
F5
System Programming
4-9
Programming Procedures
Table 4-5 Commands Applicable Only to SPM
Function
Command
PC
To activate the SPM Help option
Ctrl+F1
To reset the SPM program (return to SPM main menu and drop the connection with the control unit). Use reset when invalid characters appear on the screen. If programming from a remote location, the call to the system must be reestablished.
Ctrl+F5
Note: Do not use reset while performing a Restore procedure. This will cause corruption of system programming information.
4-10
System Programming
Programming Procedures
Programming Procedures
The system programming procedures on the following pages are listed in the sequence used to program a new system. The procedures not used for new system programming (for example,
Restart or Board Renumber) are also included and are listed in System Programming menu order.
Each of the programming procedures assumes that you are connected on-site or that you have established a remote connection to the control unit, and that the System Programming menu is displayed. Each procedure begins and ends with the
System Programming menu. (For detailed information on system programming preparation and programming basics, review
Chapters 1 and 2 of System Programming).
Before you program changes to new system, review Chapter 3 of
System Programming, which identifies the initial programming procedures, the sequence that should be followed, and the system forms necessary to plan and program each option. If you are using a PC with SPM to program the system, back up the system programming information on a disk using the backup procedure in this chapter.
Before you make changes to an established system, read
Chapter 4 of System Programming, update the appropriate planning forms to reflect the changes you are making, and, if you are using a PC with SPM to make changes to the system, back up the current system programming information on a disk using the backup procedure in this chapter.
If system programming was performed using a surrogate switch or if system programming was lost or corrupted due to a malfunction, use the Restore procedure in this chapter to load the backup system programming information into the system’s memory.
Programming Procedures
4-11
Programming Procedures
Set the Basic System
Operating Conditions
Restarting the System (Cold Start)
Step
1. Display System Restart screen
Console
System
Restart
2. Advise the system whether to continue restart process
■
To continue restart process
■
To cancel restart process
PC
F 1
F 1
Y e s
F1
System restarts System restarts and session is and session is terminated terminated automatically automatically
No
Exit
F2
F 5
System Progamming Position Assignment
Step
1.
Display System
Programming Port screen
Console
System
SysProg
Port
PC
F 1
F 2
4-12
Set the Operating Conditions
Programming Procedures
Step
Console PC
2. Erase current extension
Drop Alt+ P
and enter extension of
Dial extension, Type new system programming
∗
+ slot and ✱ extension,
+ slot and position port, or # + port, or # + logical ID, or logical ID press DSS button for extension no.
3. Save entry and exit
F10
Enter
Session is terminated automatically
F5
M o d e
Step
1. Display Mode screen
2. Specify operation
■
For Key
■
For Hybrid/PBX
■
For Behind Switch
3. Save selection
Console
System
Mode
PC
F1
F3
Key
Hybrid/PBX
BehndSwtch
F 1
F2
F3
Enter
F10
System restarts System restarts and session is and session is terminated terminated
Set the Operating Conditions
4-13
Programming Procedures
Automatic Maintenance Busy
Step
Console
1. Display Auto Maintenance
System
Busy screen
Mainten
Busy
2. Determine malfunctioning line service for outgoing calls
■
To automatically take malfunctioning lines or trunks out of service for outgoing calls
■
To leave malfunctioning lines or trunks available for outgoing calls
E n a b l e
D i s a b l e
3. Save choice then
■
If Disable was selected
■
If Enable was selected a n d :
■
No tie lines/trunks
E n t e r
E x i t
E x i t
E x i t
Continued
PC
F1
F6
F1
F2
F10
F5
F5
F5
4-14
Set the Operating Conditions
Programming Procedures
Step
3. Continued
■
Automatic
Maintenance Busy is wanted for tie trunks
■
Automatic
Maintenance Busy is not wanted for tie trunks
Console
Enable
Enter
Exit
Disable
Enter
E x i t
PC
F 1
F10
F 5
F 2
F10
F 5
System Date
Step
1. Display Date screen
Console
System
Date
2. Erase assigned date and
Drop
set current date Dial date
[mmddyy]
3. Save entry and exit
Enter
Exit
PC
F 1
F 7
Alt+P
Type date
[mmddyy]
F10
F5
Set the Operating Conditions
4-15
Programming Procedures
System Time
Step
1. Display Time screen
Console
System
Time
PC
F 1
F 8
2. Erase assigned set current time time and
Drop
Dial current
Alt+P
Type current time: [hhmm] time: [hhmm]
3. Save entry and exit
Enter
Exit
F10
F5
Board Renumbering (Cold Start After Adding or
Changing Modules)
Step
Console
1. Display screen
Board Renumber
System
Board Renum
PC
F 1
F 9
2. Advise the system whether to continue board renumber process
■
To continue board renumber process
■
To cancel renumber process
Yes
F1
System restarts System restarts and session is and session is terminated automatically terminated automatically
No
Exit
F 2
F 5
4-16
Set the Operating Conditions
Programming Procedures
S y s t e m R e n u m b e r i n g
System Numbering Plan Selection
Step
1. Display Default
Numbering screen
Console PC
SysRenumber
Default
Numbering
F2
F1
2. Specify system numbering plan
■
F o r 2-Digit
■
F o r 3-Digit
■
F o r set up Space
3. Exit
2-Digit
3-Digit
SetUp Space
Exit
Exit
F1
F2
F3
F5
F5
Single Renumbering
Step
1. Display Single System
Renumber menu
Console
SysRenumber
Single
PC
F 2
F 2
■
To see more choices
More PgUp
2. Select item to renumber Press button
Press function next to choice key next to choice
System Renumbering
4-17
Programming Procedures
Step
3. Enter current extension and save entry
Console
PC
Dial extension, Type extension,
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID, or press DSS logical ID button for extension no.
Enter
F10
4. Enter new extension number
Dial extension, Type extension,
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID, or logical ID press DSS button for extension no.
5. Save entry and either renumber more items or exit
■
To save entry and renumber another item of the same type:
■
If next extension number is sequential
■
If next extension number is not sequential
■
To save entry and exit when all entries are complete
Next
Repeat step
4
E n t e r
Repeat steps 2-5
E n t e r
E x i t
E x i t
F 9
Repeat step 4
F10
Repeat steps 2–5
F10
F5
F5
4-18
System Renumbering
Programming Procedures
Block Renumbering
Step Console
1. Display Block Renumber
SysRenumber
screen
Block
PC
F 2
F 3
2. Select type of group to renumber
3. Enter first group member’s line/trunk or extension number and save entry
Press button
Press function next to choice key next to choice
Dial extension,
Type extension,
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID, or press DSS logical ID button for extension no.
Enter
F 1 0
4. Enter last group member’s Dial extension, Type extension, line/trunk or extension
✱
+ slot and
✱
+ slot and number and save entry port, or # + logical ID, or port, or # + logical ID press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
F10
5. Assign new extension Dial extension, Type extension, numbers to the group and
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and exit port, or # + port, or # + logical ID, or logical ID press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
F10
System Renumbering
4 - 1 9
Programming Procedures
Step
6. When all entries are complete
Console
Exit
Exit
PC
F5
F5
Direct Station Selector (DSS) Page Buttons
Step Console
PC
1. Display Single screen and
select DSS Buttons
SysRenumber
Single
More
F2
F2
PgUp
DSS Buttons
F1
2. Identify Page button to
Dial Page
Type Page program (1-3) and save button number: button number: entry
[n] [n]
Enter
F10
3. Identify first extension
Dial extension Type extension number for group of 50 or number: [nnnn] number: [nnnn]
100 extension numbers represented by Page button shown on line 1
4-20
System Renumbering
Programming Procedures
Step
4. Save entry and either program more page buttons or exit
■
To save entry and assign extensions to the next page button:
If next extension number is sequential
If next extension number is not sequential
■
To save entry and exit when all entries are complete
Console PC
N e x t F 9
Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3
E n t e r
F10
Repeat steps 2–4
Repeat steps 2–4
E n t e r
E x i t
E x i t
F10
F 5
F 5
System Renumbering
4-21
Programming Procedures
System Operator Positions
QCC System Operator Positions—Hybrid/PBX Only
The following applies if you want to add or delete QCC operator positions:
■
If you want to add QCC operator positions, the primary QCC operator position must be the first one you add.
■
The primary QCC position cannot be deleted if other QCC positions are to remain in the system.
■
If you want to delete all QCC operator positions, the primary
QCC operator position must be the last one that you delete before you select the Store All option in step 6.
Step
1. Display Operator
Positions screen and select Queued Call
Console
Operator
Positions
Queued Call
PC
F 3
F 1
F 2
2. Assign or delete QCC operator positions using system programming console with a DSS attached
If system programming console does not have a
DSS attached; or if programming with SPM, go to step 3.
Continued
4-22
System Operator Positions
Programming Procedures
Step
2. Continued
■
■
To assign QCC operator position
To delete QCC operator positions
Console
Press each position’s DSS button to turn red LED on.
Go to step 6
Press each position’s DSS button to make red LED flash.
Go to step 6
PC
3. Using system programming console that
does not have a DSS attached or when programming with SPM
■
To identify QCC operator position to assign or delete
■
To view currently assigned operator positions
Dial extension, Type extension,
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID logical ID
Inspct then
Exit
PgDn then
F 5
Positions
F1
Queued Call
F2
Return to step 2 Return to step 2
System Operator positions
4-23
Programming Procedures
Step
4. Assignor delete QCC operator position
■
To assign displayed extension number as
QCC operator position
■
To delete displayed extension number as
QCC operator position
5. Assign or delete more operator positions
6. When all entries are complete
The system resets and automatically assigns factory settings for operator positions.
Console
E n t e r
D e l e t e
PC
F10
F 8
Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 and 4 and 4
StoreAll
F 3
DLC Operator Positions Including Those Used for Call Management System
Step
1. Display Operator
Positions screen and select Direct Line
Console
Operator
Positions
Direct Line
PC
F 3
F 1
F 1
4-24
System Operator Positions
Programming Procedures
Step
2. Assignor delete DLC operator positions using system programming console with a DSS attached
Console
If system programming console does not have a
DSS attached; or if programming with SPM, go to step 3.
■
To assign DLC operator position
■
To delete DLC operator positions
Press each position’s DSS button to turn red LED on.
Go to step 6
Press DSS button to make red LED flash.
Go to step 6
PC
3. Using system programming console that does not have a DSS attached or when programming with SPM
■
To identify DLC operator position to assign or delete
Continued
Dial extension,
Type extension,
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID logical ID
System Operator Positions
4-25
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
3. Continued
■
To view currently assigned operator positions
Inspct
then
Exit
PgDn
then
F5
F1
Positions
Direct Line
F1
Return to step 2 Return to step 2
4. Assignor delete DLC operator position
■
To assign displayed
E n t e r
extension number as
DLC operator position
■
To delete displayed
Delete
extension number as
DLC operator position
F10
F 8
5. Assign or delete more operator positions
Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 and 4 and 4
S t o r e A l l
F3
6. When all entries are complete
The system sets and automatically assigns factory settings for operator positions.
4-26
System Operator Positions
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Type of Trunk on 400 GS/LS, 408 GWLS, or 800 GWLS Module
Step
Console
PC
1. Display Loop-Start/
LinesTrunks
F 4
Ground-Start/DS1 screen
L S / G S / D S 1
F1
2. Identify slot number
Dial slot
Type slot
(1-17) in control unit that number: [nnnn] number: [nn] contains 400, 408, or 800
E n t e r
GS/LS module and save entry
F10
3. Specify type of trunks to
Select option be connected to module for type of trunks
Press function key for type of trunks
Note: Ground-start can be selected only when the shunt is removed; the control unit is not modified for key-only operation
Lines and Trunks
4-27
Programming Procedures
Step Console
4. If All Ground or All Loop Go to step 6 was selected
■
If Ground-Start or
Loop-Start was selected, identify port number on 400, 408,
(ports 1-4) or 800
(ports 1-8) module that has ground-start or loop-start trunks connected
If you are programming more than one sequentially numbered port with the same type, enter lowest port number.
Dial port number: [n]
5. Save entry and either program more ports or return to Lines and Trunks menu
■
To save entry and assign trunk type shown on line 1 to another port number:
If next port number is sequential
If next port number is not sequential
Next
Repeat step 4
Enter
E x i t
LS/GS/DS1
Repeat steps 2–5
Continued
PC
Go to step 6
Dial port number: [n]
F 9
Repeat step 4
F10
F5
F1
Repeat steps 2–5
4-28
Lines and Trunks
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
5. Continued
■
■
To save entry and return to Lines and
Trunks menu when all entries are complete
To view currently assigned ports on
400/408/800 GS/LS module with trunk type shown on line 1
E n t e r
E x i t
Inspct
then
E x i t
6.
To program another trunk
LS/GS/DS1
type
Repeat from step 3
■
When all entries are
E x i t
complete, exit
PC
F10
F5
PgDn
then
F5
F 1
Repeat from step 3
F5
Dial Signaling for Loop-Start/Ground-Start Lines or
Trunks
Step
1.
Display Touch-Tone/Loop
Start Disconnect screen and select Outward
Dialing Mode
Console PC
LinesTrunks
TT/LS Disc
OutMode
F 4
F 3
F 1
Lines and Trunks
4-29
Programming Procedures
Step Console
2. Select specific lines or trunks associated with the
20 line buttons on console or SPM screen
■
For logical IDs 1-20
■
For logical IDs 21-40
■
For logical IDs 41-60
■
For logical IDs 61-80
Lines 01-20
Line 21-40
LInes 41-60
Lines 61-80
3. Specific signaling
■
For touch-tone
■
For rotary dial
PC
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
Press line Press function button for each key for each line/trunk to turn line/trunk to green LED on make letter “G” appear on screen
Press line Press function button for each key for each line/trunk to turn line/trunk to green LED off erase letter “G”
4. Exit
E x i t
E x i t
E x i t
F 5
F 5
F 5
Note: An alternate method for steps 2 and 3 is to select Entry
Mode (F6), identify the line/trunk (dial or type line/trunk number, logical ID, or slot and port no.), and select Enter (F10) to assign touch-tone, or select Delete (F8) to assign rotary dial.
4-30
Lines and Trunks
Programming Procedures
Loop-Start Line/Trunk Disconnect Signaling
Reliability
Step
1. Display Touch-Tone/Loop
Start Disconnect screen and select Loop-Start
Disconnect
Console
LinesTrunks
TT/LS Disc
LS
Disconnect
PC
F 4
F 3
F 2
2. Classify disconnect signal received on loop-start lines/trunks
■
To classify as
■
To classify unreliable as
3. Save choice and exit
Yes
No
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
F1
F2
F10
F5
F5
Toll Type
Step
Console PC
1. Display Toll Type screen
LInesTrunks
Toll Type
F4
F10
Lines and Trunks
4-31
Programming Procedures
Step
2. Select specific lines/ trunks associated with the
20 line buttons on the console or SPM screen
■
For logical IDs 1-20
■
For logical IDs 21–40
■
For logical IDs 41–60
■
For logical IDs 61-80
Console
Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
PC
F1
F2
F3
F4
3. Specify toll prefix requirement for long distance calls
■
To specify toll prefix is Press line required button for each
Press function key for each line/trunk to turn line/trunk to green LED on make letter “G” appear on screen
■
To specify toll prefix is Press line not required
Press function button for each key for each line/trunk to turn line/trunk to green LED off erase letter “G”
Note: An alternate method for steps 2 and 3 is to select Entry
Mode (F6), identify the line/trunk (dial or type line/trunk number, logical ID, or slot and port no.), and select Enter (F10) to specify a toll prefix is required, or select Delete (F8) to specify a toll prefix is not required.
4. Exit
E x i t
E x i t
F5
F5
4-32
Lines and Trunks
Programming Procedures
Hold Disconnect Interval
Step
Console
1. Display Hold Disconnect
LinesTrunks
screen
More
Hold Dscnct
PC
F 4
PgUp
F 1
2. Select specific lines/trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on console or SPM screen
■
For logical IDs 1–20
■
For logical IDs 21–40
■
For logical IDs 41–60
■
For logical IDs 61–80
Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
3. Assign Hold Disconnect
Interval
■
■
For long Hold
Disconnect interval
For short Hold
Disconnect interval
Press line Press function button for each key for each line/trunk to turn line/trunk to green LED on make letter “G” appear on screen
Press line
Press function button for each key for each line/trunk to turn line/trunk to green LED off erase letter “G”
Note: An alternate method for steps 2 and 3 is to select Entry
Mode (F6), identify the line/trunk (dial or type line/trunk number, logical ID, or slot and port no.), and select Enter (F10) to assign a long hold disconnect, or select Delete (F8) to assign a short hold disconnect.
4-20
System Renumbering
Programming Procedures
Step
4. Exit
Console
Exit
Exit
PC
F5
F5
Principal User for Remote Call Forwarding and
Coverage
Step
1. Display Principal User screen
Console
LinesTrunks
More
PrncipalUsr
PC
F4
PgUp
F2
2. Identify line/trunk to Dial line/trunk Type line/trunk program and save entry no. (801-880), no. (801-880),
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID
Enter
logical ID
F10
3. Identify extension to assign or remove as
Dial extension, Type extension,
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and principal user of line/trunk port, or # + logical ID, or port, or # + logical ID press DSS button for extension no.
4-34
Lines and Trunks
Programming Procedures
Step
5. Exit
Console
4. To remove extension as
Delete
principal user
■
To remove extensions users more as principal
PrncipalUsr
Repeat steps
2-4
To assign extension as principal user and assign a principal user for another line/trunk
■
If next line/trunk number is sequential
■
If next line/trunk number is not sequential
Next
Repeat step 3
Enter
PrncipalUsr
Repeat steps
2-4
Enter
To assign extension as principal user when all entries are complete
E x i t
PC
F8
F2
Repeat steps
2-4
F9
Repeat step 3
F10
F2
Repeat steps
2-4
F1O
F5
Queued Call Console (QCC) Queue Priority
(HybridIPBX Only)
Step
1. Display QCC Queue
Priority screen
Console
PC
LinesTrunks
F 4
More
ACC Prior
PgUp
F3
Lines and Trunks
4-35
Programming Procedures
Step
2. Assign QCC queue priority level (1-7)
Console
Dial priority level: [n]
3. Save entry
Enter
4. Select specific trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on console or
SPM screen
■
For logical IDs 1–20
■
■
■
For logical IDs 21–40
For logical IDs 41–60
For logical IDs 61-80
Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
PC
Type priority level: [n]
F10
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
5. Assign or remove queue priority shown on line 1
■
To assign queue priority to trunk
Press line Press function button for each key for each trunk to turn trunk to make green LED on letter “G” appear on screen
■
To remove queue priority from trunk
Press line Press function button for each key for each trunk to turn trunk to erase green LED off letter “G”
Note: An alternate method for steps 4 and 5 is to select Entry
Mode (F6), identify the line/trunk (dial or type line/trunk number, logical ID, or slot and port no.), and select Enter (F10) or Next
(F9) to assign queue priority shown on line 1, or select Delete
(F8) to delete queue priority shown on line 1.
4-36
Lines and Trunks
Programming Procedures
Step
6. When all entries are complete exit
Console
Exit
Exit
PC
F 5
F5
QCC Operator to Receive Calls
Step
1. Display QCC Operator screen
Console
LinesTrunks
More
QCC Opper
PC
F 4
PgUp
F4
2. Identify individual QCC
Dial extension, Dial extension, operators to receive calls
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and on trunks identified in port, or # + port, or # + step 4 logical ID or logical
ID press DSS button for extension no.
F10
3. Save entry
Enter
4. Select specific trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on console or
SPM screen
■
For logical IDs 1–20
■
For logical IDs 21–40
■
For logical IDs 41–60
■
For logical IDs 61–80
Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
F1
F2
F3
F4
Lines and Trunks
4-37
Programming Procedures
Step Console
PC
5. Assign or remove calls on trunk to QCC operator shown on line 1 to trunk
■
■
To assign calls to QCC operator shown on line 1 of screen
To remove calls to
QCC operator shown on line 1 of screen
Press line button for each trunk to turn green LED on
Press line button for each trunk to turn green LED off
Press function key for each trunk to make letter “G” appear on screen
Press function key for each trunk to erase letter “G”
Note: An alternate method for steps 4 and 5 is to select Entry
Mode (F6), identify the line/trunk (dial or type line/trunk number, logical ID, or slot and port no.), and select Enter (F10) or Next
(F9) to assign calls to QCC shown on line 1, or select Delete (F8) to remove calls from QCC shown on line 1.
6. Exit
E x i t
E x i t
F5
F5
Trunks to Pools Assignment (HybridPBX Only)
Step
1. Display Pools screen
Console
LinesTrunks
Pools
PC
F 4
F 9
4-38
Lines and Trunks
Programming Procedures
Step
2. Identify Pool to program and save entry
Console
Dial pool dialout code:
[nnnn]
Enter
PC
Type pool dialout code:
[nnnn]
F10
3. Select specific trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on console or
SPM screen
■
For logical IDs 1–20
■
For logical IDs 21–40
■
For logical IDs 41–60
■
For logical IDs 61–80
Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
F1
F2
F3
F4
4. Assign or remove trunks from pool
■
■
To assign trunks to pool
To remove trunks from pool
Press line button for each trunk to turn red
LED on
Press line button for each trunk to turn red
LED Off
Press function key for each trunk to make letter “R” appear on screen
Press function key for each trunk to erase letter “R”
Note: An alternate method for steps 3 and 4 is to select Entry
Mode (F6), identify the line/trunk (dial or type line/trunk number, logical ID, or slot and port no.), and select Enter (F10) to assign the trunk to a pool, or select Delete (F8) to remove the trunk from the pool.
Lines and Trunks
4-39
Programming Procedures
Step
5. Exit
Console
Exit
Exit
PC
F5
F5
Copy Line/Trunk Options
Step
1. Display Line/Trunk Copy menu
Console
LinesTrunks
Copy
PC
F4
F7
2. To copy line/trunk options
Single
to an individual line/trunk
To copy calling restrictions to a sequentially numbered block of line/trunks
Block
F1
F2
3. Identify line/trunk to copy Dial line/trunk
Type line/trunk calling restrictions from no. (801 -880), no. (801 -880), and save entry
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and
If copying from more than port, or # + logical ID port, or # + logical ID one extension, enter lowest extension number
Enter F10
4-40
Lines and Trunks
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
4. If Single was selected, Dial line/trunk Type line/trunk identify line/trunk to copy no. (801-880), no. (801–880), options to
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + or logical ID logical ID
If Block was selected, identify the first line/trunk in block of line/trunks to copy options to
5. If Single was selected
■
To save entry and copy options from same line/trunk on line 1 of screen to another individual line/trunk
■
To copy options from another line/trunk to an individual line/trunk
■
If next line/trunk number is sequential
■
If next line/trunk number is not sequential
If block was selected, save entry and identify last line/trunk number in block of lines/trunks and save entry
Enter
Repeat steps Repeat steps
2-4 2-4
Next
Repeat step 4
F10
F9
Repeat step 4
Enter
F10
Repeat steps Repeat steps
2-4 2–4
Enter
F10
Dial line/trunk Type line/trunk no. (801–880), no. (801–880),
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID logical ID
Enter
F10
Lines and Trunks
4-41
Programming Procedures
Step
6. When copy process is complete
Console
Exit
Exit
Exit
PC
F 5
F 5
F 5
4-42
Lines and Trunks
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
Type
of DS1 Facility
Step
1. Display Loop-Start/
Ground-Start/DS1 screen
Console
LinesTrunks
LS/GS/DS1
PC
F4
F1
2. Identify slot number
Dial slot Type slot
(1-17) in control unit that number: [nn] number: [nn] contains 100D and save
Enter
F 1 0
entry
3. Display Type screen and specify facility type
Type
F1
■
For T1 facility type
■
For PRI facility type
T1
Enter
Go to step 4
PRI
Enter
Go to step 8
F 1
F 1 0
Go to step 4
F2
F10
Go to step 8
DS1 Facilities
4-43
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
4. If T1 selected in step 3, Select option
Press function specify type of emulation for type of key for type of and save entry emulation
Enter
emulation
F 1 0
5. If All Ground, All Loop, or
All Unequip selected in step 4
If TIE or All Tie selected in step 4, specify transmit/receive insertion loss parameter
Go to step 8
■
To set loss parameter to 0/4 for tie trunks to another PBX and save entry
TIE-PBX
E n t e r
Go to step 6
■
To set loss parameter to 0/6 for tie trunks programmed for network services
T o l l
Enter
Go to step 6
Go to step 6
If Ground-Start, Loop-
Start, or Unequipped selected in step 4
Go to step 8
F 1
F 1 0
Go to step 6
F2
F10
Go to step 6
Go to step 6
6. Identify channel (1–24) to Dial channel
Type channel program number: [nn] number: [nn]
4-44
DS1 Facilities
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
7. To remove channel type
■
Delete
To remove more channel types from slot number on line 1
Repeat steps 6 and 7
■
To remove channel types from another
DS1 module
To assign channel type and assign more channel types to slot number shown on line 1
To assign channel type and assign channel types to another DS1 module
■
If next slot number is sequential
E x i t
Repeat steps 3–7
E n t e r
Repeat steps 6 and 7
N e x t
Repeat steps 6 and 7
■
If next slot number is not sequential
Enter
E x i t
Repeat steps 3–7
To assign channel type and return to DS1 Slot menu when all entries are complete
Enter
E x i t
PC
F 8
Repeat steps 6 and 7
F 5
Repeat steps 3-7
F10
Repeat steps 6 and 7
F 9
Repeat steps 6 and 7
F10
F 5
Repeat steps 3-7
F10
F 5
DS1 Facilities
4-45
Programming Procedures
Step
8. Exit
Console
E x i t
E x i t
PC
F 5
F 5
Framing Mode
Step
1. Display Loop-Start/
Ground-Start/DS1 Screen
Console
LinesTrunks
LS/GS/DS1
PC
F 4
F 1
2. Identify slot number Dial slot Type slot
(1-17) in control unit that number: [nn] number: [nn] contains 100D, save
Enter
F10
entry, and display format
FrameFormat
F2
selection screen
3. Specify frame format
■
For D4 compatible framing format
■
For Extended Super
Frame format
4. Save choice and exit
D4
Compatible
Extended
Super Frame
F1
F 2
Enter
Exit
Exit
F10
F 5
F 5
4-46
DS1 Facilities
Programming Procedures
Zero Code Suppression
Step
Console
1. Display Loop-Start/
Ground-Start/DS1 screen
LinesTrunks
LS/GS/DS1
PC
F 4
F 4
2. Identify slot number
Dial slot
(1-17) in control unit that number: [nn] contains 100D, save
Enter
entry, and display zero code suppression selection screen
Suppression
Type slot number: [nn]
F10
F3
3. Specify type of zero code suppression
■
For AM Zero Code
Suppression
A M I - Z C S
■
For Bipolar 8 Zero
Code Suppression
B 8 Z S
4. Save choice and
exit
Enter
Exit
Exit
F 1
G2
F10
F5
F5
Signaling Mode
Step
1. Display Loop-Start/
Ground-Start/DS1 screen
Console
LinesTrunks
LS/GS/DS1
PC
F 4
F 1
DS1 Facilities
4-47
Programming Procedures
Step Console
2. Identify slot number Dial slot
(1-17) in control unit that number: [nn] contains 100D, save
Enter
entry, and display
Signaling
Signaling screen
3. Specify type of signaling
■
For Robbed Bit signaling
Robbed Bit
■
For Common Channel
Common
F1
F2
signaling
Channel
4. Save choice then exit
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
F10
F5
F5
P c
Type slot number: [nn]
F10
F4
Line Compensation
Step
1. Display Loop-Start/
Ground-Start/DS1 screen
Console
LinesTrunks
LS/GS/DS1
2. Identify slot number
(1-17) in control unit that contains 100D, save entry, and display Line
Compensation screen
Dial slot number:[nn]
Enter
Line Comp
PC
F4
F1
Type slot number:[nn]
F10
F6
4-48
DS1 Facilities
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
3. Erase currently assigned Drop line compensation and Dial line specify amount of decibel loss for line compensation
Alt+P
Type line compensation compensation value:[n] value: [n]
1= 0.6 dB loss
2= 1.2 dB loss
3= 1.8 dB loss
4= 2.4 dB loss
5= 3.0 dB loss
4. Save choice then exit
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
F10
F 5
F 5
Clock Synchronization
Step
1. Display Loop-Start/
Ground-Start/DS1 screen
Console
LinesTrunks
LS/GS/DS1
PC
F4
F1
2. Idendify slot number
Dial slot Type slot
(1-17) in control unit that number: [nn] number: [nn] contains 100D and save
Enter
F10
entry
3. Display Priority screen
Clock Sync
Priority
F7
F7
DS1 Facilities
4-49
Programming Procedures
Step
4. Specify that the module in slot shown on line 1 provides
■
Primary clock synchronization
■
Secondary clock synchronization
■
Tertiary clock synchronization
■
No clock synchronization
5. Save
choice and
display
Source of Synchronization s c r e e n
Console
Primary
Secondary
Tertiary
None
Enter
Source
6. Specify source of clock synchronization
■
To specify that clock is
synchronized to external endpoint
Loop
■
To specify that clock is
Local
free running
7. Save choice and exit
Enter
8. Select Clock Activation
PC
F1
F2
F3
F4
F10
F2
F 1
F2
F10
Activation
F 3
9. Activate or deactivate clock
■
To activate clock
■
To deactivate clock
Active
Not Active
F1
F2
4-50
DS1 Facilities
Programming Procedures
Step
10. Save entry and exit
Console
Enter
Exit
Exit
Exit
PC
F10
F 5
F 5
F 5
Channel Service Unit
Step
1. Display Loop-StaW
Ground-Start/DS1 screen
Console
PC
LineTrunks
F4
LS/GS/DS1
F1
2. Identify slot number
Dial slot
Type slot
(1-17) in control unit that number: [nn] number: [nn] contains 100D, save
Enter
F10
entry, and display
Channel Service Unit screen
ChannelUnit F 8
3. Specify type of channel unit access
■
For Foreign Exchange
Foreign
Exchange
■
For Special Access
S p e c i a l
Access
F 1
F2
4. Save choice then exit
Enter
Exit
Exit
F10
F 5
F 5
DS1 Facilities
4-51
ProgrammingProcedures
Tie Trunks
Tie Trunk Direction
Step
1. Display Tie Lines screen and select Direction
Console
LinesTrunks
TIE Lines
Direction
PC
F4
F2
F1
2. Identify tie trunk and save Dial trunk no.
Type trunk no.
entry (801-880)
∗
+ (801-880),
∗
+
If you are programming
slot and port, or slot and port, or
more than one tie trunk, enter the lowest trunk
# + logical ID # + logical ID
Enter
F10
number.
3. Specify trunk direction
■
For two-way direction
■
For one-way outgoing
■
For one-way incoming direction
Two Way
Outgoing
Incoming
F 1
F 2
F 3
4-52
Tie Trunks
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
4. Save choice and either program more tie trunks or exit
■
To save choice and specify direction for another tie trunk:
If next tie trunk number is sequential
If next tie trunk number is not sequential
Next
Repeat step 3
Enter
Direction
Repeat steps 2-4
■
To save choice and exit when all entries are complete
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
PC
F9
Repeat step 3
F10
F1
Repeat steps 2–4
F10
F5
F5
Tie Trunk Type
Step Console
1. Display TIE Lines screen
LinesTrunks
TIE Lines
PC
F 4
F 2
2. Select trunk type to program
■
For incoming tie trunk type
■
For outgoing tie trunk type
Intype
Outtype
F2
F3
Tie Trunks
4-53
Programming Procedures
Step Console
PC
3. Identify tie trunk and save Dial trunk no.
Type trunk no.
entry (801-880),
∗
+ (801-880),
∗
+
If programming more than slot and port, or slot and port, or
one tie trunk, enter lowest # + logical ID
trunk number.
Enter
# + logical ID
F 1 0
4. Specify tie trunk type
■
For wink type
■
For delay type
■
For immediate type
■
For automatic type
Wink
Delay
Immed
Auto
F1
F2
F 3
F 4
5. Save choice and either program another tie trunk or exit
■
To save choice and specify type for another tie trunk:
If next tie trunk number is sequential
If next tie trunk number is not sequential
Next
F 1
Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4
Enter
Repeat steps 2–5
F10
Repeat steps 2–5
■
To save choice and exit when all entries are complete
Enter
Exit
Exit
F10
F 5
F 5
4-54
Tie Trunks
Programming Procedures
E&M Signal
Step
Console
1. Display Tie Lines screen
and select E&M Signal
LinesTrunks
TIE Lines
E&M Signal
PC
F 4
F 2
F 4
2. Identify tie trunk and save Dial trunk no
Type trunk no entry
(801-880),
∗
+
(801-880),
∗
+
if you are programming
slot and port, or slot and port, or
more than one tie trunk,
# + logical ID
# + logical ID
enter the lowest trunk
Enter
F10
number.
3. Specify E&M trunk signaling
■
For type 1S signaling
Type 1S
■
For type 1C signaling
■
For type 5 signaling
Type 1C
Tpye 5
F1
F 2
F 3
Tie Trunks
4-55
Programming Procedures
Step
Console PC
4. Save choice and either program more tie trunks or exit
■
To save choice and specify signaling for another tie trunk:
If next tie trunk number is sequential
If next tie trunk number is not sequential
Next
F 9
Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3
Enter
E&M Signal
F10
F4
Repeat steps 2-4
Repeat steps 2-4
■
To save choice and exit when all entries are complete
Enter
Exit
Exit
F10
F 5
F 5
Dial Mode
Step
Console
1. Display TIE Lines screen
LinesTrunks
TIE Lines
2. Program tie trunk dial mode
■
For incoming tie trunk dial mode
I n m o d e
■
For outgoing tie trunk
Outmode
dial mode
F6
F7
PC
F 4
F 2
4-56
Tie Trunks
Programming Procedures
Step Console
3. Select the specific tie trunks associated with the
20 line buttons on the console or SPM screen
■
For logical IDs 1–20
■
For logical IDs 21–40
■
For logical IDs 41–60
■
For logical IDs 61–80
Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
PC
F1
F2
F3
F4
4. Specify dial mode
■
■
For touch-tone dial mode
For rotary dial mode
Press line button for each tie trunk to turn green LED on
Press line button for each rotary tie trunk to turn green
LED Off
Press function key for each tie trunk to make letter “G” appear on screen
Press function key next to each rotary tie trunk to erase letter “G”
Note: An alternate method for steps 3 and 4 is to select Entry
Mode (F6), identify the tie trunk (dial or type trunk number, logical ID, or slot and port no.), and select Enter (F10) to assign touch-tone, or select Delete (F8) to assign rotary dial.
5. Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
F 5
F 5
F 5
Tie Trunks
4-57
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunk Dial Tone
Step
1. Display Tie Lines screen and select Dial Tone
Console
LinesTrunks
TIE Lines
Dialtone
PC
F4
F2
F8
2. Select the specific tie trunks associated with the
20 line buttons on the console or SPM screen
■
For logical IDs 1–20
■
For logical IDs 21–40
■
For logical IDs 41–60
■
For logical IDs 61–80
Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
F1
F2
F3
F4
3. Specify dial tone
■
For remote dial tone Press the Press the button for each function key for
Iineltrunk to turn each line/trunk green LED on to make letter
“G” appear on screen
■
For local dial tone Press the Press the button for each function key for line/trunk to turn each line/trunk green LED off to erase letter
“G”
Note: An alternate method for steps 2 and 3 is to select Entry
Mode (F6), identify the tie trunk (dial or type trunk number, logical ID, or slot and port no.), and select Enter (F10) to assign remote dial tone, or select Delete (F8) to assign local dial tone.
4-58
Tie Trunks
Programming Procedures
Step
4. Exit
Console
E x i t
E x i t
E x i t
PC
F5
F 5
F5
Answer Supervision Time
Step
1. Display Tie Lines screen and select Answer
Supervision
Console
LinesTrunks
TIE Lines
AnsSupvr
PC
F 4
F 2
F9
2. Identify tie trunk and save Dial trunk no .
Type trunk no.
entry (801-880),
∗
+ (801-880),
∗
+
If you are programming
slot and port, or slot and port, or
more than one tie trunk, enter the lowest trunk
# + logical ID # + logical ID
Enter
F10
number.
3. Specify answer super-
Dial the number Type the vision time (20-4800 ms, of ms: [nnnn] number of ms: in increments of 20)
[nnnn]
Tie Trunks
4-59
Programming Procedures
Step Console
4. Save entry and either program another tie trunk or exit
■
To save entry and specify answer supervision for another tie trunk:
If next tie trunk number is sequential
Next
Repeat step 3
If next tie trunk number is not sequential
Enter
AnsSupvr
Repeat steps 2-4
■
To save entry and exit when all entries are complete
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
PC
F9
Repeat step 3
F10
F9
Repeat steps 2-4
F10
F5
F5
Disconnect Time
Step
1. Display Tie Lines screen and select Disconnect
Time
Console
LinesTrunks
TIE Lines
Disconnect
PC
F4
F2
F10
4-60
Tie Trunks
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
2. Identify tie trunk and save Dial trunk no.
Type trunk no.
entry (801-880),
∗
+ (801-880),
∗
+
If you are programming
slot and port, or slot and port, or
more than one tie trunk, enter the lowest trunk
# + logical ID # + logical ID
Enter
F10
number.
3. Specify disconnect time
Dial number of Type number of
(140-2400 ms) ms: [nnnn] ms: [nnnn]
4. Save entry and either program another tie trunk or exit
■
To save entry and specify disconnect time for another tie trunk:
If next tie trunk number is sequential
Next
F 9
Repeat step 3
Repeat step 3
If next tie trunk number is not sequential
Enter
F10
Disconnect
F10
Repeat steps 2-4
Repeat
steps 2–4
■
To save entry and exit when all entries are complete
Enter
Exit
Exit
F10
F5
F5
Tie Trunks
4-61
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Block Assignment
Step
1. Display DID Trunks screen and select Block
Assignment
Console
LinesTrunks
DID
Block
PC
F4
F4
F4
2. Identify block (1 or 2) and Dial trunk block Type Trunk save entry number: [n] block number:
[ n ]
Enter
F10
3. Select specific DID trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on the console or
SPM screen
■
F o r logical IDs 1–20
■
F o r logical IDs
21–40
■
F o r logical
IDs
41–60
■
F o r logical IDs 61–80
Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
F1
F2
F3
F4
4-62
DID Trunks
Programming Procedures
Step Console
PC
4. Assign or remove DID trunk
■
To assign DID trunk to Press line block button for each trunk to turn green LED on
Press function keys for each trunk to make letter “G” appear on screen
■
To remove from block
DID trunk
Press line button for each trunk to turn green LED off
Press function key for each trunk to erase letter “G”
Note:
Mode
An alternate method for steps 3 and 4 is to select Entry
(F6), identify the DID trunk (dial or type trunk number, logical ID, or slot and port no.), and select Enter (F10) to assign to the block, or select Delete (F8) to remove from the block.
5. When all entries are complete
Exit
Exit
Exit
F 5
F 5
F 5
DID Trunk Type
step
1. Display DID Trunks screen and select DID
Trunk Type
Console
LinesTrunks
D I D
Type
PC
F 4
F 4
F 4
DID Trunks
4-63
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
2. Identify block (1 or 2) and Dial trunk block Type trunk save entry number: [n]
Enter
number [n]
F10
3. Specify type for trunk block
■
For immediate start
■
For wink start
I m m e d
W i n k
4. Save choice program the block or exit and either other trunk
■
To save entry and specify type for the other trunk block
■
To save and exit when all entries are complete
N e x t
Repeat step 3
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
F1
F2
F9
Repeat step 3
FI0
F5
F5
Disconnect Time
Step
1. Display DID Trunks screen and select
Disconnect Time
Console
LinesTrunks
DID
Disconnect
PC
F4
F4
F3
4-64
DID Trunks
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
2. Identify DID trunk and save entry
If you are programming
Dial trunk no.
Type trunk no.
(801-880),
∗
+ (801-880),
∗
+ slot and port, or slot and port, or
more than one DID trunk,
# + logical ID # + logical ID
enter the lowest trunk
Enter
F 1 0
number.
3. Specify disconnect time Dial number of Type number of
(140-2400 ms, in ms: [nnnn] ms: [nnnn] increments of 10)
4. Save entry and either program another DID trunk or exit
■
To save entry and specify disconnect time for another DID trunk:
If next tie trunk number is sequential
If next tie trunk number is not sequential
Next
Repeat step 3
E n t e r
Disconnect
Repeat steps 2-4
■
To save entry and exit when all entries are complete
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
F9
Repeat step 3
F10
F 3
Repeat steps 2-4
F10
F 5
F 5
DID Trunks
4-65
Programming Procedures
Expected Digits
Step
1. Display DID Trunks screen and select
Expected Digits
Console
LinesTrunks
DID
E x p e c t
D i g i t
PC
F4
F4
F4
2. Identify trunk block (1 or Dial trunk block Type trunk
2) and save entry number: [n] block number:
E n t e r
[ n ]
F 1 0
3. Erase current number of
Drop
expected digits and
Alt+P
Dial number of Type number of specify new number of expected digits (1–4) expected digits: [n] expected digits: [n]
4. Save entry and either program the other trunk block or exit
■
To save entry and specify expected digits for the other trunk block
■
To save and exit when all entries are complete
N e x t
Repeat step 3
E n t e r
E x i t
E x i t
F9
Repeat step 3
F10
F 5
F 5
4-66
DID Trunks
Programming Procedures
Delete Digits
Step
1.
Display DID trunks
Screen and select Delete
Digits
Console
LinesTrunks
DID
Delete
Digit
PC
F4
F4
F6
2. To specify trunk block
(1 or 2) and save entry
Dial trunk block number: [n]
Enter
Type trunk block number:
[n]
F10
3. Erase current number of
D r o p
A l t + P
deleted digits and specify Dial number of Type number of new number of digits to delete (0-4) deleted digits: deleted digits:
[n] [n]
4. Save entry and either program the other trunk block or exit
■
To save entry and
Next
F 9
specify deleted digits Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3 for the other trunk
block
■
To save and exit when all entries are c o m p l e t e
Enter
Exit
F10
F5
Exit
F5
DID Trunks 4-67
Programming Procedures
Add Digits
Step Console
1. Display DID Trunks screen and select Add
D i g i t s
LinesTrunks
DID
Add Digits
2. Identify trunk block (1 or
2) and save entry
Dial trunk block number: [n]
PC
F4
F4
F4
Type trunk block number
[n]
F10
Alt+P
Type added digits: [nnnn]
3. Erase current added digits and specify new digits to add (1-9999)
Enter
Drop
Dial added digits: [nnnn]
4. Save entry and either program the other trunk block or exit
■
To save entry and specify digits to add for the other trunk block
■
To save and exit when all entries are complete
Next
Repeat step 3
Enter
Exit
Exit
F9
Repeat step 3
F10
F5
F5
4-68
DID Trunks
Programming Procedures
Signaling
Step
1. Display DID Trunks screen and select
Signaling
2. Identify trunk block
(1 or 2) and save entry
Console PC
LinesTrunks
D I D
Signaling
F 4
F 4
F 8
Dial trunk block Type trunk number: [n]
Enter
block number:
[n]
F10
3. Specify DID trunk signaling type
■
For rotary signaling
■
For touch-tone signaling
4. Save choice and either program the other trunk block or exit
■
To save choice and specify signaling for the other trunk block
■
To save choice and exit when all entries are complete
Rotary
TouchTone
F 1
F 2
N e x t
F 9
Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3
Enter
Exit
Exit
F10
F5
F5
DID Trunks
4-69
Programming Procedures
Invalid Destination
Step
1.
Display DID Trunks
screen and select
Invalid Destination
Console
LinesTrunks
DID
InvalDstn
2. Specify invalid destination of calls to unassigned numbers
■
To redirect to extension b a c k u p
■
To specify fast busy s i g n a l
Send to
Backup
Extension
Return Fast
Busy
F 1
F 2
PC
F4
F4
F 9
3. Save choice and exit
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
F10
F5
F5
4-70
DID Trunks
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Telephone Number
Step
1. Display PRI screen and select Phone Number
Console
PC
LinesTrunks
F4
PRI
PhoneNumber
F 6
F1
2. Identify line/trunk and save entry
Dial line/trunk
Type line/trunk no. (801-880), no. (801–880), or # + logical ID or # + logical ID
Enter
F10
3. Assign telephone number Dial telephone Type telephone to channel (up to 12 number: [nnn number: [nnn digits, any combination of nnnnnnnnn] nnnnnnnnn]
0 and 9)
PRI Facilities
4-71
Programming Procedures
Step
4. Save entry and either program more PRI channels or exit
■
To save entry and assign telephone number to another PRI channel:
If next Iine/trunk number is sequential
If next line/trunk number is not sequential
Console PC
N e x t
F 9
Repeat step 3
Repeat step 3
Enter
PhoneNumber
Repeat steps 2-4
F10
F1
Repeat steps 2-4
■
To save entry and exit when all entries are complete
E n t e r
E x i t
E x i t
F10
F5
F5
B-Channel Groups
1. Display B-Channel
Groups screen
B Channels
LinesTrunks
PRI
B-ChannlGrp
B Channels
F4
F6
F2
F1
2. Identify B-Channel group Dial group
(1-69) to program and save entry
Type group number: [nn] number: [nn]
E n t e r
F10
4-72
PRI Facilities
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
3. Identify B Channel to assign to group
Dial B-Channel Type B-Channel slot and port slot and port number:
[
∗ sspp ] number:
[
∗ sspp ]
F 8
4. To remove B Channel from group
D e l e t e
■
To remove more
B Channels from Night
Service group on line 1
Repeat step 3
■
To remove B Channels from another group
Exit
B Channels
Repeat steps 2-4
Enter
Repeat step 3
To assign B Channel to group and assign more
B Channels to group shown on line 1
To assign B Channel to group and assign
B Channels to another group
■
If next group number is sequential
■
If next group number is not sequential
N e x t
Repeat step 3
E n t e r
E x i t
B Channels
R e p e a t steps 2-4
Repeat step 3
F 5
F1
Repeat steps 2–4
F10
Repeat step 3
F9
Repeat step 3
FI0
F5
F1
Repeat steps 2–4
PRI Facilities
4-73
Programming Procedures
Step Console
5. When all entries are complete
■
To view all B Channels Inspct assigned to a group and exit
Exit
PC
PgDn
F 5
■
To exit without viewing
Exit
all B Channels assigned to a group
6. Select lines then identify
L i n e s
B-Channel group (1-69) Dial group to program and save entry number: [nn]
Enter
If programming more than one group, enter lowest group number.
7. Select specific lines/ trunks associated with the
20 line buttons on console or SPM screen
■
For logical IDs 1–20
■
For logical IDs 21–40
■
For logical IDs 41–60
■
For logical IDs 61–80
Lines 01-20
F 5
F 2
Type group number: [nn]
F10
F1
Lines 21-40
F2
Lines 41-60
F3
Lines 61-80
F4
4-74
PRI Facilities
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
8. Assign or remove line/trunk from group
■
To assign line/trunk to
Press line group button for each line/trunk to turn green LED on
Press function key for each line/trunk to make letter “G” appear on screen
■
To remove line/trunk from group
Press line button for each line/trunk to turn green LED off
Press function key for each line/trunk to erase letter “G”
Note: An alternate method for steps 7 and 8 is to select Entry
Mode (F6), identify the line/trunk (dial or type line/trunk number or logical ID), and select Enter (F10) or Next (F9) to assign the line/trunk to the group, or select Delete (F8) to delete the line/trunk from the group.
9. When all entries are complete
Exit
Exit
E x i t
Exit
F5
F5
F5
F5
PRI Facilities
4-75
Programming Procedures
Network Service
Step
1. Display B-Channel
Groups screen and select
Network Service
Console PC
LinesTrunks
PRI
B-ChannlGrp
NetworkServ
F4
F6
F2
F3
2. Identify B-Channel group Dial group
(1-69) and save entry number: [nn]
Enter
Type group number: [nn]
F10
3. Specify service
■
For Megacom WATS
■ For Megacom 800
■
■
■
For ACCUNH switched 56/64 digital service (SDS)
For Software Defined
Network (SDN)
To specify another service
4. Save choice
MegacomWATS
F1
Megacom800 F2
ACCUNET SDS
F3
SoftDefNetw
F4
Other
Enter
F6
F10
4-76
PRI Facilities
Programming Procedures
Step Console
PC
5. If you selected Megacom
WATS, Megacom 800,
ACCUNET SDS, or SDN in step 3, exit
If you selected Other in step 3, enter 5-digit binary code used to represent service, save entry and exit
Exit
Exit
F5
F5
Exit
F5
Dial binary code: [nnnnn]
E n t e r
Type binary code: [nnnnn]
F10
E x i t
F 5
Exit
F 5
E x i t
F 5
Copy Telephone Number to Number to Send
Note: You can use this procedure instead of the Telephone
Number to Send procedure to specify that the Telephone
Number to Send should be copied from the Telephone Number assigned to each channel in the B-Channel group.
Step
1. Display B-Channel
Groups screen and select
Com Number
2. Identify B-Channel group
(1-69) and save entry
Console
PC
LinesTrunks
PRI
B-ChannlGrp
Copy Number
F4
F6
F2
F4
Dial Group Type group number: [nn] number: [nn]
Enter
F10
PRI Facilities
4-77
Programming Procedures
Step
3. Specify whether telephone number should be copied to number to send
■
■
To specify that telephone number is copied as the telephone number to send when an outgoing call is made on each channel
To specify that telephone number is not copied as the telephone number to send and/or no number to send is sent when outside calls are made on each channel
Console
Copy PhnNum to
NumToSend
Do not Copy
Phone
Number
PC
F1
F2
4-78
PRI Facilities
Programming Procedures
Step
4. Save choice and either program more B-Channel groups or exit
To save choice and specify copy telephone number to telephone number to send for another B-Channel group
■
If next group number is sequential
■
If next group number is not sequential
To save choice and exit
when all entries are complete
Console
Next
PC
F 9
Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3
Enter
Copy Number
R e p e a t steps 2–4
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
E x i t
F10
F 4
R e p e a t steps 2–4
F10
F 5
F5
F 5
PRI Facilities
4-79
Programming Procedures
Telephone Number to Send
Note: You can use the Copy Telephone Number to Telephone
Number to Send procedure instead of this procedure to specify that the Telephone Number to Send should be copied from the
Telephone Number assigned to each channel in the B-Channel group.
Step
1. Display PRI screen and
select Phone Number to
Send
Console PC
LinesTunnks
PRI
NumbrToSend
F 4
F 6
F 3
2. Identify line/trunk and save entry
Dial line/trunk no. (801-880) or # + Iogical ID
Enter
Type line/trunk no. (801-880), or # + logical ID
F10
If you are programming more than one line/trunk, enter lowest number.
3. Assign telephone number Dial telephone Type telephone to line (up to 12 digits, any number: [nnn number: [nnn combination of 0 and 9) nnnnnnnnn] n n n n n n n n n ]
4. Save entry and either program another PRI line/trunk or exit
■
To save entry and assign telephone number to send to another PRI line/trunk:
If next line/trunk
Next
F 9
number is sequential
Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3
Continued
4-80
PRI Facilities
Programming Procedures
Step
4. Continued
If next line/trunk number is not sequential
■
To save entry and exit when all entries are complete
Console PC
Enter
NumbrToSend
Repeat
steps 2-4
F10
F3
R e p e a t steps 2–4
Enter
F10
Exit
Exit
F5
F5
Test Telephone Number
Step
Console
PC
1. Display PRI screen and select Test Telephone
Number
LinesTrunks
PRI
Test TelNum
F4
F6
F4
PRI Facilities
4-81
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
2. Identify slot number Dial slot Type slot
(1-17) that contains 100D number: [nn] number: [nn] module and save entry
Enter
F10
If programming more than one module, enter lowest slot number.
3. Assign test telephone number to DS1 module
Dial telephone Type telephone number: [nnn number: [nnn
(up to 12 digits, any com- nnnnn nnnn] nnnnnnnnn] bination of 0 through 9)
4. Save entry and either program another 100D module or exit
■
To save entry and assign test telephone number to another
100D module:
If next slot sequential number is
If next slot number is not sequential
■
To save entry and exit when all entries are complete
Next
Repeat
Enter
step
3
Test TelNum
Repeat steps 2-4
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
F 9
Repeat step 3
F10
F4
Repeat steps 2–4
F10
F 5
F 5
4-82
PRI Facilities
Programming Procedures
Timers and Counters
Step
1. Display PRI screen,
Protocol screen, and select Timers
Console PC
LinesTrunks
PRI
Protocol
Timers
F 4
F 6
F 6
F 1
Type slot 2. Identify slot number Dial slot
(1-17) that contains 100D number: [nn] module and save entry
Enter
3. If no change to setting for Go to step 6
T200 Timer
To change T200 Timer setting, display T200
Timer screen
T200 Timer
F10
Go to step 6
F 1
4. Erase current setting and Drop enter new setting
Alt+P
Dial number of Type number of
(1000-3000 ms) ms: [nnnn] ms: [nnnn]
PRI Facilities
4-83
Programming Procedures
Step
5. Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI
Settings menu
■
Tosave entry and change T200 Timer for another 100D module:
If next slot number is sequential
If next slot number is not sequential
Console
Next
Repeat step 4
Enter
Exit
Timers
Repeat steps 2–5
Enter
■
To save entry and return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete
6. If no change to setting for Go to step 9
T203 Timer
T203 Timer
To change T203 Timer setting, display T203
Timer screen
PC
F9
Repeat step 4
F10
F5
F1
Repeat steps 2-5
F10
Go to step 9
F2
7. Erase current setting and Drop enter new setting (1-60
Alt+P
Dial number of Type number of see) seconds: [nn] seconds: [nn]
4-84
PRI Facilities
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
8. Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI
Settings menu
■
Tosave entry and change T203 Timer for another 100D module:
If next slot sequential number is
N e x t
F 9
Repeat step 7 Repeat step 7
If next slot number is not sequential
Enter
Exit
F10
F5
Repeat steps 6–8
Repeat steps 6-8
Enter
F10
■
To save entry and return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete
9. If no change to setting for Go to step 12
Go to step 12
N200 counter
N200Counter
F3
To change N200 counter setting, display N200
Counter screen
10. Erase current setting and Drop enter new setting (1-5)
Alt+P
Dial number of Type number of transmissions: transmissions:
[n] [n]
PRI Facilities
4-85
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
11. Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI
Settings menu
■
■
To save entry and change N200 Counter for another 100D module:
If next slot sequential number is
Next
Repeat step 10 Repeat step 10
If next slot number is
Enter
not sequential
Exit
Repeat steps Repeat steps
9–11
9–11
Enter
F10
To save entry and return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete
F10
F 5
12. If no change to setting for Go to step 15
N201 Counter
N201Counter
To change N201 counter setting, display N201
Counter screen
Go to step 15
F4
13. Erase current setting and Drop enter new setting
Alt+P
Dial number of Type number of
(16-260) octets: [nnn] octets: [nnn]
4-86
PRI Facilities
Programming Procedures
Step Console
PC
14. Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI
Settings menu
■
To save entry and change N201 Counter for another 100D module:
If next slot number is
Next
sequential Repeat step 13
If next slot number is not sequential
■
To save entry and return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete
Enter
E x i t
Repeat steps 12-14
Enter
F9
Repeat step 13
F10
F5
Repeat steps 12-14
F10
15. If no change to setting for Go to step 18
Go to step 18
K Counter
K Counter
F 6
To change K Counter setting, display K
Counter screen
16. Erase current setting and Drop
Alt+P
enter new setting (1–15) Dial number of Type number of frames: [nn] frames: [nn]
PRl Facilities
4-87
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
17. Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI
Settings menu
■
To save entry and change K Counter for another 100D module:
If next slot number is sequential
If next slot number is not sequential
Next
F 9
Repeat step 16 Repeat step 16
Enter
Exit
Repeat steps 15-17
Enter
F10
F5
Repeat steps 1 5–17
F10
■
To save entry and return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete
18. If no change to setting for Go to step 21
Go to step 21
T303 Timer
T303 Timer
F7
■
To change T303 Timer setting, display T303
Timer screen
19. Erase current setting and Drop enter new setting
Alt+P
Dial number of Type number of
(4-12 see) seconds: [nn] seconds: [nn]
4-88
PRI Facilities
Programming Procedures
Step Console
PC
20. Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI
Settings menu
■
To save entry and change T303 Timer for another 100D module:
If next slot number is sequential
If next slot number is not sequential
N e x t
F 9
Repeat step 19 Repeat step 19
Enter
Exit
F10
F5
Repeat steps Repeat steps
18-20 18-20
Enter
F10
■
To save entry and return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete
21. If no change to setting for Go to step 24
Go to step 24
T305 Timer
T305 Timer
F 8
■
To change T305 Timer setting, display T305
Timer-screen
22. Erase current setting and Drop
Alt+P
enter new setting (4-30 Dial number of Type number of sec) seconds: [nn] seconds: [nn]
PRI Facilities
4-89
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
23. Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI
Settings menu
■
To save entry and change T305 Timer for another 100D module:
If next slot number is
Next
sequential Repeat step 22
If next slot number is
Enter
not sequential
Exit
Repeat steps 21-23
■
To save entry and return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete
Enter
PC
F9
Repeat step 22
F1O
F5
Repeat steps 21-23
F1O
24. If no change to setting for Go to step 27
T308 Timer
To change T308 Timer, display T308 Timer s c r e e n
T308 Timer
Go to step 27
F9
25. Erase current setting and Drop
Alt+P
enter new setting (4–12
Dial number of Type number of sec) seconds: [nn] seconds: [nn]
4-90
PRI Facilities
Programming Procedures
Step
Console PC
26. Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI
Settings menu
■
To save entry and change T308 Timer for another 100D module:
If next slot number is s e q u e n t i a l
If next slot number is not sequential
Next
F 9
Repeat step 25 Repeat step 25
Enter
Exit
Repeat steps 24-26
F10
F 5
Repeat steps 24-26
■
To save entry and return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete
Enter
F10
27. If no change to setting for Go to step 30
Go to step 30
T309 Timer
T309 Timer
F10
To change T309 Timer setting, display T309
Timer screen
28. Erase current setting and Drop enter new setting
Alt+P
Dial number of Type number of
(30-120 sec) seconds: [nnn] seconds: [nnn]
PRI Facilities
4-91
Programming Procedures
Step
29. Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI
Settings menu
■
To save entry and change T309 Timer for another 100D module:
Console PC
If next slot number is sequential
If next slot number is not sequential
Next
Repeat step 28
Enter
Exit
Repeat steps 27-29
Enter
F9
Repeat step 28
F1O
F5
Repeat steps 27–29
F1O
■
To save entry and return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete
30. If no change to setting for Go to step 33
T310 Timer
To change T310 Timer More setting, display T310
T310 Timer
Timer screen
Go to step 33
PgUp
F1
31. Erase current setting and Drop
Alt+P
enter new setting (2–10
Dial number of Type number of sec) seconds: [nn] seconds: [nn]
4-92
PRI Facilities
Programming Procedures
Step
32. Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI
Settings menu
■
Tosave entry and change T310 Timer for another 100D module:
If next slot number is sequential
If next slot number is not sequential
Console PC
N e x t F 9
Repeat step 31 Repeat step 31
Enter
Exit
Repeat steps 30-32
F10
F5
Repeat steps 30-32
Enter
F10
■
To save entry and return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete
33. If no change to setting for Go to step 36 Go to step 36
T313 Timer
T313 Timer
F2
To change T313 timer setting, display T313
Timer screen
34. Erase current setting and Drop enter new setting
Alt+P
Dial number of Type number of
(4–12 sec) seconds: [nn] seconds: [nn]
PRI Facilities
4-93
Programming Procedures
Step Console
PC
35. Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI
Settings menu
■
To save entry and change T313 Timer for another 100D module:
If next slot number is sequential
If next slot number is not sequential
N e x t
F9
Repeat step 34 Repeat step 34
Enter
E x i t
Repeat steps 33-35
Enter
F10
F 5
Repeat steps 33-35
F10
■
To save entry and return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete
36. If no change to setting for Go to step 39 Go to step 39
T316 Timer
T316 Timer
F3
To change to setting for T316 Timer, display
T316 Timer screen
37. Erase current setting and Drop enter new setting
Alt+P
Dial number of Type number of
(30-120 sec) seconds: [nnn] seconds: [nnn]
4-94
PRI Facilities
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
38. Save entry and either program another 100D module or return to PRI
Settings menu
■
To save entry and change T316 Timer for another 100D module:
If next slot number is sequential
If next slot number is not sequential
■
To save entry and return to PRI settings menu when all entries are complete
Next
F 9
Repeat step 37 Repeat step 37
Enter
F10
Exit
F5
R e p e a t
Repeat steps 36-38 steps 36-38
Enter
F10
39. Exit
E x i t
E x i t
E x i t
E x i t
F 5
F 5
F 5
F 5
PRI Facilities
4-95
Programming Procedures
Terminal Equipment Identifier
Step
1. Display PRI screen,
Protocol screen, and select Terminal Equipment Identifier (TEI)
Console
LinesTrunks
PRI
Protocol
T E I
PC
F4
F6
F6
F2
2. Identify slot number
Dial slot Type slot
(1-17) that contains 100D number: [nn] number: [nn] module and save entry
Enter
F10
3. Erase current setting and Drop
AIt+P
enter new setting (0-63)
Dial ID number: Type ID
[ n n ] number: [nn]
4. Save entry and either program another 100D module or exit
■
To save entry and change terminal equipment identifier for another 100D module:
If next slot number is s e q u e n t i a l
If next slot number is not sequential
N e x t
F9
Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3
Enter
T E I
Repeat steps
2-4
F10
F 2
Repeat steps
2-4
■
To save entry and exit when all entries are c o m p l e t e
Enter
Exit
Exit
Exit
F10
F5
F5
F5
4-96
PRI Facilities
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Assign Lines/Trunks or Pools to Telephones
Step
1.
Display Assign
Lines/Trunks screen
2.
Identify telephone to program and save entry
Console PC
Extensions
LinesTrunks
F6
F1
Dial extension,
∗
+ slot and port, or # + logical ID, or press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
Type extension,
∗
+ slot and port, or # + logical ID
F10
3. Select specific lines/trunks associated with the 20 line buttons on the console or SPM screen
■
For logical
IDs 1–20
■
For logical
IDs 21–40
■
For logical IDs 41–60
■
For logical
IDs 61–80
Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
F1
F2
Lines 41-60
F3
Lines 61-80
F4
Telephones
4-97
Programming Procedures
Step
4. Assign or remove lines/trunks or pools
■
■
■
■
To assign a line/trunk line button to t e l e p h o n e
To remove a line/trunk button from telephone
To assign a pool button
To remove a pool button
Console
Press line button for each
Iine/trunk to turn green LED on
Press line button for each line/trunk to turn green LED off
Press line button for any trunk in pool until both red and green
LEDs are on
Press line button for any trunk in pool to turn green LED off (red LED remains on)
PC
Press function key for each line/trunk to make letter "G" appear on screen
Press function key for each line/trunk to erase letter "G"
Press function key for any trunk in pml until both letters
"R" and "G" appear on screen
Press function key for any trunk in pool to erase letter "G"
(letter "R" remains on screen)
Note: An alternate method for steps 3 and 4 is to select Entry
Mode (F6), identify the line/trunk (dial or type line/trunk number, logical ID, or slot and port no.), and select Enter (F10) to assign the line/trunk or pool to the telephone, or select Delete (F8) to remove the Iine/trunk or pool assignment from the telephone.
5. Exit
E x i t
E x i t
F 5
F 5
4-98
Telephones
Programming Procedures
Copy Line/Trunk Assignments
Step Console PC
1. Display Copy Lines
Extensions F6
screen
Line Copy
F2
2. To copy line assignments to individual telephones
To copy line assignments to sequentially numbered block of telephones
Single
Block
F1
F2
3. ldentify telephone to copy Dial extension, Type extension, line assignments from
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and and save entry port, or # + port, or # + logical ID, or
If copying from more than press DSS logical ID
one extension, enter
button for
lowest extension number. extension no.
Enter
F10
4. If Single was selected,
Dial extension, Type extension, identify telephone to copy
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and assignments to port, or # + port, or or logical ID, or press DSS logical ID no.
If Block was selected, button for extension no.
identify the first telephone in block of telephones to copy assignments to
Telephones
4-99
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
5. If Single was selected
■
Tosave entry and copy line assignments from extension on line 1 of screen to another individual telephone
Enter
Exit
Repeat step 4
F10
F5
Repeat step 4
■
To copy line assignments ftom another extension to an individual telephone
■
If next extension number is sequential
■
If next extension number is not sequential
If block was selected, save entry and identify last extension in block of telephones and save entry
N e x t
Repeat step 4
F9
Repeat step 4
Enter
E x i t
Single
Repeat steps
3 - 5
Enter
Dial extension,
∗
+ slot and port, or # + logical ID, or press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
F10
F5
F1
Repeat steps
3 - 5
F10
Type extensions,
∗
+ slot and port, or # + logical ID
F1O
6. When copy process is complete
Exit
Exit
E x i t
F5
F5
F5
4-100
Telephones
Programming Procedures
Intercom or System Access Button Assignment
Step
1. Display Centralized
Programming screen
Console
More
Cntr-Prg
PC
PgUp
F4
2. Identify telephone, save
Dial extension,
Type extension, entry, and start
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and centralized telephone port, or # + port, or # + programming process logical ID, or logical ID press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
Start
F10
F10
3. Select specific line buttons associated with the 20 line buttons on the console or PC with SPM
F7
F8
■
To select buttons 1-20
P a g e 1
P a g e 2
■
To select buttons
21-34
4. Indicate button wanted
Press button as System Access Ring, being
Voice, Originate Only or programmed
Shared button
5. Continue programming process
List
Feature
Press function key for button being programmed
F10
Telephones
4-101
Programming Procedures
Step Console
6. Assign the type of System
Access button
Note: To speed programming, dial codes are shown in this step.
Items can also be selected from the display.
■
■
To program System
Access Ring button
To program System
Access Voice button
Dial
∗16
Dial
∗16
Press button being programmed again
Enter
Dial
∗19
Dial
∗18
■
■
To program System
Access Originate
Only-Ring button
To program System
Access Originate
Only-Voice button
Dial being
∗18
Press button programmed again
Enter
Dial
∗19
Continued
PC
Type
∗16
Type
∗16
Shift + function key for button being programmed again
F10
Type
∗19
Type
∗18
Type
∗18
Shift + function key for button being programmed again
F10
Type
∗19
4-102
T e l e p h o n e s
Programming Procedures
Step
7. Exit
Console
6. Continued
■
To program System
Access Shared button
■
To remove System
Access Ring, Voice,
Outgoing Only, or
Shared assignment from button
■
To change current assignment for System
Access Voice,
Originate Only, or
Shared button from
Voice to Ring
Dial
∗17
+ extension no. of principal telephone
[nnnn] + button number of specific button being shared
[ n n ]
Dial
∗21
Type
∗17
+ extension no. of principal telephone
[nnnn] + button number of specific button being shared
[nn]
Type
∗21
Dial
∗∗19
Type
∗∗19
E x i t
PC
F5
Analog Multiline Telephones with BIS and/or HFAI
Capability
Step
1. Display BIS/HFAl extensions screen
Console
Extensions
B I S / H F A I
PC
F 6
F 8
Telephones
4-103
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
2. If a DSS is not attached Go to step 3 to system programming console or if programming with SPM
If a DSS is attached
■
To specify that telephone has
Press DSS button for each
BIS/HFAl capability telephone to turn red LED on.
Go to step 6
■
To specify that telephone does not have BIS/HFAl capability
Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED off.
Go to step 6
Go to step 3
3. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
■
Identify telephone to program
Dial extension, Type extension,
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID logical ID
4. To specify that telephone
has BIS/HFAl capability.
To specify that telephone
does not have BIS/HFAl capability
Enter
Delete
F10
F 8
4-104
Telephones
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
5. To program more telephones
Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 and 4
To view telephones with
Inspct
BIS/HFAl capability and 4
PgDn
6. Exit
E x i t
E x i t
F 5
F 5
Analog Multiline Telephones Requiring
Voice Announce to Busy Feature
Step
1. Display Voice Signal Pair screen
Console
Extensions
VoiceSignl
PC
F6
F10
2. If a DSS is not attached
Go to step 3 to system programming console or if programming with SPM
If a DSS is attached
■
To assign voice/voice Press DSS pairing for Voice
Announce to Busy feature button for either extension to turn red LED on
(red LED for other extension automatically goes on).
Go to step 6
Continued
Go to step 3
Telephones
4-105
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
2. Continued
■
To remove voice/voice Press DSS pairing for Voice
Announce to Busy feature button for either extension to turn red LED off
(red LED for other extension automatically goes off).
Go to step 6
3. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
■
Identify extension Dial extension,
Type extension, number for either pair
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and member port, or # + port, or # + logical ID logical ID
4. To assign voice/voice pairing for Voice
Announce to Busy feature
To remove voice/voice pairing for Voice
Announce to Busy feature
Enter
Delete
F10
F8
5. To program more telephones
Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 and 4 and 4
PgDn
To view extensions with
lnspct
voice/Voice pairing for
Voice Announce to Busy feature
4-106
Telephones
Programming Procedures
Step
6. Exit
Console
Exit
Exit
PC
F 5
F 5
Analog Multiline Telephones Requiring
Simultaneous Voice and Data Feature
Step
1. Display Data Voice/Data screen
Console
More
Data
PC
PgUp
F2
Voice/Data
2. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
If a DSS is attached
■
To assign voice/data pairing for
Simultaneous Voice and Data feature
Go to step 3
Press DSS button for either extension to turn red LED on
(red LED for other extension in pair automatically goes on).
Go to step 6
Continued
F1
Go to step 3
Telephones
4-107
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
2. Continued
■
To remove voice/data Press DSS pairing for
Simultaneous Voice button for either extension to and Data feature turn red LED off
(red LED for other extension automatically goes off).
Go to step 6
3. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
■
Identify extension Dial extension,
Type extension, number for either pair
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID logical ID
Enter
F10
4. To assign voice/data pairing for Simultaneous
Voice and Data feature
Delete
F8
To remove voice/data pairing for Simultaneous
Voice and Data feature
5. To program more telephones
To view extensions with
Simultaneous Voice and
Data feature
6. Exit
Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 and 4 and 4
Inspct PgDn
Exit
Exit
F5
F5
4-108
Telephones
Programming Procedures
Auxiliary Equipment
Music-on-Hold
Step
4. Exit
Console
1. Display Music-on-Hold screen
AuxEquip
MusicOnHold
F9
F1
2. Identify line jack where Dial line/trunk
Type line/trunk music source is connecno. (801–880), no. (801–.80),
∗ ted
∗
+ slot and
+ slot and port, port, or # + or # + logical ID logical ID
Enter
F10
3. To specify that line jack is used for Music-on-Hold feature
To remove Music-on-Hold assignment from line jack
Delete
F8
E x i t
PC
F 5
Note: If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials, you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay license fees to a third party such as the
American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI). Or, you can purchase a
Magic on Hold
® system, which does not require you to obtain such a license, from AT&T or your authorized dealer.
Auxiliary Equipment
4-109
Programming Procedures
Loudspeaker Paging
Step
Console
PC
1. Display Loudspeaker
Page screen
2. Identify line jack where loudspeaker paging system is connected
A u x E q u i p
Ldspkr Pg
F 9
F 2
Dial line/trunk
Type line/trunk no. (801-880), no. (801-880),
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID logical ID
3. To specify that line jack is used to connect loudspeaker paging system
■
To remove loudspeaker paging assignment from line jack
E n t e r
Delete
F 1 0
F8
4. To specify more
Repeat steps 2 Repeat steps 2 loudspeaker paging line and 3 and 3 jacks (maximum 3)
To view loudspeaker paging system line/trunk numbers and exit
Inspct
Exit
PgDn
F 5
To exit without viewing loudspeaker paging system line/trunk numbers
Exit
Exit
Exit
F 5
F 5
F 5
4-110
Auxiliary Equipment
Programming Procedures
Fax
Step
1. Display Fax screen and select Port
Console
A u x E q u i p
F a x
Port
PC
F9
F3
F1
2. If a DSS is not attached
Go to step 3 to system programming console or if programming with SPM
If a DSS is attached
■
To specify that station
Press DSS jack is used to connect button for each fax machine extension to turn red LED on.
Go to step 6
■
To remove fax Press DSS machine assignment button each extension to turn red LED
Go to step 6 off .
Go to step 3
3. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
■
Identify station jack Dial extension,
Type extension, where fax machine is
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and connected port, or # + port, or # + logical ID logical ID
Auxiliary Equipment
4-111
Programming Procedures
Step
4. To specify that line jack is used to connect fax machine
To remove fax machine assignment from line jack
Console
Enter
Delete
PC
F10
F8
5. To specify more fax ports Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3
(maximum 16) and 4 and 4
To view fax machine extension numbers
Inspct PgDn
6. Return to Fax menu
7. To assign or remove telephones to receive fax message-waiting indication, display
Message Waiting screen, and identify fax machine sending message-waiting indication
If you are programming more than one fax machine, enter lowest extension number.
Exit
F 5
Msg Waiting
F 2
Dial extension, Type extension,
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID, or logical ID press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
F10
4-112
Auxiliary Equipment
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
8. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
If a DSS is attached
■
To specify that telephone receives message-waiting indication
■
To remove messagewaiting indication from telephone
Go to step 9
Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED on.
Go to step 11
Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED off.
Go to step 11
Go to step 9
9. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or with SPM if programming
■
Identify receive waiting telephone to messageindication
Dial extension,
Type extension,
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID logical ID
Auxiliary Equipment
4-113
Programming Procedures
Step Console
10. To remove messagewaiting indication from telephone
■
To remove messagewaiting indication from more telephones for fax on line 1
■
D e l e t e
Repeat step
To remove messagewaiting indication from telephones for another fax
E x i t
Repeat steps 7–10
9
Enter
Repeat step 9
To assign messagewaiting indication to telephone and assign message-waiting indication to more telephones (maximum 4) for fax shown on line 1
To assign messagewaiting indication to telephone and assign message-waiting to telephones for another fax
■
If next extension number is sequential
■
If next extension number is not sequential
Next
Repeat step 9
Enter
Exit
Repeat steps 7–10
Continued
PC
F8
Repeat step 9
F5
Repeat steps 7–10
F10
Repeat step 9
F9
Repeat step 9
F10
F5
Repeat steps 7-10
4-114
Auxiliary Equipment
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
10. Continued
To assign messagewaiting indication to telephone and assign message-waiting to telephones for another fax
Enter
F10
11. To view telephones with
Inspct
receiving messagewaiting indication from fax on line 1
Exit
Return to Fax menu without viewing telephones with message-waiting
PgDn
F5
12. To change length of time
Threshold
before system is notified that fax message has arrived, display Fax
Threshold Duration screen
F 3
13. Erase currently
Drop Alt+P
programmed number of Dial number of Type number of seconds and specify new seconds: [nn] seconds: [nn] number of seconds
(0-30)
14. Save entry and exit
Enter
Exit
Exit
Exit
F10
F 5
F 5
F5
Auxiliary Equipment
4-115
Programming Procedures
Maintenance Alarms
Step Console PC
1. Display Maintenance
Alarms screen
A u x E q u i p
MaintAlarms
F 9
F 4
2. Specify line jack to
Dial line trunk Type line trunk connect to maintenance
(801-880),
∗
+ (801-880),
∗
+ alarm and save entry slot and port, or slot and port, or
# + logical ID # + logical ID
3. To assign maintenance alarm to line jack
Enter
To remove maintenance
Delete
alarm assignment from line jack
4. To program more maintenance alarms
5. Exit
Repeat steps 2 Repeat steps 2 and 3 and 3
Exit
F10
F 8
F 5
Voice Messaging System (VMS)/Automated
Attendant (AA) Options
Note: Use Calling Group Type procedure in Group Assigned
Features section to identify voice message interface (VMI) port and specify if VMI port is integrated or generic.
Step
1. Display VMS/AA menu
Console
AuxEquip
VMS/AA
PC
F 9
F 6
4-116
Auxiliary Equipment
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
2. If no change to number of Go to step 4
Go to step 4 rings before transfer
To change number of rings before transfer, display Transfer Retn
Interval screen
TransferRtn
F1
3. To erase current setting,
Drop
specifv that calls are not Dial 0 transferred to the backup
Enter
position and save entry
Alt+P
Type 0
F10
To set number of rings
(1-9) before calls are transferred to the backup
Dial number of Type number of rings: [n]
Enter
rings: [n]
F10
position and save entry
4. If VMS/AA equipment is
Go to step 6 generic or no change to touch-tone duration
Go to step 6
TT Duration
F2
If VMS/AA equipment is integrated, to change current setting for touchtone duration, display
Touch-Tone Duration screen
5. Erase current setting,
Drop Alt+P
enter new setting (50– Dial number of Type number of
200ms, in multiples of 25), milliseconds: milliseconds: and save entry [nnn] [nnn]
Enter
F10
Auxiliary Equipment
4-117
Programming Procedures
Step
6. If VMS/AA equipment is generic or no change to touch-tone intewal
If VMS/AA equipment is integrated, to change current setting for touchtone interval, display
Touch-Tone Interval screen
Console
Go to step 8
TT Interval
PC
Go to step 8
F 3
7. Erase current setting,
Drop
A l t + P
enter new setting (50-200 Dial number of Type number of ms, in multiples of 25), milliseconds: milliseconds and save entry
[ n n n ]
Enter
[nnn]
F10
8 . E x i t
Exit
Exit
F 5
F5
4-118
Auxiliary Equipment
Programming Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Pool Dial Out Code (Hybrid/PBX only)
Step Console
PC
1. Display Pool Dial-Out
Code screen
Extensions
Dial Outcd
F 6
F 3
2. Identify telephone to
Dial extension,
Type extension, program and save entry
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID, or press DSS logical
ID button for extension no.
Enter
F10
3. Identify pool dial-out code Dial pool dial-
Type pool dialto allow or restrict out code: [nnn] out code: [nnn] telephone from using
4. To allow dial-out code use
Enter
F10
To restrict dial-out code use
Delete
F8
Optional Telephone Features
4-119
Programming Procedures
Step
5. To allow or restrict extension shown on line 1 from using another pml dial-out code
To assign or remove pool dial-out restriction from another telephone
If next extension number is sequential
If next extension number is not sequential
Console
PC
Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 and 4 and 4
N e x t
F 9
Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 and 4 and 4
Exit
Dial Outcd
F 5
F 3
Repeat steps Repeat steps
2-5
2-5
6. Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
F 5
F 5
F 5
4-120
Optional Telephone Features
Programming Procedures
Call Restrictions
Step Console
Toll
R e s t r i c t
PC
1. Display Call Restriction screen
Extensions
Restriction
F6
F4
2. Identify telephone to Dial extension,
Type extension, program and save entry
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID or logical ID press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
F10
3. Assign or remove restrictions
■
To remove restrictions
■
To restrict telephones from making outside calls (local and toll)
Unrestricted
O u t w a r d
R e s t r i c t
F1
F2
F3
■
To restrict telephones from making toll calls
4. Save choice and either assign or remove more restrictions or exit
■
To save choice and assign or remove restrictions to another extension:
Continued
Optional Telephone Features
4-121
Programming Procedures
Step
Console PC
4. Continued
If next extension
N e x t
number is sequential Repeat step 3
■
If next extension number is not sequential
To save choice and exit when all entries are complete
Enter
Restriction
Repeat steps
2-4
Enter
Exit
F9
Repeat step 3
F10
F4
Repeat
2-4 steps
F10
F5
Copy Call Restrictions
Step
1. Display Restriction screen
2. To copy calling restrictions to an individual telephone
To copy calling restrictions to a sequentially numbered block of telephones
Console PC
Extensions
RestrctCopy
Single
F6
F6
F1
Block
F2
I
4-122
Optional Telephone Features
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
3. Identify telephone to copy Dial extension, Type extension, calling restrictions from
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and and save entry port, or # + port, or # + logical ID, or logical ID
If copying from more than press DSS
one extension, enter
button for lowest extension number. extension no.
Enter F10
4. If Single was selected, identify telephone to copy assignments to or
Dial extension, Type extension,
✱
+ slot and port, or # + logical ID or press DSS
✱
+ slot and port, or # + logical ID button for extension no.
If Block was selected, identify the first telephone in block of telephones to copy assignments to
5. If Single was selected
■
To save entry and copy restrictions from same extension on line 1 of screen to another individual telephone
Continued
Enter
Exit
Repeat step 4
F10
F5
Repeat step
4
Optional Telephone Features
4-123
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
5. Continued
■
To copy line assignments from another extension to an individual telephone
■
If next extension number is sequential
■
If next extension number is not sequential
If block was selected, save entry and identify last extension in block of telephones and save entry
Next
Repeat step 4
Enter
Exit
Single
Repeat steps
3-5
Enter
Dial extension,
∗
+ slot and port, or # + logical ID, or press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
6. When copy process is complete
E x i t
E x i t
E x i t
PC
F 9
Repeat step 4
F10
F 5
F1
Repeat steps
3-5
F10
Type extension,
∗
+ slot and port, or # + logical ID
F10
F 5
F 5
F 5
4-124
Optional Telephone Features
Programming Procedures
Forced Account Code Entry
Step
1. Display Forced Account
Code Entry screen
Console
Extensions
Account
PC
F6
F7
2. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
If a DSS is attached
To assign Forced
Account Code Entry to telephones
To remove forced account code entry from telephones
Go to step 3
Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED on.
Go to step 6
Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED off.
Go to step 6
Go to step 3
3. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
■
Identify telephone to program
Dial extension, Type extension,
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + logical ID port, or # + logical ID
Optional Telephone Features
4-125
Programming Procedures
Step Console
P c
4. To assign Forced Account
Code Entry to telephone
To remove Forced
Account Code Entry from telephone
Enter
Delete
F10
F 8
5. To program telephones more
Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 and 4
To view telephones with
Inspct
Forced Account Code
Entry and 4
PgDn
6. Exit
Exit
Exit
F5
F5
Microphone Operation
Step
1. Display Extensions screen and select
Disable
Microphone
Console
Extensions
More
Mic Disable
PC
F6
PgUp
F 7
4-126
Optional Telephone Features
Programming Procedures
Step
2. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
If a DSS is attached
■
To disable telephone microphone
Console
Go to step 3
PC
Go to step 3
■
To enable telephone microphone
Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED on.
Go to step 6
Press DSS button to turn red LED off.
Go to step 6
3. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
■
Identify telephone to program
Dial extension, Type Extension,
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID logical ID
Enter
F10
4. To disable telephone microphone
To enable telephone microphone
5. To program more telephones
To view telephones disabled microphones
6. Exit
Delete
F 8
Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 and 4
Inspct
Exit
E x i t
and 4
PgDn
F5
F5
Optional Telephone Features
4-127
Programming Procedures
Remote Call Forwarding
Step Console
PC
1. Display Extensions screen
Extensions
and select Remote Call
More
Forwarding
F 6
PgUp
Remote Frwd
F8
2. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
If a DSS is attached
Go to step 3
■
To allow telephone to forward calls to outside numbers
Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED on.
Go to step 6
■
To restrict telephone from forwarding calls to outside numbers
Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED off.
Go to step 6
Go to step 3
3. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
■
Identify telephone to program
Dial extension, Type extension,
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and port, or # + port, or # + logical ID logical ID
4-128
Optional Telephone Features
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
4. To allow telephone to forward calls to outside numbers
Enter
To restrict telephone from
Delete
forwarding calls to outside numbers
PC
F10
F 8
5. To program more telephones
Repeat steps 3 Repeat steps 3 and 4
To view telephones with
Inspct
Remote Call Forwarding capability and 4
PgDn
6. Return to Extensions menu
Exit F 5
7. To specify that individual telephones are allowed to forward calls received on personal line buttons to an outside number, display
Remote Call Forward screen
Extensions
More
Remote Frwd
F 6
PgUp
F 8
8. Identify line/trunk on
Dial line/trunk
Type line/trunk which to allow telephone no. (801–880), no.. (801–880), to forward calls and save
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and entry port, or # + port, or # + logical ID, logical ID
Enter
F 1 0
Optional Telephone Features
4-129
Programming Procedures
Step
Console PC
9. Identify telephone allowed Dial extension, Type extension, to forward calls to outside
∗
+ slot and
∗
+ slot and numbers on line/trunk on port, or # + port, or # + line 1 (maximum 1 per logical ID, or logical ID line/trunk) press DSS button for extension no.
10. To restrict telephone from forwarding calls to outside numbers on line/ trunk shown on line 1
■
To restrict telephones from forwarding calls to outside numbers on another line/trunk
To allow telephone to forward calls to outside numbers on line/trunk and assign telephones to another line/trunk
■
If next line/trunk number is sequential
■
If next line/trunk number is not sequential
Delete
Exit
Remote Frwd
Repeat steps
8-10
Next
Repeat step 9
Enter
Exit
Remote Frwd
Repeat steps
8-10
Continued
F8
F 5
F 8
Repeat steps
8-10
F9
Repeat step 9
F10
F 5
F8
Repeat steps
8-10
4-130
Optional Telephone Features
Programming Procedures
Step Console
10. Continued
■
To allow telephone to
Enter
forward calls to outside numbers when all entries are compiete
11. Exit
Exit
PC
F10
F5
Optional Telephone Features
4-131
Programming Procedures
Optional Operator Features
Operator Hold Timer
Step
1. Display Operator screen and select Hold Timer
Console
Operator
Hold Timer
PC
F 3
F 3
2. Erase current number of
Drop
seconds and enter new
Alt+P
Dial number of Type number of number of seconds seconds: [nnn] seconds: [nnn]
3. Save entry and exit
Enter
E x i t
F10
F 5
Direct Line Console Automatic Hold Option
Step
1. Display Operator screen and select DLC Hold
Console
O p e r a t o r
DLC Hold
PC
F 3
F 4
2. Enable or disable
Automatic Hold
■
To enable Automatic
Hold
■
To disable Automatic
Hold
3. Save entry and exit
Auto Hold
Enable
Auto Hold
Disable
F 1
F 2
E n t e r
E x i t
F 1 0
F5
4-132
Optional Operator Features
Programming Procedures
Hold Return
Step
1. Display Queued Call screen and select Hold
Return
Console
Operator
Queued call
Hold Rtrn
2. Set Hold Return
■
To specify that calls hold return to QCC queue when hold timer expires twice
■
To specify that calls remain on hold on
QCC position after hold timer expires twice
Return to
Queue
Remain on
Hold
3. Save entry and exit
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
PC
F3
F2
F1
F1
F2
F10
F5
F 5
Optional Operator Features
4-133
Programming Procedures
Automatic Hold or Release
Step
1. Display Queued Call screen and select
Automatic Hold or
Release
Console
Operator
Queued Call
H o l d
Release
2. Specify that in-progress calls are automatically put on hold, or automatically disconnected when another call button is pressed
■
For Automatic Hold
Auto Hold
■
For Automatic Release
Auto
Release
3. Save choice and exit
Enter
Exit
PC
F 3
F 2
F 2
F1
F2
F10
F 5
4-134
Optional Operator Features
Programming Procedures
Queue Over Threshold
Step
1. Display Queued Call screen and select Queue
Over Threshold
3. Save entry and exit
Console
Operator
Queued Call
Threshold
Enter
Exit
Exit
PC
F 3
F 2
F 3
2. To erase current number of calls and specify whether QCC operators are notified when calls in queue are over threshold
■
To specify maximum number of calls allowed in QCC queue
(0-99) before operators are notified
■
To specify that operators are not notified when calls are in QCC queue are over threshold
Drop
Dial 0
Alt + P
Dial number calls: [nn] of Type number of calls: [nn]
Type 0
F10
F5
F5
Optional Operator Features
4-135
Programming Procedures
Elevate Priority
Step
1. Display Queued Call screen and select Elevate
Priority
Console
O p e r a t o r
Queued Call
ElvatePrior
PC
F 3
F 2
F 4
2. Erase currently programmed number of seconds, and specify call priority interval
■
To specify calls are not reprioritized
■
To specify length of time (5–30 seconds) before calls are reprioritized
Drop
Dial 0
Alt+P
Type 0
Dial number of Type number of seconds: [nn] seconds: [nn]
3. Save entry and exit
Enter
Exit
Exit
F10
F5
F5
4-136
Optional Operator Features
Programming Procedures
Calls-In-Queue Alert
Step Console PC
1. Display Queued Call screen and select In
Queue Alert
Operator
Queued Call
InQue Alert
F3
F2
F6
2 . Identify operator position
Dial extension, Type extension to receive In Queue Alert
✱
+ slot and
✱
+ slot and and save entry port, or # + logical ID, or press DSS port, or # + logical ID
F10
button for
Enter
3. Specify In Queue Alert for operator
■
To specify that operator receives in queue alert
■
To specify that operator does not receive in queue alert
InQue Alert
Enable
InQue Alert
Disable
F1
F2
Optional Operator Features
4-137
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
4. Save entry and either program another operator position or exit
To save entry and assign In Queue Alert to another operator position
■
If next extension number is sequential
■
If next extension number is not sequential
N e x t
Repeat step 3
Enter
InQue Alert
Repeat steps
2-4
To save entry and exit when all entries are complete
To view operator positions receiving In
Queue alert and exit
Enter
Exit
Exit
Inspct
then
Exit
Exit
PC
F9
Repeat step 3
F10
F6
Repeat steps
2-4
F10
F5
F5
PgDn
then
F5
F5
4-138
Optional Operator Features
Programming Procedures
Call Type Queue Priority Level
Step
1. Display Queued Call screen and select Call
Types
Console
Operator
Queued Call
Call Types
PC
F3
F2
F7
2. Select type of call to program and display queue priority assignment screen for call type selected
■
If Group Coverage is not selected
Press button next to choice
■
If Group Coverage is selected
Priority
GrpCoverage
Priority
Dial coverage group number
(1-30): [nn]
Enter
Press function key next to choice
F1
F8
F1
Type coverage group number
(1-30): [nn]
F10
3. Erase current priority level Drop and assign new priority level (1-7)
Dial queue
Alt+P
Type queue priority level: [n] priority level: [n]
4. Save and exit
Enter
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
F10
F5
F5
F 5
F 5
Optional Operator Features
4-139
Programming Procedures
QCC Operator to Receive Call Types
Step
1. Display Queued Call screen and select Call
Types
Console
Operator
Queued Call
Call Types
2. Select type of call to program and display QCC operator assignment screen for call type selected
■
If Group Coverage is not selected
Press button next to choice
PC
F3
F2
F7
■
If Group Coverage is selected
Operator
GrpCoverage
Operator
Dial coverage group number
(1-30): [nn]
Enter
3. If a DSS is not attached
Go to step 4 to system programming console or if programming with SPM
Continued
Press function key next to choice
F2
F8
F2
Type coverage group number
(1-30): [nn]
F10
Go to step 4
4-140
Optional Operator Features
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
3. Continued
If a DSS is attached
■
To specify that
Press DSS operator receives call button for each types operator position to turn red LED on.
Go to step 6
■
To specify that operator does not receive call type
Press DSS button for each operator position to make red LED flash.
Go to step 6
4. If a DSS is not attached
Dial extension,
Type extension, to system programming
✱
+ slot and
✱
+ slot and console or if programming port, or # + port, or # + with SPM, identify logical ID logical ID operator position to or or program
Dial 0 for
Type 0 for initiating initiating operator operator
F10
5. To specify that operator position receives the call type
Enter
To prevent operator number from receiving the call type
Delete
F 8
Optional Operator Features
4-141
Programming Procedures
Step
6. To program more telephones
To exit when all entries a r e c o m p l e t e
Console
Repeat steps 4 and 5
E x i t
E x i t
E x i t
E x i t
E x i t
PC
Repeat steps 4 and 5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
Message Center Operation
Step
1. Display Queued Call screen and select
Message Center
Console
Operator
Queued Call
Msg Center
PC
F 3
F 2
F 8
2. Identify operator position Dial extension,
Type extension to assign or remove as
✱
+ slot and
✱
+ slot and
QCC Message Center port, or # + logical ID, or port, or # + logical ID press DSS button for extension no.
F10
3. To assign operator position as QCC Message
Center
To remove operator position as QCC message center
E n t e r
D e l e t e
F 8
4-142
Optional Operator Features
Programming Procedures
Step
Console PC
4. To program more operator Repeat steps 2 Repeat steps 2 positions and 3 and 3
To exit
Exit
F 5
Exit
F5
Exit
F5
Automatic or Manual Extended Call Completion
PC
Step
1. Display Queued Call screen and select
Automatic or Manual
Extended Call Completion
Console
Operator
Queued Call
ExendComplt
2. Select type of call completion for operator using DSS console
■
To provide QCC operator with onetouch extended call completion
■
To require that QCC operator extend calls by pressing the
Release button in addition to DSS button
3. Save choice and exit
Automatic
C o m p l e t e
M a n u a l
Complete
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
F3
F2
F9
F1
F 2
F10
F5
F5
Optional Operator Features
4-143
Programming Procedures
Return Ring
Step
1. Display Queued Call screen and select Return
Ring
Console
Operator
Queued Call
Return Ring
PC
F 3
F2
F10
2. Erase currently
Drop
programmed number of
Dial number rings and specify new number of rings (1–15) rings: [nn] before an extended call returns
Alt+P
of Type number of rings: [nn]
3. Save entry and exit
Enter
Exit
Exit
F10
F5
F5
Position Busy Backup
Step
1. Display Queued Call screen and select QCC
Position Busy Backup
Console
Operator
Queued Call
More
QCC Backup
PC
F3
F2
PgUp
F1
4-144
Optional Operator Features
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
2. Identify calling group provide QCC queue backup to Dial calling group exten-
Type calling group extension no.: [nnnn] sion no.: [nnnn] or
Press DSS button for extension no.
Enter F10
3. To assign calling group as
Position Busy Backup
To remove calling group
Position Busy Backup
Delete
F 8
4. Exit
Exit
Exit
F5
F5
Optional Operator Features
4-145
Programming Procedures
Optional Group-Assigned
Features
Call Pickup Groups
Step
1. Display Call Pickup
Groups screen
Console
Extensions
Call Pickup
PC
F6
F9
2. Identify group to program Dial call pickup Type call
(1-30) and save entry group number: pickup group number: [nn]
F10
group number
[ n n ]
If programming more than
Enter
one group, enter lowest
3. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
If a DSS is attached
■
To assign telephones, to call pickup group
■
To remove telephone from call pickup group
Go to step 4
Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED on.
Go to step 6
Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED off.
Go to step 6
Go to step 4
4-146
Optional Group-Assigned Features
Programming Procedures
Step Console
PC
4. If a DSS is not attached to system programming
Dial extension,
Type extension,
✱
+ slot and console or if programming port, or # + with SPM, identify logical ID
✱
+ slot and port, or # + logical ID telephone to program
F8
5. To remove telephone from call pickup group
■
To remove more telephones from call pickup group on line 1
■
To remove telephones from another call pickup group
Delete
Repeat step 4
Exit
Call Pickup
Repeat steps
2-5
To assign telephone to
Enter
call pickup group and Repeat step 4 assign more telephones to call pickup group shown on line 1
To assign telephone to call pickup group and assign telephones to another call pickup group
■
If next group number is sequential
Continued
Next
Repeat step 4
Repeat step 4
F5
F9
Repeat steps
2-5
F1O
Repeat step 4
F9
Repeat step 4
Optional Group-Assigned Features
4-147
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
5. Continued
■
If next group number is not sequential
Enter
Exit
Call Pickup
Repeat steps
2-5
Inspct
6. When all entries are complete, to view telephones assigned to call pickup group
7. Exit
Exit
Exit
PC
F5
F5
F10
F 5
F9
Repeat steps
2-5
PgDn
Group Paging
Step
1. Display Group Page screen group extension number
Console
Extensions
More
Group Page
2. Identify paging group to Dial paging program and save entry group extension number:
If programming more than [nnnn] one group, enter lowest
Enter
PC
F6
PgUp
F2
Type paging group extension number:
[nnnn]
F 1 0
4-148
Optional Group-Assigned Features
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
3. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
If a DSS is attached
■
To assign telephones to paging group
■
To remove telephones from paging group
Go to step 4
Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED on.
Go to step 6
Press DSS button to turn red LED off.
Go to step 6
Go to step 4
4. If a DSS is not attached
Dial extension, Type extension, to system programming
✱
+ slot and
✱
+ slot and console or if programming port, or # + port, or # + with SPM, identify logical ID logical ID telephone to program
F8
5. To remove telephone from paging group
Delete
■
To remove more tele-
Repeat step 4 phones from paging group on line 1
■
To remove telephones
Exit
from another paging group
Group Page
Repeat steps
2-5
Continued
Repeat step 4
F5
F2
Repeat steps
2–5
Optional Group-Assigned Features
4-149
Programming Procedures
Step Console
PC
5. Continued
To assign telephone to paging group and assign more telephones to paging group shown on line 1
To assign telephone to paging group and assign telephones to another paging group
■
If next group extension number is sequential
■
If next group extension number is not sequential
Enter
F10
Repeat step 4
Repeat step 4
N e x t
F9
Repeat step 4
Repeat step 4
E n t e r
E x i t
Group Page
F10
F5
F2
Repeat steps Repeat steps
2-5
2-5
Inspct PgDn
When all entries are complete, to view telephones assigned to paging group
6 . E x i t
Exit
Exit
F5
F5
4-150
Optional Group-Assigned Features
Programming Procedures
Group Call Coverage
Step
1. Display Group Coverage screen
ConsoIe
Extensions
More
Group Cover
PC
F 6
PgUp
F3
2. Identify call coverage
Dial group group to program (1-30) number: [nn] and save entry
Enter
Type group number: [nn]
F10
3. If a DSS is not attached
Go to step 4 to system programming console or if programming with SPM
If a DSS is attached
■
To assign telephones
Press DSS as sender in call coverage group button for each telephone to turn red LED on.
Go to step 6
■
To remove telephone Press DSS from call coverage group button for each telephone to turn red LED off.
Go to step 6
Go to step 4
4. If a DSS is not attached Dial extension, Type extension, to system programming console or if programming port, or # + with SPM, identify
✱
+ slot and logical ID
✱
+ slot and port, or # + logical ID telephone to program
Optional Group-Assigned Features
4-151
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
5. To remove telephone from call coverage group
To remove more telephones from call coverage group on line 1
Delete
Repeat step 4
To remove telephones from another call coverage group
To assign telephone to call coverage group and assign more telephones to call coverage group shown on line 1
Enter
Repeat step 4
To assign telephone to call coverage group and assign telephones from another call coverage group
Exit
Group Cover
Repeat steps
2-5
■
If next group number is sequential
Next
Repeat step 4
■
If next group number is not sequential
Enter
Exit
Group Cover
Repeat steps
2-5
Inspct
When all entries are complete, to view telephones assigned call coverage group to
PC
F8
Repeat step 4
F5
F3
Repeat steps
2-5
F1O
Repeat step 4
F9
Repeat step 4
F10
F5
F3
Repeat steps
2-5
PgDn
4-152
Optional Group-Assigned Features
Programming Procedures
Step
6. Exit
Console
E x i t
E x i t
PC
F 5
F 5
Delayed Ring Interval for Individual or Group Cover
Buttons
Step
1. Display Delay Ring screen
Console
O p t i o n s
Delay Ring
PC
F 7
F 4
2. Erase currently
Drop Alt+P
programmed number of Dial number of Type number rings and specify new number of rings (1-6) rings: [n] rings: [n] before delayed ring of
3. Save entry and exit
Enter
Exit
F10
F5
Coverage Delay Interval
Step
1. Display Coverage Delay screen
Console
Options
M o r e
Cover Delay
PC
F 7
PgUp
F6
Optional Group-Assigned Features
4-153
Programming Procedures
Step
Console PC
2. Erase currently
Drop A l t + P
programmed number of
Dial number of Type number of rings and specify new rings: [n] rings: [n] number of rings (1-9) before delayed ring
3. Save entry and exit
Enter
Exit
F10
F5
Group Calling Member Assignments
Step
1. Display Group Calling menu and select
Members
Console
Extensions
More
Grp Calling
Members
PC
F 6
PgUp
F 4
F 9
2. Identify calling group to
Dial calling program and save entry group exten-
Type calling group extension no.: [nnnn] sion no.: [nnnn] or
Press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
F10
Go to step 4
3. If a DSS is not attached
Go to step 4 to system programming console or if programming with SPM
Continued
4-154
Optional Group-Assigned Features
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
3. Continued
If a DSS is attached
■
To assign telephones
Press DSS to calling group button for each telephone to turn red LED on.
Go to step 6
■
To remove telephone
Press DSS from calling group button for each telephone to turn red LED off.
Go to step 6
4. If a DSS is not attached to system programming
Dial extension,
Type extension,
✱
+ slot and
✱
+ slot and console or if programming port, or # + with SPM, identify logical ID port, or # + logical ID telephone to program
5. To remove telephone from calling group
■
To remove more telephones from calling group on line 1
Delete
Repeat step 4
F8
Repeat step 4
■
To remove telephones from another calling g r o u p
Exit
Members
F5
F9
Repeat steps
Repeat steps
2–5
2-5
Continued
Optional Group-Assigned Features
4-155
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
5. Continued
To assign telephone to calling group and assign more telephones to calling group shown on line 1
To assign telephone to calling group and assign telephones to another calling group
■
If next group extension number is sequential
■
If next group extension number is not sequential
Enter F10
Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4
Next
F 9
Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4
Enter
F10
Exit F5
Members F 9
Repeat steps Repeat steps
2-5 2-5
Inspct PgDn
When all entries are complete, to view telephones assigned to calling group
6. Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
F5
F5
F5
4-156
Optional Group-Assigned Features
Programming Procedures
Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool Assignment
Step Console
PC
1. Display Group Calling menu and select Line/Pool assignment
Extensions
More
Grp Calling
Line/Pool
F6
PgUp
F4
F10
2. Identify calling group to
Dial calling program and save entry group extension no.: [nnn ] sion no.: [nnnn] or
Press DSS
Type calling group extenbutton for extension no.
Enter
F10
3. Identify line/trunk or pool
Dial line/trunk Type line/trunk to assign to calling group no. (801-880),
✱ no. (801-880),
✱
+ slot and port, + slot and port,
# + logical ID, # + logical ID, or pool dial-out or pool dial-out code code
F8
4. To remove line/trunk or pool from calling group
Delete
■
To remove more lines/ Repeat step 3 trunks or pools from calling group on line 1
■
To remove lines/trunks or pools from another calling group
Exit
Line/Pool
Repeat steps
2-4
Continued
Repeat step 3
F5
F10
Repeat steps
2-4
Optional Group-Assigned Features
4-157
Programming Procedures
Step Console
4. Continued
To assign line/trunk or pool to calling group and assign more lines/trunks or pools to calling group shown on line 1
To assign line/pool or pool to calling group and assign lines/trunks or pods to another calling group
■
If next group extension number is sequential
■
If next group extension number is not sequential
Enter
Repeat step 3
Next
Repeat step 3
Enter
Exit
Line/Pool
Repeat steps
2-4
To assign iine/trunk or pool to calling group when all entries are complete
Enter
To view lines/trunks or pools assigned to calling group
Inspct
5. Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
PC
F1O
Repeat step 3
F9
Repeat step 3
F10
F5
F10
Repeat steps
2-4
F10
PgDn
F5
F5
F5
4-158
Optional Group-Assigned Features
Programming Procedures
Hunt Type
Step
1. Display Group Calling menu and select Hunt
T y p e
Console
Extensions
M o r e
Grp Calling
Hunt Type
PC
F6
PgUp
F4
F 1
2. Identify calling group to
Dial calling program and save entry group exten-
Type calling group extension no.: [nnnn] sion no.: [nnnn] or
Press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
F10
3. Specify hunt type
■
To specify circular hunt type
■
To specify linear hunt type
Circular
Linear
F1
F2
Optional Group-Assigned Features
4-159
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
4. Save entry and either program another calling group or exit
■
To save entry and assign hunt type for another calling group:
■
If next group extension number is sequential
N e x t
F 9
Repeat step 3
Repeat step 3
■
If next group extension number is not sequential
Enter
F 1 0
Repeat steps 2 Repeat steps 2 and 3 and 3
■
To save entry and exit when all entries are complete
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
E x i t
F 1 0
F 5
F 5
F 5
4-160
Optional Group-Assigned Features
Programming Procedures
Group Calling Delay Announcement
Step
Console
PC
1. Display Group Calling menu and select Delay
Announcement
Extensions F 6
More
PgUp
Grp Calling
F4
DelayAnnce
F2
2. Identify calling group to
Dial group
Type group program and save entry calling extencalling extension no.: [nnnn] sion no. [nnnn] or
Press DSS button for extension no.
Enter F10
3. Identify announcement
Dial extension,
Type extension, device to assign to calling
✱
+ slot and
✱
+ slot and group port, # + logical port, or # +
ID, or press logical ID
DSS button for extension no.
Enter F10
Delete
F8
4. To remove delay announcement device from calling group
■
To remove delay announcement from another calling group
Exit
DelayAnnce
Repeat steps
2 - 4
F5
F2
Repeat steps
2-4
Continued
Optional Group-Assigned Features
4-161
Programming Procedures
Step
4. Continued
To assign delay announcement device to calling group and assign delay announcement device to another calling group
■
If next group extension number is sequential
■
If next group extension number is not sequential
Console
Next
Repeat step 3
Enter
Exit
DelayAnnce
Repeat steps
2-4
5 . E x i t
PC
F9
Repeat step 3
F10
F5
F 2
Repeat steps
2-4
Exit
Exit
Exit
F5
F5
F5
4-162
Optional Group-Assigned Features
Programming Procedures
Group Coverage
Step
Console
1. Display Group Calling menu and select Group
Coverage
Extensions
More
Grp Calling
PC
F6
PgUp
F4
GrpCoverage
F3
2. Identify calling group to Dial group Type group program and save entry calling extencalling extension no.: [nnnn] sion no.: [nnnn] or
Press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
F10
3. ldentify coverage group Dial coverage Type coverage
(1-30) to assign to calling group number: group number: group as receiver
[ n n ]
[nn]
Enter
F10
4. To remove calling group
Delete
as receiver for coverage group
Repeat step 3
■
To remove calling group shown on line 1 as receiver for another coverage group
E x i t
■
To remove another calling group as receiver for coverage group
GrpCoverage
Repeat steps
2 - 4
F8
Repeat step 3
F5
F3
Repeat steps
2-4
Continued
Optional Group-Assigned Features
4-163
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
4. Continued
To assign calling group as receiver for coverage group and assign another calling group as receiver for another coverage group
■
■
If next calling group extension number is sequential
If next calling group extension number is not sequential
Next
Repeat step 3
Enter
GrpCoverage
Repeat steps
2-4
To assign calling group as
Enter
receiver when all entries are complete
5. Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
PC
F9
Repeat step 3
F10
F3
Repeat steps
2-4
F10
F5
F5
F5
4-164
Optional Group-Assigned Features
Programming Procedures
Group Calling Overflow and Threshold
Step
1. Display Group Calling menu and select Grour
Calling Overflow
Coverage
Console
Extensions
More
Grp Calling
Overflow
PC
F6
PgUp
F4
F6
2. Identify calling group to
Dial calling program and save entry group exten-
Type calling group extension no.: [nnnn] sion no.: [nnnn] or
Press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
F10
3. Identify calling group or Dial extension Type extension
QCC listed directory no.: [nnnn] no.: [nnnn] number to assign for backup coverage for calling group or
Press DSS button for extension no.
4. To assign extension to provide backup coverage
To remove extension as backup coverage
E n t e r
Delete
F10
F 8
Optional Group-Assigned Features
4-165
Step
Console PC
5. To exit without changing Go to step 6 currently programmed number of calls
Go to step 6
To change currently
Drop Alt+P
programmed number of Dial number of Type number of calls before overflow, erase current number, calls: [nn]
Enter
calls: [nn]
F10
enter new number (1-99), and save entry
6. Exit
E x i t
E x i t
F5
F5
Group Calling Message Waiting Receiver
Step
1. Display Group Calling menu and select Message
Waiting Receiver
Console
Extensions
More
Group Calling
M e s s a g e
PC
F 6
PgUp
F 4
F 4
2. Identify calling group to Dial calling program and save entry group exten-
Type calling group extension no.: [nnnn] sion no.: [nnnn] or
Press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
F 1 0
4-166
Optional Group-Assigned Features
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
3. Identify telephone to assign as a message-
Dial extension,
✱
+ slot and
Type extension,
✱
+ slot and waiting receiver for calling port, # + logical port, or # + group ID, or press logical ID
DSS button for extension no.
4. To remove telephone as message-waiting receiver
■
To remove telephones as message-waiting receiver from another calling group
Delete
Exit
Message
Repeat steps
2-4
F8
F5
F4
Repeat steps
2-4
To assign telephone as message-waiting receiver and assign telephones as message-waiting receiver for another calling group
■
If next group extension number is sequential
■
If next group extension number is not sequential
N e x t
Repeat step 3
F 9
Repeat step 3
Enter
Exit
F10
F 5
Message
F4
Repeat steps
Repeat steps
2-4
2-4
5. Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
F 5
F 5
F 5
Optional Group-Assigned Features
4-167
Programming Procedures
Group Calling CalIs-In-Queue Alarm Threshold
Step
Console
PC
1. Display Group Calling menu and select In Queue
Alarm Threshold
Extensions
F6
More PgUp
Grp Calling
Queue Alarm
F4
F6
2. Identify calling group to
Dial calling program and save entry group exten-
Type calling group extension no.: [nnnn] sion no.: [nnnn] or
Press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
F10
3. Erase currently
D r o p Alt+P
programmed number of
Dial number of Type number of calls and specify number calls: [nn] of calls (1–99) before calls: [nn] group members are notified
4. Save entry and program another calling group or exit
■
To save entry and specify in-queue alarm threshold for another calling group
■
If next group
Next
F 9
extension number is Repeat step 3
Repeat step 3 sequential
Continued
4-168
Optional Group-Assigned Features
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
4. Continued
■
If next group extension number is not sequential
■
To save entry and exit when all entries are complete
Enter
Repeat steps
2-4
Enter
Exit
Exit
PC
F10
Repeat steps
2-4
F10
F5
F5
Group Calling External Alert for Calls-In-Queue
Alarm
Step
1. Display Group Calling menu and select External
Alert for In Queue
Alarm
Console
Extensions
More
Grp Calling
Xtnl Alert
PC
F6
PgUp
F4
F7
2. Identify calling group to Dial group Type group program and save entry calling extencalling extension no.: [nnnn] sion no.: [nnnn] or
Press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
F10
Optional Group-Assigned Features
4-169
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
3. Identify external alert to assign for in-queue alarm
Dial extension,
Type extension,
✱
+ slot and
✱
+ slot and for calling group port, # + logical port, or # +
ID, or press logical ID
DSS button for extension no.
F8
4. To remove external alert as in-queue alarm for calling group
■
To remove external alerts from another calling group
Delete
Exit
Xtnl Alert
Repeat steps
2 4
To assign external alert as in-queue alarm for another calling group
■
If next group extension number is sequential
N e x t
Repeat step 3
Enter
■
If next group extension number is not sequential
Exit
Xtnl Alert
Repeat steps
2-4
5. Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
F5
F7
Repeat steps
2 4
F9
Repeat step 3
F10
F5
F7
Repeat steps
2-4
F5
F5
F5
4-170
Optional Group-Assigned Features
Programming Procedures
Group Type
Step
1. Display Group Calling menu and select Group
Type
Console
Extensions
More
Grp Calling
PC
F6
PgUp
F4
More
Group Type
PgUp
F1
2. Identify calling group to
Dial calling program and save entry group exten-
Type calling group extension no.: [nnnn] sion no.: [nnnn] or
Press DSS button for extension no.
Enter
F10
3. Specify group type
■
To specify automatic log-in after power failure
■
To specify manual login after power failure
■
To specify that calling group is used for integrated voice message system and automatic log-in after power failure
Continued
Auto Login
Auto Logout
Integ VMI
F1
F2
F3
Optional Group-Assigned Features
4-171
Programming Procedures
Step Console
PC
3. Continued
■
To specify that calling group is used for generic voice message system and automatic log-in after power failure
Generic VMI
F4
4. Save entry and either program another calling group or exit
■
To save entry and assign group type to another calling group
■
■
If next group extension number is sequential
Next
Repeat step 3
If next group extension number is not sequential
Enter
Repeat steps
2-4
■
To save entry and exit when all entries are complete
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
F 9
Repeat step 3
F10
Repeat steps
2-4
F10
F5
F5
4-172
Optional Group-Assigned Features
Programming Procedures
System Features
Transfer Return Time
Step
1. Display Transfer screen and select Return time
2. Erase currently programmed number of rings and specify number of rings (1–9) before transferred calls are returned to originator
■
To specify that transferred calls are not returned to originator
Console PC
Options
Transfer
Return Time
F7
F 1
F1
Drop
Alt+P
Dial number of Type number of rings: [n] rings: [n]
Dial 0
Type 0
3. Save entry and exit
E n t e r
E x i t
E x i t
F10
F 5
F 5
One-Touch Transfer
Step
1. Display Transfer screen and select One-Touch
Transfer
Console
Options
Transfer
One Touch
PC
F7
F1
F2
System Features
4-173
Programming Procedures
Step
2. Enable or disable
One-Touch Transfer
■
To specify One-Touch
Transfer with manual completion (transfer is automatically initiated when Auto Dial or DSS button is pressed and user must press another button to complete transfer)
■
To specify One-Touch
Transfer with automatic completion (transfer is automatically initiated and completed when
Auto Dial or DSS button is pressed)
■
To specify One-Touch
Hold (call is put on hold when Auto Dial or
DSS button is pressed)
Console
Transfer
E n t e r
M a n u a l
T r a n s f e r
Enter
Automatic
Hold
3. Save entries and exit
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
PC
F1
F10
F1
F1
F10
F2
F 2
F10
F5
F 5
4-174
System Features
Programming Procedures
Transfer Audible
Step
1. Display Transfer screen and select Transfer
Audible
Console
Options
Transfer
Audible
2. Specify type of Transfer
Audible
■
To specify that caller being transferred hears Music-on-Hold
■
To specify that caller being transferred hears ringing
3. Save entry and exit
Music-On-
Hold
Ringback
Enter
Exit
Exit
F1
F2
F10
F5
F5
PC
F7
F1
F3
Note: If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials, you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay license fees to a third party such as the
American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI). Or, you can purchase a
Magic on Hold
® system, which does not require you to obtain such a license, from AT&T or your authorized dealer.
System Features
4-175
Type of Transfer
Step
1. Display Transfer screen and select Transfer Type
Console
Options
Transfer
Type
2. Specify type of transfer
■
To specify that
Intercom or System
Access Voice button is automatically selected
■
To specify that
Intercom or System
Access Ring button is automatically selected
Voice
A n n o u n c e
Ring
3. Save entry and exit
Enter
Exit
Exit
PC
F 7
F 1
F 4
F1
F2
F10
F 5
F 5
Camp-On Return Time
Step
1. Display Camp-On Return
Time screen
Console
Options
C a m p O n
PC
F7
F2
4-176
System Features
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
2. Erase currently programmed number seconds and specify number of seconds of
(30-300, in increments of
10) before camped-on call returns to operator
Drop A l t + P
Dial number of Type number of seconds: [nnn] seconds: [nnn]
3. Save entry and exit
Enter
Exit
F10
F5
Call Park Return Time
Step
1. Display Call Park Return
Time screen
Console
Options
CallParkRtn
PC
F7
F3
2. Erase currently
Drop Alt+P
programmed number of
Dial number of Type number of seconds and specify seconds: [nnn] seconds: [nnn] number of seconds (30-
300, in increments before parked call to originator of 10) returns
3. Save entry and exit
Enter
Exit
F10
F5
System Features
4-177
Programming Procedures
Automatic Callback Interval
Step
1. Display Automatic
Callback Interval screen
Console
Options
Callback
PC
F 7
F 6
2. Erase currently
Drop Alt + P
programmed number of Dial number of Type number of rings and specify new number of rings (1-6) rings: [n] rings: [n] before system cancels
Automatic Callback request
3. Save entry and exit
Enter
Exit
F10
F5
Extension Status
Step
1. Display Extension screen
Status
Console
Options
Ext Status
2. Specify Extension Status mode
■
To specify extension status for Hotel mode
■
To specify extension status for Calling
Group/CMS
Hotel
GrpCall/CMS
Text
F7
F7
F1
F2
4-178
System Features
Programming Procedures
Step
3. Save choice and exit
Console
Enter
Exit
PC
F10
F5
SMDR Call Report Format
Step Console
1. Display SMDR menu and select Call Report Format
Options
S M D R
F o r m a t
PC
F7
F8
F1
2. Specify format for SMDR call report printing
To specify that SMDR
Basic SMDR
call reports are printed in basic format
To specify that SMDR
ISDN SMDR
call reports are printed in ISDN format
F1
F2
3. Save choice and exit
Enter
Exit
Exit
F10
F5
F5
System Features
4-179
Programming Procedures
SMDR Call Length
Step
1. Display SMDR menu and select Call Length
Console
Options
SMDR
Call Length
PC
F7
F8
F2
2. Erase currently
Drop A l t + P
programmed number of
Dial number of Type number of seconds and set minimum seconds: [nnn] seconds: [nnn] time (0-255 seconds) before calls are recorded on SMDR reports
3. Save entry and exit
Enter
Exit
Exit
F10
F 5
F5
SMDR Calls Recorded on Call Report
Step Console
1. Display SMDR menu and F7 select Call Report
Options
S M D R
Call Report
PC
F7
F8
F3
4-180
System Features
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
2. Specify SMDR calls recorded
■
To specify that SMDR information is recorded for both incoming and outgoing calls
■
To specify that SMDR information is recorded only for outgoing calls
In/Out
Out Only
3. Save choice and exit
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
PC
F1
F2
F10
F 5
F 5
Inside Dial Tone
Step
1. Display Inside Dial Tone screen
Console
Options
Inside Dial
2. Specify Inside Dial Tone
■
To specify that system dial tone is different from outside dial tone
■
To specify that system dial tone is same as outside dial tone
3. Save entry and exit
Inside
Outside
Enter
E x i t
PC
F 7
F 9
F 1
F 2
F10
F5
System Features
4-181
Programming Procedures
Reminder Service Cancel
Step Console
1. Display Reminder Service
Cancel screen
O p t i o n s
Remind Svc
2. Erase currently programmed time of day and set or deactivate
Reminder Service Cancel
■
To deactivate
Reminder Service
Cancel
■
To set the time of day that all reminders are cancelled
Drop
Enter
Exit
Dial time of day: [hhmm]
E n t e r
E x i t
PC
F 7
F10
Alt + P
F10
F5
Type time of day: [hhmm]
F10
F5
Redirect Outside Calls to Unassigned Extension
Numbers
Step
1. Display Redirect
Unassigned Extension
Numbers screen
Console
Options
M o r e
Unassigned
PC
F 7
PgUp
F1
4-182
System Features
Programming Procedures
Step
2. Redirect calls to unassigned extension numbers
■
■
To redirect calls to unassigned extension numbers to QCC queue (Hybrid/PBX only)
To redirect calls to unassigned extension numbers to another extension
Console
QCC Queue
Enter
Exit
PC
F1
F10
F5
■
To redirect calls to unassigned extension numbers to a calling group
Extension
Enter
Dial extension
✱
+ slot and port, # + logical
ID, or press
DSS button for extension no.
Enter
Exit
Grp Calling
E n t e r
D i a l c a l l i n g group extension no.: [nnnn]
Enter
E x i t
F2
F10
Type extension,
✱
+ slot and port, or # + logical ID
F10
F5
F3
F10
Type calling group extension no.: [nnnn]
F10
F5
System Features
4-183
Programming Procedures
Host System Dial Codes for Behind Switch Mode
Step
1. Display Behind Switch menu
Console
Options
More
BehndSwitch
PC
F7
PgUp
F 2
2. Select feature to program
■
For Transfer
■
For Conference
■
For Drop
3. Erase currently programmed host system dial code, enter new dial code, and save entry
4. Exit
Transfer
Conference
D r o p
Drop
Dial host system dial code: [nnnnnn]
Enter
Exit
Exit
F 1
F 2
F 3
Alt + P
Type host system dial code: [nnnnnn]
F 1 0
F5
F5
Recall Timer
Step
1. Display Recall Timer screen
Console PC
Options
M o r e
RecallTimer
F7
PgUp
F3
4-184
System Features
Programming Procedures
Step
2. Select length timer of recall
■
For 350 ms
■
For 450 ms
■
For 650 ms
■
For 1 sec
3. Save entry and exit
Console
350 ms
450 ms
650 ms
1 sec
Enter
Exit
PC
Rotary Operation
Step
1. Display Rotary Operation screen
Console
Options
M o r e
R o t a r y
2. Select rotary operation
■
For delay
■
For no delay
3. Save entry and exit
Delay
No Delay
Enter
Exit
PC
F 7
PgUp
F 4
F 1
F 2
F10
F5
F1
F2
F3
F4
F10
F5
System Features
4-185
Programming Procedures
Allowed Lists
Step
1. Display Allowed List screen
Console
Tables
AllowList
PC
F8
F1
2. Identify specific list (0-7) Dial list number and entry number (0-9) followed by and save entry number:
[Ie]
If programming more than one entry, enter lowest
Enter
entry number
Type list number followed by entry number:
[Ie]
F10
3. Erase current entry and
Drop
Alt + P
identify allowed area code Dial number: Type number: and/or exchange included [nnnnnn] or in the list
[ n n n ]
[nnnnnn] or
[nnn]
4. Save entry and either enter more items or exit
■
To save entry and enter next item in
Allowed List shown on line 1
■
If next entry number is sequential
■
If next entry number is not sequential
Next
Repeat step 3
F9
Repeat step 3
Enter
AllowList
F10
F1
Repeat steps Repeat steps
2-4 2-4
■
To save entry and exit when all entries are complete
Enter
Exit
F10
F5
4-186
System Features
Programming Procedures
Allowed Lists Assignment to Telephones
Step
1. Display Assign Allowed
Lists To screen
Console
Tables
AllowTo
2. Identify Allowed List (0-7) Dial lit to assign to telephone(s) number: [n] and save entry
Enter
3. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
If a DSS is attached
Go to step 4
■
To assign Allowed List to telephone
■
To remove Allowed assignment from telephones
List
Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED on.
Go to step 6
Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED off.
Go to step 6
PC
F 8
F 2
Type list number: [n]
F10
Go to step 4
4. If a DSS is not attached Dial extension
Type extension to system programming no.,
✱
+ slot no.,
✱
+ slot console or if program and port no., or and port no., or with SPM, identify
# + logical ID # + logical ID telephone to program
System Features
4-187
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
5. To remove Allowed List from telephone
■
To remove Allowed on line 1 from more telephones
List
■
To remove another
Allowed List from telephones
Delete
Repeat step 4
Exit
AllowTo
Repeat steps
2-5
To assign Allowed List telephone and assign
Allowed List shown on
1 to more telephones to line
To assign Allowed List telephone and assign another Allowed List to telephones to
■
If next list number is sequential
■
If next list number is not sequential
Enter
Repeat step 4
N e x t
Repeat step 4
Enter
E x i t
AllowTo
Repeat steps
2-5
PC
F8
Repeat step 4
F5
F2
Repeat steps
2-5
F10
Repeat step 4
F9
Repeat step 4
F10
F5
F 2
Repeat steps
2-5
6. When all entries are complete, exit
E x i t
Exit
F 5
F 5
4-188
System Features
Programming Procedures
Disallowed Lists
Step
Console PC
1. Display Disallow List screen
Tables
Disallow
F8
F3
2. Identify specific list (0-7)
Dial list number Type list and entry number (0-9) and save followed by entry number: followed by
[Ie] number entry number:
If programming one entry, enter entry number.
more than lowest
Enter
[Ie]
F10
3. Erase current entry and
Drop
A l t + P
identify disallowed Dial number:
Type number: number included in the list [nnnnnnnnnnn] [nnnnnnnnnnn]
4. Save entry and either enter more items or exit
■
To save entry and entef next item in
Disallowed List shown on line 1
■
If next entry number is sequential
N e x t
Repeat step 3
F9
Repeat step 3
F10
■
If next entry number is not sequential
Enter
Disallow
Repeat steps
2-4
■
To save entry and exit when all entries are complete
Enter
Exit
F3
Repeat steps
2-4
F10
F5
System Features
4-189
Programming Procedures
Disallowed Lists Assignment to Telephones
Step
1. Display Disallow to List screen
2. Identify disallowed list
(0-7) to assign to telephone(s) and save entry
Console
Tables
DisallowTo
Dial list number: [n]
Enter
PC
F8
F4
Type list number: [n]
F10
3. If a DSS is not attached to system programming console or if programming with SPM
If a DSS is attached
■
To assign Disallowed
List to telephone
■
To remove Disallowed
List assignment from telephones
Go to step 4
Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED on.
Go to step 6
Press DSS button for each telephone to turn red LED off.
Go to step 6
Go to step 4
4. If a DSS is not attached
Dial extension Type extension to system programming no.,
✱
+ slot no.,
✱
+ slot console or if programming and port no., or and port no., or with SPM, identify # + logical ID
# + logical ID telephone to program
4-190
System Features
Programming Procedures
Step
5. To remove Disallowed List from telephone
■
To remove Disallowed
List on line 1 from more telephones
■
To remove another
Disallowed List from telephones
To assign Disallowed List to telephone and assign
Disallowed List shown on line 1 to more telephones
To assign Disallowed List to telephone and assign another Disallowed List to telephones
■
If next list number is sequential
■
If next list number is
Console
Delete
Repeat step 4
PC
Exit
DisallowTo
Repeat steps
2-5
F5
F4
Repeat steps
2-5
Enter
Repeat step 4
F10
Repeat step 4
N e x t
F8
Repeat step 4
F9
Repeat step 4 Repeat step 4
Enter
E x i t
F10
F 5
DisallowTo
F4
Repeat steps Repeat steps
2-5 2-5
6. When all entries are complete, exit
Exit
Exit
F5
F5
System Features
4-191
Programming Procedures
Remote Access Line/Trunk Assignment
Step
1. Display Remote Access screen and select Lines and Trunks
Console
LinesTrunks
Remote
Access
LinesTrunks
PC
F 4
F 8
F 1
2. Identify line/trunk to Dial line/trunk
Type line/trunk program and save entry no. (801–880), no.,
✱
+ slot
✱
+ slot and and port no., or port no., or # + # + logical ID logical ID
Enter
F 1 0
3. Specify Remote Access use
■
■
■
To specify line/trunk is always used for
Remote Access
T
O specify line/trunk is used for Remote
Access only when
Night Service is activated
To remove Remote
Access
Dedicated
Shared
No Remote
F 1
F 2
F 3
4-192
System Features
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
4. Save entry and either program-more lines/trunks or exit
■
To save entry and assign Remote Access to another line/trunk
■
If next line/trunk number is sequential
■
If next extension number is not sequential
N e x t
Repeat step 3
Enter
LinesTrunks
Repeat steps
2-4
■
To save entry and exit when all entries are complete
Enter
Exit
Exit
PC
F 9
Repeat step 3
F10
F1
Repeat steps
2-4
F10
F5
F5
Remote Access Automatic Callback
Step
1. Display Remote Access screen and select
Automatic Callback
(queueing)
Console
LinesTrunks
RemoteAccss
PC
F 4
F 8
Auto
Queueing
F 6
System Features
4-193
Programming Procedures
Step
2. Specify Automatic
Callback use
■
To allow Remote
Access users to use
Automatic Callback feature
■
To prevent Remote
Access users from using Automatic
Callback feature
3. Save your choice and exit
Console
E n a b l e
Disable
Enter
E x i t
E x i t
PC
F1
F 2
F10
F5
F5
Remote Access Without
Class of Restriction
Barrier Codes—
Step
1. Display Remote Access
(DISA) menu
Console
LinesTrunks
PC
F 4
F 8
■
To program lines non-tie
■
To program tie trunks
Remote
Access
Non-TIE
TIE Lines
F 2
F 3
4-194
System Features
Programming Procedures
Step Console
PC
F 2
2. To change current call restrictions
To remove restrictions
Restriction
Unrestrcted
F1
Enter
F10
To restrict from making outside calls (local and toll)
O u t w a r d
Restrict
Enter
To restrict from making toll calls
Toll
Restrict
Enter
ARS Restrct
To change ARS facility restriction level (FRL)
■
Erase current level, assign new ARS FRL
(0-6), and save your entry
To assign Allowed Lists
■
Identify Allowed List
(0-7) you want to assign
■
To assign another list
■
To view all lists assigned and Exit
D r o p
Dial FRL Value:
[ n ]
E n t e r
Allow List
Dial list number: [n]
Enter
Repeat above action
Inspct
Exit
F2
F10
F3
F10
F 3
Alt + P
Type FRL value: [n]
F10
F 4
Type list number:[n]
F10
Repeat above action
PgDn
F5
F5
■
To return to Remote
Access menu without viewing lists
Continued
Exit
System Features
4-195
Programming Procedures
Step Console
2. Continued
To assign Disallowed Lists
■
Identify Disallowed List
(0-7) you want to assign and save your entry
Disallow
Lst
D i a l l i s t number: [n]
Enter
■
To assign another l i s t
■
To view all lists assigned and Exit
Repeat above action
Inspct
E x i t
E x i t
■
To return to Remote
Access menu without viewing lists
3 . E x i t
Exit
Exit
Exit
PC
F6
Type list number: [n]
F10
Repeat above action
PgDn
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
Remote Access Barrier Codes
Step Console
1. Display Remote Access
LinesTrunks
(DISA) menu
RemoteAccss
Non-Tie
■
To program non-tie lines
■
To program tie trunks
Tie Lines
PC
F 4
F 8
F 2
F 3
4-196
System Features
Programming Procedures
Step
2. To establish or remove barrier code requirement
To specify that barrier codes are required for
Remote Access, save choice and return to
Remote Access (DISA) menu
To remove barrier code requirement, save entry and return to Remote Access
(DISA) menu
Console
BarrierCode
Barrier
Code
Required
Enter
Exit
B a r r i e r
Code Not
Required
PC
F1
F1
F10
F5
F2
Enter
E x i t
F10
F5
F4
3. To add, change, or remove individual barrier codes, display Remote
Access Barrier code screen
BarrierCode
Codes
F3
4. Identify barrier code to
Dial barrier Type barrier program and save entry code number: code number:
[nn] [nn]
E n t e r
F10
System Features
4-197
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
5. To remove previously established barrier code
To change previously established barrier code
■
To save entry when all
Enter
entries are complete
Drop
■
If next barrier code
Next
number is sequential Dial four-digit code: [nnnn]
Repeat this step
■
If next barrier code is
Enter
not sequential
Codes
Repeat steps 4 and 5
Alt + P
Drop
Alt + P
Dial four-digit Type four-digit code: [nnnn] code: [nnnn]
To add new barrier code Dial four-digit
Type four-digit code: [nnnn] code: [nnnn]
■
To save entry and add change or remove another barrier code
F9
Dial four-digit code: [nnnn]
Repeat this step
F10
F2
Repeat steps 4 and 5
F10
6. Exit
E x i t
E x i t
E x i t
F 5
F 5
F 5
4-198
System Features
Programming Procedures
Remote Access with Barrier Codes —
Class of Restriction
Step
1. Display Remote Access
Barrier Code menu
Console PC
LinesTrunks
RemoteAccss
BarrierCode
F 4
F 8
F 4
2. Select option
■
To change current call restrictions
■
To change ARS facility restriction level (FRL)
■
To assign
Lists
Allowed
■
To assign
Lists
Disallowed
Restriction
ARS Restrct
Allow List
DisallowLst
F3
F4
F6
F7
3. Identify barrier code to Dial barrier Type barrier program and save entry code number: code number:
[nn]
E n t e r
[nn]
F10
System Features
4-199
Programming Procedures
Step Console
4. If you selected Restriction in step 2
■
To remove restrictions
■
To restrict from making outside calls (local and toll)
■
To restrict from making toll calls
If you selected ARS
Restrict in step 2
■
Erase current level and assign new ARS FRL
Unrestrcted
O u t w a r d
Restrict
Toll
Restrict
Drop
Dial FRL value:
[n]
If you selected Allowed
List in step 2
■
Identify Allowed List
(0-7) to assign
If you selected Disallowed
List in step 2
■
Identify Disallowed List
(0-7) to assign
Dial list number: [n]
Dial list number: [n]
PC
F 1
F 2
F 3
Alt + P
Type FRL value: [n]
Type list number: [n]
Type list number:[n]
4-200
System Features
Programming Procedures
Step
5. To save entry and assign class of restrictions to another barrier code
■
If barrier code is sequential number
Console
■
If barrier code number is not sequential
To save entry when all entries are complete
Next
Repeat steps 4 and 5
Enter
Select option from remote access Barrier
Code menu
Repeat steps
2-5
Enter
PC
F 9
Repeat steps 4 and 5
F10
Select option from remote access Barrier
Code menu
Repeat steps
2-5
F10
6. If you selected Allowed
List or Disallowed List in step 2, to view all lists assigned and exit
7. Exit
Inspct
Exit
P g D n
F 5
Exit
Exit
Exit
F5
F5
F5
System Features 4-201
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
1 + 7 Digit Dialing Requirements
Step Console
1. Display Automatic Route
Selection menu and select
ARS 1 + 7 Dialing
Tables
A R S
ARS 1 + 7 Dial
PC
F 8
F 6
F 1
2. Specify dialing for 1 + 7 digit dialing
■
To specify 1 + 7 digit
Within Area
Code
dialing is valid within area code
■
To specify 1 + 7 digit
Not within
dialing in not valid
Area Code
within area code
4. Save entry and exit
Enter
Exit
F1
F 2
F 1 0
F5
ARS Tables
Step
1. Display Automatic Route
Selection menu and select
ARS Table Input
Console
Tables
A R S
ARS Input
2. Identify table (1-16) you
Dial table want to program and save number: [nn] entry
Enter
PC
F 8
F 6
F 2
Type table number: [nn]
F10
4-202
Automatic Route Selection
Programming Procedures
Step
3. Specify ARS Table type
■
To specify 6-Digit
T a b l e t y p e
■
To specify Area Code
T a b l e t y p e
■
To specify Exchange
T a b l e t y p e
■
To specify 1 + 7 Table t y p e
Console
6-Digit
AreaCode
Exchange
1 + 7
PC
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
4. Save entry
5. ldentify entry number
(1-100) and save entry
Enter F10
Dial entry Type entry number: [nnn] number: [nnn]
Enter
F10
If programming more than one entry, enter lowest entry number
6. Identify area code or exchange included on table and save entry
■
To save entry and enter another entry in
ARS table shown on line 1
■
If next entry number is sequential
Dial number:
[nnn]
N e x t
Repeat this s t e p
Continued
Type number:
[nnn]
F9
Repeat this step
Automatic Route Selection
4-203
Programming Procedures
Step
6. Continued
■
If next entry number is not sequential
Console
Enter
A R S
ARS Input
Repeat steps
2 - 6
Enter
■
To save your entry when all entries are complete
7. Exit
E x i t
PC
F10
F 6
F 2
Repeat steps
2-6
F10
F 5
Start and Stop Trees for Subpattems
Step
1. Display Automatic Route
Selection menu and select
Console
Tables
A R S
Sub B Start
PC
F8
F6
F8
2. Identify table (1-18) to
Dial table program and save entry number: [nn]
Enter
Type table number: [nn]
F10
3. Erase currently assigned
Drop Alt + P
start time, and assign new Dial Start time:
Type start time: start time for Subpattern B [hhmm] and save entry
Enter
[hhmm]
F10
4. Select Subpattern B stop time
Sub B Stop
F 9
4-204
Automatic Route Selection
Programming Procedures
Step
5. Identify table (1-18) to program and save entry
Console
Dial table number: [nn]
Enter
PC
Type table number: [nn]
F10
6. Erase currently assigned
Drop Alt + P
start time and assign stop Dial stop time:
Type stop time: time for Subpattem B
(Start Time for Sub-
[hhmm] [hhmm] pattern A)
7. Save entry and exit
Enter
Exit
F10
F5
Pool Routing
Step
1. Display Automatic Route
Selection menu
Console
Tables
A R S
P C
F 8
F 6
2. Select subpattern to program pool routing for
■
To program pool routing for
Subpattern A
■
T o p r o g r a m p o o l routing for Subpattern
B
Sub A Pools
F3
Sub B Pool
F10
Automatic Route Selection
4-205
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
3. Identify table number Dial table
(1-18) and route number number
(1-6) to program and save entry followed by
Type table number followed by route number: route number:
[ttr]
Enter
[ttr]
F10
4. Identify pool on which to route calls and save entry
Dial pool dialout code: [nnn]
■
To save entry and enter pool dial-out code for another pool route in ARS table shown on line 1
■
If next pool route number is sequential
Next
Repeat this step
■
If next entry number is not sequential
Enter
o r
Sub A Pools
o r
Sub B Pools
Repeat steps
2-4
■
To save your entry when all entries are complete
E n t e r
5. Exit
Exit
Exit
Type pool dialout code: [nnn]
F9
Repeat this step
F10
F3
or
F10
Repeat steps
2-4
F10
F 5
F 5
4-206
Automatic Route Selection
Programming Procedures
Facility Restriction Level
Step
1. Display Automatic Route
Selection menu
Console
Tables
A R S
PC
F8
F6
2. Select Subpattern to program Facility
Restriction level for
■
To program Facility
Restriction level for
Subpattern A
■
To program Facility level for Subpattern
Sub A FRL
F4
More PgUp
Sub B FRL
F1
3. ldentify the table number Dial table
If programming more than
[ttr]
Enter
Type table
(1-18) and route number number
(1-6) to program and followed by save entry number followed by route number: route number:
[ttr]
F10
one pool route, enter lowest pool route number
Automatic Route Selection
4-207
Programming Procedures
Step Console
E x i t
E x i t
PC
4. Specify restriction level
(0-6) and save entry
Dial restriction
Type restriction level: [n]
Enter
level: [n]
F10
■
To save entry and enter FRL to another pool route in ARS table shown on line 1
■
■
If next entry number is sequential
Next
Repeat this step
■
If next entry number is not sequential
To save entry when all entries are complete
E n t e r
Repeat steps
2-4
Enter
F9
Repeat step
F1O
Repeat
2-4
F1O
this steps
5. Exit
F5
F5
Digit Absorption
Step
1. Display Automatic Route
Selection menu
Console
Tables
A R S
PC
F 8
F 6
4-208
Automatic Route Selection
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
2. Select Subpattern to program Absorb Digits for
■
To program Absorb
Digits for Subpattern
Sub A
A b s o r b
■
To program Absorb
Digits for Subpattern B
M o r e
Sub B
A b s o r b
PC
F6
Pgup
F 2
3. Identify table number
Dial table
(1-18) and route number number
(1-6) to program and followed by save entry pool route number: [ttr]
If programming more that
Enter
one pool route, enter lowest pool route number
4. Specify number of digits to absorb (0-11)
Dial number of digits: [nn]
■
To save entry and enter number of digits to absorb for another pool route in ARS table shown on line 1
■
If next pool route number is sequential
■
If next entry number is not sequential
Next
Repeat this step
Enter
Repeat steps
2 - 4
Enter
■
To save your entry when all entries are complete
Type table number followed by pool route number: [ttr]
F10
Type number of digits: [nn]
F9
Repeat this step
F10
Repeat steps
2-4
F10
Automatic Route Selection
4-209
Programming Procedures
Step
5. Exit
Console
Exit
Exit
PC
F 5
F 5
Other Digits
Step
1. Display Automatic Route
Selection menu
Console
Tables
A R S
PC
F 8
F 6
2. Select Subpattern to program other digits for
■
To program other digits for Subpattern A
■
To program other digits for Subpattern B
Sub A Digit
F7
More PgUp
Sub B Digit
F3
3. Identify the table number
(1-18) and route number
Dial table number
(1-6) to program and save entry followed by pool route number: [ttr]
If programming more than
Enter
one pool route, enter lowest pool route number
Type table number followed by pool route number: [ttr]
F10
4-210
Automatic Route Selection
Programming Procedures
Step
4. Specify number of other digits (up to entry
20) and save
Console
PC
D r o p
Alt + P
Dial digits: Type digits:
[nnnnnnnnnnnn [nnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn] nnnnnnrm]
■
To save entry and enter other digits for another pool route in
ARS table shown on line 1
■
If next pool number is sequential route
■
If next entry number is not sequential
N e x t
Repeat this step
Enter
Repeat steps
2-4
Enter
■
To save your entry when all entries are complete
F 9
Repeat this step
F10
Repeat steps
2-4
F10
5. Exit
Exit
Exit
F 5
F 5
N11 Special Number Table
Step
Console PC
1. Display Automatic Route
Selection menu and select
N11 Special Numbers
Table
Tables
ARS
More
SpeclNumber
F8
F6
PgUp
F4
Automatic Route Selection
4-211
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
2. To change current Facility
Restriction Level (FRL)
■
Erase current FRL value, enter new value
(0-6), and save entry
ARS FRL
Drop
Dial FRL value:
[ n ]
Enter
To specify other digits to add
■
Erase currently programmed other digits, specify new other digits to be added to called number and save entry
ARS Digit
Drop
Dial Other
Digits to add:
[nnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnl
E n t e r
PC
F1
Alt + P
Type FRL value: [n]
F10
F2
Alt + P
Type Other
Digits to add:
[nnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn]
F10
3 . E x i t
E x i t
E x i t
E x i t
F5
F5
F5
Dial 0 Tables
Step
Console
1. Display Automatic Route
Selection menu and select
Dial 0 Special Numbers
Table
Tables
ARS
M o r e
Dial 0
PC
F8
F 6
PgUp
F6
4-212
Automatic Route Selection
Programming Procedures
Step
2. Select option
To change Pool
Routing erase current pool routing, assign new pool route, and save entry
Console
PC
ARS Pool
Drop
Dial pool dialout code: [nnn]
Enter
F1
Alt+P
Type pool dialout code: [nnn]
F10
To change current
Facility Restriction level
(FRL) erase current
FRL value, enter new value (0-6), and save entry
ARS FRL
Drop
Dial pool dialout code: [n]
E n t e r
F2
Alt + P
Type FRL value: [n]
F10
To specify other digits to add, erase currently programmed other digits, specify new other digits to be added, and save entry
ARS Digit
D r o p
Dial Other digits to add:
[nnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnl
Enter
F 3
Alt + P
Type Other
Digits to add:
[nnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn]
F10
Automatic Route Selection
4-213
Programming Procedures
Step
3. Exit
Console
Exit
Exit
Exit
PC
F 5
F 5
F5
4-214
Automatic Route Selection
Programming Procedures
Night Service
Night Service with Group Assignment
Step
Console
1. Display Night Service
Group Assignment screen
NightSrvce
GroupAssign
PC
F10
F1
2. Identify operator position Dial extension,
Type extension, to program and save entry
✱
+ slot and
✱
+ slot and port, # + logical port, or # +
ID, or press logical ID
DSS button for extension no.
Enter F10
3. Identify telephone to assign to group
Dial extension, Type extension,
✱
+ slot and
✱
+ slot and port, # + logical port, or # +
ID, or press logical ID
DSS button for extension no.
4. To remove telephone from
Delete
Night Service Group
F8
■
To remove more telephones from Night
Service group on line 1
■
To remove telephones from another Night
Service group
Repeat step 3 Repeat step 3
Exit
F5
GroupAssign
Repeat steps
2-4
F1
Repeat steps
2-4
Continued
Night Service
4-215
Programming Procedures
Step
4. Continued
To assign telephone to
Night Service group and assign more telephones to Night Service group shown on line 1
To assign telephone to
Night Service group and assign telephones to another Night Service group
■
If next extension number is sequential
■
If next extension number is not sequential
5. When all entries are complete, exit
Console
Enter
Repeat step 3
PC
F10
Repeat step 3
N e x t
Repeat step 3
Enter
Exit
GroupAssign
Repeat steps
2-4
Exit
Exit
F9
Repeat step 3
F1O
F5
F1
Repeat steps
2-4
F 5
F 5
Night Service with Outward Restriction
Step
1. Display Night Service
OutRestrict screen
Console
NightSrvce
OutRestrict
PC
F10
F 2
4-216
Night Service
Programming Procedures
Step Console PC
■
If no password is displayed
■
I f p a s s w o r d i s displayed, to erase currently assigned password
3. Remove or assign
Password requirement
■
To remove password requirement
■
To assign required
4-digit password (any combination of digits
0-9) and save entry
4. Add or change
Emergency Allowed list
Go to step 3
D r o p
Enter
Go to step 9
Dial password:
[nnnn]
Enter
Emergency
Go to step 3
Alt + P
F10
Go to step 9
Type password:
[ n n n n ]
F10
F 3
5. Identify specific entry number on Emergency
Allowed List (0-9) and save entry l
Dial entry number: [n]
Enter
Type entry number: [n]
F10
6. Erase current entry and
Drop Alt + P
identify telephone number Dial telephone Type telephone included in list and save number: [nnn number: [nnn entry nnnnnnnnn] nnnnnnnnn]
Continued
Night Service
4-217
Programming Procedures
Step
Console PC
6. Continued
■
To save entry and enter another telephone number
■
If next entry number is sequential
Next
F9
Repeat this step
Repeat this step
■
■
If next entry number is not sequential
To save entry when all entries are complete
E n t e r
F10
Repeat steps Repeat steps
4 - 6
4 - 6
Enter
F10
7. To assign telephones to
Exclusion list
ExcludeList
F 4
8. Identify telephone to program
Dial extension,
✱
+ slot and port, # + logical
ID, or press
DSS button for extension no.
Enter
Type extension,
✱
+ slot and port, or # + logical ID
F10
■
To assign telephone to
Exclusion list
■
To remove telephone from Exclusion List
■
To add or move more telephones
9. When all entries are complete, exit
Delete
Repeat this step
Exit
Exit
F8
Repeat this step
F 5
F 5
4-218
Night Service
Programming Procedures
Night Service with Time Set
Step
1. Display Night Service screen
Console
NightSrvce
F10
2. Activate or suspend Night
Service with Time Set
■
To suspend Night
Service with Time Set
Go to step 8
■
To add or change start
Start
time
Drop
3. Erase currently programmed start day of week and time
4. Identify start day of the
Dial day of the week number and time week number
(use 24-hour clook) and followed by save entry
4-digit time of day: [dtttt]
Day of the week number
E n t e r
0 = Sunday
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
5. Add or Change stop time
Stop
6. Erase currently programmed stop day of week and time
Drop
PC
Go to step 8
F 6
Alt + P
Type day of the week number followed by
4-digit time of day: [dtttt]
F10
F 7
A l t + P
Night Service
4-219
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
PC
7. Identify stop day of the
Dial day of the Type day of the week number and time week number week number
(use 24-hour clock) and followed by save entry followed by
4-digit time of
4=digit time of
Day of the week number day: [dtttt]
Enter
day: [dtttt]
F10
0 = Sunday
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
8. To program start and stop Repeat steps
Repeat steps times for more days of the 2-7
2-7 week
To suspend Night Service
With Time Set or record current day of the week
■
Display Night Service
Day of Week Screen
Day of Week
F 8
■
To suspend Night
Service with Time Set
Dial 9
Type 9
Continued
4-220
Night Service
Programming Procedures
Step
9. Save entry and exit
Console
Enter
Exit
PC
8. Continued
■
To record current day
Dial day of the Type day of the of the week number week number: week number:
[n] [n]
Day of week number
0 = Sunday
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
F10
F 5
Notes: Changing the System Time while in Night Service mode will deactivate the Night Service. You must manually reactivate the Night Service.
After you restore, you must manually update the Current
Day of the Week field in the Night Service menu.
Night Service
4-221
Programming Procedures
Labeling
Extension Directory
Step Console
1. Display Labeling screen More and select Directory and
Extension
Labeling
Directory
Extension
PC
Pgup
F1
F1
F2
2. Identify extension to label Dial extension, Type extension, and save entry.
✱
+ slot and
✱
+ slot and port, # + logical port, or # +
ID, or press logical ID
DSS button for extension no.
Enter
F10
3. Erase current label
Drop Alt + P
Type label
4. Enter label for extension Enter label identified in step 2 and save
Enter
Use punctuation button to toggle between letters and punctuation shown on display
Use template provided with the
System Programming Guide or
PC keyboard
F6
4-222
Labeling
Programming Procedures
Step Console
5. To label another extension Repeat from step 2
When all entries are complete
Exit
Exit
Exit
PC
Repeat from step 2
F 5
F 5
F 5
Lines or Trunks
Step
1. Display Labeling screen and select Lines or Trunks
Console
M o r e
Labeling
LinesTrunks
2. Identify line or trunk to Dial line/trunk label and save entry no. (801-880),
✱
+ slot and port, or # + logical ID
E n t e r
3. Erase current label
Drop
PC
PgUp
F1
F 2
Type line/trunk no. (801-880),
✱
+ slot and port, or # + logical ID
F10
Alt + P
Labeling
4-223
Programming Procedures
Step
4. Enter label for line/trunk identified in step 2 and save
Use punctuation button to toggle between letters and punctuation shown on display
Console
Enter label
Enter
Use template provided with the
System Programming Guide or
PC keyboard
5. To label another line or trunk
When all entries are complete
Repeat from step 2
E x i t
PC
Type label
F 6
Repeat from step 2
F 5
Posted Message
Step
Console
1. Display Labeling screen More and select Posted
Message
Labeling
PostMessage
2. Identify posted message Dial posted number (1-20) you want message to add or change and save entry
3. Erase current message number: [nn]
Enter
Drop
PC
PgUp
F 1
F 3
Type posted message number: [nn]
F10
Alt + P
4-224
Labeling
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
5. To add or change another Repeat from message
When all entries are complete step 2
Exit
PC
4. Enter new message for Enter message Type message
Posted Message identi-
Enter
F6
fied in step 2 and save entry
Use punctuation button to toggle between letters and punctuation shown on display.
Use template provided with the
System Programming Guide or
PC keyboard.
Repeat from step 2
F 5
Group Calling
Step
1. Display Labeling screen and select Group Calling
2. Identify calling group to label and save entry
3. Erase current label.
Console
More
Labeling
Grp Calling
PC
PgUp
F1
F 4
Dial extension
Type extension or press DSS button for extension no.
Enter F10
Drop
Alt+P
Labeling
4-225
Programming Procedures
Step
5. To label another calling group
When all entries are complete
Console
4. Enter label for calling
Enter label group identified in step 2
Enter
and save
Use punctuation button to toggle between letters and punctuation shown on display.
Use template provided with the
System Programming Guide or
PC keyboard.
Repeat from step 2
Exit
PC
Tvpe label
F 6
Repeat from step 2
F 5
System Speed Dial/System Directory
Step
Console
1. Display Labeling screen More and select Directory and
System
Labeling
Directory
S y s t e m
PC
PgUp
F 1
F 1
F 1
2. ldentify dial code to add Dial dial code
Type dial code or change and save entry number: [nnn] number: [nnn]
Enter F10
3. Erase current label
Backspace
F2
4-226
Labeling
Programming Procedures
Step Console
4. Enter Iabel for dial code identified in step 2 and save entry
Use punctuation button to toggle between letters and punctuation shown on display.
Use template provided with the
System Progmming Guide or
PC keyboard.
Enter label
Enter
PC
Type label
F 6
5. Erase currently assigned
Backspace
telephone number
F2
6. Assign telephone number Dial telephone to dial code entered in number: [nnnn step 2 and save entry nnnnnnnnnnnn]
Enter
■
If you want the telephone number displayed when dialed
■
If you do not want the telephone number displayed when dialed
Yes
E n t e r
N o
E n t e r
7. To add or change another
System
System Speed Dial number
Repeat from step 2
When all entries are complete
Exit
Type telephone number: [nnnn nnnnnnnnnnnn]
F6
F1
F10
F2
F10
F1
Repeat from step 2
F5
Labeling
4-227
Programming Procedures
Backup, Restore, and Print
System Programming
Reports
●
Back Up System Programmmg
Step
1. Prepare to back up system programming onto diskette
2. Display Backup Screen
Console
3. To store backup file on hard disk
■
Backup file does not exist
To use default file name
(default.ams)
To specify a name of your choice
■
If backup file exists
Continued
PC
Insert diskette in drive A
F2
Press down arrow to highlight New
File
Enter
Enter
Type file name
Enter
Press down arrow to highlight file name
Enter
4-228
Backup, Restore, and Print
Programming Procedures
Step
3. Continued
To store backup file on floppy
■
If backup file does not exist
Console
PC
Enter
■
If backup file exists
Press down arrow to highlight New
File
Enter
Type file name
Press down arrow to highlight file name
4. File information transfer begins, and number on the screen shows progress of transfer
E n t e r
Wait until
Backup successful screen is displayed
Note: Interrupting an in-progress backup will result in an incomplete backup file stored on the disk.
5. Return to SPM Main Menu
Enter
Note: After you complete a system backup you must press
Enter to return to the Main Menu.
Backup, Restore, and Print
4-229
Programming Procedures
Restore System Programming
Step
1. Prepare to restore system programming from diskette
2. Select Restore
3. To restore from backup file stored on hard disk
Console
To restore from backup file stored on floppy
PC
Insert diskette in drive A
F7
Press down arrows to highlight file name
Enter
Press down arrow to highlight Floppy
Disk
Enter
Press down arrow to highlight file name
Enter
4-230
Backup, Restore, and Print
Programming Procedures
Step
4. File information transfer begins and number on the screen shows progress of transfer.
ConsoIe PC
Wait until
Restore successful.
screen is displayed
C A U T I O N
An unsuccessful restore procedure causes a frigid start. If being performed remotely, the system drops the connection immediately. All system programming is lost, and the system returns to the factory settings. In addition, interrupting an in-progress restore procedure causes corruption in system programming information which results in system malfunction. In either case you must reconnect
to the switch and do another restore immediately.
5. Return to SPM Main Menu
Enter
Note: After you restore, you must manually update the Current
Day of the Week field in the Night Service menu.
Backup, Restore, and Print
4-231
Programming Procedures
See Appendix I for a list and a sample of all system
programming reports.
Step
1. If using a PC with SPM, direct system programming reports to PC or
SMDR printer by selecting
Print-Options from SPM
Main Menu
■
To direct reports to
SMDR printer
■
To direct reports to PC
■
To return to SPM Main
Menu
Console
PC
F4
F1
F2
F5
2. Display Print screen
M o r e
PgUp
F 3
3. Select Print Reports
■
If report you want to More print is not displayed
PgUp
■
When report you want Press the to print is displayed
Press function button next to key for report report name name
4-232
Backup, Restore, and Print
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
4. If you did not select
Allowed or Disallowed List in step 3
Go to step 5
If vou selected Allowed or Dial list
Disallowed List in step 3, number: [n] identify the list you want to
Enter
PC
Go to step 5
Type list number: [n]
F10
5. If reports are being sent to Go to step 6
Go to step 6
SMDR printer or you are programming with a system programming console
If reports are being sent to a PC running SPM
To print a hard copy of the report:
Highlight LPT1:
Enter
To print reports to a hard disk:
■ if print file does not exist
Highlight
MAKE NEW
FILE
Enter
Enter
■
To save to default file name:
■
To save to file name of your choice:
Type [file name]
Enter
Continued
Backup, Restore, and Print
4-233
Programming Procedures
Step
5. Continued
■
If print file exists
To print reports to a floppy disk:
■
If print file does not exist
■
To save to default file name:
■
To save to file name of your choice:
■
If print file exists
Console
6. When printing is complete, Print menu is displayed.
To Return to System
Programming Menu
E x i t
PC
Highlight [file name]
Enter
Highlight G0T0
FLOPPY
Enter
Highlight
MAKE NEW
FILE
Enter
Type [file name]
Enter
Highlight [file name]
Enter
F5
4-234
Backup, Restore, and Print
Programming Procedures
Step
Console
4. If you did not select
Allowed or Disallowed List instep 3
Exit
PC
F5
If you selected Allowed or
Disallowed List in step 3, identify the list you want to p r i n t
To print reports to a hard disk:
■
If print file does not exist
D i a l l i s t number: [n]
Enter
Exit
Type List number:[n]
F10
F 5
5. If reports are being sent to Go to step 6
Go to step 6
SMDR printer or you are programming with a system programming console
If reports are being sent to a PC running SPM
To print a hard copy of the report:
Highlight LPT1:
Enter
Highlight
MAKE NEW
FlLE
Enter
Enter
■
To save to default file name:
■
To save to file name of your choice:
Highlight [file name]
Enter
Continued
Backup, Restore, and Print
4-235
Programming Procedures
Step
5. Continued
■
If print file exists
To print reports to a floppy disk:
■
If print file does not exist
■
■
To save to default file name:
To save to file name of your choice:
■
If print file exists
Console
6. Return to System
Programming Menu
Exit
PC
Highlight [file name]
Enter
Highlight GOTO
FLOPPY
Enter
Highlight
MAKE NEW
FILE
Enter
Highlight [file name]
Enter
Highlight [file name]
Enter
F 5
4-236
Backup, Restore, and Print
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
Maintenance
The purpose of maintenance is to detect, report, and clear problems quickly with minimum disruption of service. To do this, the system isolates troubles to a single replaceable module whenever possible.
To isolate problems, the control unit (CU) runs automatic diagnostic, auditing, and monitoring tests. Errors found by the automatic tests go into error logs. In addition, demand tests can be run by using an MLX-20L telephone or a PC with System
Programming and Maintenance (SPM) software.
Notification of trouble comes from users who report problems or from alarms generated by the system when it detects serious errors. Alarms can appear as an LED on an operator console and as a status display on the maintenance terminal.
Maintenance can be done on-site or from a remote location.
Note: You must record any station jack change on the “System
Technician’s Run Sheet” (see Appendix L).
Maintenance
5-1
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Equipment
To access the maintenance program on-site, you need an
MLX-20L telephone or a PC with SPM software. In addition, you should have the following tools:
■
■
EIA breakout box digital voltmeter (KS-20599 or equivalent)
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
110/66-type punchdown tool
Dracon TS21 or equivalent touch-tone test telephone assorted flathead screwdrivers assorted Phillips-head screwdrivers long-nosed pliers regular pliers wrist grounding strap laptop PC with MS-DOS
✱
3.3 or higher and SPM software
■
■ troubleshooting guide replacement parts recommended by the National Service
Assistance Center (NSAC)
Remote access to the maintenance program requires a PC with
SPM software.
✱
Registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
5-2
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Maintenance Elements
This section describes the important elements of the maintenance program.
Error Logs
Errors occur because of hardware malfunctions, recurring program logic inconsistencies (PLIs), or system restarts.
Whenever an error occurs, it is entered into an error log.
Errors are classified in the error log as transient or permanent.
Basically, transient errors are intermittent and permanent errors are steady. Each error has a threshold count that, when exceeded, escalates an error from transient to permanent. To be automatically cleared, each type of error must be trouble-free for a set time period.
The error logs are
■ permanent system errors
■ transient system errors
■ last 10 system errors
Error logs are stored in battery-backed-up RAM.
Alarms
A permanent error causes an alarm. This alarm lights a red LED next to a line or feature button (on a system operator console or other designated telephone) programmed for alarm notification.
The LED stays on until the error is cleared.
Maintenance
5-3
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Alarms can be cleared
■ automatically by the system when the error condition no longer exists
■ manually by the user
■ by replacing a module
■ by clearing an error log entry via the Drop button on an
MLX-20L telephone or via ALT-P on a PC
Restarts
Depending on the severity and duration of a problem, it maybe necessary to restart the system either by a warm start, cold start, or frigid start. Certain errors can cause the system to automatically restart; cold starts and frigid starts can be initiated by the maintenance technician.
■
Frigid start. All calls are dropped, and the system configuration information is erased. All system memory must be reinitialized, including customer translations. The entire system must be rebooted.
Note: After a frigid start, the default printer is the PC printer, not the SMDR printer. If you want printouts on-site from the
SMDR printer, make sure you change the option.
■
Cold start. A power interrupt of more than one second causes a cold start. All calls are dropped, but customer translations are saved.
Notes:
■
A cold start does not blank out the screen on an MLX-28D telephone until the end of the cold start.
■
A cold start can cause stations with the Extension
Status feature to lose their toll restrictions.
5-4
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
■
Warm start. Loss of power for less than 250 ms causes a power transfer to the internal battery backup and causes a warm start. Stable calls are not dropped, but calls in the process of being established may be. Call processing resumes from the point where new and stable calls are handled.
Notes:
■
Power interruptions of less than 100 ms generally are not
■ noticed by the system.
Warm starts can cause a telephone to ring without having an associated call. To stop the ringing, place a new call to the telephone.
Every restart causes an has its own error code.
error log entry, and each type of restart
System Status Displays
The power supply module, processor module,
400
EM module, and 100D module are the only modules that physically have
LEDs. However, the System Status screen displays simulated
LEDs for all the modules except the power supply module.
The simulated LEDs are R (red), Y (yellow), and G (green). R indicates an alarm or standby state; when a module enters a normal state, the R LED goes off. When a call is in progress on a module, the Y LED is on. The word “on” or “off” appears after the
R, Y, or G.
Automatic Tests
The system automatically runs tests to monitor the status of equipment audit operations consistency detect hardware malfunctions
Maintenance
5-5
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
The tests check hardware and software that are in service but do not disrupt normal service. Any errors detected are registered in the error logs. Errors are corrected automatically whenever possible. As necessary, automatic testing causes an alarm.
Demand Tests
Demand diagnostic tests for the line/trunk and station modules are selected and scheduled by using the menu screens.
Demand tests
■ increase the effectiveness of on-site troubleshooting and repair
■ verify complaints of malfunctioning equipment
Note: For some modules, the demand test does not test the shared memory.
When a demand test fails, the module being tested either was not busied-out or is faulty and may have to be replaced.
To run demand tests, the processor module, the power supply module, and the MLX-20L telephone or PC must be working.
Note: You cannot run a demand test on the 008 MLX module to which the MLX-20L telephone is attached. However, you can run a demand test on this module from the PC.
To run a demand test, you must take the equipment out of service. You can choose “Busy-Out” or “Reset" to do this, but
“Busy-Out” is preferred since:
■
Busy-out removes lines and stations as they become idIe but does not disrupt calls in progress.
■
Reset drops all calls in progress and removes equipment from service.
5-6
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Once the equipment is out of service, you can select demand tests. After testing is finished, choose “Restore" from the menu to cancel “Busy-Out" or "Reset.”
Note: A cold start or a warm start does not restore equipment that has been busied-out or reset.
On-Site Maintenance
You can do on-site maintenance with an MLX-20L telephone or a
PC with SPM software. The MLX-20L plugs into whichever of the first five jacks on the first MLX module is being used as the system programming/maintenance port. (The default is the first
MLX jack.) Only one jack at a time can be used for system programming or maintenance. The PC plugs into the RS-232 system programming/maintenance port.
Remote Maintenance
By using a PC with System Programming and Maintenance
(SPM) software, the maintenance technician and personnel from the National Service Assistance Center (NSAC) and the National
Technical Service Center (NTSC), or an authorized AT&T representative, can remotely access the maintenance program.
This remote access is provided by a built-in 1200-bps modem in the processor module.
Note: Line noise can distort the SPM screen. When this happens, the remote administrator should hang up and redial.
Once in the maintenance program, the remote administrator can use the menu screens as the on-site technician does to check error logs, check system status, and even cause restarts.
Maintenance
5-7
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
The remote administrator can access the maintenance program b y
■ dialing the listed directory number for the customer’s system.
Usually this rings at the system operator’s console, and the operator transfers the call to the system programming/ maintenance (SPM) port. The remote administrator then enters the password. (When remote SPM is in use, any local administration is blocked.)
■ directly dialing the SPM port by using the Remote Access feature. The administrator enters an access barrier code and the password to connect to the SPM port.
Note: The on-site system technician can also call the SPM port by using either method above. However, it is recommended that the technician connect the laptop PC directly to the RS-232 port on the processor module.
Security
Certain security measures guard against unauthorized remote access. A barrier code can be used for access to the built-in modem. In addition to the barrier code, the SPM software has password validation.
CAUTION:
Under applicable tariffs, the customer is responsible for any charges incurred through the remote use of system facilities. Precautions should be taken to prevent unauthorized use of the system’s outside lines by remote
callers, also called toll fraud. See “Customer Support
Information" at the front of this book for more information on
security.
5-8
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
The following menu selections must be used with care. T
O eliminate any selection mishaps, you must confirm or cancel them.
■
Busy-Out
■
R e s e t
■
Restore
■
P o k e
■
System Erase
Maintenance Strategy
The goal of maintenance is to isolate the trouble to one or more replaceable units and to replace the faulty units as quickly as possible. To help isolate the fault, check equipment in the following order:
1.
Telephones and adjuncts
2.
Station wiring
3.
Line/trunk and station modules
4.
Processor module
5.
Power supply module
6.
Carrier backplane
Note: Traffic problems can result from having more than 64 personal lines or pool buttons on the system. If you have traffic problems, check this first.
Use the maintenance program as follows:
1.
Check the error logs.
2.
If the error logs indicate trouble in the processor module, correct that problem first since it may be causing trouble in the line/trunk and station modules.
Maintenance
5-9
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
3. Run demand tests on the line/trunk and station modules to further isolate the trouble.
4. If replacing the faulty equipment does not solve the problem, use the screen menus to find the hardware vintage, the software vintage, and the ROM ID of the modules.
5. Refer the problem to the NTSC.
Using the Maintenance Screens
Using the maintenance screens involves selecting items on menus. The menu selections are identical whether you are using an MLX-20L telephone or a PC. The only difference is that the function keys on the computer keyboard simulate the display buttons on the telephone.
In the following procedures, a representation of the menu screen is shown with the actions to take. To enter maintenance programming, press the button for “Menu” and then the button for
“Maintenance.” The following main menu appears:
Maintenance:
Make a selection
System
Slot
Port
Exit
Note: On the maintenance screens, the power supply modules are not shown and the processor module is numbered “00.”
System Screens
System screens are used for getting information; you cannot alter anything with system screens.
5-10
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Error Logs
Error logs you what errors have occurred in the system.
Write down any errors before you leave the error logs.
Select "System” from the main menu.
Select "Error Log:"
System:
Make a selection
Status
Error Log
Inventory
E x i t
System Error Log:
Make a selection
Last 10
Permanent
Transient
(most recent alarm)
Exit
Permanent Errors: aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Slotxx Portxx
Countxxx
First mm/dd/yy hh:mm
Last mm/dd/yy hh:mm
Code
Xxxx
Exit
>
Select the error log desired, for example, “Permanent."
Note: The most recent alarm message stays on the
System Error Log screen until it is replaced by another one.
The error information appears.
System Status
The System Status screen displays the simulated LED status for each module, except the power supply modules.
Select “System” from the main menu.
Maintenance
5-11
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
System:
Make a selection
Status
Error Log
Inventory
Exit
System Inventory
Slot 00
Board xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Hardware Vintage: xx
LEGEND R1 ID:
XX
D1D1D1D1D1D1D1D1D1D1
Exit
>
Select "Status.”
System Status:
Slot00: Raaa
Slot0l: Raaa Yaaa Gaaa
Slot02:
Raaa Yaaa Gaaa
Slot03:
Raaa Yaaa Gaaa
SlotC14: R Y G
Exit
>
The screen appears with simulated LEDs for each module for red, yellow, and green. Press the "More" button to display more modules, up to 17. If a slot is empty, R, Y, and G will appear, but not on or off.
System Inventory
System Inventory shows the vintage of the hardware and software and the ROM ID.
Select "System" from the main menu.
Select "Inventory.
n
System:
Make a selection
Status
Error Log
Inventory
Exit
The processor module inventory information appears. Press the "More” button to show the inventory information for the other modules.
5-12
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
System Inventory:
Slot xx
Board xxxxxx
Hardware Vintage: xx
Firmware Vintage: xx
Exit
>
The inventory information for the first line/trunk and station module appears.
Press "More" to show information for the next module.
Slot Screens
Slot screens let you check the status of the module in a particular slot and to perform maintenance activities such as demand tests and restore.
Note: On the maintenance screens, the power supply modules are not represented and the processor module is numbered “00.”
To get to all slot functions, select “Slot” from the main menu.
Slot:
Enter slot number (00-17) xx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
The slot screen appears.
Enter the slot number of the module you want by keying in the number, using the dialpad (MLX-20L telephone) or the keyboard
(PC) and pressing “Enter.”
Slot Status
Slot Status gives information about the module in a particular slot.
Enter the slot number of the module you want.
Maintenance
5-13
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Slot 00:
Make a selection
Status
Auto Test
Demand Test
Exit
This is the slot menu for the processor module. Select
“Status” from the Slot menu.
Status Slot 00:
LED:
Raaa
Errors:
Alarms:
Exit
This is the screen for the processor module.
Slot xx:
Make a selection
Status Demand Test
Busy-Out
Restore
Reset
Exit
If you entered a slot number other than 00 and the module in that slot is not the
100D module, this screen appears. Select "Status."
Status Slot xx:
LED: Raaa Yaaa Gaaa
Errors:
Mode:
Alarms:
Maintenance Busy
Exit
This screen appears with information for the module in the numbered slot.
Slot xx:
Make a selection
Status
Busy-Out
Restore
CSU-1pbk
Exit
Demand Test
Reset
Error Events
Clock
If you entered the slot number of the 100D module, this screen appears. Select "Status."
5-14
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Status Slot xx:
LED:
Errors:
Raaa Yaaa Gaaa
Mode:
Alarms:
Maintenance Busy
Exit
The 100D module status information appears.
Busy-Out and Reset
You must busy-out or reset any module before you run a demand test for it and before you replace it. “Busy-Out" is the preferred choice because it does not drop calls in progress.
In the following screens, "Busy-Out” is used, but choosing “Reset” works the same way.
Choose "Busy-Out” from this
Slot screen.
Slot xx:
Make a selection
Status
Demand Test
Busy-Out
Restore
Reset
Exit
This screen appears.
Busy-Out Slot
XX:
Busy-Out in Progress
Exit
Busy-Out Slot
XX:
Busy-Out Complete
Exit
This screen appears when busy-out is successfully completed.
Maintenance
5-15
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Busy-Out Slot
XX:
Busy-Out FAILED
This screen appears when busy-out fails.
Exit
Demand Tests
Demand tests let you pinpoint module problems.
Note: Before running any tests on the processor module, back
up the system translations by using the PC with SPM (see “Back
Up System Programming” in Chapter 4).
After you run a demand test on a module, you must restore the
module. See "Restore” later in this chapter.
Module Demand Test.
Request this demand test to find out if the module is functioning properly.
Note: A module must be busied-out run.
before a demand test is
Select "Demand the Slot menu.
Test" from
Slot xx:
Make a selection
Status
Busy-Out
Restore
Demand Test
Reset
Exit
Demand Test Slot xx:
Make a selection
Note: Busy out port first
Go
Repeat
Exit
Choose “Go” to run a test once; choose “Repeat” to repeat a test continuously.
5-16
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Demand Test Slot xx:
Board aaaaaaaa
Test FAILED
(Contents of test reg)
Exit
If you selected "Go," the test runs. A screen appears with
"Test in Progress," “Test
Successfully Completed,” or
“Test FAlLED” (and the contents of the test register), a sin this example.
If you selected "Repeat," this screen appears and you choose whether to continue the test or not.
Demand Test Slot xx:
Run continuously?
Yes
Cancel
Exit
Processor Module Demand Test
If you select “Demand Test” for the processor module, you get three choices: “Peek,” “Poke,” and “System Erase.”
CAUTION:
“Peek” and “Poke” should
NTSC.
be done only at the direction of the
Demand Test Slot 00:
Make a selection
Peek
Poke
System Erase
Exit
4
With “Peek” you can examine system memory or circuit board memory but cannot change anything.
"Poke" allows you to change a configuration, but this also changes the memory.
“System Erase” is a frigid start and erases all system memory.
Maintenance
5-17
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
C
E
Slot 00 EnterHexAddress: aaaaaaaa
Hex
Enter
Backspace
A
Exit
B
D
F
lf you selected "Peek," this screen appears. Key in the memory address and press
“Enter.”
Peek Address Oxaaaaaaaa:
OxFFFF
OxFFFF
OxFFFF
OxFFFF
Exit
OxFFFF
OxFFFF
OxFFFF
OxFFFF
>
This status screen appears.
Press “More” to view the next 16 bytes of memory locations.
The first 2-byte word of data at the requested address is shown in the upper lefthand part of the screen.
The next two-byte word is shown in the upper righthand part of the screen.
If you selected “Poke,” this screen appears. Choose to continue or cancel.
Poke - WARNING! ! SYSTEM
MEMORY WILL BE MODIFIED!
Continue
Cancel
Exit
Backspace
A c
E
Slot 00 Enter address: aaaaaaaa Hex
Enter
Exit
B
D
F
If you selected “Continue,” this screen appears. Key in the address of the desired memory address and press
“Enter.”
.
5-18
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting c
A
E
Oxaaaaaaaa
Enter data: aa
Hex
Backspace
Enter
Exit
B
D
F
This screen appears and you can enter any changes you want to make. Press
"Enter" when you are done.
Slot 00 System Erase:
System will be down
Do you want to continue?
Yes
No
Exit
System Erase:
Full-default Restarting
If you selected “System
Erase,” this screen appears.
Choose “Yes” or “No."
Remember that "System
Erase" wipes out the system’s memory.
If you chose to continue with "System Erase," this screen appears.
Restore
You must restore a module after a demand test has been run and after a module has been replaced.
Slot xx:
Make a selection
Status
Demand Test
Busy-Out Reset
Restore
Exit
After entering the slot number for the module, this screen appears.
Choose
"Restore."
Maintenance
5-19
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Restore Slot xx:
Restore in Progress
This screen appears and indicates that restore is in progress.
Exit
Restore Slot xx:
Restore Complete
When restore is successfully completed, this screen appears.
Exit
Restore Slot xx:
Restore FAILED
Board Mismatch
Exit
If the restore fails, this screen appears, indicating a board mismatch (a different module from the one replaced has been inserted in the slot).
100D Module Selections
The 100D module has three slot selections that are unique: “Error
Events,” “Clock,” and "CSU-lpbk" (Ioopback). Each of these is selected from the 100D module Slot screen below.
Error Events. “Error Events” lists the errors for the current and previous hours for the 100D module.
Enter the slot number of the 100D module.
5-20
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Slot xx:
Make a selection
Status
Busy-Out
Restore
CSU-lpbk
Exit
Demand Test
Reset
Error Events
Clock
This screen appears. Select
"Error Events."
Status Slot xx:
Make a selection
Current hr
Previous hr
Choose “Current hr” or
"Previous hr."
Current hr Slot xx: mm/dd/yy hh:00-hh:mm
CurAlm aaaa MaxAlm aaaa
MIS SLP ES BS SEC FS
xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx
Exit
This screen appears if you selected "Current hr." The
"Previous hr" screen is identical except for the title l i n e .
Clock. Choosing "Clock" from the 100D module Slot screen provides information on the clock synchronization for that module.
If you selected "Clock" this screen appears.
Clock Slot XX: mm/dd/yy hh:00-hh:mm
Admin as:
Active:
Synch source:
PPM: xxx
Exit
Maintenance
5-21
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Channel Service Unit Loopback Test.
Before you select the channel service unit (CSU) Ioopback test from the Slot screen, you must do the following:
1.
Plug one end of a bantam-to-bantam patch cord (or a
Ioopback fixture, if one is available) into the EQ OUT jack on the front of the CSU.
This causes the CSU to either loop back the network signal or send the all-ones pattern, depending on the chosen CSU option.
2.
Plug the other end of the patch cord into the EQ IN jack on the CSU.
3.
Using the maintenance screens, busy out the 100D module
(see "Line/Trunk or Station Busy-Out" later in this chapter).
Select “CSU-lpbk” from the 100D module Slot screen to start the
100D module to test data looping through the CSU. (Four tests are run for each channel.) The following screen appears.
CSU-lpbk Slot
XX:
CSU-lpbk in Progress
This screen indicates that the Ioopback test is running.
Exit
CSU-lpbk Slot
XX:
CSU-lpbk Passed
This screen appears if the
Ioopback test is successfully completed.
Exit
5-22
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CSU-lpbk Slot
XX:
CSU-lpbk Failed xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx
Exit
This screen appears if the
Ioopback test fails. The screen shows the number of failures for each channel.
After the test is completed, restore the 100D module by using the
maintenance screens (see "Line/Trunk or Station Restore" later in
this chapter) and unplug the patch cord, first from the EQ IN jack and then from the EQ OUT jack.
Port Screens
Port screens show information for individual lines/trunks and stations, as well as information for RS-232 ports and modems.
They also allow you to busy-out and restore these lines/trunks and stations.
Select “Port” on the main menu screen.
Port:
Make a selection
Line/Trunk
Station
RS232 Port1
RS232 Port2
Exit
Modem
This screen appears.
Choose the port you want.
Line/Trunk and Station Selections
Choosing “Line/Trunk” or “Station” gives you three options:
“Status,” “Busy-Out,” and “Restore.”
Line/Trunk or Station Status.
Select “Line/Trunk” to pull up the following screen. (The steps to review the status of a station are the same as in the line/trunk procedure.)
Maintenance
5-23
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Line/Trunk
Enter line number x x x x
Backspace
Exit Enter
Line/Trunk xxxx:
Make a selection
Status
Busy Out
Restore
Enter the dial plan line number for a particular line/trunk and mess "Enter."
Select "Status."
Line
XXXX
:
Dial Plan: xxxx
Label: xxxxxxxxxx
Maintenance Busy:
Exit
This screen appears with the current line/trunk status information.
Station xxxx:
Dial Plan: xxxx
Profile:
Maintenance Busy:
Exit
This is the screen for station status information.
Line/Trunk or Station Busy-Out.
This allows you to busy-out an individual line or station without affecting an entire module.
Note: A telephone on a busied-out line cannot be accessed.
The system provides a busy signal and, as applicable, a busy message to any incoming calls. However, when a queued call console (QCC) is busied out, calls to that QCC remain in queue until the QCC is restored or the caller disconnects.
5-24
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Line/Trunk xxxx:
Make a selection
Status
Busy Out
Restore
Exit
Line/Trunk
XXXX
:
Busy-Out in Progress
Select "Busy-Out."
This screen appears, indicating that the busy-out is in progress.
Exit
Busy-Out Line/Trunk
Xxxx:
Busy-Out Successfully
Completed
Exit
Busy-Out Line/Trunk xxxx:
Busy-Out FAILED
If the busy-out has finished successfully, this screen appears.
If the busy-out fails, this screen appears.
Exit
Line/Trunk or Station Restore.
You must restore a line/trunk or station after you have used busy-out.
Maintenance
5-25
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Line/Trunk
XXXX
:
Make a selection
Status
Busy Out
Restore
Exit
Select "Restore."
Restore Line/Trunk
XXXX
:
Restore in Progress
This screen appears, indicating that the restorers in progress.
Exit
Restore Line/Trunk
XXXX
:
Restore Successfully
Completed
Exit
If the restore is completed successfully, this screen appears.
Restore Line/Trunk
XXXX
:
Restore FAILED
If the restore fails, screen appears.
this
Exit
RS-232 or Modem Port Reset.
Select the desired RS-232 port or the modem from the Port menu.
Note: Port 1 is the system programming/maintenance port and
Port 2 is the SMDR port.
5-26
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
RS232 Portl: or
RS232 Port2: or
Modem Port:
Make a selection
Reset
If you want to reset the
RS-232 ports or the modem, select “Reset.”
Exit
RS232 Port1 Reset: or
RS232 Port2 Resets or
Modem Port Reset:
Do you want to continue?
Yes
Cancel
Select “Yes” to start the reset.
RS232 Portl Reset: or
RS232 Port2 Reset: or
Modem Port Reset:
Reset in Progress
Exit
RS232 Portl Reset: or
RS232 Port2 Reset: or
Modem Port Reset:
Reset Successfully
Completed
Exit
This screen appears, indicating that the reset is in progress.
If the reset is completed successfully, this screen appears.
Maintenance
5-27
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
RS232 Port1 Reset: or
RS232 Port2 Reset: or
Modem Port Reset:
Reset FAILED
If the reset fails, this screen appears.
Exit
Replacing Equipment
When an error has been isolated to one of the following pieces of equipment, you can replace the equipment:
■ carrier
■ power supply module
■ processor module
■ line/trunk and station modules
■ telephones (and adjuncts)
Notes:
You must record any station jack change on the "System
Technician’s Run Sheet" (see Appendix L).
The ring generator and auxiliary power units can also be faulty
and must be replaced. (See Chapter 3, “Installation,” for
information on replacing this equipment.)
Replacing the Carrier
Typical carrier problems include power supply failure, sudden failure of one or more line/trunk and station modules, or system problems that cannot be isolated to a specific module.
5-28
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Follow these steps to check carrier problems:
1.
Visually inspect the pins on the carrier. (Bent or broken pins often cause carrier problems.) To do this, you may have to remove one or more line/trunk and station modules by using
Busy-Out, Reset, and Restore.
2.
If you find a problem with the carrier, you must replace it (but not the line/trunk and station modules). Carriers cannot be repaired in the field.
3.
Attach a tag that describes the problem to the faulty carrier.
Replacing the Power Supply Module
Failure of the power supply shuts down everything connected to the carrier.
If the power supply fails, check that the interlocking post in the power supply slot of the carrier has not broken off. Without this post, the power supply will not operate and the carrier must be replaced.
Follow these steps to replace the power supply module:
1.
If possible, save the translations on a floppy disk by using the backup function.
Note: If the power supply module on the basic carrier has failed, the system cannot save the translations to a disk.
2.
Power down the system by turning off a. the power supply module on the basic carrier b. the power supply module(s) on the expansion carrier(s) c. any auxiliary power unit (if present)
3.
Unplug the system from the AC outlet.
4.
Remove the power supply module and insert a new one.
Maintenance
5-29
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
5. Restore power by turning on a. any auxiliary unit (if present) b. the power supply module(s) on the expansion carrier(s) c. the power supply module on the basic carrier
The system automatically cold starts.
Replacing the Processor Module
A failed processor module must be repaired immediately. Follow these steps to replace a failed processor module:
1.
If possible, save all the translations to a floppy disk by using the backup function.
Note: When the processor module fails, backup is usually impossible.
2.
Power down the system by turning off a. the power supply module on the basic carrier b. the power supply module(s) on the expansion carrier(s) c. any auxiliary power unit (if present)
3.
Unplug the SMDR printer and/or system programming PC cords if present.
4.
Remove the processor module.
5.
6.
Inspect the processor module for any visible problems.
Inspect the carrier backplane.
7.
Remove the feature module from the processor module and install it in the new processor module.
8.
Install the new processor module.
5-30
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
9. Restore power by turning on a. any auxiliary unit (if present) b. the power supply module(s) on the expansion carrier(s) c. the power supply module on the basic carrier
The system automatically cold starts.
10. Use the maintenance screens to select “System Erase” (frigid start).
11. Restore the system translations from the backup floppy disk.
12. Plug in the SMDR printer and/or administrative PC cords.
13. Attach a tag identifying any visible problems and any relevant error reports to the replaced processor module.
Replacing the Line/Trunk and Station Modules
Line/trunk and station modules can be removed and inserted without affecting normal call processing. Leave the system power on. All line/trunk and station modules can be removed or inserted at the same time.
Notes:
■
Although the system is designed for line/trunk and station modules to be removed and replaced without affecting call processing, partially inserting and removing a module can cause a cold start.
■
Adding a 100D module or changing any of its DS1 parameters requires that the system be idle.
The module removed must be replaced with a module having the same type of circuit board, in other words, the same signature. If a module is replaced with another type of module, or if a module is added to the system without the system being powered down, a cold start occurs. If you move the first 008 MLX module from its
Maintenance
5-31
Maintenance and Troubleshooting slot, you must renumber the modules by selecting “Board
Renumber” from the System Programming menu.
Note: This procedure is not the procedure for replacing the processor module.
Follow these steps to replace a line/trunk and station module:
1.
Busy-out or reset the module. (Busy-out is recommended.)
The module enters standby mode for a reset.
2.
Label all line/trunk and station cords (if they haven’t been labeled already) and unplug them from the module.
3.
Run a demand test by entering the test mode.
4.
Remove the module and inspect it for visible damage.
5.
Insert the new module.
6.
Select “Restore” to put the module back in service.
7.
Plug in the line/trunk and station cords.
8.
Attach a tag identifying any visible problems or failure symptoms, and any relevant error reports to the replaced module.
Replacing the Telephones and Adjuncts
Once a problem has been isolated to a telephone (or a group of telephones), various tests can be done to see if the telephone is working properly. Check the telephone wire first. Also, swap a telephone you know is good with the one you think is faulty.
These practical steps isolate the problem quickly.
The following describes the telephone tests and how to fix particular problems.
5-32
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
MLX Telephone Tests
Follow the procedure below to test MLX telephones. The tests check the
■
LEDs
■ display screen
■ ringer
■ buttons
■ switchhook
■
B-channel operation
Follow this basic procedure for any MLX telephone test:
1.
2.
Pick up the handset.
At the dial tone, enter the feature access code
(∗00) by pressing the dialpad.
The software should place the telephone in test mode.
3.
4.
Run the test.
Hang up when done.
Note: Telephones cannot be tested remotely.
Basic MLX Telephone Test.
This test connects a test tone to the B channel and sends a repeated ring burst to the telephone.
All the LEDs turn on.
Follow these steps to test an MLX telephone:
1. Press a line/feature button with two LEDs to toggle these
LEDs red and green.
Maintenance
5-33
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
2. Press a fixed-feature button with one LED to toggle the LED on and off.
Note: Mute and Speaker LEDs may not toggle consistently since they are managed by both the CU and the telephone.
3. Press a fixed-feature button without an LED or press a dialpad button to toggle the Message LED on and off.
4. Press the fixed-feature buttons and the dialpad in the following sequence to turn on all the LEDs: a. Volume down b. Volume up c. Transfer
d.
Conf
e. Drop f. Hold g.
123456789∗0#
MLX Telephones with Displays Test.
Activating the test blacks out the display.
Follow these steps to test an MLX telephone with a display:
1. Press any display button.
A unique character string should appear.
2. Press each display button in turn to cause a unique character string to appear.
MLX Telephones with a DSS Test.
Activating the test turns on all the LEDs. Follow the steps in “Basic MLX Telephone Test” above to get the LED response.
5-34
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
MLX Telephones with Multi-Function Modules (MFMs) in the T/R Mode Test.
To run this test, you must connect a single-
Iine telephone to the MFM.
Follow these steps to test a telephone with an MFM:
1.
At the system access or intercom dial tone, dial the feature code
∗09 to activate the test.
The diagnostic test tone connects to the B channel.
2.
Press the sequence
123456789∗0# and then quickly press the switchhook.
The CU should send a confirmation tone.
3.
Hang up.
The CU should send a ring burst to the MFM, turn on the
Message LED, and resume normal operations.
Fixing Telephone Problems
When a user complaint or a system test identifies the telephone as the problem area, the trouble can be in the telephone itself, in the mounting cord, or in the wiring between the CU and the telephone. Check the wiring and the mounting cord before checking the telephone.
Note: If the wiring has been crushed or severed, the -48-VDC power supply may be shorted.
General Telephone and Wiring Troubles
Symptom:
Intermittent telephone trouble
Maintenance
5-35
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Procedure:
1.
Swap a known good telephone with the suspect telephone to determine if the problem is localized to the suspect telephone. If local power is provided, check the power supply.
2.
If trouble disappears, the fault is with the suspect telephone.
Replace it.
3.
If the known good telephone does not work properly, the fault is in the wiring or the line/trunk and station module.
4.
Check the other telephones connected to the same module. If they are working properly, the fault is probably in the wiring, or it may be a single-port failure on the line/trunk and station module. Swap the wiring between the jack field and the telephone to see if it is a wiring problem. Fix the wiring problem.
5.
If the other telephones connected to the same line/trunk and station module are not working properly, the fault is probably in the line/trunk and station module.
6.
Check the LEDs on the line/trunk and station module.
7.
Check the error log for relevant messages.
8.
Replace the faulty line/trunk and station module.
Analog Multiline Telephone Troubles
Symptom:
Telephone LEDs and/or ringing tones do not work properly.
Procedure:
1. Move the T/P lever on the left-hand side to the “T” (test) position.
You should hear tone ringing. All the red and green LEDs on the terminal should flash alternately.
5-36
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
2.
If LEDs do not light, check the CU and wiring by using a known good phone.
3.
Move the T/P lever to its normal position.
Ringing tone should stop, and the LEDs should be off.
4.
If any part of the test fails, replace the telephone.
Symptom:
Time appears on the display, but the incoming call information does not.
Procedure:
Move the T/P lever on the side of the telephone to the center position.
Voice Transmission Troubles
Symptom:
Telephone does not receive tones.
Procedure:
Check the CU and wiring with a known good telephone.
Single-Line Telephone Problems
Symptom:
Many single-line telephones cannot dial correctly even though they are receiving calls.
Maintenance
5-37
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Procedure:
Using a single-line telephone, test the touch-tone receivers
(TTRs) as follows:
1.
Pick up the handset and dial
∗04 and the 2-digit number of the TTR to be tested.
■
If you hear a busy tone, the receiver is in use.
■
If you hear a reorder tone, you have misdialed or have reached an invalid TTR.
2.
■
If you hear a dial tone, continue this test.
Dial the digits
123456789∗0#.
You should hear a DTMF signal as each button is pressed. If the test is successful, you will hear a dial tone within one to three seconds after you enter #.
3.
Repeat the test for each TTR.
4.
Replace the module containing the faulty TTR if this test fails.
Symptom:
User cannot make outside calls on touch-tone telephone.
Procedure:
Check the individual line/trunk for rotary-dial programming.
Call Forward Problems
Symptom:
Users are getting other people’s calls.
Procedure:
Usually this problem results from someone unknowingly activating Call Forward. Cancel the forwarding of calls to the receiving telephone as follows:
5-38
M a i n t e n a n c e
.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
■
For multiline telephones
1.
2.
Press the Feature button.
Dial
∗34∗.
■
For single-line telephones
1.
2.
3.
Pick up the handset.
Dial
#∗34∗.
Hang up.
Central Office Troubles
The automatic maintenance program takes service when a line/trunk is malfunctioning.
periodically tested to put it back in service.
the ports out of
The line/trunk is
Maintenance Busy
When a line/trunk cannot be seized for an incoming or outgoing call, the line/trunk is automatically put into a maintenance-busy state. When a line/trunk is in a maintenance-busy state, no outgoing calls can be placed on it. However, the line/trunk still receives incoming calls.
Note: Maintenance busy does not apply to DID trunks because
DID trunks cannot be used to make outgoing calls.
Maintenance
5-39
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
While the line/trunk is in a maintenance-busy state, the software periodically runs tests to try to seize the line/trunk. If the seizure is unsuccessful, the line/trunk stays in a maintenance-busy state.
If the seizure is successful, the line/trunk is placed back in service. If a test is running when an incoming call is received on the line/trunk, the test is dropped and the call is processed.
Note: No more than 50 percent of tines/trunks in a pool can be maintenance busy at one time. The only exceptions are
■ user-imposed maintenance busy (for example, module replacement)
■ module maintenance busy (for example, a loss-of-service alarm in the 100D module)
■ no external release at the far end of the line
A permanent error is entered when more than 50 percent of the lines/trunks in a pool are maintenance busy. When the maintenance-busy level falls below 50 percent, the permanent error is automatically removed.
Note: Make sure that no modules are in a maintenance-busy
state during a backup procedure (see "Back Up System
Programming" in Chapter 4, "Programming Procedures"). Any
module in a maintenance-busy state will be recorded as such on the translations disk.
Conditions Causing a Maintenance-Busy State
■
Ground-Start Line/Trunk
■
A seizure of the line/trunk is attempted that results in incomplete handshaking between the CO and the system.
After four occurrences, the line/trunk is put into a maintenance-busy state and a permanent error is logged.
5-40
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
■
The CO fails to disconnect when the GS Iine/trunk is dropped by the system.
After two occurrences, the line/trunk is put into a maintenance-busy state and a permanent error is !ogged.
■
No loop current is detected when the GS line/trunk is seized.
The port is marked maintenance busy and a permanent error is logged.
■
Loop-Start Line/Trunk
■
No loop current exists when the LS Iine/trunk is seized.
The port is marked maintenance busy and a permanent error is logged.
■
Tie Trunk
■
A seizure of an outgoing tie trunk fails.
A transient error is reported. After four unsuccessful seizure attempts, the port is marked maintenance busy
and the error becomes permanent.
■
The far-end station fails to disconnect.
A transient error is reported. Atfer two occurrences, the port is marked maintenance-busy and the error becomes permanent.
Note: The test is not run on auto-out tie trunks.
Maintenance-Busy Programming
You can select automatic maintenance busy as a system programming option.
If you do, there is also a menu selection to include tie trunks.
Maintenance 5-41
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Manual Correction of Line/Trunk Problems
If the system cannot seize a line/trunk even after repeated attempts, you may have to replace the module. To identify the line/trunk problem, first check for a dial tone at the CU. If you do not hear a dial tone, check the error logs and make a line/trunk test call.
It is sometimes difficult for the customer to detect line/trunk troubles. If a line/trunk is down, an error is recorded in the error log and the line/trunk is taken out of service. If an incoming-only line/trunk is down, however, the only sign of trouble is customer complaints that incoming calls are not being received.
Check the error log for messages about trunk type (such as DID, tie, and T1). Also check the wiring and the system parameters
(for example, touch-tone/rotary, toll restriction, and disconnect time interval).
Outgoing Line/Trunk Problems
Symptom:
Outgoing lines/trunks cannot be seized.
Procedure:
1. At the network interface, check for a dial tone from the CO. If a dial tone is not present, notify the customer.
Note: For GS lines/trunks, apply ground to the ring lead to get a dial tone.
2. Pickup the handset at a test station to get a system dial tone.
3. For a Hybrid/PBX system, dial
∗03.
Note: Dialing
∗03 on a single-line telephone works only if the line/trunk accepts touch-tone dialing. After you dial
∗03 on a single-line telephone, you may have to wait for a “click” before dialing the line/trunk number.
5-42
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
4.
Dial the 2-digit line/trunk number of the line/trunk to be tested
(01-80).
5.
Listen for a dial tone. if a dial tone is not present, use a test set to isolate the fault to the line/trunk and station module where the line/trunk terminates or to the location in the line/trunk access equipment.
6.
If a dial tone is present, dial a working outside number. Verify that the call is complete.
If the line/trunk is busy, you hear a busy tone. You hear a reorder tone if a wrong line/trunk type (such as DID) or an invalid line/trunk number was dialed.
7.
If the module continues to malfunction, replace it.
Incoming Line/Trunk Problems
Symptom:
Incoming lines/trunks do not work properly.
Procedure:
1.
Place an incoming call through the troubled line/trunk.
2.
For an LS or GS line/trunk, connect a single-line telephone to the line/trunk at the network interface. (If the line/trunk is a GS line/trunk, you need to have a GS button attached to the telephone.) Press the GS button for a GS line/trunk. Listen for ringing. Pick up the handset and check line seizure. Dial an outside number and verify that you have good two-way transmission.
3.
At the maintenance terminal, check the line/trunk translations to be sure this line/trunk has been properly translated. (See the system planning forms.)
4.
If the module continues to malfunction, replace it.
Maintenance
5-43
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Line/Trunk Error Summary
Table 5-1 shows the line/trunk errors reported when a transient permanent error is registered by the system. These errors are also recorded for T1 ports.
or
Note: In some cases, errors occur not because a single port fails but because the entire T1 link fails. If the entire T1 link fails, the periodic T1 board-level maintenance monitoring functions perform the testing and activate alarming.
Table 5-1 Line/Trunk Errors
Error
Line/Trunk
No loop current
LS and GS lines/trunks
No external release on far-end disconnect
GS, DID, and tie lines/trunks
On-hook before ready to receive
DID and tie trunks digits; trunk with delay-dial or wink-start
On-hook before wink; trunk with
DID and tie trunks delay-dial or wink-start
Stuck ringing
LS and GS lines/trunks
Wink too short for valid signal
Tie trunks
5-44
Maintenance
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
The 100D System Module—T1
Maintenance
Every 15 minutes the system checks the 100D module for the following:
■
Initialization. The system ensures that all T1 ports are properly initialized and placed into service. It also resolves the conflicts of different service levels (for example, between the individual ports or for the initialization of the ports to support features).
■
■
■
■
Error detection and handling. The system detects errors and takes the facility out of service, if appropriate. It attempts to restore the facility and put it back into service.
Error recording. The system records all errors and outages in the error logs.
Audits and updates. The system checks the state of the T1 facilities through audits, status checks, and error logging.
Maintaining the synchronization plan. The system maintains proper synchronization to the loop clock and switches to the local clock when the loop clock is not available (for example, during a loss of signal or a blue alarm). When the loop clock source is restored, the system switches back to the loop clock.
Maintenance
5-45
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Table 5-2 below is a quick reference for maintenance problems and possible solutions.
Table 5-2 Maintenance Problems and Solutions
Error Screen
Code Description
Possible Cause Solution
0001
T I M E O U T
COLD START
■
Software initiated
■
Power failure
■
Faulty processor module
No action is needed. If problem persists, check or replace processor module.
0002
0003
0004
0006
POWER UP
WARM START
SOFTWARE
COLD START
SOFTWARE
WARM START
■
Power failure
■
Power supply failure
■
Faulty processor
■ module
■
Faulty processor
■
Software initiated module
Software initiated
■
Faulty processor module
INCOMPLETE
COLD START
■
System was cold started while restart was in progress
■
Power supply failure
■
Faulty processor module
Check for erratic AC power. Check power supply voltages and replace if necessary; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, check or replace processor module.
No action is needed. If problem persists, check or replace processor module.
No action is needed. If problem persists, check or replace processor module.
Check power supply voltages and replace if necessary; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, check or replace processor module.
5-46
Troubleshooting
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Table 5-2 Continued
Error
Code
Screen
Description Possible Cause
0007
0008
0009
000A
SANITY
TIMEOUT
RESET
MAX RESET
COUNT
EXCEEDED
FRIGID
START
POWER UP
COLD START
Solution
■
Processor module sanity timer failure
■
Software failure
■
Module failure
■
Backplane failure
Check module and replace if necessay, or check or replace processor module.
■
System initiated cold
Check power supply start because of too voltages and replace many warm starts.
power supply module if
■
■
Power supply module failure
Faulty processor module necessary; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, check or replace processor module.
■
■
Processor module was removed while in use, and system initiated frigid start because of translation loss.
User initiated frigid start
■
Power supply module failure
■
Faulty processor module
■
Power failure
Restore translations if backup disk is available. If no backup is available, reprogram system by using instructions in Chapter
Check power supply voltages and replace if necessary; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, check or replace processor module.
000B
CARD
INSERTED/
REMOVED
■
Module was installed Usually no action is or removed needed.
000C
SLOT
STREAM CNT
EXCEEDED
■
Excessive interrupts generated by slot
If problem persists, check or replace processor module.
Troubleshooting
5-47
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Table 5-2 Continued
Error
Code
Screen
Description
Possible Cause
000D
000E
000F
FMWR NOT
IN STANDBY
MODE
COMMAND
BUFFER
FULL
TASK
RUNNING
TOO LONG
■
Module firmware is not in standby mode at cold start.
■
Module failure
■
Faulty processor module
■
Faulty processor module
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
INVALID
SLOT
INTERRUPT
STACK
OVERFLOW
INVALID
RESET FLAG
DUART
STREAMING
INT
PROCESSOR
ERR
INTERRUPT
MODULE
MISMATCH
■
System cannot determine module responsible for generating interrupt
■
Faulty processor module
■
Faulty processor module
■
Faulty processor module
■
Faulty processor module
Solution
If problem persists, check or replace module.
No action is needed. If problem persists, check or replace module.
No action is needed. If problem persists, check or replace processor module.
Check modules and replace if necessary. If problem persists, check or replace processor module.
Check or replace processor module.
Check or replace processor module.
Check or replace processor module.
Check or replace processor module.
0C01
NO I-VMS
PORT IN
SERV
■
Module inserted into wrong slot, and physical and logical types do not match
Change programming to reflect proper module or install proper module.
■
All VMS ports are out No action is needed.
of service.
5-48
Troubleshooting
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Table 5-2 Continued
Error
Code
Screen
Description Possible Cause
1C01
POOL
M-BUSY
EXCEEDS
50%
■
50% or more of lines/trunks in the pool indicated by the
PORT
number are maintenance busy.
3001
ALARM
TABLE FULL
■
Error logs are full, and no more errors can be written to them.
6C01
6C02
DS1 BLUE
ALARM
6C04
DS1 LOSS
OF SIGNAL
ALARM
DS1 YELLOW
ALARM
■
Service on line is lost.
■
T1 facility failure
■
All 1s are being received.
■
Service on link is lost.
■
Far end is out of service.
■
Far end lost frame synchronization.
■
Service on line is lost.
Solution
Check line/trunk.
Correct indicated errors, then remove entries from transient system error log to create space. If problem persists, cold start system before continuing with troubleshooting.
Check T1 facility and report to service provider; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, contact the NTSC.
Check T1 facility and report to service provider; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, contact the NTSC.
Check T1 facility and report to service provider; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, contact the NTSC.
Troubleshooting
5-49
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Table 5-2 Continued
Error
Code
Screen
Description
6C05
6C06
6C07
6C08
DS1 LOSS
OF
MULTIFRAME
DS1 REMOTE
MULTIFRAME
DS1 MAJOR
ALARM
DS1 MINOR
ALARM
Possible Cause
■
Service on link is lost.
Solution
Occurs only with common-channel signaling. Check T1 facility and report to service provider; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, contact the
NTSC.
■
■
Far end is Occurs only with experiencing loss-ofcommon-channel multiframe.
Service on link is lost.
signaling. Check T1 facility and report to service provider; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, contact the
NTSC.
■
Average bit error rate is greater than
10E-3.
■
Service on link is lost.
Check T1 facility and report to service provider; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, contact the NTSC.
■
Average bit error rate is greater than
10E-6.
Check T1 facility and report to service provider; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, contact the NTSC.
6C09
6C0A
DS1
MISFRAME
ALARM
DS1 SLIP
ALARM
■
Misframe count reached 17.
■
Slip count reached
88.
Check T1 facility and report to service provider; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, contact the NTSC.
Check T1 facility and report to service provider; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, contact the NTSC.
5-50
Troubleshooting
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Table 5-2 Continued
Error
Code
Screen
Description
7001
7002
7003
7004
7005
PRI SVC
AUDIT
TIMEOUT
PRI SVC
STATE
INCONSIST
PRI D-CHNL
INOPER-
ATIVE
PRI B-CHNL
NOT
RELEASED
PRI B-CH
GROUP
INCONSIST
Possible Cause
■
Timeout of Bchannel service audit
■
■
■
Inconsistent Bchannel service state
D-channel inoperative
Timeout of callrelease message
■
Inconsistent Bchannel trunk group
Solution
Check PRI facility and report to service provider; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, contact the NTSC.
Check PRI facility and report to service provider; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, contact the NTSC.
Check PRI facility and report to service provider; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, contact the NTSC.
Check PRI facility and report to service provider; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, contact the NTSC.
Check PRI facility and report to service provider; otherwise no action is needed. If problem persists, contact the NTSC.
Troubleshooting
5-51
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Table 5-2 Continued
Error
Code
Screen
Description
Possible Cause
7402
■
No Ioop current
LOOP
CONTROL
BIT NOT
SET
7403
NO LOOP
7404
STUCK
RINGING
7801
NOT IN
NORMAL OP
MODE
■
■
■
No loop current
Continuous ringing from CO
AC power cross
■
During background port board check, system detected port board that was not in normal operation mode.
Solution
Test the line/trunk with a single-line telephone. If the problem is not in the
Iine/trunk, swap the positions of similar line/trunk and station modules. If the problem follows the module, replace the Iine/tnmk and station module.
Test the line/trunk with a single-line telephone. If the problem is not in the line/trunk, swap the positions of similar line/trunk and station modules. If the problem follows the module, replace the line/trunk and station module.
Test the line/trunk with a single-line telephone. If the problem is not in the
Iine/trunk, swap the positions of similar
Iine/trunk and station modules. If the problem follows the module, replace the line/trunk and station module.
If problem persists, check or replace module.
5-52
Troubleshooting
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Table 5-2 Continued
Error
Code
Screen
Description
Possible Cause
7802
SANITY INT
NOT
GENERATED
■
Station port board failure
7803
NO PORT
BOARDS
AVAILABLE
■
No port boards are present.
7804
■
Station board failure
INVALID
SANITY
RESPONSE
7805
N/A
INVALID
SLOT ID
FROM TA
7806
NOT IN
STANDBY
MODE
Solution
If problem persists, check or replace module.
No action is needed.
Remove entry from transient log.
If problem persists, check or replace module.
Contact the NTSC.
■
Faulty module
If problem persists, detected during cold check or replace start.
module.
7807
SELF TEST
NOT
COMPLETED
7808
TEST
RESULT
REGISTER
BAD
■
Faulty module
If problem persists, detected during cold check or replace start or background module.
check.
■
Faulty module If problem persists, detected during cold check or replace start or background module.
check.
7809
780A
TEST
STATUS
REGISTER
BAD
DPR TEST
NOT
COMPLETED
■
Faulty module If problem persists, detected during cold check or replace start or background module.
check.
■
Faulty module
If problem persists, detected during cold check or replace start or background module.
check.
Troubleshooting
5-53
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Table 5-2 Continued
Error
Code
Screen
Description Possible Cause
780C
RAM TEST
FAILURE
N/A
7800
ROM TEST
FAILURE-
UPPER
■
Memory failed ROM test.
780E
8001
8402
8403
ROM TEST
FAILURE-
TEST
TA
HARDWARE
ERROR
WINK TOO
SHORT
NO
EXTERNAL
RELEASE
Solution
Contact the NTSC.
■
N/A
Memory failed ROM test.
■
Wink from far end is less than minimum for an outgoing tie trunk with delay-dial or wink-start. Line is waiting for valid signal.
■
Faulty cable
■
Far end not disconnected within
4 minutes.
Replace the feature module. If problem persists, check or replace processor module.
Replace the feature module. If problem persists, check or replace processor module.
Swap the positions of similar Iine/trunk and station modules. If the problem follows the module, replace the line/trunk and station module. If the problem stays at that position, test the line/trunk.
Check far end for proper operation and programming. Check for faulty cable.
Replace the line/trunk and station module as needed.
Check far end for proper operation and programming. Check for faulty cable.
5-54
Troubleshooting
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Table 5-2 Continued
Error
Code
Screen
Description
Possible Cause
8404
ON HOOK
BEFORE
WINK
■
Far end went onhook before handshake was completed on an outgoing tie trunk with delay-dial or wink-start, or on a
DID trunk with winkstart.
8405
8406
8407
ON HOOK
BEFORE
READY
INTERDIGIT
TOO SHORT
BAD UPDATE
Solution
If problem persists, check tie trunk configuration. Check the far end for proper working and translation.
Check for faulty cable.
Replace the line/trunk and station module as needed.
■
Far end went onhook before guard
Check the far end for proper working and time elapsed on an outgoing tie trunk with delay-dial-start or wink-start, or on translation. Check for faulty cable. Replace the line/trunk and station module as
DID trunk with delayneeded.
-dial-start or winkstart.
■
Noisy line
Check the far end to see if it is working and translated properly.
Check for faulty cable.
Replace line/trunk and station module as needed.
■
Invalid trunk parameter
Turn the power off for at least 1 second and then back on. Repeat system programming procedure. If the problem persists, replace the line/trunk and station module.
Troubleshooting
5-55
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Table 5-2 Continued
Error
Code
Screen
Description Possible Cause
8408
■
Noisy line
8409
840A
840B
ROTARY
RATE >
12PPS
ROTARY
RATE <
8PPS
BAD
DOWNLINK
MESSAGE
NO LOOP
CURRENT
■
Noisy line
■
Unrecognized message from the processor module to the line/trunk and station module
■
Unsteady power cycle
■
Communication problems between the tine/trunk and station module and the CO
■
No loop current
Solution
Check the far end to see if it is working and translated properly.
Check for faulty cable.
Replace line/trunk and station module as needed.
Check the far end to see if it is working and translated properly.
Check for faulty cable.
Replace line/trunk and station module as needed.
Turn power off for at least 1 second and then back on. Repeat system programming procedure. If problem persists, replace line/trunk and station module.
Swap positions of similar line/trunk and station modules. If problem follows the module, replace line/trunk and station module. If problem stays at that position, test Iine/trunk.
5-56
Troubleshooting
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Table 5-2 Continued
Error
Code
Screen
Description
840C
840D
840E
STUCK
RINGING
INCORRECT
FIRMWARE
STATE
TRK UPLINK
MESSAGE
ERROR
Possible Cause
■
Continuous ringing from CO
■
AC power cross
■
Incorrect system module firmware state
■
Unrecognized message from the processor module to the line/trunk and station module
Solution
Swap positions of similar line/trunk and station modules. If problem follows module, replace line/trunk and station module. If problem stays at that position, test line/trunk.
Turn power off for at least 1 second and then back on. Repeat system programming procedure. If problem persists, replace
Iine/trunk and station module.
Turn power off for at least 1 second and then back on. Repeat system programming procedure. If problem persists, replace line/trunk and station module.
Troubleshooting
5-57
Adapters,
Acessories, and
Applicaitons
This chapter provides descriptions and installation instructions for the adapters that connect adjuncts and accessories to the control unit and the telephones. It also describes accessories and applications that add features to the system.
A d a p t e r s
A variety of adjuncts (see Appendix B) can be connected to
analog and digital telephones and to the system by using one of the following adapters: General Purpose Adapter (GPA), ISDN
7500B Data Module, Multi-Function Module (MFM), or
Supplemental Alert Adapter (SAA).
General Purpose Adapter
A GPA permits the attachment of a tip/ring (T/R) device such as a single-line telephone, modem, or answering machine to an analog multiline telephone. The device must be touch-tone, not rotary.
Adapters
6-1
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Note: The GPA is intended for answer-only service. Calls must be originated (dialed) by using the associated analog multiline telephone. The GPA has no touch-tone receivers or pulse dial detectors for dialing.
Plug one end of a 4-pair cord into the V.T. jack on the back of the
GPA and the other end into the OTHER jack on the underside of the telephone. Plug the cord from the adjunct into the TEL.
EQUIP. jack on the GPA (see Figure 67).
Slide the switch on the back of the GPA to the setting that provides the GPA service required.
■
Basic. This setting is used to dial and answer calls from an analog multiline telephone or to attach a T/R adjunct such as a single-line telephone, answering machine, or fax machine.
Incoming calls ring only on the analog multiline telephone.
■
Join. This setting is used to add a recording device or a single-line telephone to a call that is in progress on the telephone. You cannot originate or answer calls on this setting.
■
Automatic. This setting is used in two ways:
■ with a device, such as an answering machine or a modem, to answer calls. An Auto Answer–All button is needed so that calls can be answered automatically.
■ to make and receive calls on the telephone while using a computer or modem that is attached to the GPA. This is called “simultaneous voice and data.”
ISDN 7500B Data Module
See “ISDN 7500B Data Module” in Chapter 3.
Multi-Function Module
See "Install the Multi-Function Module” in Chapter 3.
6-2
Adapters
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Supplemental Alert Adapter
An SAA allows the connection of an extra alerting device, such as a bell or chime, to an analog muitiline telephone. Alerts notify people working inside calls.
in noisy areas of incoming, transferred, and
Note: The MFM
MLX telephone.
allows the connection of alerting devices to an
Follow these steps to install an SAA (see Figure 68):
1. Plug the telephone cord into the jack labeled Telephone
2. Plug the cord from the external alert device into the jack labeled ALERTER.
3. Plug the cord from the station jack into the jack labeled
Control Unit.
Unusable Adjuncts and Adapters
The following analog telephone adjuncts and be used with the system and, in some cases, device or the system if connected: adapters are not to will damage the
Basic Telephone and Modem Interface (BTMI)
Basic Telephone and Modem Interface-2 (BTMI-2)
ATR Interface (ATRI)
MTR Interface (MTRI)
Off-Premises Extension Unit (OPX)
System 25 Direct Extension Selector (DXS)
Adapters
6-3
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Accessories
When adjuncts and adapters are connected to telephones, the power requirements of the telephone and the communications system increase. Adding a power accessory to an individual telephone or to the system accommodates these additional needs.
Power accessories can also be used for grounding and protecting special telephone connections. To install power units or power protection equipment, follow the instructions in the customer information booklet (CIB) included with the equipment.
Other accessories provide backup for power failures and alarms for system malfunctions.
Telephone Power Unit
Connected between the telephone and the wall jack, the
KS22911 and 329A power units provide additional power to individual telephones that have adjuncts, adapters, and/or Direct
Station Selectors (DSSs) attached or to telephones far from the
CU. Adding local power to a few telephones can reduce the system load.
A KS22911 kit for MLX telephones comes complete with a D6AP cord, the KS22911,L1 power supply unit, and a 400B or 400B2 adapter. For analog multitine telephones, the KS22911 kit includes the KS22911,L1 power supply unit, a D6AP cord, and a
Z400F adapter.
The 329A power unit (PEC 31578) does not come in a kit, so the
D6AP cord and the 400B or 400B2 adapter must be ordered separately.
Note: Telephone operation without adjuncts is guaranteed for a wiring run up to 1000 cable-feet from the CU.
6-4
Accessories
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Auxiliary Power Units
When a power demand of over 54 unit loads is placed on one power supply module, an Auxiliary Power Unit 9024 is generally needed and increases power by 27 unit loads.
To determine the number of unit loads for each power supply
module on each carrier, see “Unit Loads” in Chapter 2 and
Appendix D.
Note: Only one auxiliary power unit can be connected to the
391A power supply unit. If additional 48-VDC power is needed, connect some telephones to KS22911 or 329A telephone power units.
In-Range Out-of-Building (IROB)
Protector
See "IROB Protection" in Chapter 3, “Installation.”
Power Failure Transfer
A power failure transfer (PFT) telephone is a single-line telephone connected to a PFT jack on a 400, 400/GS/LS/TTR,
800,800 GS/LS, 408, or 408 GS/LS module (see Figure 4). In the
event of a power failure, the system shuts off and the PFT telephone automatically turns onto be used for making and receiving calls.
Notes:
■
The PFT jack does not operate unless a power outage occurs or the power supply units are turned off.
■
A single-line telephone connected to an MFM cannot be used as a PFT telephone.
Accessories
6-5
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
■
If PFT telephones are to be connected to GS lines/trunks, a
GS button (see Figure 66) must be added to each PFT
telephone. If the button is used with modular 2500 telephones, the button should be wired from the wall jack.
■
If rotary lines/trunks are used, rotary telephones must be used as PFT telephones.
System Alarms
An alarm detected by the system can cause the CU to activate contact closures at a GS or LS port (programming of an LS port is preferred). When the contacts close, a signal is passed on to a
Universal Paging Access Module (UPAM) and then to an external alert. Alerting devices can be a strobe, horn, bell, or chime.
A UPAM is needed because 48-VDC alerting devices require four contact closures and the GS or LS ports have only two. The
UPAM provides the additional two.
Trouble Alarms
A GS or LS port can be programmed to activate an alarm
connected to the port via a UPAM (see Figure 69). When system
trouble (caused by hardware or software malfunction) is detected by the operator console, a signal is sent to that port.
The port’s switching contacts close and send the signal onto the
UPAM, which activates an external alert.
Power Failure Alarm
A GS or LS PFT port can be programmed to activate an alerting device during a power failure. The device is connected to the
port via a UPAM (see Figure 70). When a power failure occurs,
the switching contacts on the PFT port close and send a signal to the UPAM, which activates an external alert.
6-6
Accessories
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Note: A PFT telephone cannot be used on this port when the port is connected for a power failure alarm.
Power Failure DID Busy-Out
The PFT port on a GS or LS module can be programmed to automatically short the busy-out wire pair associated with a group of DID trunks. Usually an LS line/trunk is used as the busyout pair. When a power failure occurs, shorting this busy-out pair signals the CO that the DID trunks are out of service (see
Note: To remove the GS or LS module containing the PFT port for the DID busy-out, you must first short the busy-out pair and then disconnect the modular cord from the PFT jack. Otherwise, a false busy-out will occur. Remove the short after the system is powered up.
Accessories
6-7
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Applications
The following software and hardware applications can be installed on the system. See the customer information booklet
(CIB) or installation manual (for UNIX*-based applications) that comes with each application for detailed installation instructions.
■ stand-alone products
■
Call Accounting Terminal (CAT)
— CAT—Business (CAT/B)
— CAT—Hospitality (CAT/H)
■
MERLIN
®
Attendant for the MERLIN LEGEND™
Communications System
■
MERLIN MAIL™ Voice Messaging System for the MERLIN
LEGEND
-
Communications System
■
MS-DOS
†
-based products
■
Call Accounting System (CAS) for the MERLIN LEGEND™
Communications System
—
CAS Plus—Business
— CAS—Hospitality
■
Call Management System (CMS) for the MERLIN
LEGEND™ Communications System
■
System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) for the
MERLIN LEGEND™ Communications System — DOS
✱
Registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
†
Registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation
6-8
Applications
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
■
UNIX-based products
■
Integrated Solution II (IS II)
— AUDIX Voice Power (AVP) — IS II
— Call Accounting System (CAS) — IS II
— Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant (IVP AA)
— IS II
— System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) — IS II
Voice Messaging Systems and
Touch-Tone Receivers
The following applications are voice messaging systems (VMSs):
■
MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System
■
MERLIN Attendant
■
AUDIX Voice Power—IS II
■
Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant---lS II
The system provides generic and integrated voice messaging interface (VMI) ports. The MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging
System and AUDIX Voice Power— IS II applications use streams of touch-tone codes (called mode codes) to communicate information.
Applications that use mode codes must be connected to integrated VMI ports. Applications (such as MERLIN Attendant and Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant---lS II) that do not use mode codes connect to generic VMI ports. The tip/ring ports on 012 basic telephone modules are programmed to be either "generic VMI" or "integrated VMI."
Applications
6-9
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
A VMS requires a certain number of touch-tone receivers (TTRs), depending on the number of VMS ports (see Table 6-1 ). TTRs are supplied by the following modules: 008 OPT, 012, 400, and
400 GS/LS/TTR. However, the VMS applications are not supported on the 008 OPT module.
Table 6-1 TTRs Required by VMS
No. of 400 or
No. of
No. of
No. of 012 400 GS/LS/TTR
VMS Ports TTRs Required Modules
Modules
1
1 1 0
2 1 1 0
3
4
6
8
2
2
3
4
1
1
2 or
1
2 or
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
Call Accounting System
The AT&T Call Accounting System (CAS) for the MERLIN
LEGEND Communications System is ideal for medium- and large-sized companies that want to manage telephone usage and control costs by tracking calls placed from and received by the system.
6-10
Applications
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Note: CAS is also available as part of the UNIX-based Integrated
Solution II (IS II) software application.
CAS runs on an approved AT&T MS-DOS-based PC. Two versions of this product are offered: CAS—Hospitality (CAS/H) for hotels and health care facilities and CAS Plus—Business
(CAS Plus) for other types of businesses.
The CAS Plus and CAS/H applications allow companies to calculate the cost of calls by using the rates charged by AT&T and other carriers in one of 10 major metropolitan areas. Careful selection of the area that most closely matches the company’s location and needs assures accurate costing. Rate information can be customized for a telephone exchange at an additional charge.
The CAS Plus application does the following:
■
Call Record Processing. Screens call records, calculates
the cost of valid calls, and stores the call records.
■
Report Generation. Prints the stored call record information
reports:
Summary Reports provide condensed information such as the number of calls, duration, and cost.
Organization Detail Report shows departmental telephone activity, allowing isolation of how specific extensions are used.
Selection Report allows specification of report criteria so that only call records that meet the criteria appear on the report.
Account Code Detail Report lists every call associated with each account code entered by users.
Facility and Cost Center Reports show the distribution of line/trunk usage over organizations or cost centers.
Applications
6-11
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
■
Preselected Reports provide a choice of up to five reports from any of the other report categories and can be printed on demand or at a specified time and date.
■
System Management lets the system manager do administrative tasks, such as editing tables, setting up reports, and keeping call rate information up to date.
■
Directory Lookup and Message Center lets the user look up anyone in the organization by name or extension, leave a message, and print or display messages.
Other features of CAS Plus include
■ processing of local and short-duration calls or only calls that exceed a certain cost
■ adding a service charge to calls before billing them to clients, departments, or projects
■ displays with pull-down menus and on-line help
Considerations
■
Only one CAS can be connected to the system.
■
■
CAS operates on an approved AT&T PC operating with
MS-DOS, version 3.3 or later. The PC must be dedicated to
CAS.
CAS collects detailed information on incoming and outgoing calls to outside numbers only. It does not collect information on calls between extensions.
■
■
CAS does not provide for the processing of automatic number identification (AN I) information. However, the
CAS-IS II does. (See "Integrated Solution II" in this chapter.)
CAS handles call records up to 64 bytes; the number of calls depends on the amount of available disk space. In its largest version, CAS records data for up to 5,000 extensions and
15,000 account codes.
6-12
Applications
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Hardware Requirements
A typical CAS system consists of the following equipment:
■
An approved AT&T MS-DOS-based PC with the following configuration:
■
640K RAM
■
Hard disk drive with at least 3 Mbytes of available space for the application software
■ parallel printer output
■ serial SMDR input
■
132- or 80-column parallel printer
■
D8W modular cord and 355AF adapter connecting the SMDR port on the communications system to the COM1 serial port on the PC
■
MS-DOS system disk version 3.3 or later
■
CAS software (CAS/H, CAS Plus)
Installation
CAS can be installed by using the instructions supplied with the product. Highlights of these instructions areas follows:
1.
Set up the equipment and identify the PC and MS-DOS software needed for CAS.
2.
Complete the worksheets. Be sure the four CAS worksheets show all information you need on telephone lines and extensions, calling patterns and processing options, and departments and personnel.
3.
Install the software. Load and test MS-DOS, version 3.3 or later, and the CAS application.
4.
Enter the worksheet information. Use the planning worksheets to adjust the software to meet the needs of the customer.
Applications
6-13
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Product References
■
Call Accounting System PIus — Business installation Guide
■
Call Accounting System — Hospitality Installation Guide
Call Accounting Terminal
The Call Accounting Terminal (CAT) is a stand-alone application that provides accurate and flexible call accounting at a low cost.
Two versions of this product are offered, CAT—Hospitality for hotels and health care facilities and CAT—Business for other types of businesses. The CAT has built-in intelligence and memory for collecting and organizing call information, including the duration of calls, the area code dialed, and the account charged.
The CAT is customized with the latest local and long-distance rates for a company’s location so the cost of calls can be calculated accurately. Telephone rate information is stored in a
CAT component called an EPROM (erasable and programmable read-only memory). When telephone rates change or a new area code or exchange is added, the customer simply removes the
EPROM and installs a new one.
The CAT provides a variety of reports that can be printed on a regular schedule or automatically when 90 percent of the terminal’s memory contains call information. CAT reports include
■ detailed and summary call information for all the extensions in the system or the same information for a single extension. If account codes are used to track outside calls, similar reports can be printed for the account codes.
■ management analyses that organize call information by time of day, cost and duration of calls, area codes and exchanges called, and facilities used to make calls. These reports provide the information a business needs to make informed decisions and manage telephone costs.
6-14
Applications
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Other features of the CAT are
■
■
flexible pricing. CAT can be setup to calculate the cost of calls by using toll rates or to charge by the minute. Service charges and discounts can be applied to calls made to local and long-distance numbers and to directory assistance. Calls to certain area codes, such as 900, can also receive special treatment.
automatic updates. When new telephone lines or account codes are added to the system, CAT adds this information automatically the first time a new line or code is used.
■
■
LCD display instead of a printed menu
Automatic number identification (ANI) for AT&T Megacom
800 service
Note: The availability of the caller identification information may be limited by local-serving (caller’s) jurisdiction, availability, or CO equipment.
Considerations
Only one CAT can be connected to the system.
A serial printer such as the AT&T 572 should be used so that the CAT can be connected directly to the SMDR port on the system’s control unit. A parallel printer cannot be attached directly.
The CAT is unable to process ANI information from the
Integrated Services Digital Network (lSDN).
The CAT can store call information on 5600 calls made from up to 125 telephones that share up to 49 lines. When 5040 of these calls have been processed, reports are printed and memory is cleared. Any calls that come in during this process are held until reports are printed again.
Applications
6-15
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Hardware Requirements
■
Call Accounting Terminal
■
Serial printer (model 572 is recommended) connected via a serial cable to the SMDR port of the CAT
■
D8W modular cord and 355AF adapter connecting the SMDR port on the communications system to the CAT
Installation
The CAT can be installed by using the instructions supplied with the product. Highlights of these instructions areas follows:
1. Before attaching the product to the CU and the printer, set the 10 CAT switches to establish the speed or baud rate for the CAT and its associated printer.
2. Connect the CAT, the printer, and the power supply. The CAT must be placed within the distance noted below:
■ control unit
— 14 feet (direct connection)
— 1000 feet (using building wiring)
■ serial printer (50 feet)
■ power supply — grounded wall outlet (4 feet)
Note: Do not use an outlet that is controlled by a wall switch.
3. Test the CAT, following the instructions provided in the customer information booklet (CIB).
6-16
Applications
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Product References
Customer information booklets:
■
Call Accounting Terminal—Business (CIB 3122)
■
Call Accounting Terminal—Hospitality (CIB 3123)
Call Management System
The Call Management System (CMS) for the MERLlN LEGEND
Communications System is an MS-DOS-based software application that simulates the actions of a system operator by answering calls and distributing them to individual agent telephones. If no agents are available, CMS places calls on hold and, if programmed, plays a recorded announcement to the callers such as, “Thank you for calling the ABC Company. Please hold for the next available agent.” CMS then searches its network for the appropriate agent, usually the one who’s been idle the longest, and transfers the call to that person’s telephone.
CMS is appropriate for businesses with large groups of personnel who perform a common function, such as airline ticketing, filling catalog orders, and providing customer service.
Agents within these groups can be divided into agent splits to handle different types of calls or customers. For example, the agents in a travel agency can be divided into three splits: one that handles personal vacations, one that handles business trips, and one that handles group charters. Another split can be designated for support when the call traffic is heavy in the other splits. Calls come into each of the splits on a group of lines designated to ring into the split.
Agents make themselves available and unavailable to take calls by logging in and out. Also, agents can enter the after-call-work
(ACW) state, which allows them to complete work on their last call without being interrupted by new CMS calls.
Applications
6-17
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
The system can be setup so that agents are automatically in the
ACW state whenever they complete a CMS call or so that agents must press a programmed button or dial a feature code to enter
ACW.
Other features of CMS include easy-to-use management reports that analyze call volume and patterns, as well as agent activity
Answer Delay option, which determines how long a call rings before it is designated as unanswered and is connected to the recorded announcement
Forced Delay option, which connects calls to the recorded delay announcement regardless of whether all agents are busy when the calls come in designation of priority lines to ensure that calls coming in on these lines are answered first display of current agent activity on system status screens to allow monitoring, tracking, and analyzing of short- and longterm performance ability to connect Music-on-Hold to callers waiting for agents up to four external alerts to show when an exception has occurred; for example, an LED lights when the oldest call has waited longer than 30 seconds. Exception thresholds are programmed.
summary reports from 1 to 93 days real-time dynamic reconfiguration, which lets the user modify the call flow on-line
6-18
Applications
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Considerations
The CMS cannot be connected to a system that is in Behind
Switch mode.
The CMS can handle calls for up to 28 agents on up to 28 lines, and it can answer calls on two lines at the same time with the same announcement.
There can be up to six agent splits with 28 agents per split.
Up to two CMSs can be installed on a system to handle a second set of lines if a business requires more than 28 lines or employs more than 28 agents.
CMS operates on an approved AT&T PC with MS-DOS, version 3.3. The PC must be dedicated to CMS.
The CMS supervisor’s console is the MERLIN II System
Display Console. CMS agents can have any MDX telephone or any analog multiline telephone that can be used with the system. CMS agent telephones must be connected to the first
58 telephone jacks on the control unit. (CMS allows only a two-digit method to specify an extension number; jacks 59 to
144 are designated by four digits.)
The two CMS interface card ports on the PC must be connected to two analog multiline telephone jacks on the same analog multiline telephone module; these jacks must be operator positions. If two operator position jacks are not available on the same module, another analog multiline telephone module must be installed in the control unit to provide these jacks.
CMS lines/trunks can be loop-start, ground-start, T1 emulated ground-start, or ISDN-PRI.
Up to four CMS external alerts can be used for agents and supervisors. For example, an alert sounds if the number of calls waiting to be answered nears a programmed threshold.
A MERLIN Attendant can be used to direct callers to the appropriate CMS group.
Applications
6-19
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
■
To play music for waiting callers, you must attach a Music-on-
Hold (MOH) product to the system that is compatible with an
AT&T MOH coupler.
Note: If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials, you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay license fees to a third party such as the American Society of Composers, Artists, and
Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI).
Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system, which does not require that you obtain such a license, from AT&T or your authorized dealer.
Hardware and Software Requirements
an approved AT&T PC with 640K RAM, 3.5-inch floppy disk drive, and 20-Mbyte hard disk drive.
an approved AT&T monochrome or color monitor
CMS interface card with two 14-foot, 4-pair modular plug station cords and one 14-foot DIN connector cord for connection to DA-5 Digital Voice Announcer
CMS software
DA-5 Digital Voice Announcer parallel printer — AT&T 570 or 571 printer parallel printer cable to connect the printer to the PC supervisor console — MERLIN II System Display Console agent telephones — any MLX or analog multiline telephones supported by the communications system two analog multiline modules (008 or 408); one to connect the two PC ports to the operator positions, and one to connect the CMS supervisor console
Note: For a list of optional hardware that can be used with CMS, see the documentation provided with CMS.
6-20
Applications
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Installation
CMS comes with a hardware installation checklist and information on installing the CMS software, creating an agent directory, programming lines and groups, and testing and managing calls.
The and system CU permits the connection of two CMS applications, each application can use up to two PCs.
Product References
Call Management System (CMS) for the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System Installation and System Programming
Guide
Integrated Solution
II
Integrated Solution II (IS II) is a complete package of UNIXbased voice processing and call analysis software that helps to manage telephone usage and costs. IS II offers a single interface to and can include any of the following software:
■
Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant (lVP AA) —
IS Il. The IVP AA answers telephones automatically and transfers callers to the appropriate departments or extensions. Callers are offered a menu of recorded prompts that they respond to by dialing numbers on a touch-tone telephone. Callers without touch-tone telephones can be transferred to the system operator, who then handles their calls. Separate menus for day and night service as well as multilevel menus and corresponding announcements can be set up to ensure that callers reach the right person or department quickly.
Applications
6-21
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
IVP AA can operate in touch-tone gate mode or in no-gate mode. To speed handling of calls from touch-tone telephones, gate mode prompts callers to dial 1 to continue to the main menu. If a 1 is not dialed within a programmed interval, calls are automatically transferred to the system operator. In the no-gate mode, callers hear the main menu immediately, and if no response is received after the main menu is played, calls are transferred to the system operator.
IVP AA is a low-cost alternative for businesses that need enhanced call handling without the added voice messaging capabilities of AUDIX Voice Power — IS II.
■
AUDIX Voice Power (AVP) — IS Il. AVP offers all the features of the IVP AA combined with the following services:
■
■
Call Answer. When callers reach a busy extension or there is no answer, this service allows callers to leave a message, transfer to another extension, or transfer to a system operator. Users can program a personal greeting or select a standard greeting and can program a password to prevent others from getting their messages.
Voice-Mail. This service allows users to send messages to other extensions in the system, forward received messages (along with comments), and reply to received messages. The system manager can send general messages to everyone in the system.
■
■
Information Service. This service provides a call-in information service that plays a recorded message and then disconnects the caller.
Message Drop. This service offers an answering service
(similar to an answering machine), that gives the caller a message and then allows the caller to “drop off” a message, such as a request for service or an order.
Callers cannot direct their messages to specific extensions.
6-22
Applications
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
■
Call Accounting System (CAS) — IS II. CAS collects and analyzes call information, calculates the costs of calls by using rates selected by the business, organizes calls by client or project, and prints reports on a daily or as-needed basis.
CAS — IS II provides all the functionality of CAS Plus, along with ANI. (For more information on the features of CAS, see
“Call Accounting System” in this chapter.)
■
System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) — IS II
SPM is a programming package built into IS II that allows the system manager or a system technician to upgrade and maintain the system and its features and to add, change, or rearrange telephones. Programming can be done on-site or remotely.
The number of incoming lines and subscribers programmed for
AVP or IVP AA and the number of busy-hour calls determine how many voice channels are required for the user’s system (see
Table 6-2).
Table 6-2 Voice Channels Required
No. of Channels Lines
Required
Subscribers Busy-Hour Calls
2
1 to 6 1 to 20
1 to 20
4
7 to 18 21 to 60 21 to 60
6
19 to 24 61 to 80 61 to 80
8
12
25 to 42
Over 42
81 to 200
201 to 300
81 to 200
201 to 300
Applications
6-23
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
IS II also includes the following features:
■
Dial by Name permits AVP users to call subscribers by dialing the last name of the subscriber instead of dialing extension number.
the
■
Alternate Personal Greetings allows a user to record a second personal greeting in addition to the primary call answering greeting.
Fax Transfer directs incoming fax calls to a designated machine.
fax
■
■
Class of Service allows the system manager to assign one of
16 predefine parameters to a subscriber. These parameters define the size of the mailbox, the type of coverage, and the activation of the outcalling feature.
General Mailbox Options are two special mailboxes that have reserve extensions. Callers using rotary telephones or needing assistance can be transferred to leave messages in a general mailbox. Subscribers having problems with the system can report them to the trouble mailbox.
Considerations
■
IS II uses UNIX System V, Release 3.2.2.
■
IS II stores up to 12 hours of voice-mail messages when IS II includes AVP and over 200,000 call accounting records when
IS II includes CAS.
■
Either IVP AA or AVP can be installed, but not both.
■
For IVP AA or AVP, the VMI loop-start ports should be programmed for “reliable” far-end disconnect.
■
If IS II includes AVP, when users receive voice-mail messages, the message LEDs on their telephones turn on, if a mailbox has been assigned to each of those telephones.
6-24
Applications
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
The system may need more touch-tone receivers if
■
Single-line telephone users do not get dial tone.
■
AVP or IVP AA fails to transfer calls.
■
Calls fail to ring or calls go to coverage prematurely.
CAS — IS II uses the call information provided by the system’s built-in SMDR feature to process calls.
SPM — IS II reports can be printed out or can be written to a disk (hard or floppy); however, if they are written to a disk, they cannot be looked at (write-only file).
SPM — IS II reports should not be printed while the system is handling more than 100 calls per hour.
Only the CAS — IS II and the SPM — IS II applications can be connected to a system operating in Behind Switch mode.
Hardware Requirements
■
IS II uses an AT&T Master Controller — an 6386/SX WGS processor with UNIX System V/386, Release 3.2.2 including:
■
Master Controller II processor (with 40-Mbyte, 80-Mbyte, or 200-Mbyte hard disk and a 3.5-inch floppy disk drive).
An 80-Mbyte or 200-Mbyte hard disk drive is required if
IS II includes either IVP AA or AVP.
■ video monitor (monochrome or color)
■ keyboard
■ optional tape drive (required for systems with a 200-Mbyte hard disk for saving UNIX files, application program files, administrative files, and voice system files during backup)
■
A 355 AF adapter for connecting the Master Controller to the serial port on the control unit if they are within 50 feet of each other and are on the same AC branch circuit
Applications
6-25
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
■
ADUs for connecting the Master Controller to the serial port on the control unit, if they are not within 50 feet of each other and/or are not on the same AC branch circuit
■
Any additional hardware required by the individual applications included in IS II, including the cables and adapters for connecting the applications to the system
■
IVP4 boards
■
012 basic telephone module to provide the tip/ring interface for IVP AA or AVP
Installation
Install IS II by using the instructions supplied with the product.
Highlights of these instructions areas follows:
1. Setup the equipment and identify the hardware for IS Il.
2. Connect the hardware as shown in the instructions.
3. Install the software. Test the IS II application.
If a voice application is installed you will need two 125-Mbyte tape cartridges for system backup.
Product References
Integrated Solution II Installation and Maintenance Guide
6-26
Applications
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
MERLIN Attendant
The MERLIN Attendant is a stand-alone application that provides operator-like services through the use of prerecorded messages and electronic switching.
The Attendant automatically answers incoming calls on designated lines with a recorded greeting and transfers these calls to extensions or departments based on information provided by the caller. Since the Attendant can respond only to touch-tone telephone signals, the announcement asks callers who dial from rotary telephones to wait for the system operator.
Calls can be transferred in one of two ways, either “blind” or
“supervised.” A blind transfer means the Attendant dials the extension or department requested by the caller and disconnects. If the call is not answered or the phone is busy, the caller is routed to the system operator.
With a supervised transfer, the Attendant transfers the call and can retrieve it if the transfer is unsuccessful. The Attendant then directs the call to another telephone, allows the caller a second route choice, or provides a failed-transfer announcement, depending on how the application has been programmed.
Calls can be answered immediately (Primary Call Handling) or after a delay (Secondary Call Handling), for example, if the call goes unanswered by the system operator after a certain number
of rings. Table 6-3 shows the number of Attendants required
based on a Primary Call Handling situation.
Applications
6-27
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Table 6-3 Number of Attendants
No. of Attendants Required
2
Incoming Lines/Trunks 1 to 6
Busy-Hour Calls
3
7 to 9
4
10 to 12
1 to 25 25 to 50 50 to 100
Considerations
■
The MERLIN Attendant cannot be connected to a system that operates in the Behind Switch mode.
■
The MERLIN Attendant cannot be connected to a system that has an AUDIX Voice Power application or a MERLIN MAIL
Voice Messaging System installed.
■
A maximum of four Attendants can be connected to the system (see Table 6-3).
■
All VMI loop-start ports should be programmed for “reliable” far-end disconnect.
■
■
■
■
■
The Attendant can answer every call that comes in or just answer calls that ring on certain lines.
Unanswered transferred calls do not return to the Attendant; they are redirected to a designated extension, such as the system operator.
If the extension called is busy or unanswered or if it is after business hours, calls can be directed to an answering machine to allow callers to leave messages.
The Attendant can direct and transfer calls to fax machines.
The system may need more touch-tone receivers if
■
Single-line telephone users do not get dial tone.
■
AVP or IVP AA fails to transfer calls.
■
Calls fail to ring or calls go to coverage prematurely.
6-28
Applications
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
■
When the Attendant is set up for after-hours operation, the time on the Attendant’s clock must match the system clock so the end of the business day is recognized.
■
The Attendant provides 64 seconds for recording up to five standard messages, including the caller greeting used during and after business hours, a hold announcement for a caller who is being transferred, a connect announcement for the department or extension receiving a transferred call, and a message explaining that a call cannot be completed.
Hardware Requirements
■
012 basic telephone module
■
MERLIN Attendant unit and cords
Installation
Although the Attendant physically plugs into only one jack on the
012 basic telephone module, it functionally takes up three ports.
Some AC power strips maybe needed since the Attendant is powered by wall-mounted transformers (10 VAC).
Notes:
■
Only four ports on the same 012 basic telephone module can be used simultaneously with Attendant. When four ports are used for Attendant, only one other port can be connected to a telephone.
■
Powering and grounding procedures must follow those established for T/R telephones that require auxiliary power.
Product References
MERLlN® Attendant Installer’s Guide.
Applications
6-29
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging
System
The MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System for the MERLIN
LEGEND Communications System offers integrated call management services at low cost:
■
Automated Attendant. This service answers telephones automatically and transfers callers to the appropriate departments or extensions. Callers hear a series of recorded prompts that they respond to by dialing numbers on a touchtone telephone. If there is no answer or the extension is busy, callers can leave a message or try another extension. Callers without touch-tone telephones can be transferred to the system operator, who then handles their calls.
Separate menus for day and night service, as well as multilevel menus and corresponding announcements, can be set up to ensure that callers reach the right person or department as quickly as possible.
In addition, the Automated Attendant can direct calls to a fax machine. If the fax machine is busy or does not answer, the call is automatically disconnected.
A call transfer by the Automated Attendant is either “blind” or
“supervised.” A blind transfer means the Automated Attendant dials the extension or department requested by the caller and disconnects. If the call is not answered or the telephone is busy, the call is routed to the system operator.
With a supervised transfer, the Automated Attendant transfers the call and can retrieve it if the transfer is unsuccessful. The
Automated Attendant then directs the call to another telephone, allows the caller a second route choice, or provides a failed-transfer announcement, depending on how the application has been programmed.
6-30
Applications
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
■
Call Answer. When callers reach a busy extension or there is no answer, Call Answer connects the caller to the personal greeting of the called person and allows the caller to leave a message in that person’s mailbox. If no personal greeting is available, the caller gets a general message with the recorded name of the called person and then is instructed to leave a message.
If the called person’s mailbox is full, Call Answer connects the caller to a general mailbox. Here the caller gets a message with the recorded name of the called person and can leave a recorded message. The system manager is responsible for forwarding the messages in the general mailbox to the appropriate users.
If the general mailbox is full, Call Answer tells the caller and the caller can transfer to another extension.
When a user receives a message, the message LED on the telephone goes on. If a message is left in the general mailbox, the system manager’s message LED goes on.
■
Voice-Mail. This service allows users to send messages to other extensions in the system, forward messages received along with comments, and reply to messages received. Users also can record a personal greeting and program a password to help prevent others from retrieving their messages.
The number of incoming lines and subscribers programmed for
Automated Attendant service and the number of busy-hour calls determine how many MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System
ports are required for the user’s system (see Table 6-4).
Applications
6-31
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Table 6-4 MERLIN MAIL Ports Required
No. of Ports Required
2
1 to 6
Incoming Lines/Trunks
No. of Subscribers or
Busy-Hour Calls
1 to 20
4
7 to 18
21 to 60
Other MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System features are the following:
■
Outcalling automatically calls the user at a number that the user has programmed when a new message is received. The user can then log in to the voice messaging system to retrieve messages.
■
■
Pager Notification calls the user at a designated pager number when a new message is received. However, the user cannot log in to the voice messaging system.
Broadcast Lists allows the system administrator to send a message to every user on the MERLIN MAIL Voice
Messaging System. However, this message does not light message-waiting LEDs and does not cause outcalling.
■
■
Fax Transfer directs an incoming fax call to a designated fax station—a single machine or a calling group with several machines.
Announcement Service allows a caller to enter a code for information about specific subjects, such as new product information or marketing programs.
6-32
Applications
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Considerations
The MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System cannot be connected to a system in the Behind Switch mode.
The MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System is available in
2-port and 4-port configurations. Both models have four hours of message storage capacity.
Only four ports on the same 012 basic telephone module can be used simultaneously with the MERLIN MAIL Voice
Messaging System. When four ports are used for the MERLIN
MAIL Voice Messaging System, only one other port can be connected to a telephone.
The size of a user’s mailbox—that is, the number of minutes of messages that a mailbox can hold—can be matched to individual needs. A mailbox can be set up to hold a maximum of 15 minutes of messages.
When users receive voice-mail messages, the message LEDs on their telephones turn on, provided that a mailbox has been assigned to each of those telephones.
All VMI loop-start ports should be programmed for “reliable” far-end disconnect.
Callers who dial from rotary telephones cannot use the features of the MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System and should be directed to the system operator during business hours.
Automated Attendant can answer calls immediately (Primary
Call Handling) or after a delay (Secondary Call Handling), for example, when a call remains unanswered by the system operator after a certain number of rings.
The system may need more touch-tone receivers if
■
Single-line telephone users do not get dial tone.
■
AVP or IVP AA fails to transfer calls.
■
Calls fail to ring or calls go to coverage prematurely.
Applications
6-33
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
■
The MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System does not work with the MERLIN Attendant.
■
Programming of the MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System is done via a touch-tone interface. The MERLIN MAIL Voice
Messaging System is equipped with an RS-232 serial port and an external modem to support remote diagnostics.
Hardware Requirements
■
MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System unit and power cords
■
■ remote maintenance device (with a wall-mount transformer) modem cable with a 9-pin connector at one end and a 25-pin connector at the other end to connect the remote maintenance device to the serial port on the MERLIN MAIL
Voice Messaging System unit
■
■
D4BU modular cords (two for a 2-port system or four for a
4-port system, plus one for the remote maintenance device)
012 basic telephone module
Note: Additional touch-tone receivers (TTRs) maybe needed to allow the 012 module to handle a large number of voice connections.
Installation
MERLIN MAIL Voice
012 basic telephone
Messaging System connects to two or four module jacks on the system’s CU.
MERLIN MAIL Voice mounted and should proper ventilation.
Messaging System unit can be desk or wail be placed in an area with low humidity and
Note: Follow the power and ground procedures for T/R telephones that require auxiliary power.
6 - 3 4
A p p l i c a t i o n s
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Product References
MERLIN MAIL™ Voice Messaging System for the MERLIN
LEGEND Communications System Installation, System
Programming, and Maintenance
System Programming and
Maintenance
System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) for the MERLIN
LEGEND Communications System is an MS-DOS-based software application that allows the use of a personal computer
(PC) for programming and maintaining the system. SPM performs the same functions as an MLX-20L telephone used as a system programming console and has some additional features, such as the ability to back up and restore files and print reports.
The PC’s display shows the same button and screen layout as an
MLX-20L telephone.
Either a PC with SPM can be connected directly to the system or
SPM can be accessed remotely in one of the following ways:
■
Using Remote Access, the system programmer dials the system directly. A password can be set up to prevent unauthorized access.
■
The system programmer dials the system operator and asks to be transferred to the system’s built-in modem.
Considerations
■
SPM operates with MS-DOS, version 3.3 or later.
■
Unless the system is being backed up or restored, a remote user takes priority over a local user. If the local user is programming when a remote user connects to the system, the system sends a message to the local user that a remote connection has been made and disconnects the local user.
Applications
6-35
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
The PC with SPM connects to the RS-232 jack on the processor module of the control unit. The RS-232 baud rate is
1200/2400 bps with auto speed adjust.
The SPM reports can be printed out or can be saved to a disk
(hard or floppy).
SPM reports should not be printed while the system is handling more than 100 calls per hour.
A printer connected to the PC with SPM can be used to print system programming reports. Or reports can be sent to the printer that is connected to the SMDR port on the system’s control unit.
SMDR information maybe lost while system programming reports are printed via the SMDR port.
A UNIX-based version of System Programming and
Maintenance is available as part of Integrated Solution II, discussed earlier in this chapter.
Hardware Requirements
■ an approved AT&T PC or the following: other MS-DOS compatible PC with
■ at least 128K of RAM
■ a double-sided floppy
3 1/2") diskette drive (either 5 1/4" or
■ a serial port assigned to COM1 or COM2. The serial port can use either a DB-9 or DB-25 connector. If a DB-9 connector is used, a 9-pin to 25-pin adapter is also required. The 9-pin side must be female.
■ video monitor (monochrome or color)
■
D8W modular cord and 355AF modular adapter if PC is within
50 feet of the control unit. Distances of greater than 50 feet require back-to-back ADUs.
6-36
Applications
Adapters, Accessories, and Applications
Installation
See “PC with MERLIN LEGEND System Programming and
Maintenance” in MERLIN LEGEND System Programming for installation instructions.
Applications
6-37
Wiring
The following tables summarize the basic conductor wire connections in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System.
The diagrams that follow the tables show the main wiring schemes.
Wiring
A - 1
Wiring
Wiring Tables
Table A-1 LS, GS/LS, DID, and OPT 6-Position Jacks
CU Jack
D2R Cord
RJ11 Network Interface
Desig.
Pin Plug
Plug Desig. Pin Color
T 3 3
4 T
4
Green
R 4 4 3
R
3
Red
Table A-2 Tie-Trunk and DS1/PR1 8-Position Jacks
E&M DS1
Desig. Desig.
Jack
Pin
D8W
103A DIW
Pair Cord Term Cable
# Color Strep Color
T T(xmt) 5
G 1 W-BL
1 R 2
R
T1
R(xmt)
4
T1 (rcv) 1
BL
W-O
R1 R1(rcv) 2 n/c 3
2
BL
O
BK
3
4
5
O
W-G
E
M n/c n/c n/c n/c n/c
6
7
8
3
4
Y
BR
S
6
7
8
G
W-BR
BR
A-2
Wiring Tables
Wiring
Table A-3 Tie-Trunk Jack to RJ2GX Network Interface
C U
Pin Jack
Trk
1
Trk
2
Trk
3
Trk
4
Trk
5
Trk
6
Trk
7
Trk
8
T
R
T1
R1
E
M
5
4
1
2
3
6
26 29 32 35 38 41
44 47
1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22
27
30 33 36 39 42 45 48
2 5 8
11 14
17
20
23
28
3 1
3 4
3 7
40
43
46
49
3 6 9
12 15 18 21 24
Wiring Tables
A-3
Wiring
Table A-4 T/R, Analog Multiline Telephone, and MLX
8-Position Station Jacks
Desig. Pin
Analog
Multiline
D8W 103A
DIW 25-Pr.
T/R Jack Telephone MLX Pair Cord Term Cable Conn.
Desig. Desig. #
Color Strep Color
Pin
T 5 V1T TRMT-
G 1
W-BL 1
R 4
V1R TRMT+ 1 R 2
BL 26 n/c 1 n/c 2
CT n/c
CR
BL 3 W-O 2 n/c 2
O
4 O
27 n/c 3 n/c 6 n/c 7
-48V
REC+ BK 5 W-G 3
GND
REC3
Y 6
V2T*
-48 V
G
28
BR 7 W-BR 4 n/c 8
V2R* GND 4 S 8 BR 29
* These leads are connected at telephones for Voice Announce to Busy but are not connected at the CU. Voice Announce to Busy and Simultaneous
Voice and Data require two adjacent odd/even jacks connected to the station via adapter BR-241-B1.
A-4
Wiring Tables
Wiring
7
8
5
6
Table
A-5
Eight-Pin RS-232 Flow Control Cable
Pin No.
Processor (DCE)
Data Term (DTE)
1
2
3
4
DSR
DTR
GND
CTS
DTR
GND
RXD
TXD
+5
DSR
Wiring Tables
A-5
Wiring
W i r i n g D i a g r a m s
The following illustrations are examples of different wiring applications for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System.
A-6
Wiring Diagrams
Wiring
Figure A-1 Behind Switch Wiring
Wiring Diagrams
A-7
Wiring
Figure A-2 Tie-Trunk Wiring
A-8
Wiring Diagrams
Wiring
Figure A-3 Back-to-Back Tie-Trunk Wiring
Wiring Diagrams
A-9
Wiring
Figure A-4 Back-to-Back 100D Modules
A-10
Wiring Diagrams
Wiring
Figure A-5 Single-Zone Paging with PagePac 20
Wiring Diagrams
A-11
Wiring
WARNING! The black wire form the LS trunk adapter power cable must be connected to the + input of the Wheelock PS. The grey on black wire must be connected to the - input.
Figure A-6 Single-Zone Paging with Customer-Supplied
Amplifier
A-12
Wring Diagrams
Wiring
* Access mode switch should be set to
MANUAL.
Figure A-7 Single-Zone Paging with Paging Access Module
Wiring Diagrams
A-13
Wiring
●
Access mode switch should be set to MANUAL
Figure A-8 Single-Zone Paging with Background Music and
MOH
A-14
Wiring Diagrams
Wiring
Figure A-9 Multizone Paging with Background Music,
MOH, and Talk-Back
Wiring Diagrams
A-15
Adjuncts
The following table summarizes the types and specifications of adjuncts that can be connected to the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System, the available AT&T products and associated ordering codes (PECs), and the appropriate interfaces. A description of each equipment type follows the table.
Adjuncts
B-1
Adjuncts
Table B-1 Adjunct Types and Specifications
Equipment
Type
Alerts (AC)
Alerts (DC)
Answer/record machine
Specifications
AT&T Products
■
Any audible or visual alert that operates on 20-30-HZ ringing signals
■ A device associated with a specific station (supplemental alert)or that works on a programmed line/trunk port
(external alert)
External ringerloud
External ringer
■
■
Any audible or visual
Alert bell alert that operates Alert horn on 48-WC ringing signals
A device associated
Alert Strobe
Alert chime
Alert deluxe with a specific station (supplemental alert) or that works horn
Alert switch on a programmed line/trunk port
(external alert)
■
Industry—standard machine
■
Low-ringer equivalence (less than 0.15 or
≤
1.0
total REN for T/R port)
■
Ability to recognize
600-ms disconnect signal of other means of automatic disconnect (such as voice reset disconnect timer, fixed recording time)
Model 1330
Answering
Machine
Model 1531
Remote
Answering system
Telephone
31016
31019
PEC
61212
61213
61221
61222
61223
61215
(1)
B-2
Adjuncts
Adjuncts
LS or
GS/LS
Line
Jacks
T/R
012 or
008 OPT
Station
Jack
✓
MFM
MLX
Station
Jack
✓
GPA
ATL
Station
Jack
✓
Interface
SAA
ATL
Station
Jack
Notes
Cannot be connected to a QCC
✓
(1)
✓
✓
(1) Requires Universal Paging
Access Module (UPAM) to provide 48 VDC
✓ ✓ ✓
Cannot be connected to a QCC
(1) Must order through
Sourcebook
Adjuncts
B - 3
Adjuncts
Table B-1 Continued
Equipment
Type
Cordless telephone
Specifications
■ Must have touchtone dialing capabilitiy when connected via MFM; rotary or touch-tone dialing can be used on T/R port
■ Single line
AT&T Products
5320 cordless
Telephone
5200 Cordless
Telephone
5500 cordless
Telephone
(1)
PEC
Credit card verification terminal
Dial dictation
Direct Station
Selector
■
Must have touch-tone dialing capability when connected via MFM; rotary or touchtone dialing can be used on T/R port
■
A device that requires contact closure can be used on LS/GS line jack only with UPAM
■ A maximum of two
DSSs can be connected to a console
■
A 329A power unit must be added to a console having two DSSs
■
Connects to “DSS” jack on console
3156-DCB
(black)
3156-DCW
(white)
B-4
Adjuncts
Adjuncts
Interface
LS or
GS/LS
Line
Jacks
T/R
012 or
008 OPT
Station
Jack
✓
MFM
MLX
Station
Jack
✓
(2)
✓ ✓
(1)
GPA SAA
ATL
Station
Jack
✓
ATL
Station
Jack
Notes
Cannot be connected to a QCC
(1) Must order through
Sourcebook
(2) Device originates and receives calls independently of associated telephone when used with an MFM. used with a GPA, the analog telephone dials and receives calls.
Cannot be connected to a QCC
(1) Device originates and receives calls independently of associated telephone.
✓
(1)
✓
✓ ✓ Cannot be connected to a QCC
(1) UPAM required
Adjuncts
B-5
Adjuncts
Table B-1 Continued
Equipment
T y p e
Fax
Group Calling delay announcement
Hands-free unit
Specifications
■
Must have touchtone dialing capability when
Connected via MFM; rotary dialing can be used on T/R port
■
Industry-standard analog interface
■
Industry—standard announcement device
■
Must provide automatic disconnect
■
Each calling group can have its own announcement
(maximum 32)
■
A device can provide delay annoucement for more than one group
■
For use with analog multiline telephones
■
Connects directly to telephone
S202A
AT&T Products
AT&T 3410D
AT&T 3500D
AT&T 3510D
AT&T 3520D
AT&T 3530D
AT&T Fax 4515D
AT&T Fax 4525D
AT&T Fax 9015
AT&T Fax 9020
AT&T Fax 9022
AT&T Fax 9025FX
AT&T Fax 9035FX
DA-5 Digital Voice
Announcer
Model 1330
Answering
Machine
PEC
3509-PFX
3514-DFX
3510-DFX
3515-ADX
3512-SAF
3517-DFX
3515-DFX
3504
3505-902
3508-902
3502-HFX
3503-SFX
62523
3152-008
B-6
Adjuncts
Adjuncts
LS or
GS/LS
Line
Jacks
T/R
012 or
008 OPT
Station
Jack
✓
MFM
MLX
Station
Jack
✓
(1)
GPA
ATL
Station
Jack
Interface
SAA
ATL
Station
Jack
Notes
Cannot be connected to a QCC
(1) Device originates and receives fax messages independently of associated telephone when used with an MFM.
✓ ✓
(1)
✓ Cannot be connected to a QCC
(1) Device originates and receives calls independently of associated telephone.
Adjuncts
B - 7
Adjuncts
Table B-1 Continued
Equipment
Type
Headset for analog multiline telephone
Specifications AT&T Products
Supra* (1)
Starset † II (1)
StarMate* E (2)
*
†
Headset for MLX telephone
Headset adapter
Loudspeaker paging
■
Need to program
Auto Answer All button for use with
502B, 502C
■
Connects directly to telephone OTHER jack
■
External paging system using DTMF signaling is connected to LS or GS line jack
■ CPE paging systems require an interface unit; if CPE has 2-wire input, the
BOGEN UPAM-K
(58500) can be used
Starset II—
StarMate-E
Supra-
StarMate-E
502C
502B
PagePac 20
PagePac 20 with
ZoneMata 9 (1)
PagePac 20 with
ZoneMate 39 (1)
PagePac 6 (2)
PagePac 6 Plus
Trademark of Plantronics Corporation.
Registered trademark of Plantronics Corporation.
PEC
3122-011
3122-012
3122-013
3122-014
3122-001
3122-002
3122-003
3122-004
3122-204
3122-214
3122-304
3164-HFA
62524
5323-005
53505
53506
5323-006
5323-006
B-8
Adjuncts
Adjuncts
Interface
LS or
GS/LS
Lime
Jacks
T/R
012 or
008 OPT
Station
Jack
MFM
MLX
Station
Jack
GPA SAA
ATL
Station
Jack
ATL station
Jack Notes
(1) Requires HFAI adapter
(2) No headset adapter required
No headset adapter required
✓
(1)
(1) Bi-directional paging is supported; only one line jack is needed for multizone paging.
(2) LS adapter (53518) is required when connected to LS line jack
Adjuncts
B-9
Adjuncts
Table B-1 Continued
Equipment
Type
Specifications AT&T Products
PEC
Message-waiting indicator
■
For single-line sets
■ connects directly to telephone
Z34 31032
Modem
■
If the modem supports touch-tone dialing via the associated data terminal, the key board can be used for dailing
■ If the modem does not support touchtone dailing, an associated basic
(single-line) set can be used for dailing
Modem Model
4000
Modem Model
2224G
Modem Model
4024
Modem Model
2298A
Modem Model
2296
2212-MUK (1)
2224-CEO (1)
2224-CDO (1)
2296-BAR (1)
2296-BDM (1)
Music-on-Hold*
■
Any FCC-registered
8-ohm music source or recorded announcement device
Magic on Hold 3128-010 (1)
Speakerphone ■
Connect directly to telephone
■
For single-line sets only
4A (1)
S203A
3120-02W
3131-008
*
If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials, you maybe required to obtain a copyright license from and pay license fees to a third party such as the
American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music
Incorporated (BMI). Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system, which does not require you to obtain such a license, from AT&T or an authorized representative.
B-10
Adjuncts
Adjuncts
Interface
LS or
GS/LS
Line
Jacks
T/R
012 or
008 OPT
Station
Jack
MFM
MLX station
Jack
GPA SAA
ATL
Station
Jack
ATL
Station
Jack
✓
(2)
✓
✓ ✓
Notes
(1) see sales manual for requirements.
(2) For modem model 2224G only
✓
(1)
(1) Music Coupler required
61398
(1) Requires 2500SM telephone
Adjuncts
B-11
Adjuncts
Table B-1 Continued
Equipment
Type
SMDR printer
Specifications
■
Connects to upper
RS-232 jack on processor module
■ Must be relocated with 50 feet of
CU or use ADU to extend distance
AT&T Products
AT&T 475
AT&T 476
AT&T 572
PEC
3330-475
3330-476
3333-572
B-12
Adjuncts
Adjuncts
Interface
LS or
GS/LS
Line
Jacks
T/R
012 or
008 OPT
Station
Jack
MFM
MLX
Station
Jack
GPA
SAA
ATL
Station
Jack
ATL
Station
Jack Notes
Adjuncts
B-13
Adjuncts
Adjunct Descriptions
Answer/Record Machine
Connected to the system through a single-line telephone jack, an
MFM port on an MLX telephone, or a GPA on an analog multiline telephone. Use any industry-standard device that recognizes a
600-ins disconnect signal and connect a 267A2 bridging adapter to the telephone. (The 267A2 bridging adapter is not needed when the telephone is built in to the answering machine.)
Answering devices, such as voice-reset disconnect timers and fixed recording timers, that disconnect automatically can also be used.
Cordless Telephone
Attached to the system through a single-line telephone jack or an
MFM port on an MLX telephone. When connected through an
MFM port, the cordless touch-tone telephone can place and receive calls independently of the MLX telephone. Use with a
GPA is not recommended because the cordless telephone cannot dial out through the GPA.
Credit Card Verification Terminal
Connected to the system through a single-line telephone jack or an MFM port on an MLX telephone. Use with a GPA is not recommended because the credit card verification terminal cannot auto dial through the GPA. When connected through an
MFM port, the transaction terminal makes and receives calls independently of the associated MLX telephone.
B-14
Adjuncts
Adjuncts
Group Calling Delay Announcement
Connected to the system through a single-line telephone jack, an
MFM port on an MLX telephone, or a GPA on an analog multiline telephone. An industry-standard announcement device, such as a DA-5 Digital Voice Announcer, announces to a caller that calling groups are busy or provides Night Service information.
Dial Dictation
Connected to the system through a single-line telephone jack, an
MFM port on an MLX telephone, or a GPA on an analog multiline telephone. Dial dictation can also be connected by using a commercially available "trunk adapter" or UPAM with a loop-start
(LS) CO line jack and an external power supply unit. Dial dictation equipment requiring contact closure cannot be connected via the UPAM.
Fax Machine
Connected to the system through a single-line telephone jack or an MFM port on an MLX telephone. Use with a GPA is not recommended because the fax machine cannot auto dial through the GPA. The fax machine originates and receives fax calls independently of the associated telephone. Calls are dialed with the fax machine’s dialpad or from an associated single-line telephone.
Headset
Connected to a telephone without lifting the handset.
used with a MLX telephone, the headset connects to the same jack as the telephone handset. Analog telephones operate with a
502C adapter connected to the OTHER jack on the telephone, or without an adapter by plugging the headset into the handset jack.
for answering calls automatically
When a SPIRIT StarMate E Headset is
Adjuncts
B-15
Adjuncts
Loudspeaker Paging Systems
Connected to a programmable LS or GS line/trunk port for single-zone or multizone paging. Used to page co-workers and make announcements through loudspeakers. Wiring diagrams for different configurations are included in Appendix A.
Note: Since most paging equipment works with an LS port, programming the port for LS is recommended.
External paging systems, such as PagePac 20 with ZoneMate 9 or ZoneMate 39 paging systems, that use DTMF signaling can be connected to a line jack programmed for paging operation, including hi-directional paging.
Zone paging systems, such as the PagePac series, require one
LS jack. Any zone can be used once the paging port is activated.
A UPAM is used to connect the system to paging equipment that is not PagePac or is PagePac without ZoneMate. It can be used on any LS port that is programmed for paging.
Modem
Connected to the system through a single-line telephone jack, an
MFM port on an MLX telephone, or a GPA on an analog multiline telephone. Modems are used for converting digital signals to analog, or analog signals to digital, so that digital equipment can transmit data over telephone lines. When connected through an
MFM, data calls made from the modem are independent of the associated MLX telephone. Data calls can be dialed from either the data terminal keyboard or an associated single-line telephone.
B-16
Adjuncts
Adjuncts
Music-on-Hold, Magic on Hold
Connected to an LS CO line/trunk port programmed for Music-
on-Hold (MOH) (see Appendix A). The system supports one
MOH connection, either Magic on Hold or a customer-owned music source. The external music coupler (PEC 61398) uses an
8-ohm music source and two attenuation controls for setting the
MOH music level.
Notes:
■
Since most equipment works with an LS port, programming the port for LS is recommended.
■
PagePac 20 equipment can be used with a loudspeaker system to provide music, MOH, and paging without a music coupler.
■
If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials, you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay license fees to a third party such as the American Society of Composers, Artists, and
Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI).
Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system, which does not require that you obtain such a license, from AT&T or an authorized representative.
Supplemental Alerts
Connected to the system through a single-line telephone jack, an
MFM port on an MLX telephone, or an SAA on an analog multiline telephone. The MFM and SAA support devices operating on 48 VDC. Alerts operating on 20-30 Hz can be connected to either an MFM or a single-line telephone jack.
Compatible alerts include horns and bells to audibly alert workers, and strobes for use in quiet zones (hospitals and libraries) and noisy areas (factories) and for the hearingimpaired.
Adjuncts
B-17
Product Ordering
Information
The following table summarizes the equipment that can be connected to the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and provides the corresponding ordering codes.
P E C
Comcode
App Code
Component
Control Unit
Small (AnaIog)
Basic carrier and housing
Power supply module
Processor (small)
Feature module (small)
408 GS/LS
Small (Digital)
Basic carrier and housing
Power supply module
Processor (small)
Feature module (small)
008 MLX
800 GS/LS
6141-CUA
6141-CUD
106388614
105743801
105711972
105711998
106064678
106388614
105743801
105711972
105711998
105628010
105627996
403E
391A1
517A23
517A24
517A26
403E
391A1
517A23
517A24
517A21
517A19
Product Ordering Information
C-1
Product Ordering Information
Component
Small (Digital)
Basic carrier and housing
Power supply module
Processor (small)
Feature module (small)
008 MLX (3)
800 GS/LS
PEC
6141-24D
400 GS/LS/TTR
Large
Basic carrier and housing
Power supply module
Processor (large)
Feature module (large)
6140-CUL
Upgrade from MII to
Large (Digital)
Cover
Processor (large)
008 MLX
Feature module (large)
MLX-20L telephone (choose one):
Black
White
Expansion cover
(zero, one, or two)
6140-UDLA
Upgrade from MII to Large 6140-UULA
Cover
Processor (large)
Feature module (large)
Expansion cover
(zero, one, or two)
Upgrade from Small to Large 6140-USLA
Processor (large)
Feature module (large)
106388234
106215155
105628010
106064660
105685465
105685473
106388259
106388234
106215155
106064660
106388259
106215155
106064660
Comcode
106388614
105743801
105711972
105711998
105628010
105627996
105627988
106388614
105743801
106215155
106064660
16A
517A27
517A25
17A
517A27
517A25
App Code
403E
391A1
517A23
517A24
517A21
517A19
517A18
403E
391A1
517A27
517A25
16A
517A27
517A21
517A25
7713D01A-003
7713D01A-264
17A
C-2
Product Ordering Information
Product Ordering Information
Component
Expansion Unit
Expansion carrier and housing
Power supply module
Expansion Cover
PEC
61490 n/a
Line/Station Modules
008 (ATL)
008 MLX
008 OPT
012 (T/R)
100D(DS1)
400EM (tie trunk)
400 GS/LS/TTR
408 GS/LS
800 DID
800 GS/LS
Vintage Line/Station Modules
400 (with TTRs)
408 LS
61379
61482
800 LS
61384
Telephones
Digital/lSDN (MLX) Telephones
MLX-10 (black)
MLX-10 (white)
3156-02B
3156-02W
MLX-10D (black)
MLX-10D (white)
MLX-20L (black)
MLX-20L (white)
MLX-28D (black)
MLX-28D (white)
3156-03B
3156-03W
3156-05B
3156-05W
3156-04B
3156-04W
61485
61486
61489
61487
61491
8303-200
61483
61481
61488
61484
Comcode
106388630
105743801
106388259
105351092
105628010
106387525
106397631
105461560
105311401
105627988
106064678
105628002
105627996
105408892
105512495
105351100
105685440
105665457
105688303
105688311
105685465
105685473
105688329
105688337
AppCode
403F
391A1
17A
517B3
517A21
517A28
517E13
517B15
517A14
517A18
517A26
517A20
517A19
517B12
517C1
517B4
7712D01A-003
7712D01A-264
7712D02A-003
7712D02A-264
7713D01A-003
7713D01A-264
7713D02A-003
7713D02A-264
Product Ordering Information
C-3
Product Ordering Information
Component PEC
Analog Multiline Telephones (black)
MLC-5 3168-MLC
BIS-10
BIS-22
3165-10B
3166-22B
BIS-22D
BIS-34
3166-DSB
3167-34D
BIS-34D 3167-DSB
Vintage Analog Multiline Telephones (black)
5-button
10-button
10-button HFAI
34-button
34-button Deluxe
3160-111
3161-172
3161-161
3162-412
34-button BIS
34-button BIS/DIS
3162-417
3162-BIS
3162-DIS
Single-Line Telephones
Model 7102
Black
Misty cream
Model 2500 YMGK
(message waiting, recall, touch-tone, desk)
Black
Misty cream
Model 2500 MMGK
(recall, touch-tone, desk)
Black
Misty cream
3185-MWR
3178-NHL
3101-ETR
Comcode
105515332
105161061
105188809
105630420
105167027
105630529
105217426
105217509
105371942
103842050
105217715
103981965
103981981
105335285
105330419
105480578
105480560
105414130
105414122
7102A01A-003
7102A01A-215
2500YMGK-003
2500YMGK-215
2500MMGK-003
2500MMGK-215
App Code
7312H01A-003
7313H01A-003
7314H01A-003
7315H01B-003
7317H01A-003
7317H01B-003
Z7302H01D-003
Z7303H01D-003
Z7309H01C-003
Z7305H01B-003
Z7305H02D-003
Z7305H03D-003
Z7305H04C-003
C-4
Product Ordering Information
Product Ordering Information
Component
Model 2554 MMGJ
(touch-tone, wall)
Black
Misty cream
PEC
Single-Line Telephones, continued
Model 2500 MMGJ
(touch-tone, desk)
Black
Misty cream
3101-EBD
3101-EBW
Model 500 MM (rotary,
Black
Ivory
Beige desk) 3100-ORD
Model 554 BMPA (rotary, wall) 3100-ORW
Black
Ivory
Beige
Consoles
MERLIN II System Display
Console
DSS console (black)
DSS console (white)
61392
3156-DCB
3156-DCW
Comcode
105414155
105414148
105480081
105480032
103870234
103870226
103870267
103823498
103823506
103823555
105229744
105685481
105685499
AppCode
2500MMGJ-003
2500MMGJ-215
2554MMGJ-003
2554MMGJ-215
500MM-03
500MM-50
500MM-60
554BMPA-3
554BMPA-50
554BMPA-60
7318H01A-003
604A1-003
604A1-264
Applications
Call Accounting System (CAS)
CAS Plus LEGEND
Custom Tariff *
CAS Plus upgrade
CAS/H
CAS/H LEGEND 100S
CAS/H LEGEND 200S
CAS/H Custom Tariff *
1201-DR1
12010
12009
1201-H10
1201-H20
12050
406362244
406158444
406158394
405799255
405799289
405799420
✱
Consult AT&T or an authorized dealer for other area-specific information.
Product Ordering Information
C-5
Product Ordering Information
Component
AppIication, continued
Call Accounting Terminal (CAT)
CAT/B 150S
CAT/H 150S
CAT/B update
(Custom Tariff) *
CAT/H update
(Custom Tariff) *
PEC
3600-023
3600-024
36023
36024
Call Management System
(CMS)
5 1/4" floppy disk
3 1/2" floppy disk
Board
1207-100
8301-100
MERLIN LEGEND Integrated Solution II
AUDIX Voice Power-lS II
AVP2.1 for LEGEND
LEGEND Integ SW
1234-VR1
1234-SR1
IVP4SS R1.2
IVP4 Board LEGEND
1234-BR1
8306-100
Integrated Voice Power
Automated Attendant
SAA LEGEND
IVP4SS R1 .2 LEGEND
1234-AA1
1234-BR1
IVP4 Board LEGEND
8306-100
Call Accounting System-lS II 1201-U12
System Programming and 61496
Maintenance-lS II
6125-ATT MERLIN Attendant
Hardware
Documentation
Comcode
406478800
406478818
406478792
406478784
106496540
106496532
106198815
106491608
106491590
106491616
106248651
106491624
106491616
106248651
406478537
106496565
406221499
106431265
App Code
✱
Consult AT&T or an authorized dealer for other area-specific information.
C-6
Product Ordering Information
Product Ordering Information
Component
Applications, continued
MERLIN MAIL™ Voice
Messaging System
Two-port
MERLIN MAIL unit
Remote maintenance device
Four-port
MERLIN MAIL unit
Remote maintenance device
Two-port line card (R2)
(upgrade from two to four)
MERLIN LEGEND System
Programming and
Maintenance (SPM)-DOS
PEC
6107-005
6107-006
6107-007
61495
Adjuncts/Adapters
System Adjuncts/Adapters
Auxiliary Power Unit 9024
Channel service units (CSUs)
ESF T1
Cable (8 mod, wire wrp)
Cable (8 mod, 15-pin sub)
Stand-alone wall mount
551 T1 L1
Power unit
Unit
Cord
Stand-alone wall mount
Cordless telephones
Model 5320
DA-5 Digital Voice Announcer
61416
2152-ESF
21555
21554
21545
2152-15T
21530
21545
3103-CLS
62523
Comcode
406467910
406466193
406467902
406466193
406464750
106492655
406467142
405616293
406012609
406012591
405970104
403768179
404242639
103985660
405970104
105543516
405745811
AppCode
9024
305010171-001
513861312-505
513823015-50 FT
380-100213-001
305-10097-001
KS22911LI
DW4A-SE 10FT IP
380-100213-001
CS6300U11A-229
ANNCR-DA-
5SL DI
Product Ordering Information C-7
Product Ordering Information
Component
System Adjuncts/Adapters, continued
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) suppression kits
D181574
D181589
D181590
D181591
D181593
EMI filter n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
IROB unit — analog multiline *
IROB unit — MLX *
32918
32919
ISDN 7500B Data Module
Stand-alone power supply
Multiple mounting
7500A upgrade kit
Magic on Hold player
Modem 2224G
Music coupler
PagePac 6
PagePac 6 Plus
PEC
2164-BDM
21625
21626
21627
3128-010
2224-CEO
61398
5323-006
5323-008
Comcode
105179329
105201891
105201909
105201917
105201933
406106583
106417447
105657654
405509852
105441166
105888501
405143827
105659965
406143925
405701277
405701608
App Code
D181574
D181589
D181590
D181591
D181593
Z200A
343 CA 0A 6XIN
505A ASSY 0A
WD
Z7500B-L1
WP90110L7
Z77A
D182208
DECK-MMP/RCA
PR
2224C-L1 D/2
ASSY-KS23395L3
22052-006 PG PC
22052-000 PG
PC6
ADP06
ADP06
129B RING GEN
PagePac 20 Power Mate† with three speakers
Ring generator unit
SMDR printers
475 (80-column, serial)
476 (132-column, serial)
572 (80-column, serial)
5323-005
5323-001
61388
3330-475
3330-476
3333-572
403308026
403308067
105213201
403318942
403818495
406152983
475-8510BR2
476-1550BR2
572-9500DR 10IN
* Any multiline off-premises telephone must have an appropriate IROB protector at the control unit location and at the off-premises location.
† Trademark of Plantronics Corporation
C-8
Product Ordering Information
Product Ordering Information
Component P E C
System Adjuncts/Adapter, continued
Uninterruptible Power Source (UPS)
500 VA (15 minutes)
2403-050
Reserve (1 hour) 24035
Universal Paging Access
Module (UPAM)
TAM B
PRS-48
WMT-1A
ZoneMate 9
Dialer unit
Control unit
ZoneMate 39
Dialer unit
Control unit
External Alerts
Loud external ringer
E1CM-type
Gray
Ivory
E1CM ringer and parts
290A adapter
Ringer
Mounting plate
Cord
58500 n/a n/a n/a
53505
53506
31016A
31019A
61211
Comcode
105610141
105610174
405891698
405899972
405742735
405891680
404057911
405024134
404057929
405024134
103117016
102872934
102917952
102992252
102872934
102988466
103938494
App Code
515 UPS-
005C111
ERC-W/BAT-
005E5
KIT-UPAM
D181900
0181900
D181900
DIAL UNIT-
9ZONE
CNTL 22050-020
39 ZONE SELECT
CNTL-22050-
020C
RlNGER-L1AMP-
49
RINGER-E1CM-49
RINGER-E1CM-50
D-181233
290A ADPTR
E1CM-49
1049A
CORD-D4CH-87-
25
Product Ordering Information
C-9
Product Ordering Information
Component
Supplemental Alerts
PEC
Bell
Horn
Deluxe horn
Strobe
61212A
61213A
61223A
Chime
Telephone Adapters
61221A
61222A
General Purpose Adapter (GPA) 2301-GPA
Multi-Function Module (MFM) 3156-MFM
2301-SSA
Supplemental Alert
Adapter (SAA)
Telephone Adjuncts
3164-HFA
62524
Headset adapter
Headset adapter
Single-line telephones
4A Speakerphone
Power unit
Block connector
Adapter for single-line telephone
Adapter for muitiline telephone
Transmitter
Black
Ivory
Green
Beige
White
3120-02W
S202A Speakerphone
Black
Misty cream
3152-008
Comcode
403349962
403349970
406207217
403319197
405136060
103977997
105736474
105031199
105752042
105471304
102139938
102434925
102813888
102949013
103971891
103873873
103873881
103873899
103873907
103873964
105721088
105721096
App Code
BELL-KS23053L1
KS23053L2
SIG THET4-1
STROB SCOPE
CHM-CHBT2 S1
Z1C
540A1
ADPTR-856A
ADPTR-502C-003
ADPTR-KS23552
4A
PWR UNIT-85B1
BLK CON-82B-49
ADPTR-223C
ADPTR-223D IP
TRMR-680AF-03
LSPK-108AA-03
LSPK-108AA-50
LSPK-108AA-51
LSPK-108AA-60
LSPK-108AA-58
TEL-S202A-003
TEL-S202A-215
C-10
Product Ordering Information
Product Ordering Information
Component
P E C
Telephone Adjuncts, continued
S203A Speakerphone
Black
Misty cream
Bracket
3131-008
Comcode App Code
Message Waiting Indicator 31032
Hands-Free Unit (HFU) 3163-HFU
106058340
106058365
106284011
103966396
103953790
MOD-S203A-003
MOD-S203A-215
BRKT-S203 WL
ST
Z34A
MOD-S102A-185
Headsets
Analog Multiline Telephones
Supra
StarSet II
StarMate E
3122-011
3122-012
3122-013
3122-001
3122-002
3122-003
3122-004
3122-204
3122-214
403350085
403350077
403350051
403241540
403241557
403241565
403350093
403412307
403973431
HDST-KS22990L1
HDST-KS22990L2
HDST-KS22990L3
HDST-KS22915L1
HDST-KS22915L2
HDST-KS22915L3
HDST-KS23080L1
HDST-KS23080L4
HDST-
KS23080L5P
Digital/ISDN (MLX) Telephones
StarSet II—StarMate-E
3122-304A
Supra—StarMate-E n/a
405211723 n/a
HDST-KS23080L7
HDST-KS23080L8
MLX Telephones — Miscellaneous Add-Ons/Replacement Parts
Handsets and Cords
Handset (black)
Handset (white)
Handset, amplified hearing
Black
White
Misty cream n/a n/a
31052
106050065
106053408
105581896
106248248
105581904
K2S1-003
K2S1-264
K6S2-003
K6S2-264
K6S2-215
Product Ordering Information
C-11
Product Ordering Information
Component
P E C
Handsets and Cords, continued
Handset, amplified push to listen
Black
White
Misty cream
Handset cord (9', black)
Handset cord (9’, white)
31053 n/a n/a
Handset cord (12’, white)
Handset cord (12’, black)
Handset cord (25’, black) n/a n/a n/a
DSS line cord (2’) n/a
Desk Stands and Use Trays
Stand (large, black) n/a n/a
Stand (large, white)
Stand (small, black) n/a n/a
Stand (small, white)
User tray (black)
User tray (white) n/a n/a
Comcode App Code
106382344
106382369
106382351
105635429
105701809
102402609
102401445
105523886
106187545
846320851
846320844
846320810
846320802
846320240
846320232
K8S2-003
K8S2-264
K8S2-215
H4DU-003 9FT
H4DU-264
9’BULK
H4DU-264 12’IP
H4DU-3 12FT IP
H4DU-3 25'
CORD D8AC-87
STAND-LARGE
BL
STAND-LARGE
WH
STAND-SMALL
BL
STAND-SMALL
WH
USER TRAY DWR
B
USER TRAY DWR
W
C-12
Product Ordering Information
Product Ordering Information
Component
PEC
Comcode
Designation (Button Assignment) Cards and Covers
Designation card
✱
— n/a
106448707
MLX-10, MLX-10D
Designation card
✱
— MLX-20L n/a
106448723
Designation card
✱
— MLX-28D n/a
106448715
Designation card set† — DSS n/a
106448756
106448731
Designation card covers†— n/a
DSS (black)
Designation card covers†— n/a
DSS (white)
Designation card set‡ — QCC n/a
106448749
106561673
Designation card covers§ — n/a
MLX-10, MLX-10D, MLX-20L
106448681
Designation card covers§ — n/a
MLX-28D
106448699
App Code
KIT-D182459 PRT
KIT-D182461 PRT
KIT-D182460 PRT
KIT SET DSS
KIT-D182462 PRT
KIT-D182463 PRT
KIT-D182562 PRT
KIT-D182457 PRT
KIT-D182458 PRT
Analog Multiline Telephones — Miscellaneous Add-
Ons/Replacement Parts
Desk Stands and Wall Mounts
Adjustable desk stand,
10-button
32002
32003 Adjustable desk stand,
34-button
Fixed desk stand,
5- & 10-button
32004
Desk stand/wall mount 14A, n/a
BIS-10
Desk stand/wall mount 14B, n/a
BIS-22
103746855
103746863
103746848
103804290
103964458
11A
11C
10A
14A-003
14B-003
✱
Twelve per package
† Includes both top and bottom cards or covers
‡ Eight cards per kit (four sets)
§ Four per package
Product Ordering Information
C-13
Product Ordering Information
Component PEC
Desk Stands and Wall Mounts, continued
Desk stand/wall mount 14C, n/a
BIS-34
Fixed desk stand and wall mount, 5-button
Kit of parts
Wall mount, 10-button
Kit of parts
Wall mount, 34-button
Kit of parts
32000
32000
32001
32000
32006
32000
Faceplates
BIS-10 n/a
Comcode
103979837
103804290
103995882
103747846
103995882
103747853
103995882
105203186
App Code
14C-003
10A
D-181230
201A
D-181230
203A
D-181230
BIS-22
BIS-22D
BIS-34 and BIS-34D
Button Label Sheets
10-button BIS
22-button BIS
22-button BIS with display
34-button BIS
Display console (FM1)
(includes one faceplate)
Display console (FM2 & R3)
(includes one faceplate) n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
105336986
105690762
105203194
105336978
105336960
105690770
105336956
105299754
105486252
KIT PRTS-
D181582
KIT PRTS-
D181784
D-182210
D-181583
D-181785
D-181784
D-182211
D-181783
D-181727
D-182041
Single-line Telephones — Miscellaneous Add-Ons
Ground-Start Button
KS23566L1 31021 405792839 Key-KS23566L1
C-14
Product Ordering Information
Product Ordering Information
Component
Miscellaneous Parts
Interconnect Wiring Kit
110AB1-100JP12
110A1 trough
D-Rings
D8W cords
Parts list
SYSTIMAX™ MERLIN
®
Wiring Kit
110A1 trough (5)
110AB1-100JP12 (2) modular block
110AB1 punch down block (1)
D-Rings (6)
110P8A5B patch cords
(12 — 4-pair — 5-ft.
patch cords)
D8W cords (24 — 14-ft.)
Template
Instruction sheet
Parts list
PEC
n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
3103-MER n/a n/a
Comcode
103786802
846613933
846613941
846623924
104409396
104407960
842139248
103786802 n/a
106393671
104407960
104409960
103823845
842139248
846619989
App Code
Product Ordering Information
C-15
Unit Load
Calculation Work
Sheet
Use the instructions on the following worksheet to calculate unit load totals for each carrier. Make a copy of the work sheet for each carrier.
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
D-1
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
UNIT LOAD WORK SHEET
1.
Number of modules in carrier (excluding power supply module and processor module):
■
If fewer than 5, auxiliary power is not required.
■
If 5 or 6, continue to step 2.
2.
Key or Behind Switch mode only:
Indicate configuration of lines; then go to step 5.
3.
Hybrid/PBX mode only:
Do all modules in the carrier have MLX and/or analog multiline station jacks?
■
If no, auxiliary power is not required.
■
If yes, continue to step 4.
4.
Hybrid/PBX mode only:
Calculate the total number of MLX and analog multiline telephones.
Number of MLX-20L telephones connected to modules in the carrier
Number of MLX-28D telephones connected to modules in the carrier
Number of 34-button analog multiline telephones connected to modules in the carrier
Total of MLX-20L, MLX-28D, and 34-button analog telephones
■
If total is less than 45, auxiliary power is not required.
■
If total is 45 or more, continue to step 5.
❑
Square
❑
Modified
❑
Yes
❑
No
D-2
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
5. Calculate the estimated unit loads.
Module
008
Q t y x Unit Load = Total
12.0
008 MLX
13.5
8.0
008 OPT
012 8.4
100D
0.0
0.0
400
400 EM
8.0
400 GS/LS/TTR
408
408 GS/LS
0.0
12.0
12.0
800
800 GS/LS
0.0
0.0
800 DID
8.0
Total Estimated Unit Load
■
If total is less than 54, auxiliary power is not required.
■
If total is 54 or more, continue to step
6.
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
D-3
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
6. Calculate the actual carrier unit load.
Equipment
Qty x Unit Load
Hybrid/PBX or Modified Square
= Total
Network Access Lines*
DID
DS1
GS/LS
Tie
1.0
0.0
0.0
1.4
1.0
0.0
0.0
1..4
Telephones
MLX-10
MLX-1OD
MLX-28D
MLX-20L
BIS-10
BIS-22
BIS-22D
BIS-34
BIS-34D
MLC-5
10-Button Basic
10-Button HFAl
34-Button Basic
34-Button DLX
34-Button BIS
34-Button BIS/DIS
Single-Line Telephone
.9
.9
1.2
1.1
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.1
0.0
0.9
1.0
0.9
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.6
1.5
0.0
1.1
1.2
1.1
1.7
1.4
1.4
0.7
1.2
1.2
1.7
1.6
1.1
1.3
1.3
1.5
Continued
* Unit loads are computed per trunk for trunk-type network access lines.
D-4
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
6. Continued
Equipment
Optional Equipment†
Direct Station Selector‡
General Purpose
Adapter
Hands-Free Unit
Headset Adapter
Qty x
Unit Load
Hybrid/PBX or Modified
Square
= Total
0.7
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.0
Total Actual Unit Load
† The MFM has its own wall power unit located at the station and therefore is not added to the unit load calculation.
‡ Up to two DSSs (one DSS per MLX-28D or MLX-20L) can be powered from each control unit carrier. For example, a three-carrier system can have six system operator positions, each with one DSS powered from the control unit.
■
If the total actual unit load is less than or equal to 54, auxiliary power is not required.
■
If the total actual unit load is more than 54, continue to step 7.
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
D-5
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
7. Try to exchange modules between carriers to reduce the unit loads to 54. (Remember that the
100D, 400,400 GS/LS, 800, and 800 GS/LS modules have unit loads of 0.0.) Repeat steps 1-6 to recalculate unit loads for the new configuration.
Note: Empty slots are not permitted between modules.
■
If the exchange reduces the unit load to 54 or less, auxiliary power is not required.
■
If the exchange does not reduce the unit load to 54, auxiliary power is required. Continue to step 8.
D-6
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
8. Calculate the unit load for slots 5 and 6 of the carrier.
Equipment
Network Access Lines
✱
DS1
GS/LS
Tie
Qty x
Unit Load
Hybrid/PBX or Modified
Square
0.0
0.0
1.4
0.0
0.0
1.4
= Total
Telephones
MLX-10
MLX-10D
MLX-28D
MLX-20L
BIS-10
BIS-22
BIS-22D
BIS-34
BIS-34D
MLC-5
10-Button Basic
10-Button HFAI
34-Button Basic
34-Button DLX
34-Button BIS
34-Button BIS/DIS
Single-Line Telephone
Continued
.9
.9
1.2
1.1
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.1
0.0
1.0
0.9
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.7
1.6
1.1
1.3
0.0
1.2
1.1
1.7
1.4
1.4
0.7
✱
Unit loads are computed per trunk for trunk-type network access lines.
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
D-7
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
8. Continued
Qty x
Unit Load
Hybrid/PBX or Modified Square
= Total
Equipment
Optional Equipment†
Direct Station Selector‡
General Purpose
Adapter
Hands-Free Unit
Headset Adapter
0.7
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.0
Total Unit Load for Slots 5 and 6
† The MFM has its own individual wall power unit located at the station and therefore is not added to the unit load calculation.
‡ Up to two DSSs (one DSS per MLX-28D or MLX-20L) can be powered from each control unit carrier. For example, a three-carrier system can have six system operator positions, each with one DSS powered from the control unit.
■
If the unit load for slots 5 and 6 is less than or equal to 27, auxiliary power is sufficient for the carrier.
■
If the unit load for slots 5 and 6 is more than
27, continue to step 9.
D-8
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
9. Try to exchange modules between carriers to reduce the unit loads. for slots 5 and 6 to 27.
(Remember that the 100D, 400, 400 GS/LS, 800, and 800 GS/LS modules have unit loads of 0.0.)
Repeat steps 1–8 to recalculate unit loads for new configuration.
Note: Empty slots are not permitted between modules.
■
If the exchange reduces the unit load for slots 5 and, 6 to 27 or less, auxiliary power is sufficient.
■
If the exchange does not reduce the unit load for slots 5 and 6 to 27, install wall power units for the appropriate number of telephones to reduce the unit load to 27.
Unit Load Calculation Work Sheet
D-9
General Telephone
Programming
Use these instructions to program features on MLX and analog multiline telephones.
General Telephone Programming
E-1
General Telephone Programming
Programming Methods
Telephones can be programmed by dialing programming codes or, on MLX display phones, by selecting features from the display. An analog multiline telephone cannot be programmed by selecting features from the display.
To program a telephone, you must first enter programming mode and then enter programming codes. As shown in the following tables, the steps for entering the programming mode and codes vary depending on the type of telephone.
Note: Features can also be programmed onto individual telephones through centralized telephone programming. See
System Programming for more information.
Personal Speed Dial is the only feature that single-line telephone users can program. Therefore, general programming instructions for single-line telephones are not provided.
When a telephone is in program mode, the system considers it busy. No incoming calls will ring at the telephone until it is back in normal call-handling mode.
E-2
General Telephone Programming
General Telephone Programming
To Program Analog Multiline
Telephones
1.
Label the button.
Note: Skip this step if the feature does not get programmed onto a button.
a.
Remove the clear label covers from the telephone by inserting the end of a paper clip in the notch at the top of the cover.
b.
Write the feature name in the space next to the button to be programmed.
c.
Replace the cover.
2.
Begin programming by sliding the T/P switch on the side of the telephone to P.
The telephone rings repeatedly to signal that the telephone is in programming mode.
3.
Select the feature.
a. Press the button you labeled.
If you have a display, it shows the name of the feature currently programmed on the button. If no feature is programmed, the display indicates the button is blank.
Note: If the feature does not get programmed onto a button, press any line button. This does not affect the button in anyway.
b. Dial the programming code.
The feature is programmed.
4.
End programming by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
The telephone stops ringing.
General Telephone Programming
E-3
General Telephone Programming
To Program MLX Telephones
1.
Label the button.
Note: Skip this step if the feature does not get programmed onto a button.
a.
Remove the clear label cover from the telephone by pulling upon the tab that extends from the top of the cover.
b.
Write the feature name on the card next to the button to be programmed.
c.
Replace the cover.
2.
Begin programming.
a. Press Feature. b. Dial 00.
The telephone rings repeatedly to signal that the telephone is in program mode.
3.
Select the feature.
a. Press the button you labeled.
b. Dial the programming code.
Note: If the feature does not get programmed onto a button, press any line button. This does not affect the button in any way.
The feature is programmed.
4.
End programming.
a. Press Feature. b. Dial
∗00.
The telephone stops ringing.
E-4
General Telephone Programming
General Telephone Programming
To Program MLX Display
Telephones by Using the Display
1. Label the button to be programmed.
Note: Skip this step if the feature does not get programmed onto a button.
a.
Remove the clear label cover from the telephone by pulling upon the tab that extends from the top of the cover.
b.
Write the feature name on the card next to the button to be programmed.
c.
Replace the cover.
2. Begin programming a. Press Menu. b. Select
Ext Program [Prog]
from the display.
c. Select
Start
from the display.
The telephone rings repeatedly to signal that the telephone is in program mode.
3. Program the button.
a.
Press the button you labeled.
Note: If the feature does not get programmed onto a button, press any line button. This does not affect the button in anyway.
The display identifies the feature currently programmed on the button. If no feature is programmed, the display shows that the button is blank.
b.
Delete the feature currently programmed on the button by selecting
Delete [Dlete]
from the display.
The display shows that the button is now blank.
General Telephone Programming
E-5
General Telephone Programming c. Press the button you labeled again to continue programming.
Note: If the currently programmed feature was not deleted from the button, the new feature programmed onto it will replace it.
d. Select
List Feature [List]
from the display.
The screen lists feature names.
4. Find the feature you want by doing one of the following:
■
If the feature name is on the display, press the button next to or below the name of the feature to be programmed.
■
If the feature name is not on the display, do one of the following:
— To move through the list of features page by page press More.
— To jump to the screen that displays the feature name, select
Find Feature [Find]
from the display.
Select the range of letters from the display that corresponds to the first letter of the feature name (for example, if the feature begins with A, select
ABC).
If the feature is not displayed on the page that you jumped to, press More.
5. When you find the feature you want, press the button next to or below it.
6. Respond to any additional prompts on the display.
■
Select the appropriate choice (for example, select
On
or
Off
to turn Inside Coverage on or off).
■
Enter required information (for example, dial a phone number for Auto Dial).
E-6
General Telephone Programming
General Telephone Programming
7.
End programming by doing one of the following:
■
■
■
To return to the Home screen, press Home.
The telephone stops ringing.
To return to the Menu screen, press Menu.
■
■
The telephone stops ringing.
To return to normal call handling, lift and replace the handset.
The telephone stops ringing.
A Note About Programming MLX Display Telephones
The two methods for programming MLX display telephones are interchangeable. For example, you can enter the programming mode by pressing Feature and dialing 00 and then can refer to the display to continue the programming process. Or you can enter programming via the display and then can dial a programming code to select the feature rather than selecting it from the display.
General Telephone Programming
E-7
General Feature Use
Follow these general instructions to use features on MLX, analog multiline, and single-line telephones. To use a feature:
■ press a dedicated feature button
■ press a programmed button
■ dial a feature code
■ select a feature from the display (MLX display telephones only)
Dedicated Feature Buttons
All multiline telephones have a group of dedicated feature buttons that are programmed and labeled at the factory. The functions of these buttons, which include Conference, Transfer, and Speakerphone, cannot be changed. Press the button for the feature you want to use.
Programmed Buttons
See Appendix E, "General Telephone Programming," for more
information on programming features onto line buttons.
General Feature Use
F-1
General Feature Use
Any available line button on multiline telephones can be programmed for one-touch use of a feature.
Note: Some features, such as Auto Dial, must be programmed onto line buttons in order to use them. Other features, such as
Privacy, should be programmed onto line buttons so that the
LED next to the line button lights to show that the feature is in use.
Feature Codes
Feature codes are 1-, 2-, and 3-digit codes that activate features.
To use a feature code, first press the dedicated feature button on
MLX telephones or a programmed feature button on analog multiline telephones, or dial # on single-line telephones. This sends a signal to the system that a feature code is about to be dialed. Then dial the code; the feature is activated.
Note: Some features, such as Personal Speed Dial, can be used only by dialing feature codes.
The Display
For MLX telephones with displays, select features from the
Feature screen and the Menu screen. See "Display" in Chapter 2 of the System Reference for more information on using features with the display.
F-2
General Feature Use
Programming Special
Characters
When users program a Personal Directory listing, Auto Dial number, or Personal Speed Dial code, they are storing a sequence of numbers to be dialed automatically. Some sequences require special characters to separate the digits and start a function. For example, certain characters can signal the system to pause and wait for a response to the dialed digits or to
stop so the user can enter a credit card number or password.
Special characters count toward the maximum number of digits allowed in a stored dialing sequence.
Programming Special Characters
G-1
Programming Special Characters
Press
Hold
Display It
Shows
Means Description p
Pause When a pause is needed to allow the system to respond after an initial set of numbers have been dialed, press Hold to insert a 1.5 second delay before the remaining digits in the sequence are dialed. For example, press Hold between programming a long-distance telephone number and a calling card number. You can insert as many pauses as needed in the sequence.
G-2
Programming Special Characters
Programming Special Characters
Press
Drop
Display It
Shows
Means Description s
Stop
Drop inserts a stop within the dialing sequence so the user can enter specific digits, such as a credit card number, an authorization code, or a password. For example, when you are programming the sequence of numbers onto an
Auto Dial button or into the
Personal Directory, press Drop where numbers need to be manually dialed. These numbers can be a credit card number or password that changes often. To use, press the Auto Dial button or choose the Directory listing.
The system will process the programmed numbers and then wait at the Drop signal for you to manually dial. Press the Auto
Dial button or select the
Directory listing again to continue automatic dialing.
Programming Special Characters
G-3
Programming Special Characters
Press
Conf
# #
Display It
Shows
Means Description f
Recall Conf sends a brief disconnect signal interpreted as a switchhook flash. Recall must be the first entry in the sequence of programmed numbers to signal a special command or direction.
Some local facility providers use
Recall for custom features.
#
End of # # speeds call processing by
Dialing the system. Use it at the end of a programmed sequence of numbers to signal that no more numbers follow.
G-4
Programming Special Characters
System Programming
Console Overlay
The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System can be programmed from either an MLX-20L telephone used as a system programming console or from a PC with System
Programming & Maintenance (SPM) software.
Using a system programming console may involve the dialpad, some of the labeled function buttons on the lower part of the console, and the 20 line and feature buttons in the center of the console. The programming functions of the line and feature buttons are on the overlay for the console, as shown in
Figure H-1.
System Programming Console Overlay
H-1
System Programming Console Overlay
Figure H-1 Console Overlay
On a PC with SPM, the screen is arranged to represent the
console, as a comparison of Figures H-2 and H-3 shows.
The window at the top of the SPM screen matches the console’s display. The columns to the left and right of the window show keys that work in the same way as the buttons on either side of the console’s display.
The bottom of the SPM screen simulates the 20 buttons in the center of the console and are identified on the screen as
LINE 01, LINE 02, and so forth. The outside columns to the left and right of the “line buttons” show the keys that work in the same way as the line buttons. For example, pressing the Shift and F1 keys simultaneously is the same as pressing the lower left button on the console. The letters R and G simulate the red
H-2
System Programming Console Overlay
System Programming Console Overlay and green lights beside these buttons. For example, to simulate that a red LED is on, the letter R appears on the screen next to the line button.
The labels on the top right side of the SPM screen (Drop,
Transfer, Hold) correspond to the buttons on the lower left side of the telephone.
See Chapter 4 “Programming Procedures” for instructions on
programming from a system programming console or from a PC with SPM.
Figure H-2 SPM Screen
System Programming Console Overlay
H-3
System Programming Console Overlay
Figure H-3 System Programming
Console
Display
H-4
System Programming Console Overlay
System Programming
Reports
This appendix describes the contents and shows examples of system programming reports. You can generate these reports by selecting the “Print” option from the System Programming Menu.
If you are using a PC with SPM, you must direct the reports to the
PC port by selecting "Print-Opts" from the SPM Main Menu and then selecting “PC port” from the Printer Options screen. When reports are directed to the PC port, you can print them on a printer connected to your PC (hard copy) or as a print file on either a hard disk or floppy disk. To view a print file, you must exit SPM and use DOS commands. If you are programming from a remote location, exiting SPM also disconnects you from the control unit modem.
Note: The System Programming & Maintenance report should not be printed while the system is handling more than 100 calls per hour.
System Programming Reports
I-1
System Programming Reports
Table I-1
Report Name:
System Information
System Information
Print Menu Choice
SysSet-up
Description:
System-wide information such as return intervals, system mode, system programming port, slot assignments, and Remote Access barrier codes and restrictions.
Sample Report:
SYSTEM INFORMATION
Current Date:
Current Time:
11/26/90
09:45:10
System :
Mode
..
Hybrid/PBX
AutoMaintBusy AutoBusyTie
Enable Enable
Direct Line Operators :
20 24
Queued Call Operators :
10 14
SysProg Port
..
13
Transfer : Type Audible
Password :
OneTouch(Compl)
COLT
ReturnTimer
: Ring MusicOnHold Transfer (Auto)
4 rings
Paging System Lines
Music on Hold Line
Camp On Time
Call Park Return Time
Delay Rings
Auto Callback Rings
Extension Status (ESS)
ESS Operators
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
809
810
10 sec
2
3
10 sec
Group Call / CMS
20 24
Continued
I-2
System Programming Reports
System Programming Reports
Table I-1
Continued
SMDR: Min.Call Time
.
.
20 sec
CallReport
In/Out
Intercom Dial Tone
: Inside
Reminder Service Cancel
: 18:00
Format
Basic
Behind Switch Code:
Drop
Transfer
Recall timer
Rotary Line Cut Thru
Unassigned Extension
: 450 msec
: Delay
: 10
.
.
Slot #
1: 008 MLX
Slot #
2: 408 GS/LS
Slot #
17: Not Used
Conference
System Programming Reports
I-3
System Programming Reports
Table I-2
Report Name:
Dial Plan
Dial Plan
Print Menu Choice:
Dial Plan
Description:
Extensions assigned to pools, paging zones, calling groups, lines/trunks, and stations. Labels for lines/trunks and stations.
Sample Report:
.
DIAL PLAN FOR POOLS
POOL # 1: 70
POOL # 11:
899
DIAL PLAN FOR TELEPHONE PAGING ZONES
.
TPZ # 1:
793
TPZ # 7: 799
.
DIAL PLAN FOR DIRECT GROUP CALLING GROUPS
DCGG # 1: 770 SALES
DGCC # 32: 7929
SYSTEM DIAL PLAN
DIAL PLAN FOR LINES/TRUNKS
LINE # 1: 801 CO
LINE # 3: 803 WATS
LINE #2:
LINE # 4:
802 CO
804 WATS
(Information is included for all available line/trunk jacks in control unit.)
DIAL PLAN FOR STATIONS
STN # 1: 10
STN # 4 12
WAYNE
CONF
STN # 2: 11
STN # 5: 13
MIKE
MARY
(Information is included for all available station jacks in control unit.)
I-4
System Programming Reports
System Programming Reports
Table I-3
Report Name:
Label Information
Label Information
Print Menu Choice:
Labels
Description:
Labels assigned to stations and posted messages, and names and telephone numbers included in
MLX-20L user’s Personal Directory.
Sample Report:
LABEL INFORMATION
EXECUTIVE TELEPHONE # 10: Personal Directory
Name
Number
Display
TRAVEL AGENCY
555-1212
YES
HOME
555-1611
NO
EXECUTIVE TELEPHONE # 15: Personal Directory Not Used
(shown if all entries in directory are empty)
.
.
1
(Information is included for all MLX-20L telephones connected to the system.)
MSG #
2
3
20
POSTED MESSAGE
DO NOT DISTURB
OUT TO LUNCH
AT HOME
CUSTOM MSG20
System Programming Reports
I-5
System Programming Reports
Table I-4
Report Name:
Trunk Information
Trunk Information
Print Menu Choice:
Trunk Info
Description:
Options (e.g., type, signal, etc.) assigned to the lines, DS1 facilities, and other outside lines or trunks.
Sample Report:
TIE TRUNK INFORMATION
TRUNK 820 Slot/Port: 3/ 2 TIE-PBX
Direction : 2 Way E&M Signal : Type 1S Dialtone
: Local
InType
: Immed InMode : Rotary AnsSuypvr : 300 ms
OutType : Immed Outmode : Rotary Disconnect: 200 ms
DID TRUNK INFORMATION
Trk SS/PP Blk DiscTime Type ExpDig DelDig AddDig Signal lnvDest
805 5/ 1 1
806 5/ 2 1
500ms
Wink 3
500ms Wink 3
0
0
Rotary BkupExt
Rotary BkupExt
(Information is included for all DID trunk jacks in the control unit.)
GS/LS TRUNK INFORMATION
Trk SS/PP Type
814 3/ 5 Ground
OutMode RelDisc ChannelUnit
TouchTone No
ForeignExchange
(Information is included for all LS/GS line/trunk jacks in the control unit.)
GENERAL TRUNK INFORMATION
Trk SS/PP RemAccess PoolTIPrfx HldDsc Prncipal QCC Prty QCC Oper
801 3/ 1 No Remote 770 No Long 25 4
(lnformation is included for all line/trunk jacks in the control unit.)
10
I-6
System Programming Reports
System Programming Reports
Table I-5
Report Name:
DS1 Information
DS1 Information
Print Menu Choice:
T1 Info
Description:
Options (e.g., line, signal, etc.) assigned to T1 trunks or lines.
Sample Report:
DS1 SLOT ATTRIBUTES
Slot
3
Type Format Supp Signal LineComp ClksyncSrc
T1 D4
B8ZS Rob_Bit 3 Prim Loop
Active
Yes
System Programming Reports
I-7
System Programming Reports
Table I-6
Report Name:
PRI Information
PRI Information
Print Menu Choice:
PRI Info
Description:
PRI trunks/lines assigned to B-channel groups.
Note: B-channel group numbers are from 1-69 and each may have up to 23 channel IDs. Empty
B-channel groups are not printed.
Sample Report:
PRI INFORMATION
BchnlGrp # 1 Slot: 2 TestTelNum : 5055551611 NtwkSvc:
MegacomWATS
Channel ID: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23
Line
807
PhoneNumber NumberToSend
5055551122 5055551122
I-8
System Programming Reports
System Programming Reports
Table I-7
Report Name:
Remote Access
Remote Access
Print Menu Choice:
RmoteAccess
Description:
Remote Access dial code, class of restriction, barrier code information.
Sample Report:
REMOTE ACCESS (DISA) INFORMATION
GENERAL OPTIONS: ACCESS CODE
Barrier Code required for Non-TIE DISA Lines
Barrier Code required for TIE DISA lines
Automatic Queuing enabled for DISA lines
SYSTEM DEFAULT CLASS OF RESTRICTIONS (NON-TIE)
Restriction
: OUTWARD RESTRICTED
ARS Restriction Level : 3
Allowed Lists
: 1 2
Disallowed Lists
: 1 2
SYSTEM DEFAULT CLASS OF RESTRICTIONS (TIE)
Restriction
: UNRESTRICTED
ARS Restriction Level : 4
Allowed Lists : 1 2
Disallowed Lists
: 1 2
BARRIER CODE ADMINISTRATION
Barrier Code Number
:
1
Barrier Digits
: 1234
Restriction
: UNRESTRICTED
ARS Restriction Level : 4
Allowed lists
: 1 2
Disallowed Lists
: 1 2
(Information for unassigned barrier codes is not printed.)
: 889
: Yes
: No
: No
System Programming Reports
I-9
System Programming Reports
Table I-8
Report Name:
Operator Information
Operator Information
Print Menu Choice:
Oper Info
Description:
For each operator position, the logical ID, extension number, label, type (DLC or QCC), and all general system operator options such as backup positions, etc.
Sample Report:
OPERATOR INFORMATION
OPERATOR POSITIONS
PORT
CALL ALERT
ADDR.
EXT # LABEL TYPE (QCC ONLY)
=====
===== ===== ==== ==========
3/ 5 10
MIRIAM QCC YES
GENERAL OPTIONS
Length of hold reminder timer : 20 sec
DLC Automatic hold enabled : YES
DIRECT STATION SELECTOR (DSS) OPTIONS:
BUTTON
NUMBER
======
2
1
3
FIRST
DIAL CODE
=========
0
50
100
Operator Call Park codes: 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888
Continued
1-10
System Programming Reports
System Programming Reports
Table I-8
Continued
QCC OPERATOR OPTIONS:
GENERAL OPTIONS:
Listed Directory Number for queue : 800
Held calls return to queue
: YES
: YES
Automatic hold enabled
Calls-in-queue alarm threshold
: 10
Time until priorities are elevated
: 6 sec
Message Center Operators
: 15
One Touch Extend
: AUTOMATIC
Rings before extended calls return : 4
Backup operator station
: 770
QCC CALL TYPES:
CALL TYPE
PRIORlTY
================= ========
Dial 0 Operator
Follow Forward
Unassigned DID
Listed Directory Number 4
Operator’s Extension
4
Returning
4
4
4
4
Group Coverage
Group 1
.
.
Group 2
4
4
Group 30
4
OPERATORS
=========
10 14 20 24
N/A
10 14
10 14
N/A
10 14 20 24
10 14 20 24
10 14 20 24
System Programming Reports
I-11
System Programming Reports
Table I-9
Report Name:
Allowed Lists
Allowed Lists
Print Menu Choice:
AllowList
Description
Telephone numbers included in Allowed Lists.
Lists are numbered 0-7 and entries are numbered
0–9.
Sample Report:
ALLOWED LISTS
L i s t : 0
Entry 0: 505555
Entry 1: 303555
Entry 2: 602555
.
.
Entry 9: ------
.
.
List: 7
Entry 0: ------
Entry 1: ------
Entty 2: ------
.
.
Entry 9: ------
(All lists including those with no entries are shown.)
I-12
System Programming Reports
System Programming Reports
Table I-10
Report Name:
Access to Allowed Lists
Access to Allowed Lists
Print Menu Choice:
AllowListTo
Description:
Telephones to which AIlowed Lists are assigned.
Lists are numbered from 0–7. If the Allowed List is assigned to Remote Access users and barrier codes are used, the barrier codes are numbered from 0-16. If no barrier codes are used, 17 means the Allowed List is assigned to tie-trunk users and
18 means the Allowed List is assigned to non-tietrunk users.
Sample Report:
ACCESS TO ALLOWED LISTS
FOR REMOTE ACCESS 17 & 18 MEAN TIE AND NON-TIE RESTRICTIONS
List: 0 STNS 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
RACC 0 2 3 4 5 17 18
(Empty lists and empty entries on lists are not printed.)
System Programming Reports
I-13
System Programming Reports
Table I-11
Report Name:
Disallowed Lists
Disallowed Lists
Print Menu Choice:
DisallowList
Description:
Telephone numbers included in Disallowed Lists.
Lists are numbered 0-7 and entries are numbered
0–9.
Sample Report:
DISALLOWED LISTS
L i s t : 0
Entry 0: 5055551611
Entry 1: PPP976
.
Entry 2: 6025551234
.
Entry 9: ------
.
.
List: 7
Entry 0: ------
Entry 1: ------
.
.
Entry 2: -----
Entry 9: ------
(All lists including those with no entries are shown.)
I-14
System Programming Reports
System Programming Reports
Table I-12
Report Name:
Disallowed List To
Disallowed List To
Print Menu Choice:
DisallowTo
Description:
Telephones to which Disallowed lists are assigned.
Lists are numbered from 0–7. If the Disallowed
List is assigned to Remote Access users and barrier codes are used, the barrier codes are numbered from 0–16. If no barrier codes are used for Remote Access, 17 means the Disallowed List is assigned to tie-trunk users and 18 means the
Disallowed List is assigned to non-tie-trunk users.
Sample Report:
ACCESS TO DISALLOWED LISTS
FOR REMOTE ACCESS 17 & 18 MEAN TIE AND NON-TIE RESTRICTIONS
List 0 STNS 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
RACC 0 2 3 4 5 17 18
(Empty lists and empty entries on lists are not printed.)
System Programming Reports
I-15
System Programming Reports
Table I-13
Report Name:
ARS
ARS
Print Menu Choice:
ARS
Description:
Table type, area codes and exchanges, subpattern A and subpattern B routes, FRL, absorb digit, delete digit, Dial 0 tables, and N11 tables.
Sample Report:
AUTOMATIC ROUTE SELECTION
ARS IS: ACTIVE ACCESS CODE: 9
TABLE 1: Area Code
01)303 02)505 03)602 03)619
Pool
Pattern
1)70
2)890
Pool
Pattern
1)891
2)70
Absorb Other Digits FRL
2 12345
Start
3 08:00 A
3 08:00 A
Absorb Other Digits FRL
12345
Start
3 17:00 B
3 17:00 B
(Above tables are numbered from 1–16. Empty tables, lines, and entries are not printed.)
Continued
I-16
System Programming Reports
System Programming Reports
Table I-13 Continued
TABLE 17: Default Toll Output Table
Pool
1)70 2
2)893
Absorb Other Digits
12345
FRL Start
Pattern
3 08:00 A
3
08:00 A
Pool Absorb Other Digits
1)891
12345
2)70
FRL
3
3
TABLE 18: Default Local Output Table
Start
Pattern
17:00 B
17:00 B
Pool
2)894
Absorb Other Digits
1)70 2 12345
FRL Start
Pattern
3
08:00 A
3
08:00
Pool Absorb Other Digits
1)895 12345
2)70
FRL Start Pattern
3
17:00 B
3
17:00
(Default tables 17 and 18 are also printed when ARS is not active.)
TABLE 19: Dial 0 Output Table
Pool Absorb Other Digits FRL
Start Pattern
1)70 2
2)894
12345 3
3
(Default Table 19 is also printed when ARS is not active. The "Start" column is not used in this table.)
TABLE 20: N11 Output Table
01)411 02)611 03)811 04)911
Pool Absorb Other Digits
1)70 12345
FRL Start
Pattern
3
(Default Table 20 is also printed when ARS is not active. The “Start” column is not used in this table. The entry in the "Pool” column is always the dial-out code of the main pool.)
System Programming Reports
I-17
System Programming Reports
Table I-14
Report Name:
Extension Directory
Extension Directory
Print Menu Choice:
Ext Info
Description:
Slot/port, extensions, telephone type, button contents, features assigned, labels and restrictions, etc., included in Extension Directory.
Sample Report:
EXTENSION DIRECTORY LISTING
Port Ext # Label
Addr
F
A
C
E
H
B
I
R
C
F
M
I
C
V
S
I
S W D G
R
S
T
R
A
R
S
R
Port Ext # Label
Addr
F
A
C
E
H
B
I
S
R
C
F
W
M
I
C
D
V
S
I
G
R
S
T
R
A
R
S
R
3/ 515 WAYNE
N Y Y N 1 U 3 3/ 616 ANN N Y Y N 1 U 3
(The column headings for these columns are read from top to bottom.)
(Information is included for all available station jacks in the control unit.)
I-18
System Programming Reports
System Programming Reports
Table I-15
Report Name:
System Directory
System Directory
Print Menu Choice:
PblicDirect
Description:
System Speed Dial number, telephone number, and label included in System Directory.
Sample Report:
SYSTEM DIRECTORY
Code Name
Number
Display
600 Western Sup
15055551611
YES
601 Xanadu Inc.
15055552299
NO
(Speed Dial codes without names and telephone numbers are not printed.)
System Programming Reports
I-19
System Programming Reports
Table I-16
Report Name:
Group Paging
Group Paging
Print Menu Choice:
Group Page
Description:
Extension number for each group and the extension number for each telephone assigned to the group.
Sample Report:
GROUP PAGING
Group # 793 STNS: 10 15 18 19 22
(Paging groups without members are not printed.)
I-20
System Programming Reports
System Programming Reports
Table I-17
Extension Information
Report Name:
Extension Information
Print Menu Choice:
Ext Info
Description:
Type of equipment connected, features assigned to station, and features assigned to each button on the station.
Sample Report:
EXTENSION INFORMATION
Extn
SS/PP Type
3/ 1
NT2 Executive
Pool Access :
70 890 891
Auto Callback
: ON
Call Waiting
: OFF
Coverage Inside
: ON
Abbreviated Ring
: ON
Line Preference
: ON
Shared SA Ring
: OFF
Receive Voice Calls
: ON
Button 34
Button 33
Button 32
Button 30
Button 29
Button 28
Button 27
Button 26
Button 25
*21
*21
*21
*21
*21
*21
*21
*21
*21
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Continued
System Programming Reports
I-21
System Programming Reports
Table I-17
Button 24
Button 23
Button 22
Button 20
Button 21
Button 19
Button 18
Button 17
Button 16
Button 15
Button 14
Button 13
Button 12
Button 11
Button 10
Button 9
Button 8
Button 7
Button 6
Button 5
Button 4
Button 3
Button 2
Button 1
Continued
* 2 1
* 2 1
* 2 1
* 2 1
* 2 1
* 2 1
* 2 1
* 2 1
* 2 1
* 2 1
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
9,1,5055551611
* 4 0
* 1 6
* 1 6
15 -N
Line 802 -D
Line 801 -I
SysAcc Voice -I
SysAcc Ring -I
I-22
System Programming Reports
System Programming Reports
Table I-18
Report Name:
Group Coverage
Group Coverage
Print Menu Choice:
GrpCoverage
Description:
Extension number for each group and the extension number for each telephone assigned to the group.
Sample Report:
GROUP COVERAGE INFORMATION
GROUP #: 1 SENDERS: 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
(Coverage groups with no senders are not printed.)
System Programming Reports
I-23
System Programming Reports
Table I-19
Report Name:
Group Calling
Group Calling
Print Menu Choice:
Grp Calling
Description:
Group calling options (e.g., hunt, type, message waiting, station, etc.), the extension number for each telephone assigned to the group, and the lines or trunks assigned to the group.
Sample Report:
.
.
2
No.
1
20
DIRECT GROUP CALLING INFORMATION
GROUP NO
: 770 Group Type
Call Distribution Type
: CIRCUIAR
Delay Announcement Ext # : 35
Message Waiting Station
: 26
: AutoLogin
Calls_in_queue Threshold : 5
External Alert ext # :
Overflow Threshold
: 20
Overflow to DGC group : LDN
Group Coverage: 1 2 3
EXT # LABEL
23 WAYNE
27 CAROL
LINES: 807 808 809 810
(Calling groups without members are not printed.)
I-24
System Programming Reports
System Programming Reports
Table I-20
Night Service
Report Name:
Night Service
Print Menu Choice:
Nightservce
Description:
The password required, time-of-day and
Emergency Allowed List extension numbers.
Sample Report:
NIGHT SERVICE INFORMATION
OPERATOR 10 STNS:
10 15 16 27 33 34 35 37
OPERATOR 14 STNS:
(Night Service groups
14 42 43 45
without extensions assigned are not printed.)
Password:
3456
Current Day:
Monday
Turn off at:
Turn on at:
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
08:00
08:00
17:00
17:00
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
08:00
08:00
08:00
:
17:00
17:00
17:00
..
(Time does not print if Night Service with time set is not programmed.)
.
.
Emergency Allowed List:
0)
911
1)
2)
5551611
0
9)
NS Excluded STNS:
12 13 14 15 16 17 22 23 25
System Programming Reports
I-25
System Programming Reports
Table I-21
Report Name:
Call Pickup
Call Pickup
Print Menu Choice:
Call Pickup
Description:
Extension numbers for telephones assigned to each group. Pickup groups are numbered 1–30.
Sample Report:
GROUP CALL PICKUP
Group # 1 STNS: 14 15 17 19 23 25 27
(Pickup groups without members assigned are not printed.)
I-26
System Programming Reports
System Programming
Menu Hierarchy
J
The system programming menu hierarchy is the sequence of menu screens that appear when you program the communications system. On the first menu screen, the choice of an item leads to either a secondary menu screen or a data-entry screen.
A secondary menu screen may lead to still another menu screen, and soon up to six separate screens, as shown on the following pages.
You can use the Inspect feature in system programming to display the telephone or line/trunk numbers that are programmed with a specific feature. Inspect is helpful when you must assign a feature to many lines/trunks or extensions and you do not have a
Direct Station Selector (DSS) attached to the system programming console, or when you are programming a PC with SPM.
Inspect can be used with the menu options which have an asterisk (*) next to them. To use Inspect in system programming, choose an eligible option, and press Inspct or PgDn.
System Programming Menu Hierarchy
J-1
System Programming Menu Hierarchy
*
The Inspect feature can be used with this menu option. Press Inspct or PgDn.
J-2
System Programming Menu Hierarchy
System Programming Me nu Hierarchy
*
The Inspect feature can be used with this menu option. Press Inspct or PgDn.
System Programming Menu Hierarchy
J-3
System Programming Menu Hierarchy
*
The Inspect festufe can be used with this menu option. Press Inspct or PgDn.
J-4
System Programming Menu Hierarchy
System Programming Menu Hierarchy
*
The Inspect feature can be used with this menu option. Press Inspct or PgDn.
System Programming Menu Hierarchy
J-5
System Programming Menu Hierarchy
*
The Inspect feature can be used with this menu option. Press Inspct or PgDn.
J-6
System Programming Menu Hierarchy
Two-Digit
Numbering Plan
K
The following figure and text explain the two-digit numbering plan.
Two-Digit Numbering Plan
K-1
Two-Digit Numbering Plan
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
0
1
Main Pool
70
A
Operator Console (not flexible)
0
Stations
10—19
Stations
20—29
Stations
30—39
Stations
40—49
Stations
50—59
Stations
60—67
Extra Stations
6800—6885
MFMs/7500Bs (MLX Adjuncts)
710—767
Calling Group
770—791, 7920—7929
Lines
801—880
Park
881—888
ARS Access (Hybrid / PBX Mode) / Idle Line Access
9
B
Extra Adjunct
6900—6985
Page
793—799
Pools
890—899
Figure K-1 Two-Digit Numbering Plan
A = 800—Listed Directory Number (QCC Queue)
B = 889—Remote Access
The numbers in the figure are arranged in blocks according to the first digit. The type of equipment, jack, or feature to which they are assigned is indicated in the block.
Each of the first 58 station jacks is assigned a two-digit extension number beginning with extension 10 and ending with extension
67. The rest of the stations (68–144) are assigned four-digit extension numbers 6800–6885. Extra adjuncts are assigned as extensions 6900–6985.
The extension numbers shown for MFMs/7500Bs (710-767) are reserved for digital station jacks. These numbers are automatically assigned by the system to ISDN 7500B Data
Modules or to adjuncts (such as a data terminal, answering machine, or fax) connected to an MLX telephone using a Multi-
Function Module (MFM).
K-2
Two-Digit Numbering Plan
Two-Digit Numbering Plan
For the first 58 digital station jacks, the actual extension number assigned to the adjunct is the extension number assigned to the
MLX telephone preceded by a 7. For example, if the extension number assigned for an MLX telephone is 25, the extension number assigned for the adjunct on that telephone is 725. In this example, a call can be placed to the telephone by dialing extension 25 or to the adjunct by dialing extension 725.
Note: The extension numbers are reserved whether or not an adjunct is connected to an MLX telephone. If you reassign the extension number of the telephone, the system does not automatically change the extension of the MFM or data module.
If the system has fewer than 50 stations and you want to keep the two-digit numbering plan, determine whether you want to reassign any of the numbers that are automatically assigned by the system.
The unshaded areas of the two-digit numbering plan in
Figure K-1 show the extension numbers you can reassign (6800-
6885). This means that you can change selected extension numbers to one of the available numbers in the range 6800-
6885. If the available numbers do not meet your needs, you should consider the three-digit numbering plan.
Two-Digit Numbering Plan
K-3
System Technician’s
Run Sheet
L
When you install a new MERLIN LEGEND Communications
System or when you change any existing station wiring, record information about the station wiring on the System Technician’s
Run Sheet. Figure L-1 shows the first page of the System
Technician’s Run Sheet, and the text that follows explains how to complete it.
System Technician’s Run Sheet
L-1
System Technician’s Run Sheet
9
1 0
1 1
6
7
8
3
4
5
Logical
ID
1
2
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 8
Type
Wire Old Ext.
New Ext.
No.
No.
No.
Miscellaneous
Person Location or Function
Figure L-1 System Technician’s Run Sheet
L-2
System Technicians Run Sheet
System Technician’s Run Sheet
The following explains the information you enter in the columns on the System Technician’s Run Sheet. The number in the
Logical ID column refers to the number of the station jack in the control unit.
1.
On the first line of the “Type” column, enter the type of device
(such as an MLX-20L telephone) connected to the station jack. On the second line, enter any attached adjuncts (such as an answering machine).
2.
In the “Wire No.” column, enter the number of the wire as indicated by the label on the wire.
3.
In the “Old Ext. No.” column, if the wire run is being changed, enter the extension number of the old station. If you are working with a new installation, leave this space blank.
4.
In the “New Ext. No.” column, enter the extension number of the station. This includes new installations.
5.
In the “Miscellaneous” column, enter any information particular to that station.
6.
In the “Person, Location, or Function” column, enter the name of the person at, the location of, or the function of (such as fax machine) the station.
System Technician’s Run Sheet
L-3
Abbreviations
A C W
Amps
ANI
ARS
ASCAP
AUDIX
AVP
B8ZS
BIS
BMI
BTMI
CAS
C A T
CCITT
CCS
CIB
CMS
CO comcode
CSC
CU
After Call Work (CMS) amperes automatic number identification
Automatic Route
Selection
American Society of
Composers, Artists, and Producers
Audio Information
Exchange
AUDIX Voice Power bipolar 8 zero substitution built-in speakerphone
Broadcast Music
Incorporated basic telephone modem interface
Call Accounting
System
Call Accounting
Terminal
Comitee Consultatif
International
Telephonique et
Telegraphique common-channel signaling customer information bulletin
Call Management
System central office component code
Customer Service
Center control unit
dB
DCE
DCP
DFT
DID
DIP
DLC
DNIS
DOS
DSO
D S 1
D S S
DTE
D X S
E I A
E&M
EPROM
FACE f a x
F C C
FRL
FX
GPA
HFAI
decibel data communications equipment
Digital
Communications
Protocol direct facility termination direct inward dialing dual in-line package direct-line console
Dialed Number
Identification Service disk operating system
Digital Signal 0
Digital Signal 1
Direct Station Selector data terminal equipment direct extension selector
Electronic Industries
Association ear and mouth
(receive & transmit) erasable and programmable readonly memory
Forced Account Code
Entry facsimile
Federal
Communications
Commission
Facility Restriction level foreign exchange
General Purpose
Adapter
Hands Free Answer on Intercom
Abbreviations
ABB-1
Abbreviations
MOH
NSAC
OPT
OPX
PBX
PC
PEC
PFT
PRI
QCC
RAM
RBS
HFU
ICOM
I/O
IROB
IS II
ISDN
IVP kbps
LAN
LDN
LED
LS
Mbps
MET
MFM
MIS modem
hands-free unit
Intercom input/output in-range out-ofbuilding
Integrated Solution II
Integrated Services
Digital Network
Integrated Voice
Power Automated
Attendant kilobits per second local area network listed directory number light-emitting diode loop-start megabits per second multibutton electronic telephones
Multi-Function Module management information system modulatordemodulator
Music-on-Hold
National Service
Assistance Center off-premises telephone off-premises extension private branch exchange personal computer price element code power failure transfer primary rate interface queued call console random access memory robbed-bit signaling
SA
SAA
SMDR
SPM
SSN
T/R
TDM
TEI
TTR
UPAM
UPS
VA
VAC
VMI
V.T.
WATS
ZCS
System Access
Supplemental Alert
Adapter
Station Message
Detail Recording
System Programming and Maintenance
Switched Services
Network tip and ring time-division multiplex terminal equipment identifier touch-tone receiver
Universal Paging
Access Module uninterruptible power supply volt-ampere
Volts AC voice messaging interface voice terminal wide area telecommunications service zero code suppression
ABB-2
Abbreviations
Glossary
A access line
A connection from the customer to the local telephone company that provides access to the public network. Also called local loop.
account code
A code used to associate incoming and outgoing calls with corresponding accounts, employees, projects, and clients.
Accunet
®
AT&T’s switched digital service for 56-kbps, 64-kbps restricted, and 64-kbps clear circuit-switched data calls.
address
A coded representation of the destination of data or of the data’s originating terminal, such as the dialed extension number assigned to the data terminal. Multiple terminals on one communications line, for example, must each have a unique address.
adjunct
Optional equipment used with the communications system such as an alerting device that connects to a multiline telephone or to a station jack.
administration port reassignment
Reassignment of the system programming position to any of the first five station jacks on the first 006 MLX module in the communications system control unit.
alternate mark inversion (AMI)
A line coding format in which a binary 1 is represented by a positive or negative pulse, a binary 0 is represented by no line signal, and subsequent binary 1‘s must alternate in polarity or there will be a bipolar violation. AMI is used in the DS1 interface.
analog transmission
A mode of transmission in which information is represented in continuously variable physical quantities such as amplitude, frequency, phase, or
.
Glossary
GL-1
Glossary
application
Software and/or hardware that adds functional capabilities to the communications system. For example, the Call
Management System (CMS) is a DOS-based application that simulates the actions of a system operator by answering calls and distributing them to individual telephones.
asynchronous data transmission
A method of transmitting a short bit stream of data, such as printable characters represented by a 7- or 8-bit
ASCII code. Each string of data bits is preceded by a start bit and followed by a stop bit, permitting data to be transmitted at irregular intervals. See also
synchronous data transmission.
AT&T Switched Network
(ASN)
AT&T telecommunications services provided through an
Integrated Digital Services
Network Primary Rate
Interface (lSDN-PRI) line or trunk: Accunet® switched digital service, Megacom®
WATS, Megacom 800,
Software Defined Network
(SDN), MultiQuest, and
Shared Access for Switch
Services (SASS).
Audix Voice Power Package
(AVP)
A voice-processing application, part of Integrated
Solution II, that provides automated attendant, call answering, voice-mail, message drop, and information services for use with the communications system.
automatic number identification
(ANI)
The process of automatically identifying a caller’s billing number and transmitting that number from the caller’s local central office (CO) to another point on or off the public network. INFO-2 (INformation
Forwarding-2) is AT&T’s ANI service.
automatic-ringdown
tie trunk
See automatic-start tie trunk.
automatic-start tie trunk
A tie trunk on which incoming calls are routed to an operator or other designated destination without a start signal. Also called automaticringdown tie trunk or auto-in tie trunk.
auxiliary power unit
A device that provides additional power to the communications system.
GL-2
Glossary
Glossary
B
B channel
For an Integrated Services
Digital Network (lSDN), a
64-kbps channel that carries a variety of digital information streams, such as voice at
64-kbps, data at up to
64 kpbs, wideband voice encoded at 64 kpbs, and voice at less than 64 kbps, alone or combined with other digital information streams.
Also called bearer channel.
bandwidth
The difference, expressed in hertz, between the highest and lowest frequencies in a range of frequencies that determine channel capacity.
barrier code
A password used to limit access to the Remote Access feature of the communications system.
basic carrier
A piece of hardware that holds and connects the processor module; power supply module; and up to five line, trunk, or station modules in the communications
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
A standard Integrated
Services Digital Network
(ISDN) frame format that specifies the protocol used between the communications system and a terminal. BRI runs at 192 kbps and provides two 64-kbps voice or B channels and one
16-kbps signaling or D channel per port. The remaining 48 kbps are used for framing and D-channel contention.
baud
In telecommunications applications, a unit of transmission speed equal to the number of signal events
per second. See also bit rate and bits per second.
Behind Switch
A mode of operation in which the communications system control unit is connected to
(is “behind”) another communications system.
binary code
An electrical representation of quantities or symbols expressed in the base-2 number system.
Glossary
GL-3
Glossary
bipolar 8 zero substitution
(B8ZS)
A line-coding format that encodes a string of 8 zeros a unique binary sequence using bipolar violation. See also bipolar signsland
bipolar violation.
in
bipolar signal
A digital signal in which pulses (ones) alternate between positive and
mark inversion, bipolar 8 zero
substitution, and bipolar
violation.
bipolar violation
A condition that occurs when two positive or two negative pulses are received in succession. See also
bipolar 8 zero substitution,
and bipolar signal.
bit (binary digit)
One unit of information in binary notation, having two possible values: zero or one.
bit rate
The speed at which bits are transmitted, usually expressed in bits per second.
Also called data rate. See
second.
bits per second (bps)
The number of binary units of information that are transmitted or received per
bit rate.
blocking
A condition in which end-toend connections cannot be made on calls because of a full load on all possible services and facilities.
broadband
A transmission path having a bandwidth greater than a voice-grade channel.
bus
A multiconductor electrical path used to transfer information over a common connection from any of several sources to any of several destinations.
button
A key on the face of a telephone or console that is used to access a line, activate a feature, or enter a code on a communications system.
byte
A sequence of bits (usually eight) processed together.
“Octet” is used instead of
“byte” in CClTT (International
Telegraph and Telephone
Consultative Committee) documentation.
GL-4
Glossary
Glossary
C
Call Accounting System (CAS)
A vendor-supplied DOS or
UNIX-based application that monitors and manages telecommunications costs.
Call Accounting Terminal
(CAT)
A vendor-supplied standalone unit with a built-in microprocessor and data buffer that provides simple call accounting at a low cost.
Callback queue
The queue used to hold
Callback callers who have requested a busy pool or extension.
calling group
A team of agents who answer the same types of calls.
Call Management System
(CMS)
A DOS-based application simulates the actions of a system operator by answering and distributing calls. CMS also produces that management reports for call analysis.
campus cable
Cable that runs between buildings connected to the same communications system.
central office (CO)
The location of telephone switching equipment that provides local telephone service and access to toll facilities for long-distance calling.
central processor
The part of a computer that interprets and executes instructions. Also called central processing unit.
Centrex
A set of communications system features a user can subscribe to on telephone lines from the local telephone company.
channel
A telecommunications transmission path for voice and/or data.
channel service unit (CSU)
Equipment used at a customer’s premises to provide DS1 facility terminations and signaling compatibility.
checksum
The sum of ones in a sequence of ones and zeros; used to detect or correct errors in data transmission.
Glossary
GL-5
Glossary
circuit-switched data call
A data call made via a connection exclusively established and maintained between data stations for the duration of the data call.
clock synchronization
The operation of digital facilities from a common clock.
coaxial cable
A cable consisting of one conductor, usually a small copper tube or wire, within and insulated from another conductor of large diameter, usually copper tubing or copper braid.
codec (coder-decoder)
A device used to convert analog signals such as speech, music, or television to digital form for transmission over a digital medium and back to the original analog form.
CO line/trunk jack
A jack that connects an outside line/trunk to the communications system control unit.
common-channel signaling
(CCS)
Signaling in which one channel of a group of channels carries signaling information for each of the remaining channels, permitting each of the remaining channels to be used to nearly full capacity. In the system’s DS1 module, channel 24 can be designated as the signaling channel for channels 1–23 by selecting “common channel” for emulated service when programming the system.
CCS must be used for lSDN-
PRI service.
GL-6
Glossary
Glossary
communications system
The software-controlled processor complex that interprets dialing pulses, tones, and/or keyboard characters and makes the proper interconnections both inside and outside the system. The communications system itself consists of a digital computer, software, a storage device, and carriers with special hardware to perform the actual connections. A communications system provides voice and/or data communications services, including access to public and private networks, for telephones and data terminals on a customer’s premises.
companding
The compression or expansion of the quantizing scale to reduce distortion.
control unit
The housing, carriers, power supply module, processor module, and line/trunk and station modules of a communications system.
conversion resource
cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
An error-detection code used on DS1 facilities with the extended superframe framing
(ESF) format.
D
D channel
The 16-kbps or 64-kbps channel carrying signaling or data on an Integrated
Services Digital Network
Basic Rate Interface (ISDN-
BRI) or 64-kbps channel carrying signaling or data on an ISDN Primary Rate
Interface (ISDN-PRI).
D4 framing format
A framing format consisting of a sequence of individual frames of 24 eight-bit slots, and 1 signal bit (193 bits) in a
12-frame superframe. See
Glossary
GL-7
Glossary
data communications equipment
(DCE)
Equipment such as modems or data modules used to establish, maintain, and terminate a connection between the communications system and data terminal equipment (DTE), such as printers, host computers, or workstations.
data hunt group (DHG)
A group of analog or digital data stations that share a common access code. Calls are connected in a roundrobin fashion to the first available data station in the group.
data rate
data terminal
An input/output (I/O) device that can be connected to the communications system control unit via an interface.
data terminal equipment (DTE)
The equipment that makes up the endpoints in a connection over a data circuit—for example, a data terminal, host computer, or printer.
dedicated feature buttons
The imprinted feature buttons on a telephone: Conf or
Conference, Drop, HFAl
(Hands Free Answer on
Intercom), Hold, Mute or
Microphone, Speaker or
Speakerphone, Transfer,
Message, and Recall.
delay-dial-start tie trunk
A type of tie trunk on which the originating end of the tie trunk transmits an off-hook signal to the receiving end and waits for the receiving end to send an off-hook signal followed by an on-hook signal. Also called a dialrepeating tie trunk.
dial access
dial-out code
A code (usually a 9) dialed by single-line telephone users and multiline telephone users with System Access (SA) buttons to get an outside line.
DID (direct inward dialing) trunk
An incoming trunk that receives dialed digits from the local exchange, allowing the communications system to connect directly to a station without assistance from the system operator.
GL-8
Glossary
Glossary
digital
The representation of information in discrete elements such as off and on
Digital Communications
Protocol (DCP)
An AT&T proprietary protocol used to transmit both digitized voice and data over the same communications link. A DCP link is made up of two 64-kbps information (1) channels and one signaling
(S) channel similar to the B and D channels used in an
Integrated Services Digital
Network (lSDN).
digital switch element (DSE)
A device in each jack on each module in the communications system control unit that interfaces with the TDM (time-division multiplex) bus.
digital transmission
A mode of transmission in which the information to be transmitted is first converted to digital form and then transmitted as a serial stream
DIP (dual in-line package) switch
A switch on a 400EM module used to select the signaling format for tie-line transmission. DIP switches are also used on other equipment for setting hardware options.
direct facility termination
(DFT)
A central office (CO) line/trunk that terminates directly on one or more telephones; in PBX mode a
DFT cannot be part of a trunk pool.
direct inward dialing (DID)
A service that transmits the called station number to the communications system from the central office (CO) and routes incoming calls directly to the called station, calling group, or outgoing trunk pool, bypassing the system operator.
Direct Station Selector (DSS)
A 60-button adjunct that enhances the call-handling capabilities of an MLX-20L™ telephone or MLX-28D™ telephone when used as an operator console.
display buttons
The buttons on an MLX display telephone used to access the telephone’s display.
Glossary
GL-9
Glossary
door answering unit
A device that is connected to a basic telephone jack and used at an unattended station or front desk.
DS0 (Digital Signal 0)
A single 64-kbps voice or data channel.
DS1 (Digital Signal 1)
A bit-oriented signaling (BOS) interface that multiplexes 24
64-kbps channels into a single 1.544-Mbps stream.
dual-tone multifrequency
(DTMF) signaling
Touch-tone signaling from telephones using the voice transmission path. The code for DTMF signaling provides
12 distinct signals, each composed of two voice-band frequencies.
E
E and M signaling
Tie-trunk supervisory signaling, used between two communications systems, in which information is transferred through two-state voltage conditions (on the E and M leads) for analog applications and through two bits for digital applications.
GL-10
Glossary
EIA (Electronic Industries
Association)
A trade association of the electronics industry that sets electrical and functional standards.
electronic switching system
(ESS)
A class of modern switching central office (CO) systems developed by AT&T in which the control functions are performed principally by electronic data processors operating under the direction of a stored program.
endpoint
The final destination in the path of an electrical or telecommunications signal.
expansion carrier
A carrier added to the control unit when the basic carrier cannot house all the modules needed. An expansion carrier houses a power supply module and up to six additional line/trunk and station modules.
extended superframe format
(ESF)
A framing format consisting of individual frames of 24 eightbit slots and 1 signal bit (193 bits) in a 24-frame extended
Glossary
F facility
The equipment constituting a telecommunications path between the communications system and the central office
(CO).
factory setting
The default state of a device or feature if the user does not choose an optional setting.
fax (facsimile)
A processor the result of a process in which graphic material is scanned and the information converted into electrical signal waves to produce an exact likeness.
feature
A function or service provided by a hardware or software product.
feature code
A code entered on a dialpad to activate a feature. For example, a user might press the feature button or might dial #33.
Feature screen
A display screen on digital/lSDN display telephones that provides quick access to commonly used features.
foil shield
A copper foil sheet for power units on expansion carriers that is used to prevent excessive noise on the module immediately to the right of the power supply module in each expansion carrier.
frame
One of several segments of an analog or digital signal that has a repetitive characteristic. For example, a
DS1 frame consists of a framing bit and 24 octets, which equals 193 bits.
frequency generator
A circuit pack added to the power unit module that generates a high-voltage,
20-30-Hz signal to ring a telephone. Also called a ring generator.
FX (foreign exchange)
A central office (CO) other than the one providing local access to the public network.
Glossary
GL-11
Glossary
G
General Purpose Adapter
(GPA)
A device that connects an analog multiline telephone to optional equipment such as an answering machine or a fax machine.
glare
The loud dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) signal an incoming caller hears when another caller tries to call out on a line/trunk at the same time the call is coming in on that line/trunk.
ground-start (GS) Iine/trunk
A line/trunk on which, after verifying that the line/trunk is idle (no ground on tip), the communications system transmits a request for service (puts ground on ring) to a distant central office
(CO).
Home screen
“home base” of the display screen on digital/lSDN telephones, which shows time, date, and call information, and when a feature is in use.
house cable
Cable that runs from the equipment room to a small, walk-in closet (called a satellite closet) elsewhere in the building.
Hybrid/PBX
A mode of operation in which the communications system uses trunk pools and
Automatic Route Selection
(ARS) in addition to personal lines—that is, direct facility terminations (DFTs) on line buttons. The Hybrid/PBX mode also provides a single interface to users for both internal and external calling.
H headset
An ultralight earpiece and microphone for hands-free telephone operation.
I immediate-start tie trunk
A tie trunk on which no start signal is necessary and dialing can begin immediately after the tie trunk is seized.
in-band signaling
GL-12
Glossary
Glossary
inside dial tone
A tone users hear when they are connected to an intercom line.
Inspect screen
A display screen on digital/lSDN telephones that allows users to preview incoming calls and see a list of the features programmed on line buttons.
integrated access
The use by customers of voice, data, images, and fax simultaneously on an
Integrated Services Digital
Network (lSDN).
Integrated Services Digital
Network (ISDN)
A public or private network that provides end-to-end digital connectivity for all services to which users have access by a limited set of standard multipurpose usernetwork interfaces defined by the CClTT (International
Telegraph and Telephone
Consultative Committee).
Through these internationally accepted standard interfaces, ISDN provides digital circuit-switched or packet-switched connections within the network and to other ISDNs to provide national and international digital connectivity.
Integrated Solution II (IS II)
One or more UNIX-based applications for improving voice and data communications and automating office operations.
Integrated Voice Power
Automated Attendant
An IS II application that automatically answers incoming calls with a recorded announcement and directs callers to a department, an extension, or the system operator.
interface
Hardware, software, or both that links systems, programs, or devices.
I/O (input/output) device
Equipment that can be attached to a computer internally or externally for managing a computer system’s input and output of information.
IROB (in-range out-of-building) protector
A surge protection device for off-premises telephones at a location within 1000 feet of cable distance from the communications system control unit.
Glossary
GL-13
Glossary
ISDN 7500B Data Module
A data communications device that allows connection between RS-232 data terminal equipment (DTE) and the communications system control unit via MLX station jacks on the 008 MLX module. The ISDN 7500B
Data Module is used together with a modem in a modem pool to change digital data signals to analog signals, and vice versa, which allows transmission between digital and analog data stations.
J jack
A device, accessed by inserting a plug, that is used to terminate the permanent wiring of a circuit.
K
Key
A mode of operation in which the communications system uses direct facility terminations (DFTs) on line buttons with a separate path for internal calling.
L
LED (light-emitting diode)
A semiconductor device that produces light when voltage is applied. LEDs show the operational status of hardware components, the results of maintenance tests, the alarm status of circuit packs, and the activation of telephone features.
line coding
The pattern data assumes as it is transmitted over a communications channel.
line compensation
An adjustment for the amount of cable loss in decibels
(dBs), based on the length of cable between a DS1 module and a channel service unit
(CSU) or other far-end connection point.
line/trunk and station module
A module on which the jacks for connecting central office
(CO) lines/trunks and/or the jacks for connecting the stations are located.
line and trunk assignment
The assignment of lines and trunks connected to the communications system control unit to specific buttons on each telephone.
GL-14
Glossary
Glossary
local area network (LAN)
A networking arrangement designed for a limited geographical area.
local host computer access
A method for connecting a station jack to an on-site computer for data-only calls through a modem or data module.
logical ID
A numbering sequence used to identify station and line/trunk locations on the communications system control unit.
loop-start (LS) line/trunk
A Iine/trunk on which a closure between the tip and ring leads is used to originate or answer a call. High-voltage
20-Hz AC ringing from the central office (CO) signals an incoming call.
M
Magic on Hold®
A customized Music-on-Hold
(MOH) system that promotes the customer’s products and services.
Megacom®
AT&T's tariffed digital WATS
(wide area telecommunications service) offering for outward calling.
Megacom 800
AT&T’s tariffed digital 800 service for inward calling.
MERLIN® Attendant
An application with equipment that connects to one or more tip/ring station ports and automatically answers incoming calls with a recorded announcement. In response to touch-tone digits dialed by the caller, MERLIN
Attendant directs the caller to a department, an extension, or the system operator.
MERLIN MAIL® Voice
Messaging System
An application that provides automated attendant, call answering, and voice-mail services on the communications system.
MLX-10™/MLX-10D™ telephone
A 10-button telephone offered with or without a 2-line by 24character, menu-driven display.
Glossary
GL-15
Glossary
MLX-20L™ telephone
A telephone with 20 programmable line or feature buttons and a 7-line by 24character, menu-driven display.
MLX-28D™ telephone
A telephone with 28 programmable line or feature buttons and a 2-line by 24character, menu-driven display.
modem
A device that converts digital data signals to analog signals for transmission over telephone lines. The analog signals are converted back to the original digital data signals by another modem at the other end of the line.
modem pool
A pair, or group of pairs, of modems and data modules with interconnected RS-232 interfaces that converts digital signals to analog, or analog signals to digital, thereby allowing users with
Integrated Digital Services
Network (ISDN) digital data stations to communicate with users who have analog stations.
Multi-Function Module (MFM)
An adapter that provides a tip/ring interface for the connection of optional equipment such as answering machines, external alerts, and fax machines to an MLX telephone. The optional equipment and the
MLX telephone operate simultaneously and independently. The MFM is installed inside the MLX telephone.
multiplexing
A process in which a transmission channel is divided into two or more channels, either by splitting the frequency band into a number of narrower bands or by dividing the channel into successive time slots.
GL-16
Glossary
Glossary
Music-on-Hold (MOH)
Magic on Hold® or a customer-provided music source connected to the communications system via a loop-start (LS) jack. Most
MOH equipment is designed for LS operation.
Note: If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials, you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay fees to a third party such as the American
Society of Composers,
Artists, and Producers
(ASCAP) or Broadcast Music
Incorporated (BMI). Or you can purchase a Magic on
Hold system, which does not require such a license, from
AT&T or your authorized
AT&T dealer.
N network
A configuration of communications devices and software connected for information interchange.
network interface
Hardware, software, or both that links two systems in an interconnected group of systems, for example, between the local telephone company and a PBX.
O off-premises telephone
A telephone located in a building other than where the control unit is located.
ones density
The requirement for channelized DSI service to the public network that eight consecutive zeros cannot be in a digital data stream.
outcalling
A feature of the MERLIN
MAIL™ Voice Messaging
System application. When outcalling is activated, the user is automatically called by the system at a programmed number when a new message is received in his or her mailbox.
out-of-band signaling
Signaling that uses the same path as voice-frequency transmission and in which the signaling is outside the band used for voice frequencies.
Glossary
GL-17
Glossary
P parity
The addition of a bit to a bit string so that the total number of 1's is odd or even. Parity can be used to detect and correct transmission errors.
pass through
A connection from an internal modem to a programming port on the communications system.
personal line
A central office (CO) line that rings only at the user’s telephone.
pool
On a Hybrid/PBX system, a grouping of outside trunks that users can choose with multiple pool buttons or by dialing access codes on an
SA (System Access) button on the telephone. Pools are also used by the Automatic
Route Selection (ARS) feature to choose the cheapest method to route a call.
port
A point of access into a communications system, computer, network, or other electronic device.
power supply module
A device that directs electricity to modules and telephones on the communications system. One power supply module is needed for each carrier, and an auxiliary power unit is added if the module exceeds capacity.
Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
A standard Integrated
Services Digital Network
(ISDN) access interface that specifies the protocol used between two or more communications systems. PRI runs at 1.544 Mbps and, as used in North America, provides twenty-three 64kbps B channels (voice or data) and one 64-kbps
D channel (signaling). The
D channel is the 24th channel of the interface and contains multiplexed signaling information for the other 23 channels.
prime line
An individual extension number assigned to a telephone in a Behind Switch system. Each telephone user has his or her own prime line and is automatically connected to that line when he or she lifts the handset.
GL-18
Glossary
Glossary
processor module
The module in the second slot of the basic carrier that contains the software that runs the communications system.
protocol
A set of conventions governing the format timing of message and exchanges between devices, such as a multiline analog telephone and the communications system control unit.
public network
A network that is commonly accessible for local or longdistance calling. Also called public switched telephone network (PSTN).
pulse amplitude modulation
(PAM)
A modulation technique in which an analog signal, such as speech, modulates a carrier signal consisting of a series of precisely timed pulses of equal amplitude.
See also pulse code
modulation.
pulse code modulation (PCM)
An extension of pulse amplitude modulation (PAM) in which each PAM pulse is quantized and encoded into a 8-bit code to represent the amplitude of each PAM pulse. See also pulse
amplitude modulation.
Q quantizing
The process of converting a pulse amplitude modulation
(PAM) sample into a discrete number of amplitude values.
R
RAM (random access memory)
Computer memory in which an individual byte or range of bytes can be addressed and read or changed without affecting other parts of the memory.
riser cable
Cable that runs between floors in a multistory building and connects wire closets.
Glossary
GL-19
Glossary
robbed-bit signaling (RBS)
Signaling in which the least significant bit (LSB) of every sixth frame per channel is used for signaling in that channel.
ROM (read-only memory)
Computer memory that can be read but cannot be changed.
RS-232
A physical interface, specified by the EIA
(Electronics Industries
Association), that transmits and receives asynchronous data at speeds of up to 19.2
kbps over cable distances of
50 feet.
S signaling
The sending of control and status information between devices to set up, maintain, or take down a connection.
simplex signaling
The transmission of signals in one direction only across a telecommunications channel.
single-line telephone
An industry-standard, touchtone or rotary telephone that only handles one line/trunk and is connected to the communications system via a jack on a basic telephone module.
SMDR printer
A printer used for Station
Message Detail Recording
(SMDR) that is connected to the communications system via an RS-232 jack on the processor module.
Software Defined Network
(SDN)
An AT&T private networking service created by specialized software within the public network.
special character
A pause, stop, or end-ofdialing signal in a programmed dialing sequence such as an Auto
Dial or Personal Speed Dial number.
Square Key
A way of configuring the communication system in Key mode so that all lines appear on all telephones.
GL-20
Glossary
Glossary
station
The endpoint on the internal side of the communications system. A station can be a telephone with or without an adjunct or can be a data terminal with a modem
(analog) or an ISDN 7500B
Data Module (digital) attached.
station jack
An analog, digital, or tip/ring
(T/R) interface on the control unit module for connecting telephones and other equipment.
Supplemental Alert Adapter
(SAA)
A device that permits alerting equipment to be connected to an analog multiline telephone jack so that people working in noisy or remote areas of a building can be alerted to incoming calls.
switched service network
(SSN)
A network consisting of terminals, transmission lines, and at least one exchange on which a user can communicate with any other user at any time.
switchhook flash
Operation of the telephone switchhook in which the onhook period is in the range of
250-500 ms.
synchronous data transmission
A method for continuous digital data stream in which the transmission of each binary bit is synchronized with a master clock.
system acceptance test
A test of all trunks, telephones, data terminals, and features after installation to ensure they are working correctly.
system date
The date that appears on display telephones and
Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR) reports.
System Programming &
Maintenance (SPM)
A DOS-or UNIX®-based application for programming and maintaining the communications system.
system renumbering
A process used to change the extension numbers assigned to stations, adjuncts, calling groups, paging groups, Call Park zones, and Remote Access.
system time
The time that appears on display telephones and is printed on Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR) reports.
Glossary
GL-21
Glossary
T
T1
A digital transmission carrier path that in North America transmits at the DS1 rate of
1.544 Mbps.
telephone power supply unit
Equipment that provides power to an individual telephone.
tie trunk
A private line directly connecting two communications systems.
time-division multiplexing
(TDM)
A process where the transmission channel is divided.
timer
A built-in timing device in a display telephone.
time-slot interchanger
An element of a time-division switching network that separates and switches timedivision multiplexed (TDM) signals.
tip/ring (T/R)
The contacts and associated conductors of a single-line telephone plug or jack.
touch-tone gate
An operation used to determine if a call is from a touch-tone or rotary telephone.
touch-tone receiver (TTR)
A device used to decode touch-tones dialed from single-line telephones or
Remote Access telephones.
U uninterruptible power supply
(UPS)
A device that connects to the communications system to provide 117 VAC to the equipment when the commercial power source fails.
unit load
A measure of the power load drain of a module, telephone, or adjunct.
GL-22
Glossary
Glossary
V voice-band channel
A transmission channel, generally the 300-3400-Hz frequency band.
voice-only
A station that is set up for making and receiving voice calls but not data calls.
voice signal pair
A pair of leads on an analog multiline telephone station used for the Voice Announce to Busy feature.
Z zero code suppression (ZCS)
A binary coding scheme that ensures a data stream contains at least a minimum number of information bits
(ones) for receiver synchronization.
W
WATS (wide area telecommunications service)
A service that allows calls to certain areas for a flat-rate charge based on expected usage.
wink-start tie trunk
A tie trunk on which the originating end transmits an off-hook signal and waits for the remote end to send back a signal (a wink) that it is ready for transmission.
Glossary
GL-23
Index
012 module 1-6, 1-11, 1-20, 1-22,
1 + 7 digit dialing requirements
335A auxiliary power unit 3-12
391A1 power supply module
400EM module 1-12, 1-15, 1-16,
475/476 Printer
551 T1 L1 CSU 1-34, 3-19, 3-37
connection to the 100D
800 DID module 1-13, 1-16, 1-20
A
Accunet switched digital service
power failure 6-6 system 6-6 trouble 6-6
Alerts
Assignment to telephones
Index
I N - 1
Index
Alternate mark inversion (AMI)
Analog multiline telephones 1-28,
requiring simultaneous voice
requiring Voice Announce to
with BIS and/or HFAI
Artificial transmit line option 3-30
AT&T Switched Network (ASN)
AUDIX Voice Power — IS II (AVP)
Automated Attendant (AA) 4-116
Automatic Callback Interval 4-178
Automatic extended call
Automatic Line Build-Out (ALBO)
Automatic Maintenance Busy
Automatic number identification
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
1 + 7 digit dialing
Facility restriction level 4-207
Automatic Route Selection
(cont’d)
N11 special number table
Start and stop times for
Automatic start tie trunk 1-16
Voice messaging system
Automated Attendant options
Auxiliary Power Unit 9024 3-12,
B
Back up system programming
IN-2
I n d e x
Index
Basic system operating conditions automatic maintenance busy
restarting the system (cold
system programming position
Bipolar 8 zero substitution (B8ZS)
Bit-error rate threshold option
Board renumbering (cold start after adding or changing
C
Call Accounting System (CAS) —
Call Accounting System (CAS)
Call Accounting Terminal (CAT)
Call Management System (CMS)
Call type queue priority level
Calls-in-queue alarm threshold
Index
I N - 3
Index
Channel service unit (CSU) 1-34,
1-43, 1-53, 1-61, 3-19, 3-38, 4-51
connection to the 100D module and the DS1 network
switch settings for framing in
Clock synchronization 1-59, 4-49
Commands
Common-channel signaling (CCS)
Connecting block
connecting to an AC outlet
environmental requirements
Copy line/trunk assignments 4-99
Copy telephone number to
Credit card verification terminal
D
Dial access code
Dial signaling for loopstart/ground-start lines or trunks
Dialed Number Identification
Dictation system access
IN-4
I n d e x
Index
DID, see Direct inward dialing
Digital switch element (DSE)
Digital/lSDN (MLX) telephones
Direct inward dialing (DID) trunks
Direct-line console (DLC) 1-2,
Direct Station Selector (DSS)
assignment to telephones
DS1 facilities 1-8, 1-42, 1-43,
recommended framing and
E
Entering system programming
Error logs 5-3 last 10 system errors 5-3
ESF T1 Channel Service Unit
Exiting system programming 4-3
Index
I N - 5
Index
Extended superframe (ESF)
framing format 1-57, 1-61, 3-19
External alert for Calls-In-Queue
F
Facility restriction level 4-207
Features
assignment to telephones
Automatic Callback interval
call report on the SMDR
assignment to telephones
host system dial codes for
Features (cont’d) redirect outside calls to unassigned extension
Reminder Service Cancel
Remote Access
class of restriction
Without barrier codes
line/trunk assignment
Transfer
return time 4-176 type of 4-176
Forced Account Code Entry
IN-6
I n d e x
Index
G
General Purpose Adapter (GPA)
Ground-start (GS) Iines/trunks
line/trunk or pool assignment
H
HighSpeed Synchronous
Interface Enhancement Board
Host system dial codes
Hybrid/PBX mode 1-2, 1-8, 1-33,
I
Integrated Solution II (IS II) 6-21 –
Integrated Voice Power
Automated Attendant (IVP AA) —
Intercom button assignment
Intercom dial tone
Interconnect wiring 3-77, 3-88
asynchronous features
synchronous features with high-speed synchronous
Index
I N - 7
Index
J
ISDN 7500B Data Module (cont’d) synchronous features with multipurpose
stand-alone asynchronous
stand-alone, high-speed, synchronous DCE
stand-alone multipurpose enhancement DCE
stand-alone, single-port asynchronous DCE
K
L
System Speed Dial/System
Line/trunk and station modules
Line/trunk or station busy-out
Line/trunk or station restore 5-25
Line/trunk or station status 5-23
copy line/trunk assignments
dial signaling for loop
incoming line/trunk problems
IN-8
I n d e x
Index
Lines/trunks (cont’d) problems
manual correction 5-42 outgoing line/trunk 5-42
QCC operator to receive calls
Remote Call Forward and
trunks to pools assignment
type of trunk on 400 GS/LS,
408 GS/LS, or 800 GS/LS
Loop-start (LS) lines/trunks 1-7,
disconnect signaling reliability
M
Maintenance (cont’d) line/trunk and station
Manual extended call completion
MERLIN II
MERLIN II System Display
MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging
Message center operation 4-142
Message Waiting Indicator B-10
Message waiting receiver 4-166
MLX telephone tests 3-116, 5-33
with Multi-Function Modules
(MFMs) in the T/R mode
Index
I N - 9
Index
hardware requirements
modem settings
option settings requirements
Multi-Function Module (MFM) 1-9,
Multipurpose Enhancement Board
N
N11 special number table 4-211
National Service Assistance
National Technical Service Center
connection to the control unit
RJ48C/X network interface
control unit to control unit
analog tie-trunk connection
digital tie-trunk connection
tie-trunk networks 1-44 intertandem 1-44 nontandem 1-44 tandem 1-44
with Outward Restriction
IN-10
I n d e x
Index
O
Off-premises telephone (OPT)
Office Repeater insertion into the CSU chassis
Operating conditions, setting system automatic maintenance busy
restarting the system (cold
system programming position
Optional group-assigned features
4-146 call Pickup groups 4-146
Coverage Delay interval
Group Calling
CalIs-In-Queue Alarm
Delay Announcement
external alert for Calls-ln-
line/trunk or pool
Optional group-assigned features
Group Calling (cont’d) member assignments
message waiting receiver
overflow and threshold
Optional operator features 4-132
Automatic Hold or Release
Automatic or manual call
call type priority level 4-139
DLC Automatic Hold option
Message center operation
QCC operator to receive call
Optional telephone features
Forced Account Code Entry
Index
I N - 1 1
Index
Optional telephone features
(cont’d)
Remote Call Forwarding
Outside line dial tone
P
wiring
single-zone with background music and
single-zone with customer
single-zone with
single-zone with
Paging Access Module
Paging interface
Personal computer (PC) with
System Programming and
connection to the control unit
Personal computer (PC) with
System Programming and
Maintenance (SPM) (cont’d)
PFT, see Power failure transfer
100D, 400EM, or 800 DID
Power failure DID busy-out 6-7
Power failure transfer (PFT) 1-37
Power supply module 1-6, 1-24,
Power unit
IN-12
I n d e x
Index
Power
Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
copy telephone number to
telephone number to send
terminal equipment identifier
Printers
475/476 Printer
572 Printer
Processor module 1-6, 1-45, 3-8,
modify for Key-only operation
Product ordering information
Program logic inconsistencies
Pulse amplitude modulation
Pulse code modulation (PCM)
Q
Queued call console (QCC) 1-2,
QCC operator to receive call
QCC operator to receive calls
R
Remote Access 1-17, 1-20, 1-37,
class of restriction
Index
I N - 1 3
Index
Remote Call Forwarding and
Coverage
Restarting the system 4-12, 5-4
Restore system programming
Ring generator 1-6, 1-25, 3-5, 3-6
RJ14 network interface 3-683
RJ48C/X network interface 3-84
Robbed-bit signaling (RBS) 1-60,
S
Shared Access for Switched
Shared System Access buttons
Signal Monitor Unit (SMU)
switch options 3-38 switch settings 3-38
Single-line telephones 1-30, 1-37
Software Defined Network (SDN)
Station Message Detail Recording
calls recorded on call report
connection to control unit
50 or more feet from the
within 50 feet of the CU
Start and stop times for
Station outlet
Supplemental Alert Adapter (SAA)
System acceptance testing 3-116
IN-14
I n d e x
Index
assignment to telephones
Automatic Callback interval
call report on the SMDR
assignment to telephones
host system dial codes for
redirect outside calls to unassigned extension
Reminder Service Cancel
Remote Access
class of restriction
without barrier codes
Transfer
System numbering plan selection
System operating conditions, setting automatic maintenance busy
restarting the system (cold
system programming position
System operator positions 4-22
direct-line console (DLC) 4-24
queued call console (QCC)
System Programming and
programming screens 4-7 data entry screens 4-7 informational screens 4-7 menu selection screen 4-7
Index
I N - 1 5
Index
System Programming and
Maintenance (SPM) (cont’d)
system programming console
System Programming and
system numbering plan
System Speed Dial/System
System Technician Run Sheet
T
analog multiline telephones
assign lines/trunks or pools
copy line/trunk assignments
fixing telephone problems
general telephone and wiring
Intercom or System Access
single-line telephone problems
voice transmission troubles
Terminal equipment identifier
Terminating resistor adapter
IN-16
I n d e x
Index
signaling 1-50 signaling modes 1-50
Time-division multiplex (TDM) bus
Touch-tone receivers (TTRs)
Transfer
Trunks 1-7. See also Lines/trunks.
Trunks to pools assignment
U
Universal Paging Access Module
V
Voice messaging interface (VME)
Voice Messaging System (VMS)
Index
I N - 1 7
Index
W
connections
back-to-back 100D modules
back-to-back tie-trunk
multizone paging with background music, MOH,
RS-232 flow control cable
single-zone paging with background music and
single-zone paging with customer-supplied
single-zone paging with
single-zone paging with paging access module
tie-trunk jack to RJ2GX
tie-trunk wiring A-8 diagrams A-8 – A-15
Workstation on local area network
Z
Zero code suppression (ZCS)
IN-18
I n d e x
ILLUSTRATIONS
1
2
BASIC CARRIER
EXPANSION CARRfER
00 01 02 03 04 05
BACKBOARD
06 07 08 09 10 11
3
PROCESSOR
MODULE
Module Label
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE
Power Indicator (Green LED)
Auxiliary Power Input Jack
On/Off Switch
Power Connection
Grounding Screw
SMDR Port
System Programming/
Maintenance Port
LED Warning Light
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
From AC
Load Center
(2 separately fused 15 A circuits)
HUBBELL Receptacles
(5262 15 A or equivalent)
TYPICAL AC GROUNDING
Ground
(#14 AWG)
4“ Box (RACO 230 or equivalent)
Single-Point
Ground
Ground Bar
Mounted on a 4" Box
(Square “D” PK9GTA or approved equivalent)
4“ cover
(RACO 807 or equivalent)
#12 or #14 AWG Copper wire to Each Power Supply
Grounding Screw
(Maximum length: 25 feet)
Approved
Building Ground
(#6 AWG Copper)
PLUG TEST VOLTAGES
12
To
Central
Ooffice or
Serving
Facility
13
14
15
BACKBOARD
16
17
Upper Copper
Foil Shield
Lower Copper
Foil Shield
Power Unit
Information
Label
UL Label o r
CSA Label
18
19
FEATURE
MODULE
20
PROCESSOR
MODULE
21
2 2
F R O N T
R E A R
24
FAULT LOCATION FILTER
OFFICE REPEATER
SIGNAL MONITOR UNIT
-
25
26
27
TO NETW0RK
32
33
DCE/DTE Flip Board
3 4
38
39
41
42
44
45
70" above floor
46
Green
1
Yellow
2
Beige
3
Green
1
Yellow
2
Beige
3
Pink
4
Grey
5
White
6
Pink
4
Grey
5
White
6
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
OFF-PREMISES ON-PREMISES
IROB Protector
55
56
400B Adapter or 400B2 Adapter
Power Supply (KS22911
57
Multi-Function Module
Pull
D6AP Cord (7 feet long)
Press
58
Connector Pins
Locking Tab
Locking Tab
59
Multi-Function Module
T/R Operation Setting
SAA Setting
MFM Jack Tab Cover
62
63
64
65
66
Ground-Start Button
67
68
General Purpose Adapter
Supplemental Alert Adapter
70
71
72
NOTES
advertisement
Related manuals
advertisement